JP2016104451A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To provide a game machine executing an attractive display performance.SOLUTION: A game machine includes: display means including a first transmission type display panel, and a second display panel disposed behind the first display panel viewed from a player so as to overlap with the first display panel; and display control means for controlling the first display panel and the second display panel.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 259

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine (generally also referred to as a “pachinko machine”) or a spinning-type gaming machine (generally also referred to as a “pachislot machine”).

  A gaming machine that uses a display device including a liquid crystal panel or the like to perform various display effects such as stopping / fluctuating a symbol or operating a character for a player (a viewer of the display device) is known. (See Patent Document 1).

JP-A-4-220276

  By the way, in the gaming machine as described above, if the display effect is not attractive, there is a possibility that the player's willingness to play is impaired. For this reason, game machines have been required to create attractive presentation displays that attract players.

  The present invention has been made in view of the above problems, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that performs attractive presentation display.

SUMMARY An advantage of some aspects of the invention is to solve at least a part of the problems described above, and the invention can be implemented as the following aspects.
[Aspect]
A gaming machine capable of giving a jackpot game to a player by stopping and displaying a jackpot symbol combination indicating a jackpot by combining a plurality of symbols,
A starter that can accept game media;
A game medium detecting means for detecting a game medium received at the start opening;
A first display panel that is capable of forming a display area for displaying an image and a non-display area for not displaying the image; and a rear panel of the first display panel as viewed from the player A second display panel disposed so as to overlap the first display panel and capable of forming the display area and the non-display area;
Based on the detection of one game medium by the game medium detection means, the front screen effect executed on the first display panel of the display means and the rear screen effect executed on the second display panel are performed in parallel. Display control means capable of executing a parallel progression game effect to be advanced;
With
The parallel progression game direction is
(1) In the first display panel and the second display panel, the display area is formed, and the display area of one of the first display panel and the second display panel is displayed. To display a first reach display mode representing a reach state with a plurality of symbols including a stopped state symbol and a changing symbol, and in parallel, the display of the other display panel different from the one display panel A parallel reach display effect that displays a second reach display mode that represents a reach state with a plurality of symbols including a stopped state symbol and a changing symbol in the area;
(2) After the parallel reach display effect, the display area of the one display panel and the display area of the other display panel are enlarged or reduced, respectively, so that each display area has a plurality of sizes. When the display area of the one display panel is enlarged and displayed, the display area of the other display panel is reduced and the display area of the one display panel is reduced. When the display area is reduced and displayed, the display area of the other display panel is enlarged and the display area of the other display panel is enlarged. The plurality of replacement expansion / contraction display effects in which the front screen effect and the rear screen effect are advanced in parallel while changing the size relationship of the plurality of times,
(3) The reach display mode corresponding to the display area relatively reduced among the first reach display mode and the second reach display mode during the multiple replacement scaled display effect is displayed as the reach display. A pattern cut display effect for cutting and displaying at least a part of the symbols in the stopped state forming an aspect to the extent that the symbol forms a reach display aspect;
Including gaming machines.

[Application example]
A gaming machine capable of giving a jackpot game to a player by stopping and displaying a jackpot symbol combination indicating a jackpot by combining a plurality of symbols,
A display having a first display panel of a transmissive type panel and a second display panel arranged so as to overlap the first display panel behind the first display panel as viewed from the player Means,
(1) The reach state is represented by a plurality of symbols including a stopped state symbol and a changing symbol in the display area of one of the first display panel and the second display panel. A first step of displaying one reach display mode and displaying a second reach display mode representing the reach state in the display area of the other display panel different from the one display panel; and (2) the first After the step, the second step of stopping and displaying the changing symbol of the first reach display mode on the one display panel, and displaying an outlier symbol combination that is not the jackpot symbol combination; After two steps, a third step of displaying the second reach display mode on the other display panel while displaying the off symbol combination on the one display panel. (4) After the third step, while the one display panel displays the off symbol combination, the other display panel stops displaying the changing symbol of the second reach display mode. Display control means capable of executing the fourth step;
A gaming machine comprising:

  In this way, by utilizing the two display panels arranged in a double manner, it is possible to realize a variable display effect of a new design that is rich in stereoscopic effect and attracts the player's interest.

[Application example]
A gaming machine capable of giving a jackpot game to a player by stopping and displaying a jackpot symbol combination indicating a jackpot by combining a plurality of symbols,
Display means comprising: a transmissive first display panel; and a second display panel disposed behind the first display panel so as to overlap the first display panel as viewed from the player. ,
One of the first display panel or the second display panel is caused to display a first reach display mode representing a reach state with a plurality of symbols including a stopped symbol and a changing symbol. A double reach state is formed by displaying a second reach display mode representing a reach state with a plurality of symbols including a stopped state symbol and a changing symbol on the other display panel different from the one display panel. Possible display control means, wherein when the double reach state is formed, the stopped state symbol or the changing symbol in the first reach display mode, or the stopped state symbol in the second reach display mode Alternatively, after displaying a part of the changing symbols, a part of the symbols is displayed after the symbols in the stopped state or the entire changing symbols are displayed. Display control means for that forms a switch display mode is displayed by cutting a part of the pattern enough to be identified,
A gaming machine comprising:

  In this way, the display area of the first reach display mode or the display area of the second reach display mode can be made compact, and various game effects are performed on the first display panel or the second display panel. A display space can be secured.

  In addition, it is understood that “the extent to which it is possible to identify that the symbol forms a reach display mode” may be a state in which the symbol has 20% or more of the total area of the symbol. Because, if the symbol has 20% or more of the total area of the symbol, it is possible to roughly imagine the whole image of the symbol from the contour of the symbol and other symbols forming the reach display mode. This is because it is understood that the reach display mode including the symbol can be identified as a result. Therefore, if the symbol has more than 80% (half) of the total area of the symbol as well as the state where the symbol has more than 50% of the total area, naturally, It is included in the “degree to which it can be identified that the symbol forms a reach display mode”.

[Application example]
A gaming machine capable of giving a jackpot game to a player by stopping and displaying a jackpot symbol combination indicating a jackpot by combining a plurality of symbols,
Display means comprising: a transmissive first display panel; and a second display panel disposed behind the first display panel so as to overlap the first display panel as viewed from the player. ,
Display control means,
(1) A first reach display mode in which one of the first display panel and the second display panel displays a reach state with a plurality of symbols including a stopped symbol and a changing symbol. A first step of displaying a second reach display mode representing a reach state with a plurality of symbols including a stopped symbol and a changing symbol on the other display panel different from the one display panel; (2) After the first step, while the second reach display mode is displayed on the other display panel, the changing design of the first reach display mode is stopped and displayed on the one display panel. Then, the second step of displaying an out symbol combination that is not the jackpot symbol combination can be realized,
In the second step, in the stopped symbol or the changing symbol in the second reach display mode displayed on the other display panel, or in the off symbol combination displayed on the one display panel Among the symbols in the stopped state, after displaying a part of the symbols that are the symbols in the stopped state or in the changing state, the symbols form the second reach display mode or the combination of outlier symbols. Display control means for cutting and displaying a part of the design to the extent that it can be identified,
A gaming machine comprising:

  In this way, the display area of the second reach display mode or the display area of the off symbol combination can be made compact, and a display space for performing various game effects on the first display panel or the second display panel. Can be secured.

  In addition, “the extent to which it is possible to identify that the symbol forms the second reach display mode or the off symbol combination” means that the symbol has 20% or more of the entire symbol area. I understand it is good. Because, if the symbol has 20% or more of the total area of the symbol, the outline of the symbol is approximated from the contour of the symbol and other symbols forming the second reach display mode or the off symbol combination. This is because it is understood that the second reach display mode including the symbol or the off symbol combination can be identified. Therefore, if the symbol has more than 80% (half) of the total area of the symbol as well as the state where the symbol has more than 50% of the total area, naturally, It is included in “the extent that it is possible to identify that the symbol forms the second reach display mode or the off symbol combination”.

  It should be noted that the present invention can be realized in various modes. In addition to the above-described device inventions such as the gaming machine and the control board of the gaming machine, for example, a method for displaying an image on a display device of a gaming machine It can implement | achieve as a method invention like this. Alternatively, the present invention can be realized in the form of a computer program for constructing such an apparatus or method, a recording medium storing the computer program, a data signal including the computer program and embodied in a carrier wave, and the like.

It is a perspective view which shows the state which open | released the main body frame with respect to the outer frame of the pachinko machine which concerns on embodiment, and opened the door frame with respect to the main body frame. It is a front view of a pachinko machine. It is a side view of a pachinko machine. It is a top view of a pachinko machine It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is the disassembled perspective view seen from the outer frame, main body frame, game board, and door frame which comprise a pachinko machine. It is the disassembled perspective view seen from the front of the outer frame, main body frame, game board, and door frame which comprise a pachinko machine. It is a front perspective view of an outer frame. It is the disassembled perspective view seen from the front of an outer frame. It is a front view of an outer frame. It is a rear view of an outer frame. It is BB sectional drawing (A) of FIG. 10, CC sectional drawing (B) of FIG. 12 (A), DD sectional drawing (C), EE sectional drawing (D). It is a perspective view for demonstrating the attachment or detachment structure of the upper-axis support metal fitting of a main body frame, and the upper support metal fitting of an outer frame. They are the disassembled perspective view (A) which shows the attachment state of the lock member provided in the back surface of the upper support metal fitting of an outer frame, and the perspective view (B) seen from the downward direction. It is a reverse view of the upper support metal fitting part for demonstrating the relationship between a pivot pin and a locking member. It is a reverse view of the upper metal fitting part for demonstrating the effect | action of a locking member. It is a front view of a door frame. It is a rear view of a door frame. It is the perspective view which looked at the door frame from the right front. It is the perspective view which looked at the door frame from the left front. It is the disassembled perspective view seen from the front of the door frame. It is the disassembled perspective view seen from the back of a door frame. (A) is a front perspective view of a door frame base unit, (B) is a rear perspective view of a door frame base unit. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the door frame base unit and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the door frame base unit and was seen from back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the left unit of the side speaker electrical decoration unit in a door frame base unit, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which looked at FIG. 26 from back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the right unit of the side speaker electrical decoration unit in a door frame base unit, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which looked at FIG. 28 from the back. It is a disassembled perspective view which decomposes | disassembles and shows the ball | bowl feeding unit in a door frame base unit. (A) is a perspective view which expands and shows the part of the joint unit in a door frame base unit, (B) is a disassembled perspective view which decomposes | disassembles and shows a joint unit. (A) is a front perspective view of a top lamp illumination unit, and (B) is a rear perspective view of the top lamp illumination unit. It is a perspective view which shows a top lamp electrical decoration unit from diagonally lower front. (A) is a disassembled perspective view which disassembles a top lamp electric decoration unit for every main structure, and shows from the front, (B) is an exploded perspective view which shows (A) after. It is a disassembled perspective view which decomposes | disassembles the top lamp reflector unit in a top lamp electrical decoration unit, and shows from the front with a top lamp base. FIG. 36 is an exploded perspective view showing FIG. 35 later. It is a disassembled perspective view which decomposes | disassembles and shows the left rotation lamp in a top lamp electrical decoration unit. It is a disassembled perspective view which decomposes | disassembles and shows the right rotation lamp in a top lamp electrical decoration unit. It is a disassembled perspective view which decomposes | disassembles and shows the center rotary lamp in a top lamp electrical decoration unit. It is a front perspective view of a plate unit. It is a back perspective view of a plate unit. It is a top view of a dish unit. It is AA sectional drawing in FIG. It is a rear view in the state which removed the plate back plate of the plate unit. It is a perspective view shown later in the state which removed the plate back plate and ball rental unit of a plate unit. It is a disassembled perspective view which decomposes | disassembles a tray unit for every main component, and shows from the front. It is a disassembled perspective view which shows FIG. 46 from the back. It is a disassembled perspective view which decomposes | disassembles the dish unit main body in a dish unit, and shows from the front. It is a disassembled perspective view which shows FIG. 48 from back. It is a rear view which shows the 1st ball removal mechanism in a dish unit. It is a perspective view which shows the 2nd ball removal mechanism in a dish unit later. It is a disassembled perspective view which decomposes | disassembles and shows the operation button unit in a plate unit. It is a bottom view of the state which removed the operation button unit board | substrate of the operation button unit in a plate unit. It is a bottom perspective view showing the main button of the operation button unit in the dish unit from below. It is a disassembled perspective view which decomposes | disassembles and shows the main button of the operation button unit in a plate unit. It is sectional drawing of the handle apparatus attached to the door frame. It is a perspective view which shows the relationship between the operation handle part which comprises a handle apparatus, and a joint unit. It is a disassembled perspective view of the operation handle part in a handle device. It is an operation | movement figure for demonstrating operation | movement of an operation handle part and a joint unit. It is a perspective view which shows the relationship between a handle | steering-wheel apparatus and the hit ball | bowl launching apparatus provided in a main body frame. It is sectional drawing for demonstrating the state which connects a handle | steering-wheel apparatus and a hit ball | bowl launcher. (A) is explanatory drawing which shows the flow of the game ball in a tray unit, (B) is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between the 2nd ball extraction port in a tray unit, and the flow of game ball. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between the horizontal ball | bowl inflow port in a dish unit, and a storage tray. It is a front perspective view of a glass unit. It is a disassembled perspective view which decomposes | disassembles a glass unit and shows from the front. FIG. 66 is an exploded perspective view showing FIG. 65 later. It is a front view of the main body frame main body before attaching components. It is a rear view of the main body frame main body before attaching components. It is a side view of the main body frame main body before attaching components. It is the perspective view seen from the back of the main body frame main body before attaching components. It is the perspective view seen from the front of the main body frame which attached components. It is the perspective view which looked at the state which pivotally supported the main body frame which attached components to the outer frame from the front. It is a rear view of the main body frame which attached components. It is the perspective view seen from the back of the main body frame which attached components. It is a cross-sectional plan view of the pachinko machine cut along a horizontal line in the middle of the pachinko machine (main control board box part). It is the perspective view seen from the front of a game board. It is a front view of a game board. It is a rear view of a game board. It is a top view of a game board. It is an expansion perspective view of the removal prevention mechanism part formed in a game board. It is a fragmentary perspective view of the main body frame which shows the structure by the side of the main body frame with respect to the removal prevention mechanism of a game board. FIG. 80 is a cross-sectional view showing a front component member, a game panel, and a panel holder in a second embodiment different from the game board shown in FIGS. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the front structural member, game panel, panel holder, etc. which mainly comprise the game board of 2nd embodiment, and was seen from diagonally forward. It is the disassembled perspective view which looked at FIG. 83 from diagonally behind. It is a perspective view shown from diagonally behind in the state which fixed the main control board box to the board | substrate holder for boards. FIG. 85 is an exploded perspective view showing the board substrate holder, the drawer holder, and the main control board box in an exploded perspective view after FIG. It is the schematic of the disassembled perspective view of the function display unit in a game board. It is the schematic of a function display sticker. It is the fragmentary view which looked at the function display sticker of the game board through the game window. It is the perspective view (A) of the whole hitting ball | bowl launcher, and the perspective view (B) of the state which removed the firing motor part. It is a disassembled perspective view of a hit ball launching device. It is the front view (A) which shows the relationship between a hit ball | bowl launcher and a firing rail, and a perspective view (B) of a launching motor part. It is a rear view which shows the relationship between the hit ball | bowl launching device in the state which is not operating the operation handle | steering-wheel part, and a firing rail. It is a rear view which shows the relationship between the hit ball | bowl launching device in the state which is operating the operation handle | steering-wheel part, and a firing rail. They are a top view (A), a front view (B), a perspective view (C), and a front view (B) AA sectional view (D) of the slide member provided in the ball striking device. FIG. 4 is a perspective view (A), a plan view (B), and a side view (C) of the prize ball tank. It is a top view which shows the pressure state of the ball | bowl in the discharge port part of the conventional prize ball tank (A), (B) and the prize ball tank (C) which concerns on this embodiment. It is the perspective view seen from the back side of the pachinko machine 1 which shows the relationship between a prize ball tank, a tank rail member, a ball path unit, a prize ball unit, and a full tank unit. It is the perspective view seen from the front side of the pachinko machine 1 which shows the relationship between a prize ball tank, a tank rail member, a ball path unit, a prize ball unit, and a full tank unit. They are sectional drawing (A) and a top view (B) which show the relationship between the downstream part of a tank rail member, and the upstream part of a ball passage unit. It is a disassembled perspective view which shows the relationship between a main body frame, a ball path unit, and a prize ball unit. It is a rear view which shows the relationship between a ball path unit and a prize ball unit. It is the perspective view seen from the back of a ball passage unit. It is a front view of a ball passage unit. It is a side view for demonstrating the connection structure of a ball path unit and a prize ball unit. It is the disassembled perspective view seen from the back side of a prize ball unit. It is a rear view for demonstrating the relationship between the payout motor and the sprocket as a payout member. It is a rear view for demonstrating the channel | path and drive relationship of a prize ball unit. It is AA sectional drawing of FIG. It is a perspective view which shows the relationship between a prize ball unit and a full tank unit. It is a perspective view of a full tank unit. It is the disassembled perspective view seen from the front of a full tank unit. It is the disassembled perspective view seen from the back of a full tank unit. It is a partially broken perspective view which shows the relationship between a full tank unit and a foul mouth. It is the cross-sectional view cut | disconnected by the bottom rocking | fluctuation board part provided in a full tank unit. It is sectional drawing which shows the relationship between a full tank unit and a foul mouth. It is a back perspective view which shows the relationship between a locking device and a main body frame. It is an expanded side sectional view which shows the latching structure to the main body frame of a locking device. It is the partial cross section cut | disconnected in the horizontal direction in the position slightly lower than the center of the vertical direction of a pachinko machine. It is an expanded sectional view which shows the detailed relationship between a locking device and the side wall of a main body frame. It is the side view (A) of a locking device, and the perspective view (B) seen from the front side. The perspective view (A) seen from the back side of the locking device, the perspective view (B) of the sliding rod for the glass door and the sliding rod for the main body frame provided slidably inside the U-shaped base of the locking device, (C). It is a disassembled perspective view of a locking device. It is a front view for demonstrating the effect | action of the sliding rod for glass doors, and the sliding rod for main body frames. It is a front view for demonstrating the effect | action of a fraud prevention member. It is the perspective view which looked at the substrate unit from the back side. It is the disassembled perspective view seen from the back side of the substrate unit. It is the perspective view which looked at the substrate unit from the front side. It is the disassembled perspective view seen from the front side of the board | substrate unit. It is the front view seen from the front side of the frame substrate holder which makes the main body of a substrate unit. It is a rear view of the board | substrate holder for frames. It is a rear view of a substrate unit. It is a rear view of the board | substrate unit in the state which removed the payout control board box and the terminal board box. It is a top view which shows the connection relation of each board | substrate provided in a board | substrate unit. It is the schematic which shows the electrical connection of a board | substrate unit and a game board. It is a part of back view of the pachinko machine which shows the wiring etc. of a payout control board and a substrate unit. FIG. 139 is a front view of a game board for illustrating a cross-sectional location in the cross-sectional view in FIG. 138. It is CC sectional drawing of FIG. It is the pachinko machine which attached the cover body which concerns on 2nd embodiment, and is the perspective view seen from the back surface of the state which open | released the cover body. It is a side view of the pachinko machine which attached the cover body concerning a second embodiment. It is the pachinko machine which attached the cover body which concerns on 2nd embodiment, Comprising: It is the perspective view seen from the open side of the cover body. It is the pachinko machine which attached the cover body which concerns on 2nd embodiment, Comprising: It is the perspective view seen from the shaft support side of the cover body. It is a rear view of the pachinko machine which attached the cover body concerning a second embodiment. It is a rear view of the pachinko machine in the state where a cover body concerning a second embodiment was removed. It is a perspective view of the payout control board box which overlaps and contacts the lower part of the cover object concerning a second embodiment. It is the perspective view seen from the inside of the cover body concerning a second embodiment. It is a rear view for demonstrating the effect | action of the cylinder lock provided in the cover body which concerns on 2nd embodiment. It is AA sectional drawing of FIG. It is BB sectional drawing of FIG. It is CC sectional drawing of FIG. It is a front view of a game board. It is the perspective view which looked at the game board from diagonally right front. It is the perspective view which looked at the game board from diagonally left front. It is the perspective view which looked at the game board from diagonally behind. It is the perspective view which decomposed | disassembled for every main member which comprises a game board, and was seen from diagonally forward. It is the perspective view which decomposed | disassembled for every main member which comprises a game board, and was seen from diagonally behind. (A) is a perspective view which shows the attacker unit, side prize opening member, and gate member in a game board from diagonally forward, (B) is a perspective view which shows (A) from diagonally behind. (A) is a perspective view which shows the center combination in a game board from diagonally forward, (B) is a perspective view which shows (A) from diagonally behind. It is a perspective view which shows the center combination in a game board from diagonally lower back. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the back unit from diagonally forward, (B) is the perspective view which looked at the back unit from diagonally behind. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the back unit for every main structure and was seen from diagonally forward. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the back unit for every main structure and was seen from diagonally behind. It is the perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the back box unit in the back unit for every main structure, and was seen from diagonally forward. It is the perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the back box unit for every main structure, and was seen from diagonally behind. It is a perspective view which shows the left movable decoration body unit in the state which removed the slide rack cover and the raising / lowering rail cover. It is explanatory drawing which shows a motion of a left movable decoration body unit. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the right movable decoration body unit in a back unit from diagonally forward, (B) is the perspective view which looked at the right movable decoration body unit from diagonally behind. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the right movable decoration body unit for every main structure, and was seen from diagonally forward. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the right movable decoration body unit for every main structure, and was seen from diagonally behind. It is explanatory drawing which shows rotation operation | movement of the right movable decoration body in a right movable decoration body unit. It is explanatory drawing which shows the expansion-contraction operation | movement of the right movable decoration body in a right movable decoration body unit. It is the perspective view which looked at the upper left movable decoration body unit in a back unit from diagonally forward. It is the perspective view which looked at the upper left movable decoration body unit from diagonally behind. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the upper left movable decoration body unit for every main structure, and was seen from diagonally forward. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the upper left movable decoration body unit for every main structure, and was seen from diagonally lower back. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the upper middle movable decoration body unit in the back unit from diagonally forward, and (B) is the perspective view which looked at the upper middle movable decoration body unit from diagonally behind. (A) is an exploded perspective view of the upper middle movable decorative body unit disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from the front, and (B) is an upper middle movable decorative body unit disassembled for each main configuration and later FIG. It is the perspective view which looked at the game board from diagonally right above. FIG. 153 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line AA in FIG. 151. It is the perspective view which looked at the game board from diagonally lower right. It is a front view of the game board which shows the state which the left movable decoration body moved to the right direction. It is a front view of the game board which shows the state where the sub decoration body of the left movable decoration body which moved rightward moved up. It is a front view of the game board showing the state where the right movable decorative body is rotated upright. It is a front view of the game board showing a state where the right movable decorative body is rotated to the left and the upper left movable decorative body is lowered. FIG. 185 is a front view of the game board showing a state in which the right movable decorative body is extended from the state of FIG. 184. FIG. 185 is a front view of the game board showing a state in which the right movable decorative body is further extended from the state of FIG. 185; It is explanatory drawing which shows a motion of an upper middle movable decoration body. It is sectional drawing cut | disconnected laterally with the game board in the part above the liquid crystal display device of a back unit. It is a block diagram of a main board and a peripheral board. It is a block diagram which shows the functional structure in a main control board. 10 is a flowchart showing an example of main system processing executed by a main control MPU 4100a mounted on a main control board 4100 of the main board 4000. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a process at the time of a power failure occurrence. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a timer interruption process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a special symbol and a special electric accessory control process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a 1st and 2nd start opening prize process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a fluctuation | variation start process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a fluctuation pattern setting process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a hit fluctuation pattern table setting process. It is a table | surface which shows distribution of the table set in a hit fluctuation pattern table setting process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a high disappointment fluctuation pattern table setting process. It is a table | surface which shows distribution of the table set in a high anticipation fluctuation pattern table setting process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a low expectation variation pattern table setting process. It is a table | surface which shows distribution of the table set in a low anticipation fluctuation pattern table setting process. 10 is a list of variation patterns determined based on hit variation pattern tables A to C that can be selected in the hit variation pattern table setting process. It is a list of fluctuation patterns determined based on hit fluctuation pattern tables D to M that can be selected in the hit fluctuation pattern table setting process. It is a list of the variation patterns determined based on the high expectation loss variation pattern tables N to S that can be selected in the high expectation loss variation pattern setting processing. It is a list | wrist of the variation pattern determined based on the low expectation loss variation pattern table TZ, AA, BB, CC which can be selected in a low expectation loss variation pattern setting process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the process during a fluctuation | variation. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a jackpot game start process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a process at the time of small hit establishment. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a special electric accessory big hit control process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of an attacker unit operation | movement process. It is a figure which shows an example of a mode that the decoration display and display of a decoration symbol are displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1400. FIG. It is a figure which shows the frame image which comprises the moving image displayed on a liquid crystal display device as a continuous production. It is a figure which shows the frame image which comprises the moving image displayed on a liquid crystal display device as a continuous production. It is a figure which shows the frame image which comprises the moving image displayed on a liquid crystal display device as a continuous production. It is a figure which shows the frame image which comprises the moving image displayed on a liquid crystal display device as a continuous production. It is a figure which shows the frame image which comprises the moving image displayed on a liquid crystal display device as a continuous production. It is a figure which shows the frame image which comprises the moving image displayed on a liquid crystal display device as a continuous production. It is a figure which shows the frame image which comprises the moving image displayed on a liquid crystal display device as a continuous production. It is a figure which shows the frame image which comprises the moving image displayed on a liquid crystal display device as a continuous production. It is a figure which shows the frame image which comprises the moving image displayed on a liquid crystal display device as a continuous production. It is a figure which shows the frame image which comprises the moving image displayed on a liquid crystal display device as a continuous production. It is a figure which shows the frame image which comprises the moving image displayed on a liquid crystal display device as a continuous production. It is a figure which shows the frame image which comprises the moving image displayed on a liquid crystal display device as a continuous production. It is a figure which shows the frame image which comprises the moving image displayed on a liquid crystal display device as a continuous production. It is a figure which shows the frame image which comprises the moving image displayed on a liquid crystal display device as a continuous production. It is a figure which shows the frame image which comprises the moving image displayed on a liquid crystal display device as a continuous production. It is a figure which shows the frame image which comprises the moving image displayed on a liquid crystal display device as a continuous production. It is a figure which shows the frame image which comprises the moving image displayed on a liquid crystal display device as a continuous production. It is a figure which shows the frame image which comprises the moving image displayed on a liquid crystal display device as a continuous production. It is a figure which shows the frame image which comprises the moving image displayed on a liquid crystal display device as a continuous production. It is a figure which shows the frame image which comprises the moving image displayed on a liquid crystal display device as a continuous production. It is a figure which shows the frame image which comprises the moving image displayed on a liquid crystal display device as a continuous production. It is a figure which shows the frame image which comprises the moving image displayed on a liquid crystal display device as a continuous production. It is a figure which shows the frame image which comprises the moving image displayed on a liquid crystal display device as a continuous production. It is a figure which shows the frame image which comprises the moving image displayed on a liquid crystal display device as a continuous production. It is a figure which shows the frame image which comprises the moving image displayed on a liquid crystal display device as a clipping sliding effect. It is a figure which shows the frame image which comprises the moving image displayed on a liquid crystal display device as a clipping sliding effect. It is a figure which shows the frame image which comprises the moving image displayed on a liquid crystal display device as a clipping sliding effect. It is a figure which shows the frame image which comprises the moving image displayed on a liquid crystal display device as a clipping sliding effect. It is a figure which shows the frame image which comprises the moving image displayed on a liquid crystal display device as a clipping sliding effect. It is a figure which shows the frame image which comprises the moving image displayed on a liquid crystal display device as a clipping sliding effect. It is a figure which shows the frame image which comprises the moving image displayed on a liquid crystal display device as a clipping sliding effect. It is a figure which shows the frame image which comprises the moving image displayed on a liquid crystal display device as a clipping sliding effect. It is a figure which shows the frame image which comprises the moving image displayed on a liquid crystal display device as a clipping sliding effect. It is a figure which shows the frame image which comprises the moving image displayed on a liquid crystal display device as a clipping sliding effect. It is a figure which shows the frame image which comprises the moving image displayed on a liquid crystal display device as a clipping sliding effect. It is a figure which shows the frame image which comprises the moving image displayed on a liquid crystal display device as a clipping sliding effect. It is a figure which shows the frame image which comprises the moving image displayed on a liquid crystal display device as a clipping sliding effect. It is a figure which shows the frame image which comprises the moving image displayed on a liquid crystal display device as a clipping sliding effect. It is a figure which shows the frame image which comprises the moving image displayed on a liquid crystal display device as a clipping sliding effect. It is a figure which shows the frame image which comprises the moving image displayed on a liquid crystal display device as a clipping sliding effect. It is a figure which shows the visual recognition screen seen from the frame image which comprises the moving image displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1400 as an example of 3D reach production, and a player. It is a figure which shows the visual recognition screen seen from the frame image which comprises the moving image displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1400 as an example of a double-sided reach production, and a player. It is a figure which shows the visual recognition screen seen from the frame image which comprises the moving image displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1400 as an example of a double-sided reach production, and a player. It is a figure which shows the visual recognition screen seen from the frame image which comprises the moving image displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1400 as an example of a double-sided reach production, and a player. It is a figure which shows the visual recognition screen seen from the frame image which comprises the moving image displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1400 as an example of a double-sided reach production, and a player. It is a figure which shows the visual recognition screen seen from the frame image which comprises the moving image displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1400 as an example of a double-sided reach production, and a player. It is a figure which shows the visual recognition screen seen from the frame image which comprises the moving image displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1400 as an example of a double-sided reach production, and a player. It is a figure which shows the visual recognition screen seen from the frame image which comprises the moving image displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1400 as an example of a double-sided reach production, and a player. It is a figure explaining the modification of a continuous production. It is a figure explaining the modification of a continuous production. It is a figure explaining the modification of a double-sided reach production.

[1. Overall structure of pachinko machine]
DESCRIPTION OF EXEMPLARY EMBODIMENTS Hereinafter, preferred embodiments of the invention will be described with reference to the drawings. First, the entire pachinko machine according to the embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 1 to 7. FIG. 1 is a perspective view showing a state in which a main body frame is opened with respect to the outer frame of the pachinko machine according to the embodiment and a door frame is opened with respect to the main body frame, and FIG. 2 is a front view of the pachinko machine. 3 is a side view of the pachinko machine, FIG. 4 is a plan view of the pachinko machine, FIG. 5 is a rear view of the pachinko machine, and FIG. 6 is an outer frame, a main body frame, a game board, FIG. 7 is an exploded perspective view seen from the rear of the door frame, and FIG. 7 is an exploded perspective view seen from the front of the outer frame, the main body frame, the game board, and the door frame constituting the pachinko machine.

  1 to 7, a pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment has an outer frame 2 installed on an island (not shown) of a game hall, and is pivotally supported by the outer frame 2 so as to be openable and closable. Main body frame 3, a game window 101 that is pivotally supported by the main body frame 3 so as to be openable and closable, and is formed on the game board 4 and into which a ball is driven, and below the game window 101. And a door frame 5 provided with a tray unit 300 as a storage tray for storing balls that are arranged and are paid out according to the result of the game.

  A cover reinforcing metal fitting 14 that reinforces the decorative cover plate 15 is fixed to the outer frame 2 at the lower front side thereof. Further, as described above, the game board 4 can be detachably attached to the main body frame 3, and the ball hitting device 650 and the door frame 5 excluding the game board 4 and the main body frame 3 are provided at the lower back of the main body frame 3. A board unit 1100 on which various control boards for controlling electrical components, a power board 1136, and the like are collectively provided is attached, and a cover body 1250 that covers the rear opening 580 (see FIG. 6) of the main body frame 3 is provided. It is detachable. Furthermore, in addition to the above-described dish unit 300, the door frame 5 is provided with a glass unit 450 and a handle device 400 so as to close the gaming window 101. The feature of the present embodiment is that there is one dish unit 300 provided on the door frame 5, and the handle device 400 conventionally provided on the main body frame 3 is provided on the door frame 5. Since the frame 5 and the main body frame 3 have substantially the same square size when viewed from the front, the main body frame 3 is not visible from the front. Hereinafter, members constituting the pachinko machine 1 will be described in detail.

[1-1. Outer frame]
The outer frame 2 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 8 is a front perspective view of the outer frame 2, FIG. 9 is an exploded perspective view seen from the front of the outer frame 2, FIG. 10 is a front view of the outer frame 2, and FIG. FIG. 12 is a rear view of the outer frame 2, and FIG. 12 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line BB in FIG. 10, a cross-sectional view taken along the line CC in FIG. 12A, and a cross-sectional view taken along the line DD. , E-E sectional view (D). FIG. 13 is a perspective view for explaining the attachment / detachment structure between the upper shaft support fitting of the main body frame and the upper support fitting of the outer frame, and FIG. 14 shows a lock member provided on the back surface of the upper support fitting of the outer frame. It is the disassembled perspective view (A) which shows an attachment state, and the perspective view (B) seen from the downward direction. Further, FIG. 15 is a rear view of the upper support metal part for explaining the relationship between the pivot pin and the lock member, and FIG. 16 is a rear view of the upper support metal part for explaining the action of the lock member.

  8 and 9, the outer frame 2 according to this embodiment includes upper and lower upper frame plates 10 and lower frame plates 11 extending in the horizontal direction, and left and right side frame plates 12 and 13 extending in the vertical (vertical) direction. Are assembled in a square shape by connecting them with connecting members 19 for connecting the respective end portions. Specifically, the connecting member 19 is formed in a podium shape with a step between the center and the left and right, and the protruding center part is an engagement notch formed at the center of both ends of the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11. The side frame plates 12, 13 are fitted to the side surfaces of the left and right portions which are fitted to the portion 20, and the back surface of the upper frame plate 10 and the upper surface of the lower frame plate 11 are in contact with the planes of the left and right portions lowered one step. The inner surface of the is in contact.

  In that state, the insertion hole 21 formed on both sides of the engagement notch 20 of the upper frame plate 10 and both sides of the engagement notch 20 of the lower frame plate 11 and the left and right lowered by one step of the connecting member 19. A plurality of (two in the illustrated case) connecting holes 22 (shown on the connecting member 19 that connects the upper frame plate 10 and the side frame plate 12 in FIG. Are also fixed by a plurality of (two in the illustrated case) connecting screws 23 from above or below, and further, a plurality ( Two (in the illustrated case) mounting holes 24 and a plurality of (three in the illustrated case) connecting holes 25 formed on the side surfaces of the left and right portions of the connecting member 19 that are lowered by one step are aligned to form a plurality (from the lateral outer side). The upper and lower upper frame plates 10 and the lower frame are fixed by fastening with three connecting screws 26 and 27 in the illustrated case. 11 and the left and right side frame plates 12 and 13 is firmly coupled and fixed. However, of the three connecting screws 26 and 27, one connecting screw 27 does not connect the side frame plates 12 and 13 and the connecting member 19 but connects the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11. The member 19 is directly connected from the side.

  Of the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11 and the side frame plates 12 and 13 constituting the outer frame 2, the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11 are made of the same wood as in the prior art, and the side frame plates 12 and 13. Is made of an extruded plate of a lightweight metal, for example, an aluminum alloy. The reason why the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11 are made of the same wood as before is that when the pachinko machine 1 is installed on an island lined up in a game hall, a predetermined angle is given to the vertical plane of the island. Although it is necessary to perform a fixing operation, such an operation is performed by hitting the nail to the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11 and the island, so that it is easy to hit the nail. On the other hand, the reason why the side frame plates 12 and 13 are made of an aluminum alloy extruded plate is that the thickness of the side frame plates 12 and 13 can be reduced while maintaining the strength as compared with the conventional wood. The left-right width when viewed from the front of the side walls 540 to 543 (see FIG. 69) of the main body frame 3 adjacent to the main frame 3 can be increased. This is because the game board 4 having a large lateral dimension can be mounted on the main body frame 3, and as a result, the game area 605 of the game board 4 can be formed larger.

  If the side frame plates 12 and 13 are made of an aluminum alloy flat plate, sufficient rigidity cannot be ensured. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 12C, the side frame plate 12 (the side frame plate 13 has the same structure). .) Is formed by drawing so that the thickness h1 of the rear portion is increased by forming a space portion 28 (the space portion 28 of the side frame plate 13 is shown in FIG. 11) opened rearward by a rib. Yes. Of course, the wall thickness h1 is the same as or slightly smaller than the wall thickness of the conventional wood.

  As shown in FIGS. 12B and 12D, in the front of the space portion 28 of the side frame plate 12, a groove portion 29 (side) into which one of the left and right portions of the connecting member 19 is lowered one step is fitted. A groove portion 29 of the frame plate 13 is formed in FIG. From the groove 29 to the front end of the side frame plate 12, as shown in FIGS. 12 (B) to 12 (D), the other side of the left and right portions whose inner side surfaces are lowered by one step is connected. However, a shallow concave portion for reducing material is formed in the flat plate portion. Further, on the opposite surface (outer surface) where the groove portion 29 is formed, as shown in FIGS. 8 and 12B, the recessed portion 30 (side frame) into which the hanging piece portion 53 of the upper support fitting 45 is inserted. The concave portion 30 of the plate 13 is formed as shown in FIG.

  In addition to the structure for attaching the connecting member 19, the side frame plate 12 on the pivot support side formed as described above is provided with a hanging piece 53 of the upper support fitting 45 on the outer side of the side frame plate 12. A mounting hole 31 for fixing with a fixing screw 32 is formed in the lower portion of the mounting hole 31, and a fixing screw 34 is formed at the lower portion thereof so as to coincide with the mounting hole 69 formed in the vertical contact piece 72 of the lower support fitting 66. A mounting hole 33 for fastening is formed. A mounting hole 35 for fixing the side frame plate 12 and the cover reinforcing metal fitting 14 with the fixing screw 36 is formed in the lower part of the mounting hole 33 and in the front portion of the side frame plate 12.

  On the other hand, in addition to the structure for attaching the connecting member 19, the open side frame part 13 is provided with an attachment hole 37 for attaching a closing projection 38 with an attachment screw 39 at the upper part thereof, and closing at the lower part thereof. An attachment hole 40 for attaching the projection 41 with the attachment screw 42 is formed, and an attachment hole 43 for attaching the side frame plate 13 and the cover reinforcing bracket 14 with the fastening screw 44 is further provided at the lowermost position. Is formed.

  The closing protrusions 38 and 41 are hook portions 1054 and 1065 (see FIG. 121) of the locking device 1000 that are attached along the open side of the main body frame 3 when the main body frame 3 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2. As shown in detail later, by inserting a key into the cylinder lock 1010 of the locking device 1000 and turning it to one side, the hook portions 1054 and 1065 and the closing projections 38 and 41 are connected to each other. The main body frame 3 can be released from the outer frame 2 by disengagement.

  Further, the cover reinforcing bracket 14 fixed to the lower front surface of the lower frame plate 11 and the left and right side frame plates 12 and 13 is such that the main body frame 3 is placed on the upper surface when the cover reinforcing bracket 14 is closed. The front and side surfaces of the cover are covered with a decorative cover plate 15. A guide plate 18 for smoothly guiding the main body frame 3 when the main body frame 3 is closed is replaceably mounted on the upper surface of the outer frame 2 on the open side of the decorative cover plate 15.

  By the way, as a structure for pivotally supporting the main body frame 3 so as to be openable and closable, the main frame 3 is attached along the upper surface of one side of the upper support metal 45 and the cover reinforcement metal 14 which also serve to connect the upper frame plate 10 and the side frame plate 12. A lower support fitting 66 is provided. The upper support fitting 45 is formed with a support flange 47 formed by bending the support protrusion piece 46 protruding forward from the side of the support protrusion piece 46 toward the center of the tip. A shaft support pin 504 (see FIG. 71) of an upper shaft support fitting 503 (described later) of the main body frame 3 is detachably engaged with the hole 47.

  Further, the lower support fitting 66 is also formed to protrude forward, and a support protrusion 68 protrudes upward from the protruding portion, and a frame support plate 506 (described later) of the main body frame 3 is provided on the support protrusion 68. The support holes formed in (see FIG. 72) are inserted. Accordingly, in order to support the main body frame 3 on the outer frame 2, after the support holes formed in the frame support plate 506 of the main body frame 3 are engaged with the support protrusions 68 of the lower support metal fitting 66, By pivoting the pivot pin 504 of the upper pivot bracket 503 in the support hole 47, it can be pivotally supported so as to be freely opened and closed.

  The upper support bracket 45 is attached to a mounting step portion 49 formed in a concave shape on the upper surface and the front surface of the upper frame plate 10 on the shaft support side. A plurality of (two in the illustrated case) mounting holes 48 and a plurality of (two in the illustrated case) mounting holes 50 formed in the mounting step portion 49 are aligned so that the mounting screws 51 are inserted from above, and the upper frame The upper support fitting 45 is firmly fixed to the upper frame plate 10 by being fastened to the clamping plate 52 pressed from the back surface of the plate 10.

  A hanging piece 53 that contacts the outside of the side frame plate 12 is provided on the outer side of the upper support fitting 45, and a mounting hole is also formed in the hanging piece 53. Are fastened with fastening screws 32 to fix the upper support fitting 45 and the side frame plate 12 and to connect the upper frame plate 10 and the side frame plate 12 via the upper support fitting 45. .

  On the other hand, the lower support fitting 66 is fixed by the fixing screw 34 in a state where the mounting hole 33 of the side frame plate 12 and the mounting hole 69 of the vertical contact piece 72 coincide with each other as described above. By inserting a mounting screw 71 into a mounting hole 70 formed in the middle of the horizontal surface of the metal fitting 66, it is fixed to the upper surface of the cover reinforcing metal fitting 14 via the decorative cover plate 15.

  In the outer frame 2 configured as described above, the connecting member 19 is connected to the side frame by connecting the upper frame plate 10, the lower frame plate 11, and the side frame plates 12 and 13, which are constituent members, with the connecting member 19. Since the connection member 19 is fastened in close contact with the inner surfaces of the plates 12 and 13 and the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11 are engaged with each other, the mounting strength is high and the rectangular shape is strong. It can be a framework. In addition to the engagement state of the connection member 19 with the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11, the left and right sides of the connection member 19 that are lowered by one step in the groove portion 29 when the connection member 19 is attached to the side frame plates 12 and 13. Since one part of the structure is fitted, the attachment of the connecting member 19 to the side frame plates 12 and 13 is strengthened, which can also improve the strength of the rectangular frame and accurately position it. Can be done.

  Further, when the upper support plate 45 is attached at a predetermined position after the upper frame plate 10, the lower frame plate 11, and the side frame plates 12 and 13 are connected by the connecting member 19, as shown in FIGS. Since there is no member protruding outward from the outer surface (outer peripheral surface) of each of the frame plates 10, 11, 12, and 13, when the pachinko machine 1 is installed on a pachinko island base (not shown), an adjacent device (for example, It can be installed in close contact with the adjacent ball lending device. Further, when the lower support metal fitting 66 is attached, the upper surface of the cover reinforcing metal fitting 14 and the upper surface of the lower support metal fitting 66 are substantially flush with each other.

  Incidentally, a lock member 80 is pivotally supported on the back surface of the upper support fitting 45 for pivotally supporting the body frame 3 so as to be freely opened and closed as shown in FIG. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 14A, the support protruding piece 46 of the upper support fitting 45 is formed as an arc-shaped flat plate at the tip and is perpendicular to the outer edge of the support protruding piece 46. A drooping wall 46a is formed. The drooping wall 46a can improve the strength of the support protruding piece 46 of the upper support fitting 45, and when viewed from the front, the lock member 80, which will be described below, cannot be visually recognized to improve the appearance. Then, the lock member 80 is used as a portion where the tip contact portion of the elastic piece 80c of the lock member 80 described below comes into contact, or as a stop portion so that the lock member 80 does not jump out of the support protruding piece 46. Further, the support hole 47 formed in the support projecting piece 46 is formed to be bent so as to be inclined slightly toward the inside from the side on the opposite side where the hanging wall 46a is not formed. Has been. The groove size of the inclined hole portion of the support rod hole 47 is formed to be slightly larger than the diameter of the shaft support pin 504.

  The hanging wall 46 a described above is formed by being bent at right angles along the outer edge of the support protruding piece 46 and the upper support fitting 45 from the entrance end portion in front of the support pothole 47, and the support pothole 47. A stop drooping portion 47a is formed by being bent inward at the entrance end portion of the front. A mounting hole 46 b is formed in the approximate center of the support projecting piece 46, and a lock member 80 is rotatably supported by a rivet 81 in the mounting hole 46 b. The lock member 80 is molded from a synthetic resin. The stopper portion 80a and the operation portion 80b are formed in an L shape, and an arc-shaped elastic piece 80c is integrally extended on the opposite side of the operation portion 80b. It is installed. A mounting hole 80d through which the rivet 81 is inserted is formed in an L-shaped base portion formed by the stopper portion 80a and the operation portion 80b. Thus, in a state where the lock member 80 is attached to the attachment hole 46b by the rivet 81 and is rotatably fixed to the back surface of the support protruding piece 46, as shown in FIG. The portion is in contact with the inner side surface of the hanging wall 46 a, and the stopper portion 80 a closes the inclined hole portion of the support hole 47. Further, at this time, the tip end portion of the stopper portion 80a is not in a state of closing the leading space portion of the inclined hole portion of the support hole 47. That is, in a normal state, a space in which the shaft support pin 504 of the upper shaft support 503 of the main body frame 3 is inserted is formed in the head space portion of the support rod hole 47.

  By the way, the shaft support pin 504 is inserted into the tip space portion of the inclined hole portion of the support rod hole 47, and the tip side of the stopper portion 80a faces the stop hanging portion 47a at the inlet end portion (in this state) In a normal shaft support state in which there is a slight gap between the tip side of the stopper portion 80a and the stop drooping portion 47a, the support hole 47 is formed by bending. The centers of the shaft support pin 504 and the tip end surface 80e of the stopper portion 80a that are located in the tip space portion of the inclined hole portion are opposed to each other while being shifted in an oblique direction. In this normal shaft support state, the shaft support pin 504 that supports the heavy main body frame 3 is in contact with the tip end portion of the support rod hole 47. Since almost no load is applied to the distal end surface 80e of the stopper portion 80a, the load is not applied to the elastic piece 80c of the lock member 80. Further, as shown in FIG. 15A, the lock member 80 is formed in an arc shape so that it smoothly rotates when the distal end surface 80e of the stopper portion 80a is rotated by operating the operation portion 80b. . In the illustrated case, the arc center of the arcuate tip surface 80e is the center of the rivet 81 (the rotation center of the lock member 80).

  For this reason, when the acting force F is applied in the direction in which the shaft support pin 504 comes out along the inclination of the inclined hole portion of the support flange 47 and comes into contact with the arcuate tip surface 80e, the acting force F is The component force F1 (the normal direction of the arc of the arcuate tip end surface 80e) acting on the contact portion between the support pin 504 and the arcuate tip end face 80e, and the inclined hole portion of the shaft support pin 504 and the support flange 47 Since the direction of the component force F1 is directed to the center of the rivet 81 (rotation center of the lock member 80) when divided into the component force F2 acting on the contact portion with the inner surface of the one side, the stopper of the lock member 80 The moment that rotates the tip of the portion 80a in the direction away from the support protrusion 46 (clockwise in the figure) does not act, and the pivot pin 504 is inclined between the tip of the stopper 80a of the lock member 80 and the support flange 47. Clamped between one side inner surface of the hole To hold. Therefore, the elastic piece 80c of the lock member 80 is not always loaded even in the normal shaft support state or in the state where the acting force of the shaft support pin 504 is applied to the lock member 80, and the elasticity formed integrally with the synthetic resin. The plastic deformation due to creep of the piece 80c can be prevented, and the shaft support pin 504 can be prevented from falling off from the support hole 47 over a long period of time. Even if an excessive force is applied and the distal end portion of the stopper portion 80a of the locking member 80 is rotated in a direction away from the support projecting piece 46 (clockwise in the figure), one side of the distal end portion of the stopper portion 80a Does not rotate in such a direction that it comes into contact with the stop drooping portion 47a and disengages further, so that the lock member 80 does not protrude outside the support projecting piece 46.

  Further, in the embodiment shown in FIG. 15A, the arc center of the arcuate tip surface 80e of the stopper portion 80a is the center of the rivet 81 (the rotation center of the lock member 80), so Although the description has been given of the case in which no rotational moment is generated in the lock member 80 even when the acting force F in the direction of coming off along the inclination of the inclined hole portion of the support hole 47 is applied, as shown in FIG. When the radius of curvature of the arcuate tip surface 80f of the portion 80a is further reduced and the shaft support position by the rivet 81 of the lock member 80 is set to the inside of the support protrusion 46, the shaft support pin 504 is inclined with respect to the support collar hole 47. When the acting force F is applied in the direction of coming off along the inclination of the hole, and abuts against the arcuate tip surface 80f, the acting force F is brought into contact with the pivot pin 504 and the arcuate tip surface 80f. Component force F1 acting on the component (normal direction of the arc of the arcuate tip surface 80f) and component force acting on the contact portion between the shaft support pin 504 and one side inner surface of the inclined hole portion of the support hole 47 In the case of dividing into F2, the rotational moment is exerted by the component force F1 to rotate the lock member 80 in the direction of the arrow shown in the figure (clockwise rotation direction). Since the side only abuts against the stop drooping portion 47a, the lock member 80 does not protrude outside the support protruding piece 46, and no load is applied to the elastic piece 80c of the lock member 80.

  That is, the point that can be understood from the embodiment shown in FIGS. 15A and 15B is that the acting force is such that the shaft support pin 504 is pulled out along the inclination of the inclined hole portion of the support hole 47. When F is applied and abuts against the end faces 80e and 80f, a rotational moment that rotates the lock member 80 by the component force F1 acting on the abutting portion between the pivot pin 504 and the end faces 80e and 80f of the acting force F. By positioning the rotation center (the axis fixed by the rivet 81) of the lock member 80 at a position where no rotation occurs or a position where a rotational moment is generated where the lock member 80 rotates its tip end toward the outside of the support protrusion 46. In addition, no load is applied to the elastic piece 80c of the lock member 80 at all times, and even if the lock member 80 rotates, one side of the tip of the stopper portion 80a is stopped. Since only abuts against the lock member 80 nor protrudes to the outside of the support protruding piece 46. Even if the shape of the tip surface of the stopper portion 80a is not an arc, the position where the rotational moment is not generated by the action of the component force F1 described above or the tip of the lock member 80 faces the outside of the support protruding piece 46. By positioning the rotation center of the lock member 80 (the axis fixed by the rivet 81) at a position where the rotational moment to rotate is generated, no load is applied to the elastic piece 80c of the lock member 80 at all times. The present applicant confirms that the locking member 80 does not protrude outside the support projecting piece 46 because the one side of the tip of the stopper portion 80a only abuts against the stop drooping portion 47a even when the 80 rotates. doing.

  The operation of the lock member 80 configured as described above will be described with reference to FIG. As a premise that the main body frame 3 is pivotally supported by the outer frame 2 so as to be freely opened and closed, a support protrusion 68 of the lower support metal fitting 66 is formed in a support hole (not shown) formed in a frame support plate 506 (see FIG. 71) of the main body frame 3. Must be inserted. Under such a premise, as shown in FIG. 16A, the shaft support pin 504 of the upper shaft support fitting 503 of the main body frame 3 is pressed against the side surface of the stopper portion 80a of the lock member 80, thereby pushing the figure. As shown in FIG. 16 (B), the lock member 80 rotates counterclockwise while deforming the elastic piece 80 c, so that the shaft support pin 504 can be inserted into the support rod hole 47. Then, when the pivot pin 504 reaches the head space portion of the inclined hole portion of the support hole 47, as shown in FIG. Therefore, the lock member 80 is urged by the elastic force of the elastic piece 80c and rotates in the clockwise direction. The distal end portion of the stopper portion 80 a faces the shaft support pin 504 so that the shaft support pin 504 does not fall out of the support rod hole 47. This state is maintained even when the main body frame 3 is completely closed or during the normal opening / closing operation of the main body frame 3 as shown in FIG. Next, in order to remove the pivot pin 504 from the support hole 47, as shown in FIG. 16E, the finger is inserted into the back surface of the support protrusion 46 and the operation portion 80b of the lock member 80 is turned counterclockwise. By rotating, the lock member 80 rotates against the elastic force of the elastic piece 80c, and the distal end portion of the stopper portion 80a is retracted from the support rod hole 47, so that the shaft support pin 504 is supported. It can be taken out from the hole 47. Thereafter, the main body frame 3 can be removed from the outer frame 2 by lifting the main body frame 3 and releasing the engagement between the support holes formed in the frame support plate 506 and the support protrusions 68 of the lower support fitting 66. .

  As described above, in the lock member 80 provided on the upper support fitting 45 of the outer frame 2 according to the second embodiment, the stopper portion 80a, the operation portion 80b, and the elastic piece 80c are integrally formed of synthetic resin. Therefore, it can be very easily attached to the back surface of the upper support fitting 45, and since it has a very simple structure, there are few failures and the manufacturing cost can be reduced. In addition, when the acting force F is applied in the direction in which the shaft supporting pin 504 is pulled out along the inclination of the inclined hole portion of the support flange 47 and comes into contact with the front end surfaces 80e, 80f, the shaft supporting pin 504 of the acting force F is applied. And a position where no rotational moment is generated to rotate the lock member 80 by the component force F1 acting on the contact portion between the front end surfaces 80e and 80f, or the front end portion of the lock member 80 is rotated toward the outside of the support protruding piece 46. By positioning the rotation center of the lock member 80 (the axis fixed by the rivet 81) at the position where the rotation moment is generated, no load is applied to the elastic piece 80c of the lock member 80 at all times. It is possible to prevent plastic deformation due to creep of the elastic piece 80c to be formed, and to prevent the pivot pin 504 from coming off from the support hole 47 over a long period of time. Since the locking member 80 is only towards the distal end on one side of the stopper portion 80a also rotates and abuts against the stop drooping portion 47a, the lock member 80 nor protrudes to the outside of the support protruding piece 46.

[1-2. Overall structure of door frame]
Next, the door frame 5 that can be freely opened and closed on the front side of the main body frame 3 will be described with reference to FIGS. 17 to 22. FIG. 17 is a front view of the door frame, and FIG. 18 is a rear view of the door frame. FIG. 19 is a perspective view of the door frame as viewed from the right front, and FIG. 20 is a perspective view of the door frame as viewed from the left front. FIG. 21 is an exploded perspective view seen from the front of the door frame, and FIG. 22 is an exploded perspective view seen from the back of the door frame.

  As shown in FIGS. 17, 18, 21, and 22, the door frame 5 is a door frame base unit having a gaming window 101 whose outer shape is formed in a vertically long rectangular shape and whose inner peripheral shape is a vertically long polygonal shape. 100, a horizontally long top lamp lighting unit 200 attached to the upper part of the gaming window 101 on the front surface of the door frame base unit 100, a tray unit 300 attached to the lower part of the gaming window 101 on the front surface of the door frame base unit 100, A glass unit 450 that is attached to the rear side of the door frame base unit 100 so as to close the gaming window 101, and a security cover 470 that is attached to the rear side of the door frame base unit 100 so as to cover the lower rear side of the glass unit 450. And. The door frame base unit 100 in the door frame 5 is provided with side speaker lighting units 120 on both the left and right sides of the gaming window 101, which will be described in detail later. The outer periphery of the game window 101 is surrounded by the decoration unit 200 and the dish unit 300. Further, the door frame 5 is provided with a handle device 400 for performing a game ball driving operation on the left side (open side) of the dish unit 300 when viewed from the front.

[1-2A. Door frame base unit]
Next, the door frame base unit 100 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 23 to 31. FIG. 23A is a front perspective view of the door frame base unit, and FIG. 23B is a rear perspective view of the door frame base unit. FIG. 24 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame base unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 25 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame base unit as seen from the back. FIG. 26 is an exploded perspective view of the left unit of the side speaker electrical decoration unit in the door frame base unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 27 is an exploded perspective view of FIG. 26 as seen from the back. FIG. 28 is an exploded perspective view in which the right unit of the side speaker electric decoration unit in the door frame base unit is exploded and seen from the front, and FIG. 29 is an exploded perspective view in which FIG. 28 is seen from the back. FIG. 30 is an exploded perspective view showing the ball feeding unit in the door frame base unit in an exploded manner. FIG. 31A is an enlarged perspective view showing a joint unit portion in the door frame base unit, and FIG. 31B is an exploded perspective view showing the joint unit in an exploded manner.

  As shown in the figure, the door frame base unit 100 has a door frame base body having a gaming window 101 having an outer shape formed in a vertically long rectangular shape and penetrating in the front-rear direction and having a vertically long inner periphery and a polygonal shape. 110, a side speaker lighting unit 120 fixed to the left and right sides of the gaming window 101 on the front side of the door frame base body 110, and a metal frame-shaped reinforcing sheet metal 140 fixed to the rear side of the door frame base body 110. A horizontally long mounting base 160 fixed to the rear side of the reinforcing sheet metal 140, and a ball feeding unit 170 that sends game balls, which are fixed to the mounting base 160 and supplied from the dish unit 300, one by one to the ball hitting device 650, An operation handle in the handle device 400 is disposed on the rear side of the door frame base body 110 and substantially below the ball feed unit 170 fixed via the reinforcing sheet metal 140 and the mounting base 160. And a joint unit 180 to transmit the rotation operation 410 to hitting the firing device 650 mainly includes.

  Further, the door frame base unit 100 corresponds to a lower left decorative board 190 fixed to the lower left side of the gaming window 101 on the front side of the door frame base main body 110 and a ball removal path 393 of the dish unit 300 in the door frame base main body 110. A ball extraction path cover 191 that closes the ball extraction path opening 112 formed at the position, a door decoration drive board 192 that is fixed below the game window 101 on the rear side of the door frame base body 110, and a door decoration drive. A door decoration drive board cover 193 that covers the board 192 from the rear, a handle relay terminal plate 194 that is fixed immediately above the joint unit 180 on the rear side of the door frame base body 110, and a door frame base body on the lower side of the game window 101 The wiring receiving groove 110b formed on the rear side of 110 and capable of receiving wiring from the lower left decorative board 190 and the handle relay terminal board 194 is closed from the rear side. The wiring cover 195, and a stop lever 196 which is pivotally supported on the rear side of the respective arranged door frame base body 110 in the upper left and right of the game window 101.

  The door frame base unit 100 of the present example has an overall rigidity increased by fixing a reinforcing sheet metal 140 in which metal sheets are assembled with rivets or the like to the rear side of a rectangular door frame base body 110 made of synthetic resin. In addition, it has sufficient strength to sufficiently support the top lamp illumination unit 200, the dish unit 300, and the like.

  The lower left decorative substrate 190 in the door frame base unit 100 has a plurality of LEDs 190a mounted on the front surface thereof, so that the left end portion of the later-described dish unit 300 can be decorated with light emission. On the other hand, the door decoration drive board 192 is provided in the operation handle portion 410 of the handle device 400. Wiring from the switch, the ball rental unit 301, the operation button unit 370, etc. are connected together, and the wiring from the door decoration drive board 192 is incorporated in the board unit 1100 attached to the back surface of the main body frame 3. It is connected to the main control board 4100 (see FIG. 189) of the main control board box 624 attached to the prize ball payout control board 1186 and the game board 4 through 1102 and the like.

[1-2A-1. Door frame base body]
First, the door frame base main body 110 in the door frame base unit 100 is formed in a vertically long frame shape with synthetic resin, as shown in FIGS. The game window 101 having a shape is formed so as to be offset upward as a whole. The door frame base body 110 has an upper side formed by the gaming window 101 and widths on the left and right sides of an upper side reinforcing sheet metal 141, a shaft side reinforcing sheet metal 142, and an open side reinforcing sheet metal 143 of a reinforcing sheet metal 140 described later. The gaming window 101 is formed as large as possible with respect to the size of the door frame base body in a front view. Accordingly, a wider range of the game board 4 arranged on the rear side of the door frame 5 can be viewed from the player side, and a wider game area than the conventional pachinko machine can be easily formed. It has become.

  Also, below the gaming window 101 in the door frame base body 110, a prize ball passing port 111 through which the prize ball contact rod 343 of the dish unit 300 penetrates at the upper part of the shaft support side (left side in front view), and a prize ball A ball removal path opening 112 formed at a position corresponding to the ball removal path 393 in the dish unit 300 below the passage opening 111, and a ball for mounting the ball feeding unit 170 on the upper side of the open side (right side in front view). A feed opening 113, a lock hole 114 through which a cylinder lock 1010, which will be described later, is inserted further toward the opening side of the ball feed opening 113, and a cam insertion opening 115 through which the cam 416 of the handle device 400 can be inserted below the ball feed opening 113. Are formed so as to penetrate the door frame base body 110, respectively.

  Further, the door frame base body 110 has a mounting opening 116 for mounting a mounting elastic piece 473 of the crime prevention cover 470 and a left and right of the mounting opening 116, as will be described in detail later on the left and right sides of the lower end of the gaming window 101. Speaker openings 117 are formed so as to penetrate the rear ends of the left and right side speakers 121 in the side speaker lighting unit 120, which will be described later.

  Further, on the rear side of the door frame base body 110, a glass unit support step 110 a that is recessed forward along substantially the inner periphery of the gaming window 101 and the front outer peripheral edge of the glass unit 450 can contact, and the gaming window 101. On the lower side, a wiring receiving groove 110b that is recessed forward and is formed at a position substantially corresponding to the front surface of the lower reinforcing sheet metal 144, and can accommodate the wiring, and a cam insertion opening 115 is opened to attach the recessed joint unit 180 toward the front side. And a joint unit mounting recess 110c.

  Further, on the rear side of the door frame base body 110, door frame protrusions 110d and 110e projecting a predetermined amount rearward from the lower side are formed, and these door frame protrusions 110d and 110e are formed in a body frame 3 described later. The door frame 5 is positioned and locked with respect to the main body frame 3 by being inserted into the engagement grooves 584 and 585. In addition, the protrusion amount to the rear of the door frame protrusion 110d is formed to be larger than the protrusion amount of the door frame protrusion 110e.

  In addition, as shown in the figure, the door frame base body 110 is provided with a plurality of mounting bosses 110h projecting forward for fixing the top lamp electrical decoration unit 200 on the front upper portion thereof, and on the rear surface thereof. A stop lever mounting portion 110i for rotatably supporting the stop lever 196 is provided. In addition, the door frame base body 110 is formed with a large number of mounting bosses and mounting holes for fixing the side speaker lighting unit 120, the reinforcing sheet metal 140, the mounting base 160, the dish unit 300, etc. at appropriate positions. ing.

[1-2A-2. Side speaker lighting unit]
Subsequently, the side speaker lighting unit 120 in the door frame base unit 100 illuminates the left and right sides of the gaming window 101 on the front surface of the door frame 5 (light-emitting decoration), and the four arranged at the four corners of the gaming window 101. The left speaker lighting unit 120L that can emit predetermined music, sound effects, and the like to the player by the side speaker 121 and is disposed on the pivotal side of the gaming window 101 (left side in front view). And a right side speaker illumination unit 120R disposed on the open side (right side in front view) of the gaming window 101. The side speaker illumination unit 120 includes a vertically elongated illumination part 122 and an acoustic part 130 having a side speaker 121 disposed above and below the illumination part 122 in each of the left and right units. It has a configuration.

  More specifically, as shown in an exploded view in FIGS. 26 to 29, the illumination part 122 of the side speaker illumination unit 120 is a vertically long semi-cylindrical and transparent side illumination lens 123, and the side illumination lens 123. A transparent side illumination reflector 124 disposed on the rear side and constituting a cylinder with the side illumination lens 123; a side illumination base 125 disposed on the rear side of the side illumination reflector 124; and a side illumination base 125 The side decoration board 126 fixed to the rear side, and the side illumination lens 123 and the side illumination reflector 124 are formed so as to enclose the upper end and the lower end of the side illumination lens 124 from the front side, and are attached to the side illumination base 125 so that the side illumination lens is attached. 123 and the side electric decoration flash cover 127 which supports the side electric decoration reflector 124, and the side electric decoration flash cover A flash lens 128 having translucency to close the 27 flash openings 127a from the rear side, and a flash substrate 129 disposed on the rear side of the flash lens 128 and supported on the front surface of the side electric decoration base 125. .

  The illumination part 122 of the side speaker illumination unit 120 has a plurality of color LEDs 126a that can emit light in various colors at predetermined intervals in the vertical direction on the front surface of the side illumination board 126, and high luminance above and below the plurality of LEDs 126a. Each white LED 126b is mounted. In addition, openings 124a and 125a penetrating in the front-rear direction are formed at positions corresponding to the LEDs 126a and 126b of the side electric decoration board 126 in the side electric decoration reflector 124 and the side electric decoration base 125, respectively. The light from the LEDs 126 a and 126 b mounted on 126 can be irradiated forward through the opening 125 a of the side electric decoration base 125 and the opening 124 a of the side electric decoration reflector 124.

  Moreover, in the electrical decoration part 122, in the inner side in the transparent cylinder of the side electrical decoration lens 123 and the side electrical decoration reflector 124, in the whole inner periphery of the side electrical decoration lens 123, and a part of inner periphery of the side electrical decoration reflector 124 In this way, the side lens sheet 123a having a substantially U-shaped cross section is disposed. The side lens sheet 123a is formed of a known optical sheet that displays transmitted light or reflected light in a pearl shape or a chromatic shape. When viewed from the player side, the side lens sheet 123a allows the side illumination lens 123a to be seen. In addition, an appearance as if a fluorescent tube (fluorescent tube) is arranged in a transparent column (pipe) formed by the side electric reflector 124 can be exhibited.

  Furthermore, in the electrical decoration part 122, the dividing wall 124b which divides | segments the several opening part 124a formed corresponding to the several LED 126a of the side decoration board 126 into three groups in the up-down direction is provided in the side electrical decoration reflector 124. The partition wall 124b prevents light from a predetermined LED 126a from entering another group. That is, the dividing wall 124b can clearly divide the fluorescent tube formed by the side illumination lens 123 and the side illumination reflector 124 into upper, middle, and lower three parts. Accordingly, by appropriately emitting light from the plurality of LEDs 126a mounted on the side decorative board 126, the fluorescent tube is caused to emit light in whole or in part, or light is emitted in various colors for each of the upper, middle, and lower parts. Can be done.

  In addition, a lens concave portion 124c that is recessed from the front side is formed in the side electric decoration reflector 124 at a position corresponding to the upper and lower LEDs 126b on the side decorative substrate 126, and a semicircular sub lens is formed in the lens concave portion 124c from the front side. 122a (see FIGS. 28 and 29) is inserted. The electrical decoration part 122 of this example is a fluorescent tube formed by the side electrical decoration lens 123 and the side electrical illumination reflector 124 by causing only the LED 126b to emit light strongly before the LED 126a emits light by the sub lens 122a and the LED 126b. As if it were a real fluorescent lamp, it is possible to produce a light emission effect that lights only after both ends shine.

  Furthermore, the illumination part 122 has a flashlight 129a (for example, an ultra-bright white LED or the like) that can emit strong light on the front surface of the flash substrate 129 supported on the rear side of the side illumination flash cover 127. The flashlight 129a emits light so that the player can irradiate a flashlight.

  The acoustic part 130 of the side speaker electric decoration unit 120 includes a speaker decoration 131 having a substantially circular speaker opening 131a disposed at the foremost part, and a substantially disk made of punching metal that closes the speaker opening 131a of the speaker decoration 131 from the rear side. Speaker cover 132, a decorative spacer 133 disposed behind the speaker cover 132 and cooperating with the speaker decoration 131 to sandwich the speaker cover and have a circular speaker front support port 133 a, and the speaker of the decoration spacer 133 It mainly includes a side speaker 121 disposed so as to close the front support port 133a from the rear side, and a back pressing member 134 having a speaker fitting port 134a that is fitted to the outer periphery of the side speaker 121 from the rear side. .

  As shown in the figure, the acoustic unit 130 has different speaker decorations 131, decorative spacers 133, and back pressing members 134 in different shapes depending on the positions where they are attached. Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 26 and 27, the upper left acoustic unit 130 in a front view includes a decoration 131b that is formed in a cylindrical shape and extends outward from the left side. The decorative spacer 133 has a cylindrical shape that can be inserted into the speaker decoration 131, and the back pressing member 134 is formed with a back pressing decoration part 134 b that is paired with the decoration part 131 b of the speaker decoration 131. The upper left acoustic part 130 is further provided with a hinge cover 135 that is disposed above the back press decoration part 134 b of the back press member 134 and covers the lower side of the shaft pin 145 of the upper shaft support part 146 in the reinforcing sheet metal 140. Yes. In the lower left acoustic part 130 in front view, the speaker decoration 131 is formed in a plate shape having a decoration part 131 b, and the decoration spacer 133 includes a spacer decoration part 133 b that is paired with the decoration part 131 b of the speaker decoration 131. The back pressing member 134 is formed in a ring shape.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 28 and 29, the speaker decoration 131 is formed in a cylindrical shape and the decoration spacer 133 and the back pressing member 134 are inserted into the speaker decoration 131 in the upper right acoustic section 130 in front view. It is formed in a possible cylindrical shape. Further, in the lower right acoustic part 130 in front view, the speaker decoration 131 is formed in an annular shape, and the decoration spacer 133 is formed in a flat plate shape having a spacer decoration part 133b that contacts the rear surface of the speaker decoration 131. In addition, the back pressing member 134 is formed in a ring shape. Note that the lower right acoustic unit 130 further includes a decoration base 136 having a back presser member fixing port 136a through which the back presser member 134 can be inserted and fixed from the front side further on the rear side of the back presser member 134. .

  As shown in the figure, the four side speakers 121 in the side speaker electric decoration unit 120 of this example are arranged at the four corners of the game window 101, and the head of the player who plays the game is more or less. Are also arranged at the top, bottom, left and right positions, so that each side speaker 121 has independent acoustic signals (for example, 2ch stereo signal, 4ch stereo signal, and 2.1ch surround including a lower speaker 391 described later) By sending a signal or a 4.1ch surround signal, etc., it is possible to present a more realistic sound effect (sound production) than before. In addition, the side speaker 121 of this example is mainly in charge of the middle to high range, and the lower speaker 391 is in charge of the low range.

[1-2A-3. Reinforced sheet metal]
Next, the reinforcing sheet metal 140 in the door frame base unit 100 includes an upper reinforcing sheet metal 141 attached along the back of the upper side of the door frame base main body 110, and a door frame base main body, as mainly shown in FIGS. 110, a pivot-side reinforcement sheet metal 142 attached along the pivot-side side part back surface, an open-side reinforcement sheet metal 143 attached along the open-side side part back surface of the door frame base body 110, and the door frame base body 110. A lower reinforcing sheet metal 144 attached along the lower back surface of the gaming window 101 is fastened to each other with a screw or the like to form a square shape.

  As shown in FIG. 24, the reinforcing sheet metal 140 includes an upper shaft supporting part 146 having shaft pins 145 provided on the upper and lower ends of the shaft supporting side reinforcing sheet metal 142 so as to be slidable in the vertical direction on its upper surface, and its lower surface. A lower shaft support portion 148 having a shaft pin 147 (see FIG. 18) is integrally formed. The upper and lower shaft pins 145 and 147 are pivotally supported by an upper shaft bracket 503 and a lower shaft bracket 509 formed on the upper and lower sides of the body frame 3, so that the door frame 5 is attached to the body frame 3. It can be opened and closed freely.

  Further, the lower reinforcing metal plate 144 of the reinforcing metal plate 140 has a predetermined width and is formed to have a length substantially the same as the horizontal width dimension of the door frame base main body 110. It is a lower bent protrusion piece 149 that is bent rearward (see FIG. 25), and both upper side edges of the upper long side edge are upper bent protrusion pieces 150 that are bent rearward. However, the portions sandwiched between the upper bent protrusions 150 on both sides are vertical bent protrusions 151 extending in the vertical direction. The amount of protrusion of the lower bent protruding piece 149 is not so large, and the lower bent protruding piece 149 does not engage with the groove portion or the concave portion to form the concave / convex engagement, but is formed to increase the strength. On the other hand, the amount of protrusion of the upper bent protrusions 150 on both sides is slightly larger than the amount of protrusion of the lower bent protrusions 149, and somewhat prevents unauthorized tools from entering from below, but rather the lower reinforcement in the present embodiment. The most characteristic configuration of the sheet metal 144 is a vertical bent protrusion piece 151.

  The vertical bent protrusion 151 is formed in a concave shape so that its upper edge shape matches the lower end shape of the unit frame 451 of the glass unit 450 described later, and when the glass unit 450 is fixed to the back side of the door frame 5 Further, the upper end piece of the vertical bent protrusion piece 151 is engaged with an engagement groove 451c formed along the outer periphery of the substantially central portion in the width direction (front-rear direction) of the unit frame 451 of the glass unit 450. . The lower reinforcing sheet metal 144 is formed with a prize ball passage port covering portion 152 that protects the outer periphery excluding the bottom surface of the prize ball passage port 111 formed in the door frame base body 110.

  Further, the open side reinforcing sheet metal 143 of the reinforcing sheet metal 140 includes open side outward bent protrusions 153 bent toward the rear on both sides of the long side between the upper side reinforcing sheet metal 141 and the lower side reinforcing sheet metal 144, and Open side inner bent protrusions 154 are respectively formed, and the open side inner bent protrusions 154 are formed to extend rearward longer than the open side outer bent protrusions 153. The upper reinforcing sheet metal 141 is formed with bent protrusions 155 and 156 that are bent backward on both sides of the long side. Further, the shaft-supporting side reinforcing sheet metal 142 is formed with a shaft-supporting side L-shaped bent protrusion 157 extending rearward at the outer end of the long side. In addition, a hook cover 158 that comes into contact with a door frame hook portion 1041 of the lock device 1000 described later is attached to the rear lower portion of the opening-side reinforcing sheet metal 143.

[1-2A-4. Mounting base / ball feeding unit]
Next, the mounting table 160 and the ball feeding unit 170 in the door frame base unit 100 will be described. First, as shown in FIGS. 18, 24, and 25, the mounting base 160 is attached so as to cover the upper half of the rear surface of the plate portion of the door frame base unit 100, and is a transparent synthetic resin similar to the security cover 470. Is formed in a horizontally long rectangular parallelepiped shape whose front is opened. In order to smoothly guide the ball fired from the firing rail 515 to the game board 4, the mounting base 160 is formed by the rear surface of the mounting base 160 and the plate portion 511 of the main body frame 3 when the door frame 5 is closed. The ball flying guide surface 161 is formed on the rear surface of the mounting table 160. By the way, the mounting base 160 according to the present embodiment has a prize ball passing port opening 162 through which the rear protruding portion of the prize ball passing port covering part 152 formed in the lower reinforcing sheet metal 144 is penetrated at the upper part on the pivotal support side. A ball feed unit mounting recess 163 for attaching the ball feed unit 170 is formed in the lower part on the open side. A region in the oblique direction from the ball feed unit mounting recess 163 is a ball flight guide surface 161.

  Further, a lid notch 164 into which a finger can be put when removing a ball passage route cover 191, a door decoration drive board 192, and a door decoration drive board cover 193, which will be described later, is formed in the middle lower part of the mounting base 160. In addition, a vertical wall 165 is formed vertically on a part of the upper side of the mounting table 160. As shown in FIG. 18, the upright wall 165 is for preventing the lower part of the security cover 470 from moving forward by contacting the front surface of the security cover 470 when the security cover 470 is attached.

  Further, the mounting table 160 includes a crime prevention protrusion 166 that protrudes obliquely rearward from the above-described ball flight guide surface 161 to the prize ball passage opening 162. As described above, the security projecting piece 166 is provided between the security frame 586 formed in the plate portion 511 of the main body frame 3 and the inner ridges and the inner side ridges at the lower side portions of the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3. The engaging portion is configured.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 30, the ball feeding unit 170 includes a box-shaped main body 171 fixed to the ball feeding unit mounting recess 163 and a ball pivotally supported by a support shaft 171 a of the main body 171. A feed member 172 and a weight 173 pivotally supported by the ball feed member 172 while rotating the ball receiving portion of the ball feed member 172 upward are provided. The ball feed unit 170 is located at the lower end of the third inclined surface 311c of the dish unit 300 by swinging the ball feed member 172 in response to the reciprocal movement difference of the ball striking rod 687 of the ball hitting device 650 described later. The balls are supplied one by one to the firing position of the firing rail 515 through the hitting ball supply port 171b formed in the main body 171.

  Reference numeral 174 in the figure denotes an E-ring that prevents the ball feed member 172 from coming off from the support shaft 171a of the main body 171 and prevents the weight 173 from coming off from the ball feed member 172. It is.

[1-2A-5. Joint unit]
Next, the joint unit 180 in the door frame base unit 100 will be described. As shown in FIG. 31, the joint unit 180 is housed in the joint unit mounting recess 110 c of the door frame base body 110 and is slidable in the lateral direction, and the joint unit 180 is housed in the state where the slide body 182 is housed. The cover body 184 covers the front surface of the unit mounting recess 110c.

  The joint unit mounting recess 110c of the door frame base body 110 is formed in a rectangular parallelepiped box shape with the front surface open, and a cam insertion opening 115 is formed on the rear surface. In addition, a pair of attachment holes 110f for fixing the cover body 184 of the joint unit 180 is formed in one corner portion of the joint unit mounting recess 110c that is positioned substantially diagonally. Furthermore, the arcuate abutment convex portions for allowing the slide body 182 to move smoothly by abutting against the outer surfaces of the upper and lower sides of the slide body 182 on the upper side and the bottom side of the inner side surface of the joint unit mounting recess 110c. 110g (in FIG. 31B, only the lower abutment protrusion 110g is shown, and the upper abutment protrusion 110g is not shown).

  On the other hand, the slide body 182 of the joint unit 180 has a rear surface smaller than the joint unit mounting recess 110c so that the slide body 182 is housed in a space formed by the joint unit mounting recess 110c and the cover body 184 so as to be movable in the left-right direction. Formed in the shape of an open rectangular parallelepiped box, the rear face wall has two guide protrusions 182a that project a predetermined amount rearward and are arranged in a substantially horizontal direction, and the lower guide protrusion 182a on the right side in rear view. A plate-like slide protrusion 183 that protrudes rearward and a hole pierced between the two guide protrusions 182a so that a wiring through tube portion 428 of the handle device 400, which will be described later, penetrates on the left side of the slide protrusion 183 in rear view. And a rectangular cylindrical member through-opening 182b. The slide projecting piece 183 of the slide body 182 has an inclined side 183a in which the traveling direction during sliding (right direction in rear view) is cut obliquely. In addition, a cam engagement recess 182 c that houses a cam 416 that is fixed to the tip of the rotation shaft 415 of the handle device 400 is formed in a U shape on the front wall of the slide body 182 by a rib. Then, a vertical part of a part of the rib forming the cam engagement recess 182c is formed as an arc-shaped rib so as to protrude into the cam engagement recess 182c, and that part is a cam contact part 182d that contacts the cam 416. It has become.

  Further, the cover body 184 of the joint unit 180 is formed in a rectangular parallelepiped box shape with the front surface opened, and a cylindrical boss-shaped guide protrusion 182a protruding from the front surface of the slide body 182 is inserted into the front surface of the slide body 182. Two lateral guide holes 194a that guide the movement of the slide body, an insertion lateral hole 184b through which the slide protrusion 183 projecting from the front surface of the slide body 182 is inserted, and the rear grip member 413 of the operation handle 410 It protrudes outward from a position corresponding to the wiring opening 184c that is attached to the end and is inserted through the cam insertion opening 115 and facing the rear end of the wiring through cylinder 428 and the mounting hole 110f of the joint unit mounting recess 110c. And a mounting hole 184d formed. The cover body 184 can be attached to the joint unit mounting recess 110c by fixing a predetermined screw (not shown) to the mounting hole 110f of the joint unit mounting recess 110c through the mounting hole 184d. .

  In order to assemble the slide body 182 and the cover body 184 of the joint unit 180 into the joint unit mounting recess 110c, the slide body 182 is housed in the joint unit mounting recess 110c, and in this state, the cover body 184 is covered from the front. When covering, the guide protrusion 182a is inserted into the guide lateral hole 194a, and the slide protrusion 183 is inserted into the insertion lateral hole 184b. Then, after the coating, by screwing into the mounting hole 110f with the screw through the mounting hole 184d, the slide body 182 is housed inside, and the assembly of the joint unit 180 is completed.

[1-2B. Top lamp lighting unit]
Next, the top lamp illumination unit 200 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 32 to 39. 32A is a front perspective view of the top lamp illumination unit, FIG. 32B is a rear perspective view of the top lamp illumination unit, and FIG. 33 is a perspective view showing the top lamp illumination unit obliquely from the lower front. It is. FIG. 34A is an exploded perspective view showing the top lamp electrical decoration unit disassembled for each main configuration and shown from the front, and FIG. 34B is an exploded perspective view showing FIG. FIG. 35 is an exploded perspective view of the top lamp reflector unit in the top lamp illumination unit disassembled and shown from the front together with the top lamp base. FIG. 36 is an exploded perspective view of FIG. Further, FIG. 37 is an exploded perspective view showing the left rotating lamp in the top lamp lighting unit in an exploded manner, FIG. 38 is an exploded perspective view showing the right rotating lamp in the top lamp lighting unit in an exploded manner, FIG. 39 is an exploded perspective view showing the center rotating lamp in the top lamp illumination unit in an exploded manner.

  As shown in FIG. 33, the top lamp electrical decoration unit 200 in the door frame 5 of the present embodiment includes three rotating lights 244, 264, 284 (so-called Patlite (registered trademark)) arranged in the left-right direction. The sizes of the rotating lamps 244, 264, and 284 are arranged in order from the left in front view. The top lamp electric decoration unit 200 is fixed to the front side of the horizontally long and box-shaped top lamp base 210 and the top lamp base 210 and to the upper front part of the door frame base unit 100 with the top lamp base 210 interposed therebetween. Top lamp reflector unit 220, left rotating lamp unit 240, right rotating lamp unit 260, and central rotating lamp unit 280 attached to the front surface of top lamp reflector unit 220, left rotating lamp unit 240, right rotating lamp unit 260, and Rotating lamp covers 201, 202, 203 that cover the front surface of the central rotating lamp unit 280, respectively, and are attached to the top lamp reflector unit 220, and a reflector inner 204 that covers the substantially central lower surface of the top lamp reflector unit are mainly provided ( (See Figure 34)

  Further, the top lamp illumination unit 200 includes a top lamp power supply board 205 fixed to the front right side of the top lamp base 210 and two top lamp decoration drive boards 206 fixed to the rear side of the top lamp base 210. In addition. The top lamp power supply board 205 includes the boards 224, 226, 231 and LEDs 244a, 266a, 231a, motors 245, 265, 285 of the rotary lamp units 240, 260, 280 and boards 248 in the top lamp lighting unit 200. , 268, 288, 296, LED 453a of a glass unit 450 described later, and the like, for supplying power from a power supply board 1136 (described later) via a relay. Further, the top lamp decoration drive board 206 emits light from the LEDs in the top lamp reflector unit 220, the LEDs in the central rotary lamp unit 280, the motors 245, 265, 285, etc. of the rotary lamp units 240, 260, 280, etc. The driving is for driving based on a control signal from a peripheral board 4010 (peripheral control board 4140) described later.

[1-2B-1. Top lamp base]
Next, as shown in FIGS. 35 and 36, the top lamp base 210 in the top lamp electrical decoration unit 200 has a shape in which the upper surface and the left and right side surfaces are substantially aligned with the upper side and the left and right side sides of the door frame base unit 100. At the same time, the lower surface is shaped substantially along the gaming window 101 of the door frame base unit 100, and is formed in a box shape that is horizontally long and partitioned in the middle in the front-rear direction. The top lamp base 210 has a rear end of a mounting boss 221 i protruding from the front side to the rear from the top lamp reflector unit 220 while the mounting boss 110 h of the door frame base body 110 is inserted from the rear side at a position along the outer periphery. Are fitted and positioned, and a plurality of substantially cylindrical mounting boss portions 211 having insertion holes through which predetermined screws can be inserted are provided. The front end of the mounting boss 110h of the door frame base unit 100 is inserted into the mounting boss portion 211 from the rear, and the rear end of the mounting boss 221i of the top lamp reflector unit 220 is inserted from the front. By fixing a predetermined screw from the rear side to the mounting boss 221 i of the top lamp reflector unit 220, the top lamp base 210 (top lamp lighting unit 200) is attached and fixed to the door frame base unit 100. ing.

  Further, the top lamp base 210 is provided with a plurality of fixed boss portions 212 having insertion holes through which a rear end of a fixed boss 221j protruding rearward from the top lamp reflector unit 220 can be fitted and a predetermined screw can pass. ing. By fixing a predetermined screw to the fixed boss 221j of the top lamp reflector unit 220 from the rear side through the fixed boss portion 212, the top lamp base 210 and the top lamp reflector unit 220 can be assembled to each other. It has become.

  Further, the top lamp base 210 is provided with a connector opening 213 through which the connection connector 205a of the top lamp power supply board 205 can be inserted in the vicinity of the right end when viewed from the front, and the connector 205a is inserted through the connector opening 213. Is faced from the rear side of the top lamp base 210. In addition, a board attachment portion 214 is provided on each of the left and right sides of the rear side of the top lamp base 210, and the top lamp decoration driving board 206 is attached to the board attachment portion 214.

[1-2B-2. Top lamp reflector unit]
Next, the top lamp reflector unit 220 in the top lamp illumination unit 200 will be described. As shown in FIGS. 35 and 36, the top lamp reflector unit 220 of the present embodiment includes a box-shaped reflector base 221 that can cover the top lamp base 210 from the front side and is open at the rear side. The reflector base 221 is a cylindrical cylinder that has three rotating lamps 244, 264, and 284 mounted side by side on its front surface, and projects between the central rotating lamp 284 and the left and right rotating lamps 244 and 264 greatly forward. It is partitioned by a portion 221a and an inclined portion 221b that hangs downward from the cylindrical portion 221a and inclines backward as it goes downward. In the reflector base 221, a substantially circular opening is formed in the cylindrical part 221a, and three rectangular openings arranged in the vertical direction are formed in the inclined part 221b (see FIG. 33). ). The reflector base 210 is provided with a vertically long bulging portion 221e that protrudes forward at both left and right ends, and a rectangular slit 221f that opens vertically is formed in front of the bulging portion 221e. The reflector base 211 has a shape in which the mounting positions of the three rotating lamps 244, 264, and 284 are recessed backward by two cylindrical portions 221a and inclined portions 221b and two bulging portions 221e as shown in the figure. It has become.

  In addition, the reflector base 221 has a gently curved surface shape that is recessed rearward between the two cylindrical portions 221a and the inclined portion 221b (position where the central rotating lamp 284 is disposed). Between the cylindrical portion 221a and the inclined portion 221b, a lens opening portion 221g penetrating in a substantially trapezoidal shape in front view is formed on the left and right sides of the substantially horizontal center. Further, the reflector base 221 is mounted with a rotating lamp through which the front ends of the rotating lamp unit bases 241, 261, 281 of the rotating lamp units 240, 260, 280 having the rotating lamps 244, 264, 284 can pass from the rear side. A mouth 221h is formed. In addition, the reflector base 221 has a plurality of mounting bosses 221 i protruding rearward that fit with the mounting boss portions 211 of the top lamp base 210, and a plurality of mounting bosses 212 fitted to the fixed boss portion 212 of the top lamp base 210 and protruding rearward. And a fixed boss 221j. Although not shown in detail, the reflector base 221 is also provided with an attachment boss 221k that is directly attached to the door frame base unit 100 without using the top lamp base 210.

  By the way, the top lamp reflector unit 220 includes, in addition to the reflector base 221, a pair of top inner lenses 222 that are fixed to the substantially center in the left-right direction on the rear side of the reflector base 221, and the reflector base 221 on the rear side of the top inner lens 222. A pair of lens sheets 223 disposed at a position corresponding to the lens opening 221g, a pair of reflector decorative substrates 224 disposed on the rear side of the lens sheet 223 and having a plurality of color LEDs 224a mounted thereon, and a reflector base 210. A transparent round lens 225 that is inserted into the cylindrical portion 221a from the rear side and closes the opening 221c, and behind the cylindrical portion 221a and the inclined portion 221b of the reflector base 210 with the round lens 225 and the top inner lens 222 interposed therebetween. LED226a on the front Mounted and a pair of partition decorative substrate 226.

  The top inner lens 222 is formed of a transparent resin. The top inner lens 222 includes a curved lens portion 222a having a substantially trapezoidal curved surface that closes the lens opening 221g of the reflector base 221, and an inclined portion 221b of the reflector base 221. A partition lens portion 222b that closes the opening 221d and a round lens support portion 222c that contacts the rear end of the round lens 225 are provided. In addition, saw-shaped diffusion lens portions 222d are formed on the upper and lower sides of the curved lens portion 222a, and can emit light in a mode different from that of the curved lens portion 222a, and light from the front side can be emitted even when light is not emitted. Can be irregularly reflected.

  Further, the top inner lens 222 supports a lens sheet 223 on the rear side of the curved lens portion 222a sandwiched between upper and lower protruding pieces, and a protruding piece 222e protruding rearward from the rear side of the diffusion lens portion 222d. A support recess 222f is formed. As shown in the figure, in the reflector decorative substrate 224, a plurality of LEDs 224a are arranged at positions corresponding to the protruding pieces 222e of the top inner lens 222, and correspond to the curved surface lens portion 222a of the top inner lens 222. The positions are also distributed. Accordingly, the curved lens portion 222a and the diffusing lens portion 222d of the top inner lens 222 can emit light in different modes.

  The lens sheet 223 is a known optical sheet that displays transmitted light from the LED 224a mounted on the reflector decorative substrate 224 or reflected light from other light sources in a pearl shape or a chromatic shape. The LED 226a mounted on the partition decoration board 226 is an ultra-bright LED, and can emit a strong flash.

  Further, the top lamp reflector unit 220 includes a top side lens 227 that closes a longitudinal slit 221f formed in the left and right bulged portions 221e of the reflector base 221, and a top side that fixes the upper end of the top side lens 227 from the front side. A lens retainer 228, a lens sheet 229 disposed on the rear side of the top side lens 227 and the reflector base 221, and a top side substrate base 230 that holds the lens sheet 229 by being fixed to the rear side of the reflector base 221. And a top side substrate 231 mounted on the front surface with a color LED 231a fixed to the top side substrate base 230 and capable of irradiating light to the front top side lens 227 via the lens sheet 229.

  The top side lens 221 is formed in a square shape in a plan view with a transparent resin, and locking pieces 227a and 227b are formed at upper and lower ends, respectively. The locking piece 227b at the lower end is formed on the reflector base. The upper end locking piece 227a is pressed by the top side lens presser 228 after being locked to the lower end of the slit 221f in the set 221 so that it can be attached to the reflector base 221. The lens sheet 229 disposed on the rear side of the top side lens 221 is formed of an optical sheet similar to the lens sheet 223 described above, and is formed in a curved shape as shown in the figure. By being attached to 221, an appearance as if a columnar fluorescent tube is arranged on the rear side of the top side lens 227 can be exhibited.

  Further, as shown in the drawing, the top side substrate base 230 is formed in a vertically long rectangular frame shape, and light from the LED 231a of the top side substrate 231 that is fixed to the rear side through the frame is converted into the lens sheet 229 and the top side. Light can be applied to the front surface via the lens 227.

[1-2B-3. Revolving light unit]
Next, the three rotating lamp units 240, 260, and 280 in the top lamp illumination unit 200 will be described. First, as shown in FIG. 37, the left rotating lamp unit 240 has a circular opening 241a penetrating in the vertical direction, and the opening 241a projects forward from the rotating lamp mounting port 221h of the reflector base 221. A rotating lamp unit base 241 fixed to the rear side of the reflector base 221 and a substantially annular rotation fixed on the upper surface of the rotating lamp unit base 241 disposed coaxially with the opening 241a of the rotating lamp unit base 241. A base part 242, a rotating lamp base gear 243 that is arranged coaxially with the rotating part base 242, and is slidably mounted on the upper surface of the rotating part base 242, and a lower surface of the rotating lamp base gear 243. The rotating lamp mounting port 221 of the reflector base 221 is substantially parallel to the axis of the rotating lamp base 244 and the rotating lamp base gear 243. A left rotating lamp motor 245 disposed on the rear axis of the rotating lamp unit and fixed to the lower surface of the rotating lamp unit base 241 so that the rotating shaft 245a protrudes upward from the upper surface of the rotating lamp unit base 241; A transmission gear 246 that is fixed to the rotating shaft 245a of the H.245 and meshes with the rotating lamp base gear 243, covers the entire rotating lamp base gear 243 and a part of the transmitting gear 246 from above, and covers the rotating lamp base gear 243 from the rotating portion base 242. The rotating unit holder 247 fixed to the rotating lamp unit base 241 and supported on the lower surface of the rotating unit holder 247 is coaxial with the rotating lamp base gear 243 and is directed to the lower rotating lamp 244. And a left rotating lamp substrate 248 having a high-luminance color LED (not shown) capable of emitting light.

  The left rotating lamp unit 240 is mounted with a rotating lamp unit cover 249 that covers the rotating part holder 247 from above, a left rotating position detection sensor 250 that detects the rotating position of the rotating lamp 244, and a left rotating position detection sensor 250. And a counterclockwise rotation position detection substrate 251.

  The rotating lamp unit base 241 of the left rotating lamp unit 240 hangs downward on the upper surface thereof at an attachment step 241b formed substantially along the inner periphery of the opening 241a and at a position rearward of the opening 241a. A mounting portion 241c mounted on the rear side of the reflector base 211 and a motor fixing portion 241d disposed on the rear side of the opening 241a for fixing the left rotating lamp motor 245 are provided. The mounting step portion 241b rotates from above. The part base 242 is adapted to be fitted. In addition, the rotating part base 242 has a left rotation position detected at a predetermined position on the upper surface that is coaxial with the opening 241a of the rotating lamp unit base 241 and is smaller in diameter than the outer periphery of the rotating lamp base gear 243. A substrate support portion 242b that supports the lower end of the substrate 251; a wiring locking portion 242c that is disposed behind the substrate support portion 242b and that locks the wiring connected to the left rotation lamp substrate 248 and the left rotation position detection substrate 251; It has.

  The rotating lamp base gear 243 is an annular spur gear having an outer diameter larger than that of the shaft support port 242a of the rotating portion base 242, and extends downward from the lower surface to the shaft supporting port 242a of the rotating portion base 242. A cylindrical gear shaft (not shown) that can be inserted into the shaft, a shaft support hole 243a that has a smaller diameter than the gear shaft and penetrates in the vertical direction, and a rotational position detection that protrudes radially outward from the outer periphery of the lower surface And a piece 243b. The outer diameter of the shaft tube of the rotating lamp base gear 243 is slightly smaller than the inner diameter of the shaft support port 242a of the rotating part base 242, and is inserted into the shaft support port 242a. 243 can rotate substantially coaxially with the shaft support port 242a. In the left rotating lamp unit 240, the rotation position detecting piece 243b of the rotating lamp base gear 243 is detected by the left rotating position detection sensor 250, so that the rotating position of the rotating lamp 244 can be detected. Yes.

  Further, although not shown, the rotating portion holder 247 protrudes downward to a position coaxial with the shaft support opening 242a of the rotating portion base 242, and can be inserted into the shaft supporting hole 243a of the rotating lamp base gear 243. The holder shaft cylinder is formed. The outer diameter of the holder shaft tube is slightly smaller than the shaft support hole 243a of the rotating lamp base gear 243. By inserting the holder shaft tube into the shaft support hole 243a of the rotating lamp base gear 243, the rotating lamp The base gear 243 can be rotated substantially coaxially with the holder shaft cylinder. In other words, in the left rotating lamp unit 240 of this example, the rotating lamp base 242a, the gear shaft cylinder and the shaft supporting hole 243a of the rotating lamp base gear 243, and the holder shaft cylinder of the rotating section holder 247 are provided by the rotating lamp base 242a. A gear 243 is rotatably supported. The left rotating lamp substrate 248 is fixed to the lower end of the holder shaft cylinder of the rotating part holder 247. Although not shown in the drawings, the rotation unit holder 247 has a substrate support unit that supports the upper end of the left rotation position detection substrate 251 at a position corresponding to the substrate support unit 242b of the rotation unit base 242 on the lower surface. The left rotation position detection substrate 251 is nipped and fixed between the rotation unit base 242 and the rotation unit holder 247.

  In addition, the rotating lamp 244 of the left rotating lamp unit 240 is disposed on the lower side of the rotating lamp lens 252 and the transparent disk-shaped rotating lamp lens 252 disposed on the lower side of the rotating lamp base gear 243 as shown in the figure. The reflector 253 is fixed to the lower surface of the rotating lamp base gear 243, and the reflector cover 254 that covers the reflector 253. The reflector 253 of the rotating lamp 244 is plated with a metallic luster on its surface, and has a disk-like base portion 253a, an opening 253b drilled in the center of the base portion 253a, and a base portion 253a. And a plurality of mounting bosses 253d that extend upward from the upper surface of the base portion 253a and whose upper ends can come into contact with the rotating lamp base gear 243.

  The rotating lamp 244 has the lower surface of the rotating lamp lens 252 facing the opening 253b of the reflector 253, and the rotating lamp lens 252 has an insertion hole 252a through which the mounting boss 253d of the reflector 253 can be inserted. The mounting boss 253d is inserted into the insertion hole 252a and the mounting boss 253d is fixed to the rotating lamp base gear 243, so that the rotating lamp lens 252 is narrowed between the rotating lamp base gear 243 and the reflector 253. It is designed to be held and fixed. In addition, the reflector cover 254 of the rotating lamp 244 has a substantially regular octagonal shape in plan view, has a box shape with the upper part opened, and has an opening on the side surface of the reflector 253 facing the inner surface side of the reflecting portion 253c. 254a is formed.

  Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 38, the right rotating lamp unit 260 has a circular opening 261a penetrating in the vertical direction, and the opening 261a projects forward from the rotating lamp mounting port 221h on the left side of the reflector base 221. A rotating lamp unit base 261 fixed to the rear side of the reflector base 221 so as to be in the position, and a substantially circular shape arranged coaxially with the opening 261a of the rotating lamp unit base 261 and fixed to the upper surface of the rotating lamp unit base 261. An annular rotating part base 262, a rotating lamp base gear 263 that is arranged coaxially with the rotating part base 262 and is slidably mounted on the upper surface of the rotating part base 262, and hangs down from the rotating lamp base gear 263. The rotating lamp 264 fixed to the lower surface of the rotating lamp base and the rotating lamp mounting of the reflector base 221 is substantially parallel to the axis of the rotating lamp base gear 263. A right rotating lamp motor 265 that is disposed on the axis behind 221h and that is fixed to the lower surface of the rotating lamp unit base 261 so that the rotating shaft 265a protrudes upward from the upper surface of the rotating lamp unit base 261; A transmission gear 266 fixed to the rotating shaft 265a of the motor 265 and meshing with the rotating lamp base gear 263, the entire rotating lamp base gear 263 and a part of the transmitting gear 266 are covered from above, and the rotating lamp base gear 263 is covered with the rotating part base. Rotating portion holder 267 which is pivotally supported in cooperation with 262 and fixed to rotating lamp unit base 261, and is fixed to the lower surface of rotating portion holder 267 coaxially with rotating lamp base gear 263, to lower rotating lamp 264. And a right rotating lamp substrate 268 having high-luminance color LEDs (not shown) capable of emitting light.

  The right rotating lamp unit 260 includes a rotating lamp unit cover 269 that covers the rotating unit holder 267 from above, a right rotating position detection sensor 270 that detects the rotating position of the rotating lamp 264, and a right rotating position detection sensor 270. And a right rotation position detection board 271.

  The rotating lamp unit base 261 of the right rotating lamp unit 260 hangs downward at an upper surface of the rotating lamp unit base 261b formed substantially along the inner periphery of the opening 261a and at a position behind the opening 261a. An attachment portion 261c attached to the rear side of the reflector base 211 and a motor fixing portion 261d arranged on the rear side of the opening 261a for fixing the right rotating lamp motor 265 are provided, and the attachment step portion 261b is rotated from above. The part base 262 is fitted. In addition, the rotating portion base 262 detects the right rotation position at a predetermined position on the upper surface that is coaxial with the opening 261a of the rotating lamp unit base 261 and is smaller in diameter than the outer periphery of the rotating lamp base gear 263. A substrate support portion 262b that supports the lower end of the substrate 271; a wiring locking portion 262c that is disposed behind the substrate support portion 262b and that locks the wiring connected to the right rotation lamp substrate 268 and the right rotation position detection substrate 271; It has.

  The rotating lamp base gear 263 is an annular spur gear having an outer diameter larger than that of the shaft support port 262a of the rotating unit base 262, and extends downward from the lower surface to the shaft supporting port 262a of the rotating unit base 262. A cylindrical gear shaft (not shown) that can be inserted into the shaft, a shaft support hole 263a that has a smaller diameter than the gear shaft and penetrates in the vertical direction, and a rotational position detection that protrudes radially outward from the outer periphery of the lower surface And a piece 263b. The outer diameter of the shaft tube of the rotating lamp base gear 263 is slightly smaller than the inner diameter of the shaft support port 262a of the rotating part base 262, and is inserted into the shaft support port 262a. 263 can rotate substantially coaxially with the shaft support port 262a. In the right rotating lamp unit 260, the rotating position detection piece 263b of the rotating lamp base gear 263 is detected by the right rotating position detection sensor 270, so that the rotating position of the rotating lamp 264 can be detected. Yes.

  Furthermore, although not shown, the rotating part holder 267 protrudes downward to a position that is coaxial with the shaft support port 262a of the rotating part base 262, and can be inserted into the shaft support hole 263a of the rotating lamp base gear 263. The holder shaft cylinder is formed. The outer diameter of this holder shaft cylinder is slightly smaller than the shaft support hole 263a of the rotating lamp base gear 263. By inserting the holder shaft cylinder into the shaft support hole 263a of the rotating lamp base gear 263, the rotating lamp The base gear 263 can be rotated substantially coaxially with the holder shaft cylinder. That is, in the right rotating lamp unit 260 of this example, the rotating lamp base 262a, the gear shaft cylinder and the shaft supporting hole 263a of the rotating lamp base gear 263, and the holder shaft cylinder of the rotating section holder 267 are used as the rotating lamp base. A gear 263 is rotatably supported. The right rotating lamp substrate 268 is fixed to the lower end of the holder shaft cylinder of the rotating part holder 267. Although not shown, the rotating part holder 267 is provided with a substrate supporting part that supports the upper end of the right rotating position detecting substrate 271 at a position corresponding to the substrate supporting part 262b of the rotating part base 262 on the lower surface. The right rotation position detection substrate 271 is nipped and fixed between the rotation unit base 262 and the rotation unit holder 267.

  In addition, the rotating lamp 264 of the right rotating lamp unit 260 is generally larger than the rotating lamp 244 of the left rotating lamp unit 240 as shown in the figure, and is a transparent disk-like shape disposed below the rotating lamp base gear 263. , A reflector 273 disposed below the rotating lamp lens 272 and fixed to the lower surface of the rotating lamp base gear 263, and a reflector cover 274 that covers the reflector 273. The reflector 273 of the rotating lamp 264 is plated with a metallic luster on its surface, and has a disk-like base portion 273a, an opening portion 273b drilled in the center of the base portion 273a, and a base portion 273a. And a plurality of mounting bosses 273d that extend upward from the upper surface of the base portion 273a and whose upper ends can come into contact with the rotating lamp base gear 263.

  The rotating lamp 264 has the lower surface of the rotating lamp lens 272 facing the opening 273b of the reflector 273, and the rotating lamp lens 272 is formed with an insertion hole 272a through which the mounting boss 273d of the reflector 273 can be inserted. The mounting boss 273d is inserted into the insertion hole 272a, and the mounting boss 273d is fixed to the rotating lamp base gear 263, so that the rotating lamp lens 272 is narrowed between the rotating lamp base gear 263 and the reflector 273. It is designed to be held and fixed. In addition, the reflector cover 274 of the rotating lamp 264 has a substantially regular octagonal shape in plan view, has a box shape with the upper part opened, and has an opening on a side surface of the reflector 273 facing the inner surface side of the reflecting portion 273c. 274a is formed.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 39, the central rotary lamp unit 280 has a circular opening 281a penetrating in the vertical direction, and the opening 281a is on the front side from the rotary lamp mounting port 221h in the horizontal center of the reflector base 221. A rotating lamp unit base 281 fixed to the rear side of the reflector base 221 so as to protrude to the rear, and an opening 281a of the rotating lamp unit base 281 are arranged coaxially and fixed to the upper surface of the rotating lamp unit base 281. A substantially annular rotating part base 282, a rotating lamp base gear 283 that is arranged coaxially with the rotating part base 282 and is slidably mounted on the upper surface of the rotating part base 282, and depends from the rotating lamp base gear 283. The rotating lamp 284 fixed to the lower surface thereof and the axis of the rotating lamp base gear 283 are substantially parallel to the rotating axis of the reflector base 221. A central rotating lamp motor 285 that is disposed on the axis behind the lamp mounting port 221h and that is fixed to the lower surface of the rotating lamp unit base 281 so that the rotating shaft 285a protrudes upward from the upper surface of the rotating lamp unit base 281; A transmission gear 286 that is fixed to the rotation shaft 285a of the central rotary lamp motor 285 and meshes with the rotary lamp base gear 283, and the entire rotary lamp base gear 283 and a part of the transmission gear 286 are covered from above and the rotary lamp base gear 283 is covered. A rotating part holder 287 that is pivotally supported in cooperation with the rotating part base 282 and fixed to the rotating lamp unit base 281, and is fixed to the lower surface of the rotating part holder 287 coaxially with the rotating lamp base gear 283, and rotates downward. And a central rotating lamp substrate 288 having high-luminance color LEDs (not shown) that can emit light toward the lamp 284.

  The central rotary lamp unit 280 is mounted with a rotary lamp unit cover 289 that covers the rotary unit holder 287 from above, a central rotational position detection sensor 290 that detects the rotational position of the rotary lamp 284, and a central rotational position detection sensor 290. And a central rotational position detection board 291.

  The rotating lamp unit base 281 of the central rotating lamp unit 280 hangs downward on the upper surface thereof at an attachment step 281b formed substantially along the inner periphery of the opening 281a and at a position rearward of the opening 281a. An attachment portion 281c attached to the rear side of the reflector base 211 and a motor fixing portion 281d arranged on the rear side of the opening 281a for fixing the central rotary lamp motor 285 are provided. The attachment step portion 281b is rotated from above. The part base 282 is fitted. In addition, the rotating portion base 282 has a center rotational position detected at a predetermined position on the upper surface that is coaxial with the opening 281a of the rotating lamp unit base 281 and is smaller in diameter than the outer periphery of the rotating lamp base gear 283. A substrate support portion 282b for supporting the lower end of the substrate 291; and a wire locking portion 282c that is disposed behind the substrate support portion 282b and that locks wires connected to the central rotary lamp substrate 288 and the central rotational position detection substrate 291; It has.

  The rotating lamp base gear 283 is an annular spur gear having an outer diameter larger than that of the shaft support port 282a of the rotating unit base 282, and extends downward from the lower surface to the shaft support port 282a of the rotating unit base 282. A cylindrical gear shaft (not shown) that can be inserted into the shaft, a shaft support hole 283a having a smaller diameter than the gear shaft and penetrating in the vertical direction, and a rotational position detection projecting radially outward from the outer periphery of the lower surface And a piece 283b. The outer diameter of the shaft tube of the rotating lamp base gear 283 is slightly smaller than the inner diameter of the shaft support port 282a of the rotating part base 282, and is inserted into the shaft support port 282a. 283 can rotate substantially coaxially with the shaft support port 282a. In the central rotating lamp unit 280, the rotational position detection piece 283b of the rotating lamp base gear 283 is detected by the central rotational position detection sensor 290, so that the rotational position of the rotating lamp 284 can be detected. Yes.

  Further, although not shown in the drawings, the rotating part holder 287 has a cylindrical shape that protrudes downward to a position that is coaxial with the shaft supporting port 282a of the rotating part base 282 and can be inserted into the shaft supporting hole 283a of the rotating lamp base gear 283. The holder shaft cylinder is formed. The outer diameter of the holder shaft cylinder is slightly smaller than the shaft support hole 283a of the rotating lamp base gear 283. By inserting the holder shaft cylinder into the shaft support hole 283a of the rotating lamp base gear 283, the rotating lamp The base gear 283 can be rotated substantially coaxially with the holder shaft cylinder. That is, in the central rotating lamp unit 280 of this example, the rotating lamp base 282a of the rotating part base 282, the gear shaft cylinder and the shaft supporting hole 283a of the rotating lamp base gear 283, and the holder shaft cylinder of the rotating part holder 287 are used. A gear 283 is rotatably supported. The central rotating lamp substrate 288 is fixed to the lower end of the holder shaft cylinder of the rotating part holder 287. Although not shown in the drawings, the rotation unit holder 287 is provided with a substrate support unit that supports the upper end of the center rotation position detection substrate 291 at a position corresponding to the substrate support unit 282b of the rotation unit base 282 on the lower surface. The central rotation position detection substrate 291 is nipped and fixed between the rotation unit base 282 and the rotation unit holder 287.

  Further, as shown in the figure, the rotating lamp 294 of the central rotating body unit 280 has an intermediate size between the rotating lamp 244 of the left rotating lamp unit 240 and the rotating lamp 264 of the right rotating lamp unit 260. A transparent disk-shaped rotating lamp lens 292 disposed below the rotating lamp base gear 283, a reflector 293 disposed below the rotating lamp lens 292 and fixed to the lower surface of the rotating lamp base gear 283, and the reflector 293 And a reflector cover 294 for covering. The reflector 293 of the rotating lamp 284 is plated with a metallic luster on its surface, and has a disk-like base portion 293a, an opening portion 293b drilled in the center of the base portion 293a, and a base portion 293a. And a plurality of mounting bosses 293 d that extend upward from the upper surface of the base portion 293 a and whose upper ends can contact the rotating lamp base gear 283.

  The rotating lamp 284 has the lower surface of the rotating lamp lens 292 facing the opening 293b of the reflector 293, and the rotating lamp lens 292 has an insertion hole 292a through which the mounting boss 293d of the reflector 293 can be inserted. The mounting boss 293d is inserted into the insertion hole 292a, and the mounting boss 293d is fixed to the rotating lamp base gear 283, whereby the rotating lamp lens 292 is narrowed between the rotating lamp base gear 283 and the reflector 293. It is designed to be held and fixed. In addition, the reflector cover 294 of the rotating lamp 284 has a substantially regular octagonal shape in plan view, has a box shape with the upper part opened, and has an opening on a side surface of the reflector 293 that faces the inner surface side of the reflecting portion 293c. 294a is formed.

  By the way, the central rotating lamp unit 280 of the present embodiment includes a plurality of front side surfaces of the rotating lamp unit cover 289 formed between the rotating unit holder 287 and the rotating lamp unit cover 289 as shown in the drawing. A cover lens 295 having a plurality of protrusions 295a inserted into the notch 289a from the rear side, and a cover decorative substrate 296 disposed on the rear side of the cover lens 295 and having a plurality of color LEDs 296a mounted thereon. In addition. The cover lens 295 and the cover decoration substrate 296 are formed on the rotating lamp unit cover 289 while the lower ends thereof are supported by the grooved lens support portion 287a and the substrate support portion 287b formed at the front end of the rotation portion holder 287, respectively. The upper end is supported by a groove-shaped lens support portion and a substrate support portion (not shown). In this example, the front end of the rotating lamp unit cover 289 of the central rotating lamp unit 280 can be illuminated and decorated by causing the LED of the cover decoration board 296 to emit light.

[1-2C. Dish unit]
Next, the dish unit 300 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 40 to 63. 40 is a front perspective view of the dish unit, FIG. 41 is a rear perspective view of the dish unit, and FIG. 42 is a plan view of the dish unit. 43 is a cross-sectional view taken along line AA in FIG. FIG. 44 is a rear view showing the dish unit with the dish back plate removed, and FIG. 45 is a perspective view showing the dish unit and the ball rental unit after removing the dish unit. FIG. 46 is an exploded perspective view showing the plate unit disassembled for each main component from the front, and FIG. 47 is an exploded perspective view showing FIG. 46 from the back. 48 is an exploded perspective view showing the dish unit main body of the dish unit in an exploded view from the front, and FIG. 49 is an exploded perspective view showing FIG. 48 from the rear. FIG. 50 is a rear view showing the first ball removal mechanism in the dish unit, and FIG. 51 is a perspective view showing the second ball removal mechanism in the dish unit later. 52 is an exploded perspective view showing the operation button unit in the dish unit in an exploded manner, FIG. 53 is a bottom view of the operation button unit in the dish unit with the operation button unit board removed, and FIG. FIG. 55 is a bottom perspective view showing the main button of the operation button unit in the unit from below, and FIG. 55 is an exploded perspective view showing the main button of the operation button unit in the dish unit in an exploded manner.

  56 is a cross-sectional view of the handle device attached to the door frame, FIG. 57 is a perspective view showing the relationship between the operation handle portion constituting the handle device and the joint unit, and FIG. 58 is an operation in the handle device. It is a disassembled perspective view of a handle part. Further, FIG. 59 is an operation diagram for explaining the operation of the operation handle portion and the joint unit, FIG. 60 is a perspective view showing the relationship between the handle device and the hitting ball launching device provided in the main body frame, and FIG. It is sectional drawing for demonstrating the state which connects a handle | steering-wheel apparatus and a hit ball | bowl launcher. Further, FIG. 62 (A) is an explanatory diagram showing the flow of game balls in the tray unit, and (B) is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the second ball outlet and the flow of game balls in the tray unit. It is. Moreover, FIG. 63 is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between the horizontally long spherical inflow port in a dish unit, and a storage tray.

  The tray unit 300 in the door frame 5 of the present embodiment can store game balls that are paid out from a prize ball unit 800, which will be described later, and a ball hitting device 650, which will be described later, via the ball feeding unit 170. Can be supplied to. As shown in FIGS. 46 and 47, the dish unit 300 covers a front surface of the dish body 310 and a dish body 310 having a storage tray 311 that is open at the top and rear and can store a predetermined amount of game balls. The dish unit main body 320, the plate-like dish back plate 340 that covers the rear surfaces of the dish unit main body 320 and the dish body 310, and the first ball removal mechanism that can discharge all the game balls stored in the storage dish 311 of the dish body 310 350, a second ball removing mechanism 360 capable of discharging a part of the game balls stored in the storage tray of the plate 310, and a ball lending machine (not shown) installed adjacent to the pachinko machine 1 A ball rental unit 301 that operates, a control button unit 370 that is fixed to the upper surface of the plate 310 and that can be operated by the player in accordance with a game state (game situation), and a plate unit main body 320 below the plate 310 dish A lower speaker unit 390 having a lower speaker 391 larger than the side speaker 121 of the side speaker lighting unit 120 in the door frame base unit 100 disposed between the plate 340 and the lower right corner of the dish unit main body 320 when viewed from the front. A handle base 303 to be arranged and a handle device 400 supported by the handle base 303 for performing a game ball driving operation are mainly provided. Reference numeral 302 denotes a wiring cover that covers the electrical wiring connected to the dish illumination board 336 in the later-described dish unit main body 320. Further, as shown in the drawing, a lower left decorative board 190 for illuminating and decorating the left end of the dish unit main body 320 is disposed on the left side of the dish back plate 340 when viewed from the front.

  As shown in the figure, the lending unit 301 in the dish unit 300 is fixed to the upper side of the dish back plate 340 at the approximate center in the left-right direction, and is disposed next to the lending button 301a and the lending button 301a. A return button 301b, and a remaining lending indicator (not shown) that is arranged between the lending button 301a and the returning button 301b and displays the remaining number of cash and prepaid cards on the lending machine. When the ball rental unit 301 is pushed into the ball lending machine provided adjacent to the pachinko machine 1 with cash or a prepaid card and the ball lending button 301a is pressed, a predetermined number of game balls are transferred to the dish unit 300. Can be rented (paid out) into the storage tray 311 and when the return button 301b is pushed, the balance of the loaned portion is drawn and the cash balance or prepaid card that has been inserted is returned. Yes.

  Further, the main button 371 and the two sub buttons 372 of the operation button unit 370 in the dish unit 300 are used when the player participates in the game content (game effect) performed on the liquid crystal display device 1400 provided on the game board 4 or the like. To operate.

[1-2C-1. Dish body]
First, as shown in the drawing, the plate body 310 in the plate unit 300 occupies approximately 2/3 of the whole from the left end in a plan view, and has a storage tray 311 having a predetermined depth opened upward and rearward, and a storage plate 311 A second ball outlet 312 which is arranged at a predetermined position on the bottom and penetrates in the vertical direction, and is arranged on the downstream side of the third inclined surface 311c from the right end of the storage tray 312 to be connected to the storage tray 311 and can flow game balls. The first ball extraction path 313 (see FIGS. 44 and 47) that can guide the game ball to a position just below the second ball extraction port 312 and the upper side of the storage dish 311 are opened in a substantially rhombus shape and operated. An operation button unit mounting recess 314 in which the button unit 370 can be mounted, and a first ball extraction button 351 of the first ball extraction mechanism 350 that opens in a substantially circular shape behind the operation button unit installation recess 314 is mounted. Ball removal A button mounting port 315, a first ball vent mechanism supporting portion 316 for supporting the first ball vent mechanism 350 is disposed substantially directly below the first ball vent button mounting port 315 is mainly provided with.

  The storage plate 311 in the plate body 310 is arranged on the front surface of the ball inlet 341 of the plate back plate 340 and is lower in the right side and the front side in a plan view, and the right end of the first inclined surface 311a. A second inclined surface 311b that is continuous with the rear portion of the second portion and decreases toward the right side and the rear side, and a third inclined surface that is continuous with the right end portion of the second inclined surface 311b and decreases toward the ball supply port 342 of the back plate 340. An inclined surface 311c, a fourth inclined surface 311d that is continuous with a front portion of the right end portion of the first inclined surface 311a and a front end portion of the second inclined surface 311b, and decreases toward the right and second inclined surfaces 311b; A fifth inclined surface 311e that is continuous with the right end portion of the four inclined surfaces 311d and decreases toward the fourth inclined surface 311d (see FIGS. 42 and 43).

  In addition, the storage tray 311 is disposed between the partition wall 311f where the rising game ball cannot be crossed from the rear end of the fifth inclined surface 311e, and between the partition wall 311f and the third inclined surface 311c. And a sixth inclined surface 311g that decreases toward the third inclined surface 311c. The second ball outlet 312 is arranged between the first inclined surface 311a and the second inclined surface 311b. The second ball removal port 312 is normally closed by the second ball removal shutter 364 of the second ball removal mechanism 360.

  In the storage tray 311 of this embodiment, the first inclined surface 311a has a quadrangular shape (trapezoidal shape) that occupies approximately half the size of the storage tray 311 in plan view as shown in the figure. The second inclined surface 311b has a variable pentagon shape in which the length in the left-right direction is about 1/4 of the length of the storage plate 311 and the depth in the front-rear direction becomes narrower toward the third inclined surface 311c. The third inclined surface 311c has a horizontally long section shape whose depth in the front-rear direction is slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball. The fourth inclined surface 311d has a rectangular shape (trapezoidal shape) whose length in the left-right direction is substantially the same as that of the second inclined surface 311b and decreases in length toward the second inclined surface 311b. Further, the fifth inclined surface 311e has a rear end portion extending from the left end portion in the right direction by a predetermined distance substantially parallel to the third inclined surface 311c and then obliquely extending toward the rear third inclined surface 311c. While extending along the third inclined surface 311c across the partition wall 311f, the front end portion (right end portion) extends toward the right toward the right end portion of the rear end portion so as to extend rearward, and as a whole. The partition wall 311f is formed along the rear end of the fifth inclined surface 311e.

  Further, as shown in the figure, the storage plate 311 includes a left end portion and a front end portion of the first inclined surface 311a, a front end portion of the fourth inclined surface 311d, and a front end portion (right end portion of the fifth inclined surface). The outer peripheral wall 311h rising upward is provided, and the outer peripheral wall 311h has a shape in which the storage tray 311 is recessed downward from the upper surface of the dish body 310 by a predetermined amount. In addition, the outer peripheral wall 311h of the storage tray 311 is formed in a loose arc shape that goes forward as it goes rightward at the front end portions of the first inclined surface 311a, the fourth inclined surface 311d, and the fifth inclined surface 311e. When the game ball that has flowed into the first inclined surface 311a from the ball inlet 341 comes into contact with the position facing the ball inlet 341 in the outer peripheral wall 311h, it is reflected in the direction of the fifth inclined surface 311e and It distribute | circulates on the 5 inclined surface 311d. The fifth inclined surface 311e is a gentle slope that allows the game ball flowing into the storage tray 311 from the ball inlet 341 to climb up to the right end of the fifth inclined surface 311e, Is changed to flow downward (to the left) in the direction of the fourth inclined surface 311d. In other words, the storage tray 311 of this example causes the game ball that has flowed in from the ball inlet 341 to once detour to the fifth inclined surface 311e and then flow into the third inclined surface 311c that serves as a supply path to the ball supply port 342. It is like that.

  In addition, the sixth inclined surface 311g in the storage tray 311 has a steeper inclination angle than the other inclined surfaces 311a to 311e, and a plurality of game balls are placed on the third inclined surface 311c on the downstream side. It is possible to facilitate alignment in a left-right direction toward the sphere supply port 342. Note that a stainless steel rail body 304 is attached to the third inclined surface 311c so as to improve the wear resistance of the circulating game balls and to prevent static electricity charged on the game balls. It can be removed.

  Further, as shown in FIGS. 44 and 47, the third inclined surface 311c of the storage tray 311 is formed in a groove shape in which the right end portion is slanted to the lower right and then is dropped downward and the rear side is opened. In addition, it is formed so as to be continuous with the first ball extraction path 313, and a flow path that is folded back with respect to the left-right direction by being continuous with the first ball extraction path 313 is formed. The boundary between the third inclined surface 311c and the first ball removal path 313 is configured such that the flow path is closed by the first ball removal slide 356 of the first ball removal mechanism 350. As desired for the slide 356, the ball supply port 342 of the dish back plate 340 is opened. As a result, the game ball that has flowed down the third inclined surface 311c is blocked from flowing by the first ball removal slide 356, so that it flows to the ball supply port 342 side.

  Note that the first sphere removal mechanism support 316 in the dish 310 has a first sphere beside the boundary portion between the third inclined surface 311c and the first sphere removal path 313 (right side in front view, left side in FIG. 44). A slide groove 316a in which the extraction slide 356 is inserted and arranged to be slidable in the left-right direction, and a first sphere described later on the opposite side of the boundary between the third inclined surface 311c and the first sphere extraction path 313 across the slide groove 316a. A flange portion 316b for locking the lower end portion of the extraction spring 357 is formed.

[1-2C-2. Plate unit body]
Next, as shown in FIGS. 48 and 49, the dish unit main body 320 in the dish unit 300 constitutes the front surface of the dish unit 300, covers the front surface of the dish body 310 and the lower speaker unit 390, and is opened upward and rearward. A box-shaped main body 321 is provided. The main body 321 is shaped such that about 3/4 of the left side bulges forward in front view, and the lower speaker unit 390 is accommodated inside (rear side) of the bulged portion. It has become. Further, the main body 321 includes a speaker opening 321a formed so as to penetrate to a position corresponding to the lower speaker 391 of the lower speaker unit 390 on the right side of the center of the front surface of the bulged portion, and a speaker opening 321a. A dummy opening 321b formed on the left side and a second ball removal button opening 321c formed on the left side of the dummy opening 321b are formed so as to penetrate therethrough. Further, the main body 321 has an elliptical handle base attachment port 321d for attaching the handle base 303 to the lower right corner, and a lock opening 321e disposed above the handle base attachment port 321d and facing a cylinder lock 1010 described later. A section-shaped duct opening 321f that opens to the right side of the portion that bulges to the front side on the left side of the handle base mounting opening d, and a section-shaped ball discharge opening 321g that opens to a substantially central lower portion in the left-right direction I have.

  The dish unit main body 320 of the dish unit 300 has a front back plate 322 that covers the speaker opening 321a and the dummy opening 321b of the main body portion 321 from the front side, and a speaker opening 322a of the front back plate 322 through the speaker opening 322a. A plate-shaped right cover 323 made of punched metal, which is disposed on the front surface corresponding to the speaker opening 321a, and four corners cut off, and is disposed in the approximate center of the front surface of the right cover 323 and is smaller than the right cover 323 and has a metallic luster on the surface Plate-shaped right decoration base 324 that has been subjected to plating, a right decoration 325 that is disposed in the approximate center of the front surface of the right decoration base 324 and is smaller than the right decoration base 324, and a main body of the front back plate 322 A plate-like plate made of punching metal and disposed at the front surface corresponding to the dummy opening 321b of the portion 321. A left cover 326, a plate-like left decoration base 327 disposed substantially at the center of the front surface of the left cover 326, which is smaller than the left cover 326 and plated with a metallic luster on the surface, and a front surface of the left decoration base 327 A frame shape that is arranged substantially at the center and decorates the periphery of the left decoration 328 that is smaller and plate-like than the left decoration base 327, the speaker opening 321a, the dummy opening 321b, and the second ball release button opening 321c of the main body 321. The main body 329 is mainly provided. A plurality of through holes 322a are formed in the front back plate 322 of the dish unit main body 320 so as to penetrate the speaker openings 321a of the main body 321 as desired. The sound from the lower speaker 391 can be satisfactorily transmitted to the outside via (not shown).

  The plate unit main body 320 of the present example has a main body left decoration base 330 fixed to the left end of the main body portion 321 on the front side of the lower left decorative substrate 190, and a front surface of the main body left decoration base 330 and a metallic luster plating on the surface. And a main body left decoration 331 that has been processed. The main body left decoration base 330 has translucency, and can be decorated with light emission by the LEDs 190 a of the lower left decorative substrate 190 disposed on the rear side of the main body left decoration base 330.

  Furthermore, the plate unit main body 320 is formed with a plate-like duct cover made of punching metal that covers the duct opening 321f of the main body 321 and a duct notch 333a such that the duct cover faces from the surface. And a main body right decoration 333 that covers the entire right side surface of the portion 321 that bulges to the front side and that has been subjected to a metallic luster plating process on the surface.

  The dish unit main body 320 has a plurality of horizontally long slits 334a arranged along the upper edge of the main body portion 321 and penetrating in the vertical direction, and a main body decoration 334 whose surface is plated with metallic luster, An upper decoration lens 335 having a light guide portion 335a disposed in the main body 321 below the main body upper decoration 334 and inserted into the slit 334a of the main body upper decoration 334, and an upper decoration lens 335 is disposed below the upper decoration lens 335. And a dish decoration board 336 having a plurality of color LEDs 336a mounted thereon. By appropriately emitting light from the LED 336a of the dish illumination board 336, the main body upper decoration 334, that is, the upper edge of the dish unit main body 320 can be illuminated and decorated via the upper decoration lens 335.

[1-2C-3. Dish back plate]
Subsequently, as shown in FIGS. 46 and 47, the dish back plate 340 in the dish unit 300 is formed in a horizontally long plate shape, and is disposed in the upper left corner portion in a front view, and is in a horizontally long section shape in the front-rear direction. A ball inlet 341 that penetrates the ball, a ball supply port 342 that is arranged at a predetermined distance from the ball inlet 341 in a lower right direction and passes in a shape that allows a game ball to pass through, and a rear that communicates with the ball inlet 341. And a prismatic prize ball contact bar 343 extending to the main. As shown in FIG. 43 and the like, the ball inlet 341 of the dish back plate 340 opens toward the inside of the storage dish 311 of the dish body 310, and the length in the left-right direction is the first inclined surface 311a of the storage dish 311. Is approximately the same length. Further, the sphere supply port 342 is disposed at a position corresponding to the first sphere removal slide 356 of the first sphere removal mechanism 350 at the right end of the third inclined surface 331 c in the storage tray 311. The prize ball contact bar 343 is disposed at a position biased to the left end in front view with respect to the ball inlet 341 and the length in the left-right direction is about half of the length of the ball inlet 341. The rear end penetrates the prize ball passing port 111 of the door frame base main body 110 and communicates with an outlet 921 at the lower end (front end) of the front guide passage 920 in the full tank unit 900 described later. .

  In addition, the dish back plate 340 is disposed at a position where the front end of the prize ball contact bar 343 is a predetermined amount behind the ball inlet 341, and between the ball inlet 341 and the prize ball contact bar 343. The ball inlet 341 further includes a shelf 344 that extends over the entire length in the left-right direction and allows game balls to circulate. The game balls distributed through the prize ball contact bar 343 by the shelf portion 344 can be made to flow downstream from the second ball outlet 312 of the storage tray 311.

  Further, the back plate 340 has a spherical flow path opening 345 corresponding to a ball extraction path 393 of the lower speaker unit 390 to be described later and penetrating in a substantially L shape. A latch opening 346 disposed below the inlet 341 (the second ball outlet 312 in the dish 310) and penetrating in a section shape through which a rear end of a latch unit 366 of a second ball outlet mechanism 360 described later is inserted; In addition, the wire insertion port 347 that is disposed in the upper right corner portion when viewed from the front and penetrates in a substantially section shape, and the ball rental unit 301 that is disposed on the upper side of the back plate 340 between the ball inflow port 341 and the wire insertion port 346 are attached. A ball rental unit mounting portion 348 for the purpose.

[1-2C-4. First ball removal mechanism]
Next, the first ball removal mechanism 350 in the dish unit 300 includes a first ball removal button 351 and a first ball removal button 351, which are pressed by the player, as shown in FIGS. A first ball release button base 352 that is slidably supported in the vertical direction and is inserted from the lower side with respect to the first ball release button mounting opening 315 of the plate body 310, and a dish on the upper portion of the first ball release button base 352 The first ball removal button decoration body 353 fixed so that the first ball removal button 351 protrudes upward across the body 310, the first ball removal button decoration body 353, and the first ball removal button base 352 are supported. A rotating shaft 354 supported at the position of the first ball removing mechanism support portion 316 of the dish body 311 on the right side (left side in FIG. 50) in front view of the lower end of the first ball removing button 351, and a rotation shaft 354 times An inverted L-shaped first sphere extraction crank 355 whose one end is in contact with the lower end of the first sphere extraction button 351 and the other end extends downward, and the other end of the first sphere extraction crank 355. The lower end of the plate body 311 and supported by the first ball removal mechanism support 316 of the plate body 311 so as to be slidable substantially in the left-right direction. And a first ball removal spring 357 that urges the first ball removal crank 355 to rotate in a predetermined direction.

  The first ball removal slide 356 of the first ball removal mechanism 350 is inserted in the slide groove 316a of the first ball removal mechanism support 316 in the dish 310 so that it can slide in the left-right direction. In this state, the first sphere extraction crank 355 rotates and is slid in the left-right direction by the lower end on the other end side of the first sphere extraction crank 355. By sliding the first ball removal slide 356 in the left-right direction, the tip can move forward and backward with respect to the flow path at the boundary portion between the third inclined surface 311 c of the dish body 310 and the first ball removal path 313. When the advancing to the boundary part and closing the flow path, the game ball that has circulated through the third inclined surface 311c can be supplied to the ball supply port 342, and the flow path is retreated from the boundary part. When opened, the game balls that have circulated through the third inclined surface 311c can be supplied (discharged) to the first ball removal path 313 side.

  Further, the upper end portion of the first ball removal spring 357 is locked to the first ball removal crank 355 on the opposite side to the one end side contacting the lower end portion of the first ball removal button 351 with the rotation shaft 354 interposed therebetween. A collar portion 355a is formed. The first ball removal spring 357 has its upper end engaged with the flange 355a of the first ball removal crank 355 and its lower end engaged with the flange 316b of the first ball removal mechanism support 316 in the dish 310. By stopping, the first ball removal crank 355 is moved to the position where the first ball removal slide 356 closes the boundary portion between the third inclined surface 311c and the first ball removal passage 313, and the first ball removal button 351 is the most. It can be urged to rotate in the direction of the raised position.

  When the first ball removal button 351 is pressed by the player, the first ball removal mechanism 350 has a first ball removal crank 355 via a contact pin 355b that contacts the lower end of the first ball removal button 351. Is rotated in a direction in which one end thereof moves downward against the urging force of the first ball release spring 357, and the other end side is away from the boundary portion between the third inclined surface 311c and the first ball extraction path 313. Move to. Then, the first ball removal slide 356 moves in a direction away from the boundary portion between the third inclined surface 311c and the first ball removal passage 313 together with the lower end of the first ball removal crank 355, and the tip of the first ball removal slide 356 is moved. The third inclined surface 311c and the first ball removal path 313 communicate with each other by retreating from the flow path at the boundary portion, and all the game balls in the third inclined surface 311c, that is, the storage dish 311 are transferred to the first ball. It can be discharged to the outside through the extraction path 313.

  When the pressing of the first ball removal button 351 is released, the first ball removal crank 355 is rotated by the urging force of the first ball removal spring 357 so that the first ball removal button 351 is raised and the first ball is released. The leading end of the pull slide 356 advances into the flow path at the boundary between the third inclined surface 311c and the first ball discharge path 313, closes the flow path, and is on the third inclined surface 311c (in the storage tray 311). A game ball can be supplied to the hitting ball launching device 650 through the ball supply port 342.

[1-2C-5. Second ball removal mechanism]
Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 51 and the like, the second ball removal mechanism 360 in the dish unit 300 is a second ball that protrudes forward from the second ball removal button opening 321c of the main body portion 321 in the dish unit main body 320. A pull-out button 361, a second ball-extracting slide 362 fitted and fixed at the tip, and supported so as to be slidable in the front-rear direction by a lower speaker unit 390 described later, and the front and rear of the second ball-extracting slide 362 The second ball-extracting crank 363 that is pivotally supported by the lower speaker unit 390 so as to be able to rotate around an axis extending in the left-right direction, and the second ball-extracting crank 363 is rotated to rotate the plate 310 Rotation about an axis extending in the vertical direction between a closed position for closing the second ball outlet 312 and an open position for opening the second ball outlet 312 A second ball-extracting shutter 364, a second ball-extracting spring 365 that urges the second ball-extracting shutter 364 to a closed position where the second ball-extracting port 312 is closed, and a second ball-extracting spring 365 A latch unit 366 capable of holding the second ball removal shutter 364 in the open position against the biasing force, and an opening corresponding to the second ball removal port 312 while slidably supporting the lower surface of the second ball removal shutter 364. A second ball removal base 367 fixed to the lower side of the plate body 310 and a rear end of the second ball removal slide 362 slidably and supporting a latch unit 366, which will be described later. A second ball removal mechanism support 368 (see FIG. 44 and FIG. 47) that rotatably supports the second ball removal crank 363 in cooperation with the speaker box 392 of the lower speaker unit 390; To have.

  The second ball removal slide 360 of the second ball removal mechanism 360 has a transmission groove 362a that is opened upward at the rear end portion thereof and into which the lower end portion of the second ball removal crank 363 is inserted, and protrudes rearward from the rear end portion. An engagement protrusion 362b that can be engaged with the engagement claw 366a of the latch unit 366 is provided. The second ball removal crank 363 is a rod-like member extending substantially in the vertical direction, and a lower end portion thereof is inserted into the transmission groove 362a of the second ball removal slide 362 from above, and substantially in the middle in the vertical direction. The portion is pivotally supported by the speaker box 392 of the lower speaker unit 390 so as to be rotatable. Thus, when the second ball removal slide 362 slides in the front-rear direction, the lower end portion of the second ball removal crank 363 moves along with the slide of the transmission groove 362a, and the second ball removal crank 363 rotates. The upper end of the second ball removal crank 363 moves in the direction opposite to the lower end.

  Further, as shown in the figure, the second ball removal shutter 364 is disposed above the second ball removal slide 362, and the second ball removal port 312 of the dish body 310 and the opening 367a of the second ball removal base 367 are provided. A substantially semicircular (D-shaped) plate-like closing part 364a that can be closed, and a rod-like collar part that extends from the closing part 364a in one of the left and right directions (left direction in front view, right direction in FIG. 51). 364b, and is formed in a substantially P-shape as a whole. The second ball removal shutter 364 is pivotally supported by the plate body 310 and the second ball removal base 367 so that the tip of the flange portion 364b can rotate about an axis extending in the vertical direction, and the flange portion 364b. On the rear side, the upper end portion of the second ball removal crank 363 comes into contact with a substantially middle portion in the left-right direction. Further, the front end portion of the second ball extraction spring 365 is locked to the rear base end portion of the flange portion 364b of the second ball extraction shutter 364. Although not shown, the rear end portion of the second ball release spring 365 is locked by a locking boss that hangs downward from the lower surface of the dish 310, and the second ball release spring 365 is provided. Thus, the closing portion 364a of the second ball removal shutter 364 is biased to a closed position (position shown in FIG. 51) for closing the second ball removal port 312.

  The second ball removal base 360 of the second ball removal mechanism 360 allows the upper end portion of the second ball removal crank 363 to pass between the opening 367a and the position where the second ball removal shutter 364 is pivotally supported. A slit 367b extending in the front-rear direction is provided, and the upper end portion of the second ball removal crank 363 supported on the lower side of the second ball removal base 367 through the slit 367b is the upper surface of the second ball removal base 367. It can contact | abut with the collar part 364b of the 2nd ball | bowl extraction shutter 364 arrange | positioned in this. In addition, the 2nd ball removal base 367 is formed in the shape of a shallow dish, as shown in the figure, and can form an accommodation space for accommodating the second ball removal shutter 364 with the dish body 310. Yes. Further, the height of the accommodation space for accommodating the second ball removal shutter 364 is set to be smaller than the outer diameter of the game ball, and the second ball removal shutter 364 rotates to turn the second ball removal port 312. Even if is opened, the game ball is prevented from entering between the dish body 310 and the second ball removal base 367.

  In the second ball removal mechanism 360 of the present embodiment, when the player presses the second ball removal button 361 that protrudes forward from the front surface of the dish unit main body 320, the second ball removal slide 362 slides backward, The second ball removal crank 363 rotates so that the lower end portion of the second ball removal crank 363 is guided rearwardly by the transmission groove 362a of the two ball removal slide 362. Then, as the second ball removal crank 363 rotates, the upper end portion thereof moves forward in the direction opposite to the lower end portion, and the second ball removal shutter 364 that contacts the upper end portion of the second ball removal crank 363. However, it rotates so that the closing portion 364a moves forward around the tip of the flange portion 364b against the urging force of the second ball release spring 365. Thus, when the closing part 364a moves forward and the second ball outlet 312 of the dish body 310 and the opening 367a of the second ball outlet base 367 are opened, the second ball outlet 312 in the storage dish 311 is opened. Thus, the game balls stored on the upstream side are discharged to the lower outside of the dish unit 300 through the second ball outlet 312.

  The second ball removal mechanism 360 of this example is provided with a latch unit 366, and the second projection of the second ball removal slide 362 is pushed by the second ball removal button 361 so that the pair of engagement protrusions 362b in the latch unit 366 are a pair. Contact between the two engaging claws 366a, the pair of engaging claws 366a are closed and engaged so as to sandwich the engaging protrusion 362b, and the second ball removal spring 365 is resisted against the biasing force of the second ball removal spring 365. The state where the button 361 is pressed, that is, the second ball outlet 312 can be held in the opened (opened) position by the closing portion 364a of the second ball shutter 364. In this state, when the second ball release button 361 is pressed, the pair of engagement claws 366a of the latch unit 366 are opened, and the engagement with the engagement protrusions 362b is released, and the biasing force of the second ball release spring 365 is used. The closing part 364a of the second ball extraction shutter 364 can be returned to a position where the second ball extraction port 312 is closed.

[1-2C-6. Operation button unit]
Next, the operation button unit 370 in the dish unit 300 is mounted and fixed from above to the operation button mounting recess 314 of the dish body 310 in the dish unit 300, as shown in FIGS. A pair of octagonal main buttons 371 obtained by cutting off the four corners of a square in plan view, and a left base button 372L and a right sub button 372R having a home base shape in plan view and arranged symmetrically on the left and right sides of the main button 371. The sub button 372, the main button 371 and the sub button 372 are slidably held in the vertical direction, and the operation button unit base 373 inserted into the operation button mounting recess 314 of the plate body 310, and the operation button unit base 373 A plate-like operation button unit decoration member 374 for decorating the upper surface and an operation button unit Color LED375a which is fixed to the lower light emission decorated the operation button unit 370 Tobesu 373 is provided with an operation button unit substrate 375 in which a plurality mounted on an upper surface, a.

  The operation button unit 370 includes a main button sensor 376 that detects an operation of the main button 371, a left sub button sensor 377L that detects an operation of the left sub button 372L, and a right sub that detects an operation of the right sub button 372R. A button sensor 377R. The main button sensor 376, the left sub button sensor 377L, and the right sub button sensor 377L are photosensors each having a light emitting portion and a light receiving portion, and are fixed to predetermined positions on the operation button unit substrate 375, respectively. .

  As shown in the figure, the operation button unit base 373 in the operation button unit 370 has a substantially rhombus shape in a plan view, and a main button housing recess 373a that can house the main button 371 from above, and a main button housing portion 373a. A plurality of guide grooves 373b that are formed on the inner peripheral surface and extend in the vertical direction to guide the main button 371 in the vertical direction, and a substantially circular opening formed in the bottom surface of the main button housing recess 373a. 373c, a plurality of light guide openings 373d that guide the light from the LED 375a of the operation button unit board 375 that opens at a predetermined width along the outer periphery of the main button housing recess 373a to the upper surface side, and the sub A pair of sub button housing recesses 373e capable of housing the button 372 from above, and formed at the diagonal upper corner of the long axis A plate-like top plate portion 373g that forms the upper surface of the operation button unit base 373, and a plate-like shape that hangs downward from the lower surface along the outer periphery of the top plate portion 373g. Side wall part 373h.

  The operation button unit base 373 is formed in a box shape having a lower surface opened by a top plate portion 373g and a side wall portion 373h. A main button housing recess 373a and a plurality of ( Here, eight light guide openings 373d, two sub-button accommodating recesses 373e, and two screw insertion holes 373f are opened. In the operation button unit base 373, the main button receiving recess 373a is formed with a thickness where the guide groove 373b is not formed, and the strength and rigidity of the inner wall surface and the bottom surface are increased. In addition, each light guide opening 373d formed on the outer periphery of the main button housing recess 373a is formed in a cylindrical shape that is long in the vertical direction, and is also formed by the outer peripheral wall of the cylindrical light guide opening 373d. The main button accommodating recess 373a is reinforced (see FIG. 53).

  As shown in FIGS. 54 and 55, the main button 371 includes a main button lens 371a that forms the upper surface of the main button 371 and has translucency, and a cylinder that supports the main button lens 371a and is open at the top and bottom. Main button base 371b, a vibrating body 371c disposed below the main button base 371b, and a vibrating body holder that encloses the vibrating body 371c and is fixed to the lower side of the main button base 371b via mounting screws 371d. 371e. Although not shown, the upper end of the main button 371 contacts the lower side surface of the main button base 371a, and the lower end contacts the bottom surface of the main button housing recess 373a in the operation button unit base 373. A main button spring is provided to bias the 371 so as to rise.

  The main button lens 371a in the main button 371 is formed in a box shape having an octagonal shape in plan view and an open bottom surface, and has a smooth shape on the front side, whereas a plurality of small lenses are provided on the back side. A portion is formed so that the light from the LED 375a of the operation button unit substrate 375 can be diffused widely, and the entire surface of the main button 370 can be illuminated and decorated substantially uniformly.

  As shown in the figure, the main button base 371b has an octagonal outer shape similar to that of the main button lens 371, whereas the main button base 371b is a cone whose lower end is narrowed downward from a substantially middle portion in the vertical direction. The lower end portion extends downward from an opening 373c formed in the bottom surface of the main button housing recess 373a in the operation unit button base 373 and directly above the LED 375a group disposed in the center of the operation button unit substrate 375. Can be located in. The main button base 371b includes a main locking claw 371f extending downward from two opposite sides and a plurality of guide protrusions extending in the vertical direction inserted into the guide groove 373b of the operation button unit base 373. 371g. The main button claw 371f of the main button base 371b is locked to a locking portion (not shown) in the main button receiving recess 373a in the operation button unit base 373, so that the main button 371 is moved to the main button spring. It is possible to prevent the main button accommodating recess 373a from being pulled out by the urging force.

  Further, the main button base 371b is configured such that the vibrating body 371c can be attached to the inside of the one main locking claw 371f via the vibrating body holder 371e and the mounting screw 371d, and a portion to which the vibrating body 371c is attached. A detection piece 371h (see FIG. 54) detected by the main button sensor 376 is formed inside.

  When the main button 371 of this example pushes the main button 371 downward against the urging force of the main button spring, the detection piece 371 h of the main button base 371 b is interposed between the light emitting part and the light receiving part of the main button sensor 376. The main button sensor 376 detects the operation after entering. The main button 371 is configured such that when an operation is detected by the main button sensor 376, the vibrating body 371 c is activated. Thus, it can be recognized that the operation of the main button 371 is accepted, and the player can be surprised by the vibration of the main button 371. The operation button unit board 375 is provided with a light shielding plate 375b for preventing the main button sensor 376 from malfunctioning due to light from the mounted LED 375a.

  In addition, the sub button 372 of the operation button unit 370 has a sub button lens 372a having a substantially isosceles right triangle shape in plan view and a light transmitting property, and a sub button lens 372a supported on an upper surface having a home base shape in plan view. The sub button base 372b accommodated from above into the sub button accommodating recess 373e in the operation button unit base 373, and the sub button lens 372a is disposed below the sub button lens 372a between the sub button base 372b and the bottom surface of the sub button accommodating recess 373e. And a sub button spring 372c that urges the button base 372b to move upward. The sub-button base 372a of the sub-button 372 includes a sub-locking claw 372d that hangs down in the front-rear direction across the sub-button spring 372c, and a plate-shaped guide wall 372e that hangs down from the long side of the home base. And a detection piece 372f extending further downward from the lower end of the guide wall portion 372e.

  This sub button 372 has a sub locking claw 372d that is locked to a locking portion (not shown) in the sub button receiving recess 373e of the operation button unit base 373. Since the 372d is locked to the locking portion, the sub button 372 can be prevented from coming out of the sub button accommodating recess 373e by the urging force of the sub button spring 372c. Further, when the sub button 372 is pushed downward against the urging force of the sub button spring 372c, the detection piece 372f of the sub button base 372b enters between the light emitting portion and the light receiving portion of the sub button sensor 377. The operation of the sub button 372 is detected by the sub button sensor 377.

  Further, the operation button unit decoration member 374 of the operation button unit 370 is formed in a plate shape with a substantially rhombus shape in plan view, as shown in the figure, and the main button lens 371 a of the main button 371 and the two sub buttons 372. An opening 374a through which the sub button lens 372a can pass is formed, and a decorative member lens 374b having translucency is provided at a position corresponding to the light guide opening 373d of the operation button unit base 373. . In addition, a mounting hole 374c into which a mounting screw (not shown) can be inserted from above is formed in the upper corner of the diagonal of the long axis. The operation button unit 370 is fixedly attached to the dish body 310 by a predetermined mounting screw. In this example, a screw concealment 378 for concealing the two attachment holes 374 c is attached to the upper surface of the operation button unit decoration member 374.

  As described above, in the operation button unit 370 of the present embodiment, the operation button unit base 373 is formed in a triple cylindrical shape by the main button housing recess 373a, the light guide opening 373d, and the side wall 373h. Since the strength and rigidity are enhanced, the operation button unit 370 is not easily damaged even if the main button 371 or the like is hit and operated strongly. In addition, the operation button unit 370 is mounted and fixed from above to the operation button mounting recess 314 of the plate 310, and even if the operation button unit 370 is damaged or malfunctioned, The plate body 310 can be easily detached and replaced from above. Further, since the operation button unit 370 is supported (placed) on the speaker box 392 of the lower speaker unit 390 described below via the plate body 310, the shock resistance and load resistance from the main button 371 and the like. Therefore, not only the operation button unit 370 but also the entire dish unit 300 is hardly damaged.

[1-2C-7. Lower speaker unit]
Subsequently, as shown in FIGS. 46 and 47, the lower speaker unit 390 in the dish unit 300 includes a lower speaker 391 having a diameter larger than that of the side speaker 121 of the side speaker lighting unit 120 in the door frame base unit 100, and a lower portion. A box-like speaker box 392 that mainly holds the speaker 391 at a position to the rear of the speaker opening 321a of the main body 321 in the dish unit main body 320 at a position on the right side of the front face in a front view. The lower speaker unit 390 of the present embodiment is a bass-reflex type speaker in which the internal space of the speaker box 392 is opened to the outside through the open port 392a, and can produce a heavy bass with respect to the speaker diameter of the lower speaker 391. It can be done.

  The opening 392a of the speaker box 392 is formed at a desired position in the duct opening 321f of the main body 321 in the dish unit main body 320. It enters and exits through the duct opening 321f. Further, the flow of air entering and exiting through the duct opening 321f by driving (vibration) of the lower speaker 391 is formed so as to pass through the grip members 412 and 413 of the operation handle portion 410 in the handle device 400. The player can operate the unit 410 by applying the air flow (wind) from the lower speaker 391 to the player's hand, giving the player an unprecedented feel and having fun. Yes. Note that by sending an acoustic signal having a frequency lower than the human audible band to the lower speaker 391, only the wind can be applied to the player from the duct opening 321f, and combined with the vibrating body 371c of the main button 371. As a result, it has become possible to entertain a tactile sensation that is not available in previous gaming machines.

  The speaker box 392 is disposed on the rear surface thereof downstream of the first ball extraction path 313 and the second ball extraction opening 312 of the dish 310, and flows through the first ball extraction path 313 and the second ball extraction opening 312. A ball removal path 393 is provided for guiding the game ball that has been played to the lower portion of the speaker box 392 in the substantially horizontal direction. The ball extraction path 393 is formed in a substantially L shape with the rear open, and the door frame base main body in the door frame base unit 100 through the ball extraction path opening 345 of the back plate 340 in the dish unit 300. The rear side is closed by a ball passage cover 191 that closes the ball passage passage opening 110. In addition, the game balls that have circulated through the ball removal path 393 are discharged from the ball discharge port 321 g of the main body 321 in the plate unit main body 320 to the lower side of the plate unit 300.

  Further, the speaker box 392 has a second ball removal slide holding hole 394 for holding the front end of the second ball removal slide 362 of the second ball removal mechanism 360 slidably in the front-rear direction at the upper left portion in front view, A second ball removal mechanism support portion 395 that is disposed on the rear side of the two-ball removal slide holding hole 394 and supports the second ball removal mechanism support 368 of the second ball removal mechanism 360. The second ball removal mechanism 360 can be supported at a predetermined position by the second ball removal slide holding hole 394 and the second ball removal mechanism support 395.

[1-2C-8. Handle device]
Next, as shown in FIGS. 56 to 58, the handle device 400 in the dish unit 300 includes an operation handle portion 410 provided on the lower front surface of the door frame 5 and the door frame 5 corresponding to the operation handle portion 410. And a joint unit 180 that is linked to a rotation shaft 415 that rotates in response to a rotation operation of the operation handle portion 410 and changes the rotation motion of the rotation shaft 415 to a slide motion.

  First, the operation handle portion 410 is a handle support tube portion of a cylindrical handle base 303 attached so as to protrude forward from the handle base attachment port 321d of the main body portion 321 of the plate unit main body 320 of the plate unit 300 in the door frame 5. Inserted and fixed to 303a. Since the handle support cylinder portion 303a is formed so as to be inclined outward (right side) when viewed from above the pachinko machine 1, the operation handle portion 410 inserted and fixed to the handle support cylinder portion 303a. Is also inclined outward in plan view (in other words, the front end of the pachinko machine 1 is inclined with respect to a line orthogonal to the front vertical plane of the pachinko machine 1 so as to face the outside of the pachinko machine 1). It is attached and fixed to 5. Thus, by tilting the operation handle portion 410 outward in a plan view, there is an advantage that the player can easily grasp the operation handle portion 410 and can easily perform the rotation operation without feeling uncomfortable in the rotation operation. In the present embodiment, as will be described later, even if the operation handle portion 410 is installed at an inclination, the rotational motion of the rotation shaft 415 of the operation handle portion 410 is smoothly transmitted, and the resilience of the ball hitting device 650 is increased. A structure that can be adjusted is adopted. After the operation handle portion 410 is inserted into the handle support tube portion 303a, the handle support tube portion 303a and the operation handle portion 410 (more precisely, the rear grip member 413) are connected with a screw or the like so that the operation handle portion 410 is It cannot be pulled out from the handle support cylinder 303a.

  As shown in FIG. 58, the operation handle portion 410 is pivotally supported so as to be rotatable between the front gripping member 412, the rear gripping member 413, and the front gripping member 412 and the rear gripping member 413. The operation member 414 includes a linear columnar rotation shaft 415 whose one end is fixed to the rotation operation member 414, and a cam 416 fixed to the other end of the rotation shaft 415. The rear grip member 413 is integrally formed with a small-diameter portion fitted to the handle support cylinder portion 303a and a large-diameter portion in front of the small-diameter portion, and a shaft through-hole 418 through which the rotation shaft 415 passes is formed at the center. Is formed. When the rotating shaft 415 is inserted into the shaft through hole 418, the bearing bush 417 is fitted into the rear end of the shaft through hole 418, and the rotating shaft 415 is inserted into the bearing bush 417. On the other hand, the rotating shaft 415 that is passed through the shaft through hole 418 via the bearing bush 417 passes through the bearing hole 424 of the fixed bearing member 423 that is fixed to the front surface side of the rear grip member 413, and the rotation operation member 414. It is fitted in a shaft fitting hole 426 formed at the center.

  Further, on the front side of the rear grip member 413, a projection and a mounting hole (both not shown) for fixing the touch sensor 420 and the firing stop switch 422 are provided, and the single button 421 is supported in a swingable manner. A swing pin (not shown) is formed, and a touch sensor 420, a firing stop switch 422, and a single button 421 are attached to the protrusions, mounting holes, and swing pins. Then, the wiring through cylinder having the wiring through hole 419 formed in the side of the shaft through hole 418 of the rear grip member 413 by collecting the wiring from the touch sensor 420 and the firing stop switch 422 in a state where they are attached. It is led from the part 428 and the wiring opening 184c (see FIG. 31) to the back surface of the door frame 5, and is connected to the handle relay terminal plate 194 (see FIGS. 24 and 25). The wiring from the handle relay terminal plate 194 is attached along the lower reinforcing plate 36 described above, and is electrically connected to a payout control board 1186 described later. Further, an urging spring 425 is provided between the fixed bearing member 423 and the rotation operation member 414 so as to be provided around the rotation shaft 415. It is designed to return to the position. Further, a switch contact convex portion 427 protrudes outside the shaft fitting hole 426 of the rotation operation member 414. When the rotation operation member 414 is in the original position by the biasing force of the biasing spring 425, the switch contact is made. When the convex portion 427 contacts the actuator of the firing stop switch 422 to turn off the firing stop switch 422 and the rotation operation member 414 is rotated by the player, the switch contact convex portion 427 becomes the actuator of the firing stop switch 422. Turn away and turn on. Further, since the single button 421 can be swung while the firing stop switch 422 is ON, the actuator of the firing stop switch 422 can be turned off by pressing the single button 421. ing.

  Note that the outer peripheral surface of the rotation operation member 414 is subjected to conductive plating, and the touch sensor 420 detects contact when the player contacts the rotation operation member 414. Then, when the player rotates the rotation operation member 414, the firing stop switch 422 is turned on and the touch sensor 420 detects contact, a later-described firing motor 695 of the ball striking device 650 (see FIG. 91). ) Is driven to rotate.

  A cam 416 fixed to the tip of the rotating shaft 415 is formed in a slanted ball shape, and a cam contact of a slide body 182 (see FIGS. 31 and 59) of the joint unit 180 described later according to the rotation of the rotating shaft 415. The part 182d is pressed and slid in one direction. In this embodiment, the operation handle portion 410 is attached in an inclined manner in plan view as described above by the cooperative structure of the cam 416 fixed to the tip of the rotating shaft 415 and the slide body 182 of the joint unit 180. It is possible.

  As described above, the operation handle portion 410 is inserted and supported from the front side of the door frame 5 into the handle support cylinder portion 303a of the handle base 303, and the joint unit 180 is attached to the joint unit mounting recess 110c from the back side of the door frame 5. Thus, as shown in FIG. 56, the cam 416 fixed to the tip of the rotating shaft 415 is accommodated in the cam engaging recess 182 c of the slide body 182. In this case, the operation handle portion 410 is attached to be inclined in a plan view, so that the cam 416 is also inclined with respect to the vertical surface of the door frame 5, but the cam engaging recess 182c is predetermined in the front-rear direction. Since the space is wide, the entire inclined cam 416 can be accommodated in the space of the cam engaging recess 182c. Further, as shown in FIG. 59 (A), the retracted state is such that the rotation center of the cam 416 is located on the side of the cam contact portion 182d, and the tip of the slanted cam 416 is below the cam engagement recess 182c. It is located in the space.

  When the player rotates the rotation operation member 414 of the operation handle portion 410 in the state described above, the rotation shaft 415 rotates and the cam 416 also rotates accordingly, so as shown in FIG. The slide body 182 moves in one direction (in the case of FIG. 59, in the right direction in the figure) by the contact between the cam contact portion 182d of the cam engagement recess 182c and the one outer surface of the cam 416 (outer front surface). Move to slide. That is, the rotational motion of the rotating shaft 415 is converted into the sliding motion of the slide body 182. For this reason, the distance S1 between the rotation center of the cam 416 in the initial state (before rotation) shown in FIG. The distance S2 is greater than the distance S1 due to the rotation. That is, the slide protrusion 183 of the slide body 182 slides by a distance of “S2-S1”. Then, the slide movement of the slide protrusion 183 of the joint unit 180 is transmitted to the slide member 710 of the ball hitting device 650 as shown in FIGS. The tension of the hitting ball desired by the player can be obtained by adjusting the tension shown in FIG. The relationship between the handle device 400 and the ball hitting device 650 will be described in detail after the ball hitting device 650 is described.

  The wiring led out from the inside of the operation handle 410 to the back surface of the door frame 5 through the wiring through hole 419, the wiring through tube portion 428, and the wiring opening 184c And then connected to the operation handle terminal 1194 (see FIG. 132) of the payout control board 1186 that is collectively attached to the board unit 1100 attached to the back side of the main body frame 3. .

[1-2C-9. Effect of dish unit]
Next, the flow of game balls in the storage tray 311 of the tray unit 300 of the present embodiment will be described with reference mainly to FIG. 62 and FIG. In this example, a game ball paid out from a prize ball unit 800, which will be described later, flows into the storage tray 311 from the ball inlet 341 via the full tank unit 900 and the prize ball communication rod 343 of the back plate 340. The game ball that has flowed from the ball inlet 341 first flows into the first inclined surface 311a. The first inclined surface 311a is formed so that the front side and the right side when viewed from the front are lowered. The outer peripheral wall 311h that surrounds the front outer periphery of the storage plate 311 comes into contact with a position that substantially faces the spherical inlet 341. This position of the outer peripheral wall 311h is inclined in a curved line with respect to the surface of the dish back plate 340 on which the ball inlet 341 is formed, and the game ball in contact with the outer peripheral wall 311h moves rightward in front view. It is designed to reflect.

  Then, the game ball that has flowed into the storage tray 311 from the ball inlet 341 and reflected rightward on the outer peripheral wall 311h enters the fifth inclined surface 311e beyond the fourth inclined surface 311d. The fifth inclined surface 311e is lower on the left side when viewed from the front, that is, on the fourth inclined surface 311d side, and the inclination angle is set to a gentle inclination that allows a game ball entering from the first inclined surface 311a to climb up. Thus, the game ball that has entered the first inclined surface 311a beyond the fourth inclined surface 311d circulates to the upper portion (right end portion in plan view) of the fifth inclined surface 311e while ascending the fifth inclined surface 311e. It will be. The fifth inclined surface 311e is partitioned from the front side to the rear side by the outer peripheral wall 311h and the partition wall 311f around the right end, and the game ball that has entered the fifth inclined surface 311e The outer peripheral wall 311h and the partition wall 311f are surrounded by the fifth inclined surface 311e so as to return to the fourth inclined surface 311d disposed on the left side of the fifth inclined surface 311e.

  The game balls that have entered the fourth inclined surface 311d from the fifth inclined surface 311e flow to the second inclined surface 311b on the rear side of the fourth inclined surface 311d according to the inclination of the fourth inclined surface 311d, and further It enters from the inclined surface 311b to the right third inclined surface 311c, and is supplied to the ball launcher 650 from the ball supply port 342 of the dish back plate 340 disposed at the downstream end of the third inclined surface 311c. It has become. That is, the game ball that has flowed into the storage tray 311 from the ball supply port 341 does not go directly from the first inclined surface 311a to the third inclined surface 311c via the second inclined surface 311b, but from the first inclined surface 311a. Once entering the fifth inclined surface 311e via the fourth inclined surface 311d, the third inclined surface 311c is reached via the fourth inclined surface 311e and the second inclined surface 311b. The game ball flowing in from 341 can be detoured.

  As a result, a plurality of game balls can be stored effectively using the entire storage tray 311, and the game balls are stored in a state of low storage as in conventional pachinko machines, and the game balls block the ball inlet 341. Then, the full tank switch 916 of the full tank unit 900 is actuated to stop paying out the game ball, or the game ball launching operation at the ball launcher 650 is stopped and the game is interrupted. Can be prevented well.

  By the way, a large number of game balls are stored in the storage tray 311 of the tray unit 300 of this example, so that the ball inlet 341 is closed by the stored game balls, and a prize ball contact bar 343 of the tray back plate 340 is awarded. When the game ball stays in the full tank unit 900 disposed between the ball unit 800 and the full tank switch 916 of the full tank unit 900, the payout of the game ball from the prize ball unit 800 is stopped. The ball launching device 650 stops the game ball launching operation. In particular, when the ball launching device 650 is stopped, the game cannot be interrupted. When the amount of game balls stored in the tray 311 reaches an appropriate amount, the first ball extraction button 351 and the second ball extraction button 361 are operated to dispose the game balls from the storage tray 311 below the tray unit 300. Containers (for example, dollar box) needs to be discharged to. In this example, when the full tank switch 916 is operated, the player is informed that the inside of the storage tray 311 is full, and then the firing operation of the ball launching device 650 is stopped.

  In order to discharge the game ball from the storage tray 311, the first ball removal slide 356 of the first ball removal mechanism 350 is operated by operating (pushing) the first ball removal button 351 disposed on the upper surface of the dish unit 300. Slides to release the closure between the downstream end of the third inclined surface 311c and the first ball removal path 313, and causes the game ball on the third inclined surface 311c to flow down to the first ball removal path 313. It can discharge | emit to the downward direction of the dish unit 300 from the ball | bowl discharge port 321g via the extraction path | route 393. FIG. By operating the first ball removal button 351, the game balls can be extracted from the downstream end of the third inclined surface 311c which is the lowest position in the storage tray 311. Therefore, all the game balls are discharged from the storage tray 311. Be able to. However, in the ball removal by operating the first ball removal button 351, the game balls are aligned in a row on the third inclined surface 311c, so that there is a problem that it takes time to remove the ball.

  Therefore, when the second ball removal button 361 disposed on the left side of the front surface of the dish unit 300 is operated (pressed), the second ball removal shutter 364 of the second ball removal mechanism 360 moves to move the second ball removal shutter 364 in the storage tray 311. The ball outlet 312 is opened, and the game ball upstream of the second ball outlet 312 in the storage tray 311 passes through the second ball outlet 312 and passes through the ball outlet path 393 from the ball outlet 321g to the dish unit. It can be discharged below 300 (see FIG. 62B). As shown in the drawing, the second ball outlet 312 has an opening that is several times larger than the outer diameter of the game ball, so that many game balls can be quickly discharged at once. Accordingly, the presence of the two buttons, the first ball removal button 351 and the second ball removal button 361, allows the player to select the length of time to remove the ball. Further, when a big hit is made during the game, a large amount of balls are paid out to the dish unit 300, and when the game is continued by leaving it, the full tank switch 916 provided on the upstream side of the dish unit 300 (see FIG. 111) may be activated and the payout operation may be stopped or the ballistic operation may be stopped and the hitting operation of the game ball may stop and the game may not be continued even though the jackpot is being hit. Yes, in such a case, by operating the second ball removal button 361, the ball being stored in the dish unit 300 is removed, and at the same time, the supply of the ball to the launch position is maintained and the game with a big hit Can be continued.

  In the dish unit 300 of this example, when the second ball removal button 361 is operated, the second ball removal shutter 364 is held in the open position by the latch unit 366 of the second ball removal mechanism 360, and the second ball removal port 312 can be kept open. In this state, when the game balls on the upstream side of the second ball outlet 312 are discharged and there are almost no game balls on the first inclined surface 311a, the game balls flowing in from the ball inlet 341 are as described above. The second inclined surface 311b, which is reflected from the outer peripheral wall 311h and flows in the direction of the fifth inclined surface 311e, the fourth inclined surface 311d, the fifth inclined surface 311e, the second inclined surface 311b, A game ball is supplied on the third inclined surface 311c. Therefore, even if the game ball on the third inclined surface 311c is consumed by the launch operation of the ball launcher 650, as long as the game ball flows into the storage tray 311 from the ball inlet 341, the second inclined surface 311b, If the game balls are supplied to the third inclined surface 311c via the fourth inclined surface 311d and the fifth inclined surface 311e, and the number of game balls that flow in by stopping the firing operation of the game balls increases, the second ball Since it will be produced from the outlet 312, a certain amount of game balls can always be secured in the storage tray 311 and the game can be continued even when the second ball outlet 312 remains open. ing. That is, the game can be continued without worrying about the amount of game balls in the storage tray 311 even in a state where game balls are continuously paid out, such as during a big hit game.

  In the dish unit 300 of this example, as shown in FIG. 63 and the like, the storage tray 311 of the dish body 310 has a bottom surface continuously including a first inclined surface 311a, a second inclined surface 311b, and a third inclined surface 311c. The ball inlet 341 of the dish back plate 340 has a rectangular shape extending substantially horizontally in the left-right direction, whereas it becomes lower as viewed in the right direction (sphere supply port 342). Thus, a step is formed between the bottom surface of the storage tray 311 and the bottom of the ball inlet 341, and the step becomes larger as it goes to the right in the front view. ing. The step between the bottom surface of the storage tray 311 and the bottom of the ball inlet 341 has almost no step at the left end of the ball inlet 341, and the outer diameter of the game ball at the right end of the ball inlet 341. There is a slightly higher step. As a result, the game balls that have flowed substantially straight in the front-rear direction via the prize ball communication rod 343 flow into the storage tray 311 mainly through the left side portion of the ball inlet 341 with few steps. As a result, the potential energy (falling energy) of the game ball falling from the ball inlet 341 to the storage tray 311 is small due to the small level difference, and the load applied to the storage tray 311 is reduced and the storage tray 311 is damaged. Can be prevented.

  By the way, when the amount of game balls stored in the storage tray 311 increases and a large number of game balls are stored on the first inclined surface 311a, the ball inflow port 341 is connected via the prize ball contact hole 343. The game balls flowing into the storage tray 311 are shaped so as to push the game balls stored in the storage tray 311 from the side, and the game balls are pressed against each other by applying a lateral force to each game ball. It becomes a state. In this state, when the game balls in the storage tray 311 (third inclined surface 311c) are consumed via the ball supply port 342, the game balls are collected near the upstream side of the third inclined surface 311c (second inclined surface 311b). When the width of the flow path is narrowed, the game balls may be pressed against each other and the fluidity of the game balls may be reduced to cause clogging of the balls. Since it has an elongated rectangular shape, the game ball from the prize ball contact bar 343 directly flows into the second inclined surface 311b through the shelf 344, and can be supplied to the third inclined surface 311c. (See FIG. 62B).

  In addition, in the portion on the right side of the center in the left-right direction of the ball inlet 341, the lower side of the ball inlet 341 is higher than the outer diameter of the game ball with respect to the bottom surface of the storage dish 311. Thus, the game balls flowing into the storage tray 311 flow into the upper side of the game balls stored in the storage tray 311, and the fluidity of the game balls is suppressed by preventing the game balls from pushing sideways. In addition to being able to prevent the lowering, the game balls flowing in from the top promote the lateral movement of the lower game balls (especially the game balls in contact with the front surface of the dish back plate 340), and naturally Ball clogging can be eliminated (see FIG. 63).

  As described above, the storage tray 300 of the present example allows the game balls paid out from the prize ball unit 800 to be stored in the shelf of the horizontally long ball inlet 341 even if the amount of game balls stored in the storage tray 311 increases. Since the game balls stored in the storage tray 311 are caused to flow into the upper side of the storage tray 311 via the portion 344, it is possible to satisfactorily prevent the game balls from clogging in the storage tray 311. The game can be continued without worrying about the game ball in the plate 311 and the interest of the player can be prevented from decreasing.

[1-2D. Glass unit]
Next, the glass unit 450 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 64 is a front perspective view of the glass unit, FIG. 65 is an exploded perspective view showing the glass unit exploded from the front, and FIG. 66 is an exploded perspective view showing FIG. 65 from the rear. As shown in the drawing, this glass unit 450 has an annular, vertically-long octagonal unit frame 451 that has a larger opening than the game window 101 and is molded of synthetic resin, and two front and rear ends of the unit frame 451 are closed. The transparent glass plate 452 of a sheet | seat, and the strip | belt-shaped glass decoration board | substrate 453 arrange | positioned along the inner periphery of the unit frame 451 between the two glass plates 452 are provided.

  The unit frame 451 in the glass unit 450 has a substrate insertion groove 451a into which the rear side is opened and the glass decorative substrate 453 is inserted, and a plurality of openings 451b that open from the substrate insertion groove 451a toward the inner peripheral side of the unit frame 451. A locking groove 451c formed on the outer periphery of the substantially central portion in the front-rear direction of the unit frame 451, a terminal plate support portion 451d that protrudes leftward from the upper left end in a front view, and an outer periphery that is above the center in the vertical direction Stop pieces 451e that respectively protrude in the left-right direction from the position, and locking protrusions 451f that protrude outward in the left-right direction from both ends of the lower side are provided.

  In addition, the glass decorative substrate 453 in the glass unit 450 is strip-like and flexible, and has a plurality of color LEDs 453a at positions corresponding to the openings 451b of the unit frame 451 on the front surface side (inner surface side of the unit frame 451). When the glass decorative substrate 453 is inserted into the substrate insertion groove 451a of the unit frame 451, the LED 453a faces the inner surface side of the unit frame 451 through the opening 451b.

  Further, the glass unit 450 is connected to the glass decorative substrate and is supported by the terminal plate support portion 451d of the unit frame 451, and the end of the glass decorative substrate 453 is fixed to the glass decorative relay terminal plate 454. And a terminal plate holder 456 that covers the terminal plate support portion 451d of the unit frame 451 that supports the glass decorative relay terminal plate 454.

  In the glass unit 450, glass plates 452 are bonded and fixed to the front and rear of the unit frame 451 in a state where the glass decorative substrate 453 is inserted into the substrate insertion groove 451 a of the unit frame 451. In the glass unit 450, the engaging groove 451c formed on the outer peripheral lower side of the unit frame 451 engages with the vertical bent protruding piece 151 of the reinforcing sheet metal 140, and the outer peripheral edge of the unit frame 451 and the stopper piece 451e The locking projection 451f is fitted in the glass unit support step 110a of the door frame base body 110 from the rear side, and is detachably attached to the door frame 5 by the stop lever 196. .

  In addition, the glass unit 450 can appropriately decorate the light emission between the two glass plates 452 by causing the LED 453a of the glass decoration substrate 453 to emit light appropriately, and has an atmosphere different from conventional pachinko machines ( A pachinko machine 1 having a gaming window 101 (with a mood) can be provided.

[1-2E. Security cover]
Next, the security cover 470 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 21 and 22. The security cover 470 is provided with a security function that covers the lower back surface of the glass unit 450 and prevents the intrusion of unauthorized tools into the game board 4. Are formed in a flat plate shape so as to cover the lower portion of the glass unit 450 between the reinforcing metal plates 142 and 143, and the upper side portion thereof is an arc-shaped contact recess 471 along the lower arc surface of the inner rail 603 of the game board 4. And a post-crime prevention protruding piece 474 projecting rearward along the contact recess 471. Further, a crime prevention rear end protrusion 475 is formed in a slanting manner on the back surface of the shaft support side with the crime prevention cover 470 attached. On the other hand, on the front surface of the crime prevention cover 470, a crime prevention pre-projection piece 472 along the lower shape of the unit frame 451 in the glass unit 450 is projected with the crime prevention cover 470 attached, and U-shaped at both lower ends. A mounting elastic piece 473 is formed so as to project forward.

  The security cover 470 configured as described above is detachably attached to the back side of the door frame 5 by mounting the mounting elastic piece 473 on the mounting opening 116 formed in the door frame base unit 100. And in the attached state, although illustration is abbreviate | omitted, the protrusion piece 472 before a crime prevention faces the back lower one side of the unit frame 451 of the glass unit 450. FIG. Further, the front end of the crime prevention front protrusion 472 is in contact with the vertical bent protrusion 151. In addition, the post-crime projecting piece 474 and the post-crime end end projecting piece 475 are in a state of projecting rearward, but when the door frame 5 is closed, The bottom side of the inner rail 603 fixed to the game board 4 enters and faces the lower side, but the half of the open side of the post-crime projection 474 is rail security formed on the inner rail 603 of the front component 601 The state is inserted into the groove 607, and the crime prevention rear end protrusion 475 is in a superposed position along the upper surface of the crime prevention projection 608 formed on the shaft support side of the main body frame 3 (see FIG. 76). ).

  Thus, in the state in which the security cover 470 is attached and the door frame 5 is closed, the security structure by the door frame protrusion 110d and the engagement grooves 584 and 585 described above, and the security protrusion 166 and the security space 586 described later. In addition to the crime prevention structure by the above, even if it is attempted to intrude an unauthorized tool from below the glass unit 450, the unauthorized device enters from the front lower direction of the security cover 470 due to the polymerization of the pre-crime projection piece 472 and the unit frame 451. The anti-crime piece 474 and the inner rail 603 constituting the front component 601 are superposed to prevent unauthorized equipment from entering from the lower side of the rear face of the security cover 470. In particular, against the intrusion of unauthorized tools from the diagonally lower side of the door frame 5 on the shaft support side, the intrusion of unauthorized tools into the outer rail 602 is prevented by the superposed structure of the security projection 608 and the rear end projection 475. In addition, the overlapping structure of the inner rail 603 and the post-crime protrusion 474 can prevent unauthorized equipment from entering the game area 605 of the game board 4.

  Similarly, in addition to the crime prevention structure by the double bent projecting pieces 153 and 154 of the above-described opening-side reinforcing sheet metal 143, intrusion of unauthorized tools from obliquely below the opening side of the door frame 5, The uneven engagement between the rail crime prevention groove 607 and the post-crime projection piece 474 can further prevent the unauthorized tool from entering the game area 605 of the game board 4. Note that a vertical surface between the post-crime protrusion 474 and the rear-end protrusion 475 on the back side of the security cover 470 is formed by the outer rail 602 and the inner rail 603 with the door frame 5 closed. Since it covers the lower part of the front surface of the guide path of the hit ball, it also has a function of preventing the hit ball that jumps or reverses the guide path part from colliding with the glass plate 452.

[1-3. Body frame]
Next, the main body frame 3 in the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 67 to 75. 67 is a front view of the main body frame main body 500 before mounting the parts, FIG. 68 is a rear view of the main body frame main body 500 before mounting the parts, and FIG. 69 is a main body frame main body before mounting the parts. FIG. 70 is a perspective view seen from the back side of the main body frame main body 500 before mounting the parts, and FIG. 71 is a perspective view seen from the front of the main body frame 3 to which the parts are attached. 72 is a perspective view of the state in which the main body frame 3 to which the parts are attached is pivotally supported on the outer frame 2, and FIG. 73 is a rear view of the main body frame 3 to which the parts are attached. FIG. 75 is a perspective view as seen from the back of the main body frame 3 to which components are attached, and FIG. .

  The main body frame 3 of the present embodiment has a game board 4 that can be detachably mounted from the front side, a hitting ball launching device 650, a prize ball tank 720 for delivering a prize ball, a tank rail member 740, and a ball path unit. 770, a prize ball unit 800 (corresponding to a payout unit of the present invention), a full unit 900, a locking device 1000 for locking the main body frame 3 to the outer frame 2 and a door frame 5 to the main body frame 3, and a game board 4, a board unit 1100 in which various control boards for controlling electrical components provided in the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3 except 4, a power supply board 1136, and the like are provided together, and a cover body 1250 that covers the rear opening 580. And a main body frame main body 500 on which various components such as these are mounted.

  First, the main body frame main body 500 on which the above-described various components are mounted and the main body frame 3 on which the various components are mounted will be described. In FIG. 67, an upper shaft support bracket 503 and a lower shaft support bracket 509 (both see FIG. 71) for attaching and closing the main body frame 3 to the outer frame 2 are attached on one side of the main body frame main body 500. In the state where the upper shaft bracket 503 and the lower shaft bracket 509 are mounted on the shaft bracket mounting steps 501 and 502, the upper side and the side of the main body frame main body 500 are formed. The sides are substantially flush with the upper sides and sides of the upper shaft support 503, and the lower and sides of the main body frame main body 500 are substantially flush with the lower sides and sides of the lower shaft support 509 (see FIG. 73). Here, the upper shaft bracket 503 and the lower shaft bracket 509 will be described with reference to FIGS. 71 and 73. The upper shaft support fitting 503 has a mounting portion on the back surface of the main body frame main body 500, and its upper end protrudes forward. A shaft support pin 504 is erected and fixed on the upper surface protruding forward, and the shaft support pin 504 A door shaft support hole 505 is formed on the side.

  On the other hand, the lower shaft support 509 has a mounting portion on the back surface of the main body frame main body 500, and two support plates 506 and 507 are integrally projected on the lower end side and slightly on the upper side. The lower support plate 506 constitutes a frame support plate 506 for supporting the main body frame 3 on the lower support fitting 66 of the outer frame 2, and the upper support plate 507 is provided on the door frame 5. A door support plate 507 for supporting the lower shaft support portion 148 on the main body frame 3 is configured. For this reason, a shaft support hole (not shown) for inserting the support protrusion 68 of the lower support fitting 66 of the outer frame 2 is formed in the frame support plate 506, and the lower support portion 148 of the door frame 5 is formed in the door support plate 507. A shaft support hole 508 for inserting the projecting shaft pin 147 is formed.

  By the way, the main body frame main body 500 is formed in a rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and about 3/4 of the upper part thereof is a game board installation recess 510 (see FIG. 71) for installing the game board 4. A slightly recessed area below the game board installation recess 510 is a plate portion 511. In addition, the front upper side portion and the front open side portion on the front side surrounding the game board installation recess 510 are formed with a predetermined width so as to face the rear surface of the door frame 5, An upper crime prevention double groove 581 is formed by a protrusion protruding in parallel with the lateral direction, and a side crime prevention groove 582 is formed on the outer side and on the inner side of the front opening side edge on the right side when viewed from the front. A security recess 583 is formed which is formed by an inner wall having an inclined surface that is connected to the first side wall 540 at the rear end. Unlike the side part, it is not formed so as to have a predetermined width that faces the back surface of the door frame 5, but the front shaft support side part of the main body frame main body 500 is more forward than the front upper side part or the front open side part. The shaft support side portion 587 (see FIG. 110) has a large protrusion amount.

  More specifically, the upper crime prevention double groove 581 formed on the upper side portion of the front surface is bent with the long side ends of the upper reinforcing metal plate 141 attached and fixed to the rear surface of the upper side portion of the door frame 5 facing rearward. The bent projecting pieces 155 and 156 are inserted respectively. Further, the side security grooves 582 and the security recesses 583 formed on the front open side edges are folded back toward the rear at both long side ends of the open side reinforcing sheet metal 143 attached and fixed to the open back of the door frame 5. The open-side outer bent protrusion 153 and the open-side inner bent protrusion 154 to be bent are respectively inserted. Further, on the shaft support side portion 587 of the front shaft support side portion, the tip end of the shaft support side L-shaped bent protruding piece 157 of the shaft support side reinforcing sheet metal 142 attached and fixed to the shaft support side rear surface of the door frame 5 is provided. The parts come into contact.

  Further, the above-described structure can prevent an illegal act of inserting a fraudulent tool such as a piano wire through the gap between the contact surfaces of the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3, and in particular, the open side where the fraudulent act is most likely to be performed. It has a structure that can prevent fraud at the side and then at the upper side where fraud is likely to be performed. Of course, the prevention of fraud by the contact between the support-side reinforcing sheet metal 142 on the support side and the support-side L-shaped bent protrusion 157 also works well, but in many cases the support side is sturdy. Since the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 are connected to each other by the support brackets 45 and 66 and the shaft support brackets 503 and 509, the space between the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 is larger than that of the upper side and the open side. It is difficult to make a gap. For this reason, in this embodiment, not a double crime prevention structure but a single crime prevention structure. These points will be described in detail later.

  In addition to the configuration described above, the front upper side, front open side, and front pivot side on the front side surrounding the game board installation recess 510 are arranged on the upper, middle, and lower sides of the front open side. A door hook hole 549 for allowing a door hook portion 1041 (see FIG. 121) provided in a lock device 1000 (described later) attached to the open side rear surface of the main body frame 3 to protrude forward is opened. In addition, a board positioning protrusion 576 for engaging with a positioning recess 611 formed in the game board 4 is provided on the inner side surface of the front shaft support side. Further, the pivot side L-shaped bent projection piece 157 of the pivot side reinforcement sheet metal 142 with the door frame 5 closed on the inner front surface of the lower side position of the panel positioning projection 576 on the front side pivot side side part. Two upper and lower restricting projections 577 into which the distal ends are inserted project. The operation of the restricting protrusion 577 is as described above. In addition, as shown in FIG. 67, a board stopper insertion hole into which an end of a game board stopper 614 provided on the game board 4 is engaged above and below the boundary between the open-side flat portion and the game board installation recess 510. 578 is formed.

  Next, the configuration of the plate portion 511 will be described with reference to FIGS. The upper surface of the plate portion 511 is a game board placement section 512 for placing the game board 4, and when the game board 4 is placed at the approximate center of the game board placement section 512, the game board 4 is provided with a passage support protrusion 513 that supports the lower surface of the out port 606 (see FIG. 76) formed in the base plate 4. Further, as shown in FIG. 67, a rail mounting boss 514 protrudes from the central portion of the front surface of the plate portion 511 toward the open side end portion at a predetermined interval, and the launch rail 515 ( 71) is fixed with screws. Further, a rail connection member 516 protrudes from the front surface of the plate portion 511 corresponding to the tip position of the launch rail 515, and when the game board 4 is installed in the game board installation recess 510, the inner rail of the game board 4 is provided. It is adjacent to the connection passage portion 609 (see FIG. 76) which is the downstream end of 603.

  Further, an upper end of an elliptical game board fixture 519 (see FIG. 71) for fixing the lower part of the game board 4 at a side position of the rail connection member 516 (position opposite to the firing rail 515). A fixing tool mounting boss 517 for mounting is protruded, and a stopper 518 is protruded obliquely below. In other words, the game board fixing tool 519 is provided so as to be rotatable about the fixing tool mounting boss 517, and rotates in the clockwise direction in a state where the game board 4 is placed on the game board mounting portion 512, thereby playing the game board. The fixture 519 is pressed against the front surface of the game board 4 to fix the game board 4. Further, when removing the game board, it can be easily performed by turning the game board fixture 519 counterclockwise and removing it. In this case, the game board fixture 519 is prevented from being rotated counterclockwise by the stopper 518.

  In addition, the lower part of the open side of the plate part 511 is formed with a rectangular parallelepiped launching device mounting portion 520 that projects in a bulging shape toward the front side (which is concave when viewed from the back side). A hitting ball launcher 650 is fixed to the mounting portion 520 from the back surface of the main body frame main body 500. This will be described in detail later. A handle connection window 522 that houses a slide member 710 (see FIG. 95) that is linked to the slide protrusion 183 of the joint unit 180 described above is formed on the front wall portion of the launcher mounting portion 520 described above. A shaft hole 523 is formed at the position adjacent to the handle connection window 522 so that the end surface of the bearing 689 (see FIG. 91) of the ball striking rod 687 faces. In addition, the upper wall portion of the launching device mounting portion 520 is formed with a notch-shaped through hole opening 521 for projecting the hitting ball rod 687 of the hitting ball launching device 650 upward, and a plate portion 511 obliquely above the saddle through opening 521. Is formed with a cylinder lock through hole 526 through which the cylinder lock 1010 of the lock device 1000 passes.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 68, on the back surface of the plate portion 511, a ball discharge passage 524 is formed extending from the upper portion on the shaft support side toward the central portion of the plate portion 511 and then going downward. . The ball discharge passage 524 is for discharging a ball discharged from a ball connection passage 880 (see FIG. 71), which will be described later, from below the pachinko machine 1 into the island. In addition, a cylindrical guide protrusion 525 protrudes rearward from the above-described launcher mounting portion 520, and a guide hole 1212 (see FIG. 128) of the substrate unit 1100 described later is formed in the guide protrusion 525. The board unit 1100 is easily attached by being inserted. Also, mounting holes 527 for mounting the board unit 1100 with screws are formed on the left and right and upper and lower sides of the plate part 511, and the mounting pieces 1122 of the board unit 1100 are made to correspond to the mounting holes 527 and fastened with screws. In addition, a launching device mounting boss 529 for mounting the hitting ball launching device 650 is projected rearwardly inside the concave shape of the launching device mounting portion 520, and the lowermost end portion on the open side is shown in FIG. As shown in the figure, when the main body frame 3 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, a guide protrusion with a tapered tip and a vertically long shape is provided to guide the closing operation of the main body frame 3 while contacting the upper surface of the decorative cover plate 15. 528 protrudes rearward.

  In addition to the configuration described above, the plate portion 511 is formed with a ball removal connection opening 530 which is an opening at the upstream end of the ball removal discharge passage 524 on the upper surface of the end portion on the shaft support side, as shown in FIG. . A downstream end of the ball removal connection passage 880 is connected to the ball removal connection opening 530. Further, the portion adjacent to the ball-opening connection opening 530 is horizontal so that the full unit mounting portion 531 for mounting the full unit 900 (see FIG. 71), which will be described in detail later, is orthogonal to the plate portion 511. A unit engagement groove 532 that engages with an engagement piece 924 (see FIG. 111) of the full tank unit 900 is formed in the front portion of the full unit mounting portion 531. Further, as shown in FIG. 71, an outlet for blocking a prize ball discharged from the outlet 921 of the full tank unit 900 when the door frame 5 is opened is provided on the front surface of the plate part 511 in front of the full unit mounting part 531. An opening / closing device 579 is provided.

  Although the outlet opening / closing device 579 is not described in detail, when the door frame 5 is closed, the opening / closing plate is lowered by a lever that contacts the back surface of the door frame 5, but the door plate 5 is opened. Then, the contact with the lever disappears, so that the opening / closing plate rises and closes the outlet 921. For this reason, even when the door frame 5 is opened, the prize balls stored in the full tank unit 900 do not fall down from the outlet 921. In addition, as shown in FIG. 71, a fastening hole penetrating vertically in a position corresponding to the upper side of the launching portion of the firing rail 515 in the game board mounting portion 512 formed along the upper end side of the plate portion 511. 533 is formed, and a fastening link 534 for holding the fastening band 619 is passed to the front portion of the fastening hole 533. The fastening linkage 534 is a mechanism for preventing the game board 4 from being detached from the main body frame 3.

  Next, the structure of the game board installation recessed part 510 is demonstrated. The game board installation recess 510 is provided around a first side wall 540 that is provided in a rearward direction from the inner side surface on the pivot support side, the above-described upper side portion, and the open side surface portion, and a rear side provided from the first side wall 540. The main body frame 3 includes a second side wall 541, a third side wall 542 that is provided rearward from the second side wall 541, and a fourth side wall 543 that is provided rearward from the third side wall 542. The left and right sides and the rear side of the upper side are formed in a concave shape.

  The first side wall 540 to the fourth side wall 543 are formed such that the upper side and the right side (sides on the shaft support side) are straightly extended rearward with a step when viewed from the back, whereas the left side ( The open side is formed in a stepped shape (see FIG. 75) that inwardly slopes from the first side wall 540 toward the fourth side wall 543. This is because the rear end of the fourth side wall 543 is opened when the main body frame 3 is opened when the first side wall 540 to the fourth side wall 543 on the left side (side on the open side) are straightly formed rearward. May be in contact with the inner surface of the side frame plate 13 of the outer frame 2 so that it cannot be opened smoothly. Therefore, the first side wall surface 540 to the fourth side wall 543 on the open side can be smoothly opened by inclining inside. It is something that can be done.

  At the same time, the lock device 1000 is attached along the first side wall 540 on the open side, and the attachment is made using a lock attachment hole 547 (see FIG. 117) provided in the rear end side of the first side wall 540. Therefore, in order to form the lock mounting hole 547, the fourth side wall 543 is formed in an inclined step shape from the first side wall 540 on the open side. Furthermore, as for the step size of the first side wall 540 to the fourth side wall 543, the step between the first side wall 540 and the second side wall 541 needs to be in contact with the periphery of the back surface of the game board 4 described later. For this reason, it is formed with a somewhat large step, but the other steps are extremely small steps. Of course, the second side wall 541 to the fourth side wall 543 may be formed continuously without forming a step.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 69, the side walls 540 to 543 are formed so as to have depth width dimensions d1, d2, d3, and d4, respectively, and in this embodiment, d1 + d2 + d3 + d4 = about 135 mm. . In particular, the width dimension d1 of the first side wall 540 corresponds to the thickness of the game board 4, and the game board is formed in the space formed by the remaining second side wall 541, third side wall 542, and fourth side wall 543. The rear projecting portions of various gaming devices provided at 4 are accommodated.

  That is, the first side wall 540 constitutes a front side wall having a depth dimension substantially the same as the thickness of the game board 4, and the second side wall 541 to the fourth side wall 543 are in contact with the rear surface of the peripheral part of the game board 4. A rear side wall that has a stepped portion that contacts the rear side wall of the gaming device 4 that extends from the first side wall 540 in a rearward direction substantially parallel to the first side wall 540 and that is provided on the game board 4; It constitutes. In particular, in the case of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 4, the rearward protruding amounts of all the parts of the second side wall 541 to the fourth side wall 543 are fixed to the upper part on the back side of the main body frame 3. It is formed so as to be at substantially the same position as the rear wall 722 of the storage portion 728 for storing the balls of the prize ball tank 720.

  Thereby, since the size of the space formed by the second side wall 541, the third side wall 542, and the fourth side wall 543 is secured up to a position corresponding to the periphery of the game board 4, for example, a game Even in the case where a gaming device is installed in which the liquid crystal display screen occupies substantially the entire area of the board 4, the rearward protruding portion of such a gaming device can be easily stored.

  In addition, as shown in FIGS. 68 and 70, from the rear end side of the fourth side wall 543 to the left side (open side), the upper side and the right side (shaft support side) when viewed from the back side, the open side rear wall 544, An upper rear wall 545 and a pivot support side rear wall 546 as a rear wall are provided so as to protrude inward so as to be parallel to the front surface of the pachinko machine. The shaft support side rear wall 546 has a flat front surface (see FIG. 67), and a ball path unit 770 (to be described later) and a prize ball unit 800 constituting a ball payout mechanism are detachably mounted on the rear surface. It is supposed to be. Therefore, the width of the projecting width toward the inside of the pivot support side rear wall 546 is sufficient if the ball passage unit 770 and the prize ball unit 800 are wide enough to be mounted.

  Further, the front surface of the upper rear wall 545 has a flat plate shape (see FIG. 67), and a tank rail member 740, which will be described later, is attached to the rear surface thereof. Therefore, it is sufficient for the projecting width to the inside of the upper rear wall 545 to have a height width dimension of the tank rail member 740 attached in an inclined manner. Furthermore, the front surface of the open-side rear wall 544 has a flat plate shape (see FIG. 67), and a cover body support cylinder portion 575 that pivotally supports a cover body 1250 described later is formed on the rear surface. Accordingly, it is sufficient that the width of the projecting width toward the inside of the open-side rear wall 544 is a width that forms the cover body support cylinder 575.

  As described above, the front surfaces of the open-side rear wall 544, the upper rear wall 545, and the pivot-side rear wall 546 that project inward from the rear end side of the fourth side wall 543 are formed in a flat plate shape. Since the flat plate portion corresponds to the peripheral portion of the game board 4, as described above, the second side wall 541, the third side wall 542, and the fourth side wall to the position corresponding to the peripheral portion of the game board 4. Since the size of the space formed by 543 is ensured, for example, even when a gaming device is attached such that the liquid crystal display screen occupies substantially the entire area of the gaming board 4, The rear protruding portion can be easily stored. Note that the insides of the open-side rear wall 544, the upper rear wall 545, and the pivot support-side rear wall 546 form a rear opening 580 so that the rear opening 580 can be opened and closed by a cover body 1250 described later. It has become.

  Next, a more detailed configuration of the game board mounting recess 510 will be described. As described above, the door hook hole 549 through which the door frame hook portion 1041 of the lock device 1000 passes is formed on the open side plane portion. There are three places in the middle and bottom, but a lock locking hole 548 (see FIG. 68) into which a locking projection 1004 (described later) of the lock device 1000 is engaged further above, below, and below the upper and lower door hook holes 549. ) Is formed. Further, the lock device 1000 is attached along the first side wall 540 on the open side, and a lock attachment hole 547 (see FIG. 68) for attaching the lock device 1000 with a screw is provided at the rear end of the first side wall 540. It is formed in the upper part and the middle. Note that the locking device 1000 is attached not only by the upper and middle screws, but also by a screw fixing portion 1003 formed in a lock mounting piece 1008 described later and a lock mounting hole 547 formed in the vicinity of the cylinder lock through hole 526. And the lower part of the locking device 1000 can be attached.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 70, on the left and right in front of the upper side of the first side wall 540, when the main body frame 3 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the inner peripheral surface of the upper frame plate 10 of the outer frame 2 A guide arc projection 552 that abuts is provided, and a relief recess 551 that communicates with a notch 729 of a prize ball tank 720, which will be described later, is formed at the center of the rear end side of the first side wall 540. A tank mounting groove 550 is formed on a vertical surface connected to the side wall 541. When the mounting flange 733 of the prize ball tank 720 is attached to the tank attachment groove 550, the notch 729 of the prize ball tank 720 communicates with the escape recess 551 as shown in FIG. When the ball pressure of the sphere stored in the tank increases, the pressure is released to prevent clogging. When the prize ball tank 720 is attached to the main body frame 3, the rear side wall 722 on the back side and the rear end side of the fourth side wall 543 are substantially coincident when viewed from the front side of the prize ball tank 720 in plan view (FIG. 4). See). The guide arc projection 552 described above lifts the main body frame 3 by bringing the upper side of the main body frame 3 into contact with the inner peripheral surface of the upper frame plate 10 of the outer frame 2 and the decorative cover plate. 15 is formed to prevent a fraudulent act such as forming a gap with 15 and inserting a fraudulent instrument through the gap.

  Further, the above-described upper rear wall 545 is formed with a rail locking groove 553 for attaching the tank rail member 740 along the opening edge of the rear opening 580, and the fourth side wall 543 and the upper rear wall. A rail locking groove 554 is formed in the bent portion of 545. The tank rail member 740 can be attached to the main body frame 3 by locking the locking protrusions 749, 750 (see FIG. 99) of the tank rail member 740 in the rail locking grooves 553, 554. In addition, a rail latching elastic piece 555 is formed on the upper part of the upper rear wall 545 corresponding to the downstream side when the tank rail member 740 is attached, and the tank rail member 740 is locked in the rail locking grooves 553 and 554. When the projecting pieces 749 and 750 are locked and the tank rail member 740 is attached to the main body frame 3, the rail latching elastic piece 555 is arranged at the upper end on the downstream side of the tank rail member 740 so that the locked state is not released. It comes in contact with the top.

  When the tank rail member 740 is removed, the rail rail elastic member 555 is pressed backward, and then the tank rail is released to release the locking state between the rail locking grooves 553 and 554 and the locking protrusions 749 and 750. The member 740 may be lifted upward. Further, a relief hole 556 is formed on the side of the rail latching elastic piece 555, and a ground wire connector 557 (see FIG. 110 and the like) is formed below the rail latching elastic piece 555. The escape hole 556 is formed to escape the end of the shaft pin 748 of the alignment gear 747 provided in the tank rail member 740, and the ground wire connector 557 is provided inside the tank rail member 740. In addition to being in contact with a metal conductive plate (not shown) to be attached, a wiring connected to a ground connector provided on the power supply board 1136 is connected.

  Further, as shown in FIGS. 68 and 70, vertical standing walls 560 are erected on the left and right ends of the pivot support side rear wall 546 on the pivot support side rear wall 546, and the spherical passage unit is provided between the standing walls 560. 770 and a prize ball unit 800 are attached. In addition, a prize ball guide projection 561 is provided in a bent shape from the most upstream part between the left and right standing walls 560 to slightly above the middle stream part. The award ball guide protrusion 561 is protruded rearward on the pivot support side rear wall 546 so that the protrusion height gradually decreases toward the downstream side, and a ball passage unit 770 described later is attached. This corresponds to the ball drop passage 772 (see FIG. 104) of the ball passage unit 770 and guides the winning balls in a line. Further, a path unit mounting boss 562 for fixing the ball path unit 770 with screws and a positioning pin 574 for positioning are provided on the left and right sides of the prize ball guide projection 561, and a ball break switch described later. A switch-corresponding protrusion 563 is provided so as to face 778 (see FIG. 104). The passage unit mounting boss 562 and the positioning pin 574 will be described in detail later.

  Furthermore, an engaging protrusion 565 as a locking portion that engages with a hook-shaped engaging portion 824 (see FIG. 106) as an engaging portion of the prize ball unit 800 from the midstream portion to the downstream portion of the left and right standing walls 560, A lock elastic claw 564 that engages with the button insertion engagement hole 821 (see FIG. 106) of the prize ball unit 800 is formed, and the rotation shaft 808 (see FIG. 106) of the sprocket 807 of the prize ball unit 800 is formed. A clearance hole 566 for receiving the end of the reference is formed. Also, a payout motor escape opening 572 is formed below the pivot support side rear wall 546 so that the payout motor 815 as the drive motor of the prize ball unit 800 faces the payout motor escape opening 572. (See FIG. 71). Then, the prize ball unit 800 is engaged with the lower end of the locking groove 573 formed at the lowermost lower surface of the rear surface of the shaft support side rear wall 546, and the rear end of the shaft support side by the engagement protrusion 565 and the lock elastic claw 564. The surface wall 546 is detachably attached. This detachable configuration will be described in detail later.

  In addition, a cover body contact groove 567 into which the open side end of the cover body 1250 enters is formed at the open end of the pivot support side rear wall 546 and below the cover body contact groove 567. A locking wall 569 is provided in a protruding manner. The cover body abutment groove 567 is formed with stop holes 568 corresponding to the stop holes 1253 of the cover body 1250 (see FIGS. 74 and 139), and these stop holes 1253 and 568 are not shown in the figure. By fastening with screws, the rear opening 580 of the main body frame 3 can be closed and fixed by the cover body 1250. The locking wall 569 is provided with a U-shaped locking protruding hook piece 570 in a plan view, and the locking protruding hook piece 570 is attached to the cover body 1250 with the cover body 1250 closed with respect to the main body frame 3. Only the responsible person having the padlock key can open the cover body 1250 by penetrating the formed through-hole 1254 (see FIG. 74) and hooking a lock such as a padlock on the locking protrusion 570. Can not be.

  As mentioned above, although the structure of the main body frame main body 500 which consists of the game board installation recessed part 510 and the board part 511 was demonstrated, when the door frame 5 was closed to the lowest end side part of the board part 511 other than having demonstrated above. In addition, engagement grooves 584 and 585 (see FIG. 67) into which door frame protrusions 110d and 110e (see FIG. 25) bent downward with the lower side of the door frame base main body 110 bent rearward are formed. Yes. The engagement groove 584 is a groove formed below the firing device mounting portion 520 described above, and the engagement groove 585 is a groove formed from one end of the engagement groove 584 toward the shaft support side. Note that the door frame protrusion 110d corresponding to the engagement groove 585 protrudes rearward so as to be larger than the protrusion amount of the door frame protrusion 110e corresponding to the engagement groove 584. However, a door frame protrusion 110d with a large amount of protrusion is slightly formed at the lower end of the open end. The door frame protruding pieces 110d and 110e and the engaging grooves 584 and 585 constitute the outer protrusions and engaging portions on the lower side portions of the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3.

  As described above, the plate portion 511 is provided with the launch rail 515 and the outlet opening / closing device 579, and the rail connection member 516 and the launch device attachment portion 520 are formed to project, but the launch device attachment portion 520 and the launch rail 515 are provided. The position of the plate portion 511 is biased toward the open side, and they are formed so as to protrude from the surface of the plate portion 511. For this reason, in a state where the door frame 5 is closed, the region from the substantially central portion of the plate portion 511 on which the launching device mounting portion 520 and the firing rail 515 are arranged to the open side is the rear surface of the door frame 5 and the launching device mounting portion. 520 and the front surface of the firing rail 515 are in close contact with each other, so that the unauthorized tool such as a piano wire that has passed through the gap between the door frame protruding piece 110d and the engagement groove 585 can be removed from the back surface of the door frame 5. It is extremely difficult to make the gap between the launcher mounting portion 520 and the front surface of the launch rail 515 even better and reach the front side of the game board 4 or the back side of the game board 4.

  On the other hand, since the region from the substantially central portion of the plate portion 511 where the launcher mounting portion 520 and the firing rail 515 are not arranged to the shaft support side does not have a portion protruding on the surface of the plate portion 511, the door frame 5 is closed. In this case, a space 586 is generated between the back surface of the door frame 5 and the front surface of the plate portion 511. For this reason, an unauthorized tool such as a piano wire that has passed through the gap between the door frame protrusion 110d and the engagement groove 584 can easily open the space 586 between the back surface of the door frame 5 and the front surface of the plate portion 511. In order to prevent unauthorized tools from slipping through the space 586 upward, the mounting base 160 attached to the lower part of the back surface of the door frame 5 has a space 586 in a state where the door frame 5 is closed. Crime prevention protrusions 166 are formed to invade. The security protrusion 166 is formed on the mounting base 160 so as to extend from substantially the middle of the plate portion 511 to the end portion on the shaft support side. Therefore, the space below the outer rail 602 attached to the launch rail 515 and the game board 4 constitutes a crime prevention space 586 that receives the crime prevention protrusion 166 protruding from the mounting base 160. The security protrusion 166 and the security space 586 constitute an inner protrusion and engagement portion at the lower side of the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3.

  As described above, the main body frame 3 includes the game board 4, the hit ball launching device 650, the prize ball tank 720, the tank rail member 740, the ball passage unit 770, the prize ball unit 800, the full tank unit 900, the lock device 1000, and the board unit. 1100 and the cover body 1250 are attached, and these will be sequentially described below.

[1-3A. Schematic configuration of game board]
A schematic configuration of the game board 4 will be described with reference to FIGS. 76 to 86. 76 is a perspective view of the game board 4 as viewed from the front, FIG. 77 is a front view of the game board 4, FIG. 78 is a rear view of the game board 4, and FIG. 79 is a game board 4. 80 is an enlarged perspective view of a removal prevention mechanism portion formed on the game board 4, and FIG. 81 is a main body frame 3 showing a structure of the main body frame side with respect to the removal prevention mechanism of the game board 4. FIG. FIG. 82 is a cross-sectional view of the game board of the second embodiment different from the game board shown in FIGS. 76 to 79, cut in the longitudinal direction in the assembled state of the front component member, the game panel, and the panel holder. FIG. 83 is an exploded perspective view of the front structural member, game panel, panel holder, etc., mainly constituting the game board of the second embodiment, as seen from obliquely in front, and FIG. FIG. 84 is an exploded perspective view of FIG. 83 viewed obliquely from behind. Further, FIG. 85 is a perspective view showing obliquely from behind with the main control board box fixed to the board holder. FIG. 86 is an exploded perspective view showing the board substrate holder, drawer holder, and main control board box in FIG. FIG. 87 is a schematic diagram of an exploded perspective view of the function display unit in the game board. FIG. 88 is a schematic view of the function display sticker, and FIG. 89 is a partial view of the function display sticker of the game board through the game window.

  As shown in FIGS. 76 to 79, the game board 4 of the present embodiment includes a game panel 600 formed of a wooden plywood such as a veneer board having a substantially square outer shape and a predetermined thickness, and a front surface of the game panel 600. And a function display unit 640 (see FIG. 87 and the like) fixed to the rear side of the front component member 601, which is attached so as to surround the game area 605. The rear end of the game area 605 is partitioned.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 82 to 83, the gaming board 4 of the second embodiment includes a transparent plate-like gaming panel 600A, a panel holder 630 that holds the gaming panel 600A and has a substantially square outer shape, The front component member 601 is attached to the front surface of the game panel 600A via the holder 630, and the function display unit 640 is fixed to the front component member 601, and the game panel 600 of the first embodiment is While being divided into a transparent gaming panel 600A and a panel holder 630, the front component member 601 and the function display unit 640 have the same configuration as in the first embodiment.

  Various game devices and a number of obstacle nails (all not shown) are planted in the game area 605 on the surface of the game panels 600 and 600A. The front component 601 is attached to the front surface of the panel holder 630 after those gaming devices and obstacle nails are provided. The front component 601 is a hollow cavity that surrounds the outer periphery of the game area 605. And the outer shape is formed in a shape along the outer shape of the panel holder 630, and an arc surface extending from the middle of the lower side to the diagonally upper side past the center of the upper side is formed as the outer rail 602. An inner rail 603 is formed from the lower position of the stopper 620 provided at the end of 602 to the position where the symmetrical backflow prevention member 604 of the upper stopper 620 is provided. The outer rail 602 is formed with a connecting passage portion 609 connected to a rail connecting member 516 provided in an extension shape of the firing rail 515 at the start end portion thereof, and a foul port adjacent to the connecting passage portion 609. 610 is formed. In addition, a metal rail is closely attached to the outer rail 602 from the upstream end of the foul port 610 to the stop portion 620.

  The stopper 620 is provided with an elastic body of rubber or synthetic resin so that when a hit ball that has slid on the outer rail 602 collides with force, the hit ball hits the inside of the game area 605. The backflow prevention member 604 prevents the hit ball, which is fired at one end and taken inside the game area 605, from flowing back to the outer rail 602 again. Further, a security protrusion 608 is provided on one side of the lower portion of the outer rail 602 so as to extend along a part of the metal rail. The security protrusion 608 overlaps with the rear end protrusion 475 of the security rear end projecting on the security cover 470 in the state in which the door frame 5 is closed, and overlaps with the axis of the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5. It prevents intrusion of unauthorized tools such as a piano wire inserted from slightly below the middle of the support side gap.

  Further, an out port 606 is provided at the center of the lower portion of the inner rail 603, and the hit ball hits the game area 605 between the inner rail 603 and the outer rail 602 from the out port 606 to the backflow prevention member 604. Although it constitutes a guided passage to be guided, the hit ball that has flowed back through the outer rail 602 without reaching the game area 605 is taken into the foul port 610 and guided to the foul ball inlet 923 of the full tank unit 900 described later. Then, it is discharged again to the dish unit 300. The game area 605 is an area substantially surrounded by the inner rail 603. In addition, a rail security groove 607 is formed in the front component member 601 on the way from the out port 606 of the inner rail 603 to the stop 620. The rail security groove 607 is formed in a groove shape so that a part of the post-crime projection piece 474 protruding from the security cover 470 enters as described above with the door frame 5 closed. Due to the concavo-convex engagement between the rail crime prevention groove 607 and the post-crime projection piece 474, the piano wire or the like that is inserted from the middle of the gap on the open side of the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 overlaps vertically. This will ultimately prevent the tool from entering.

  By the way, a positioning recess 611 is formed on one side of the game board 4 to be fitted into a board positioning protrusion 576 formed on the main body frame 3, and a board formed on the main body frame 3 is formed on the other side of the game board 4. A game board stopper 614 to be inserted into the stopper insertion hole 578 is provided. The end of the game board stopper 614 is inserted into the board stopper insertion hole 578 when the game board stopper 614 is pressed and fixed. Thus, in order to fix the game board 4 to the main body frame 3, after inserting the positioning recess 611 from the front side of the main body frame 3 so as to be fitted to the board positioning protrusion 576, The whole is pushed into the first side wall 540 of the main body frame 3, the game board stopper 614 that is free in that state is pushed in and fixed, and the end portion is inserted into the board stopper insertion hole 578 and fixed. . Thereafter, the game board fixing tool 519 is rotated to fix the lower front surface of the game board 4. As a result, the game board 4 can be easily attached to the main body frame 3. In order to remove the game board 4, the game board 4 may be removed in the reverse order of the above procedure.

  In addition, the game board 4 in the present embodiment has a configuration that prevents unauthorized removal of the game board 4 from the main body frame 3 very easily. That is, as shown in FIGS. 76 and 80, a mounting notch 616 that penetrates the gaming board 4 in the front-rear direction is formed at the lower end opposite to the passage notch 613 below the gaming board 4 (more precisely, A mounting notch 616 is formed in the front component 601.) A fastening bar 617 is stretched and fixed in the horizontal direction below the mounting notch 616. The fastening bar 617 is formed with a band groove-like fastening portion 618 for latching the fastening band 619 at the approximate center thereof. On the other hand, as the removal preventing mechanism provided in the main body frame 3, as described above, it is the game board mounting portion 512 formed along the upper end side of the plate portion 511 below the main body frame 3, and the firing rail 515 is fired. A fastening hole 533 penetrating in the vertical direction is formed at a position corresponding to the upper portion of the portion, and a fastening linkage 534 for hanging the fastening band 619 is passed to the front portion of the fastening hole 533 (see FIG. 81). reference).

  When the game board 4 configured as described above is housed and arranged in the game board installation recess 510 of the main body frame 3, the fastening bar 617 is placed in contact with the game board placement part 512 as shown in FIG. At the same time, the fastening portion 618 and the fastening linkage 534 are in a matched state. In this state, the tip of a fastening band 619 that is generally marketed from above the fastening bar 617 is inserted into the mounting notch 616 with respect to the portion where the fastening portion 618 and the fastening linkage 534 coincide. Then, it is inserted downward into the fastening hole 533 and guided forward, and its tip is engaged with the fastener portion of the fastening band 619. And the unnecessary front-end | tip part which protruded ahead from the fastener of the fastening band 619 is cut | disconnected. In this way, unless the fastening band 619 is cut, the game board 4 cannot be removed from the main body frame 3 even if the game board stopper 614 and the game board fixture 519 are released. Although the game board 4 can be removed from the main body frame 3 by cutting the fastening band 619, for example, if different fastening bands are fastened by using a fastening band 619 unique to a pachinko parlor, It can be easily understood that the board 4 has been removed and some sort of fraud has been performed. Thus, illegal removal from the main body frame 3 of the game board 4 can be prevented by an extremely simple removal prevention mechanism.

  Further, the game board 4 has an outer shape in which notch portions 612 are formed on the upper left and right sides, and a part of the front guide passage 920 portion of the full tank unit 900 described later is inserted obliquely below the side of the foul port 610. A passage notch 613 is formed. In addition, on the lower left and right sides of the front component member 601, a certificate sticking unit 615 for applying a certificate check certificate is provided. Further, a function display seal 649 is affixed to the upper side of the lower right certificate sticking part 615 in the front component 601.

  On the other hand, on the back side of the game board 4, the balls won in various gaming devices (for example, general winning ports 2004, 2101, starting ports 2001, 2002, grand winning ports 2003, etc.) provided in the gaming area 605 are located downstream. A liquid crystal control board 4150 for controlling the display of a liquid crystal display device 1400 (see FIG. 151, etc.) as a display device arranged at the approximate center of the game area 605 on the back surface of the back box 621 which can be guided in alignment with A peripheral board box 622 in which the peripheral control board 4140 is accommodated is attached.

  Further, a board substrate holder 623 is fixed to the back of the game board 4 below the back box 621. This board substrate holder 623 has a space part (this space part has a width in the front-rear direction that is relatively wider than the width of the back box 621 so as to collect the winning balls aligned and guided by the back box 621 in front of it. Formed), and a drop port 629 (see FIG. 75) is formed on the bottom surface of the space. The drop port 629 joins at the rear surface portion of the out port 606 and communicates with an out ball passage 1119 (see FIG. 128) formed in the substrate unit 1100 described later.

  The board substrate holder 623 has a main control board box 624 for storing a main control board 4100 for controlling a game operation on the back surface thereof, a payout control board 1186, a power supply board 1136 and the like provided in a board unit 1100 described later. A relay terminal plate 625 for connection is attached. The relay terminal plate 625 is provided with drawer connectors 626 and 627 that are automatically connected to drawer connectors 1200 and 1202 provided on the board unit 1100 simply by mounting the game board 4 on the main body frame 3.

  Furthermore, the board substrate holder 623 is formed with a joint guide protrusion 628 that protrudes backward from between the drawer connectors 626 and 627 so as to penetrate the relay terminal plate 625. The joint guide protrusions 628 are provided on the drawer connectors 1200 and 1202 provided on the board unit 1100 side and on the game board 4 side when an operation of mounting the game board 4 on the main body frame 3 is performed as will be described in detail later. The drawer connectors 626 and 627 are inserted into the joining guide holes 1213 formed in the frame substrate holder 1101 of the substrate unit 1100 so as to be naturally connected (see FIG. 128). The connection of these drawer connectors will be described in detail later.

[1-3A-1. Front component / game panel / panel holder / panel back plate]
Next, the holding structure of the game panel 600A in the game board 4 of the second embodiment will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. As shown in the figure, the game board 4 includes a plate-like game panel 600A made of a transparent synthetic resin having a size corresponding to the game area 605, and a frame made of a synthetic resin that detachably holds the game panel 600A from the front. -Shaped panel holder 630, and a front structural member that is arranged on the front side of panel holder 630, defines an outer periphery of game area 605, and guides a game ball in game area 605 and guides inner rail 602 and inner rail 603 601 and a plate-like panel back plate 635 disposed in a predetermined range from the lower end to a predetermined height on the rear surface side of the panel holder 630.

  As shown in the figure, the front component 601 is provided with a plurality of positioning bosses 601a and positioning protrusions 601b protruding rearward on the rear surface side. Although these positioning bosses 601a and positioning projections 601b will be described in detail later, they can be positioned with respect to the panel holder 630, board board holder 623, and game panel 600A disposed on the rear side.

  The gaming panel 600A in the gaming board 4 has a polygonal shape whose outer shape is slightly larger than the gaming area 605, and is formed of a transparent synthetic resin plate such as acrylic resin, polycarbonate resin, polyarylate resin, methacrylic resin or the like. . The game panel 600A is thinner than the panel holder 630 and has a necessary minimum thickness (8 to 10 mm) that can be sufficiently retained even when a failure nail (not shown) is implanted.

  The gaming panel 600A includes a plurality of fitting holes 600a formed by round holes arranged in the vicinity of the outer periphery and penetrating in the front-rear direction, and a long hole 600b disposed in the vicinity of the outer periphery of the lower left portion and extending in the front-rear direction and extending in the vertical direction. Each is provided. The fitting hole 600a and the long hole 600b are disposed outside the game area 605 and are positioned with respect to the panel holder 630. In addition, the gaming panel 600A is provided with stepped engagement step portions 600c whose front sides are recessed at both ends of the upper side and the lower side, respectively. The engagement step portion 600c is formed by cutting out approximately half of the thickness of the game panel 600A, and is disposed outside the game area 605, like the fitting hole 600a and the long hole 600b. The game panel 600A is engaged and fixed to the panel holder 630.

  The gaming panel 600A is provided with a plurality of inner rail fixing holes 600d at predetermined positions. The inner rail 603 can be fixed at a predetermined position by fitting and fixing a positioning projection 601b protruding from the rear side of the inner rail 603 into the inner rail fixing hole 600d.

  Further, the gaming panel 600A is provided with a plurality of openings 600e having a predetermined inner shape and penetrating in the front-rear direction so as to be provided with the center accessory 2300, the attacker unit 2000, and the like, and for fixing them. These fixing holes are formed at appropriate positions. Note that these openings 600e are shaped so as not to penetrate the outer periphery of the gaming panel 600A in the vertical and horizontal directions, and the outer periphery of the gaming panel 600A is connected, so that the strength of the gaming panel 600A is determined by the opening 600e. Is designed to suppress the decrease.

  The panel holder 630 in the game board 4 has a size that includes the game panel 600A and has a substantially quadrangular outer shape. , Approximately 20 mm). The panel holder 630 includes a holding step portion 630a that holds the gaming panel 600A in a detachable manner and is recessed from the front side toward the rear side, and is substantially the same size as the gaming area 605 inside the holding step portion 630a. It mainly includes a through-hole 630b penetrating in the direction.

  The holding step portion 630a of the panel holder 630 has a depth from the front surface that is substantially the same as the thickness of the game panel 600A. It is designed to be almost the same surface. In addition, the holding inner side 630a has a front inner peripheral surface that is sized so that a predetermined amount of clearance C (see FIG. 82) is formed with respect to the outer peripheral surface of the game panel 600A. With this clearance C, even if the game panel 600A expands or contracts relatively due to temperature changes or changes with time, the expansion and contraction can be absorbed. An elastic member such as rubber may be packed in the clearance C.

  Further, the panel holder 630 is disposed at a position corresponding to the fitting hole 600a and the long hole 600b formed in the game panel 600A held by the holding step portion 630a, and moves forward from the front surface of the holding step portion 630a. A plurality of protruding pins 630c that extend and can be fitted and inserted into the fitting holes 600a and the long holes 600b of the game panel 600A are provided. By fitting and inserting these projecting pins 630c into the fitting holes 600a and the long holes 600b of the gaming panel 600A, the panel holder 630 and the gaming panel 600A can be positioned relative to each other.

  Further, the panel holder 630 is provided with an engaging claw 630d and an engaging piece 630e that are engaged with the engaging step portion 600c at a position corresponding to the engaging step portion 600c of the game panel 600A. More specifically, as shown in Exhibit A82 and FIG. 82, the engaging claw 630d is disposed on the upper holding step portion 630a of the panel holder 630, and corresponds to the upper engaging step portion 600c in the game panel 600A. The holding step 630a protrudes forward from the front surface and is elastically engaged with the engagement step 600c. The engaging claw 630d is sized so that its tip does not protrude from the front surface of the panel holder 630. On the other hand, the engagement piece 630e is disposed on the lower holding step portion 630a of the panel holder 630, corresponds to the lower engagement step portion 600c of the game panel 600A, and is played between the front surface of the holding step portion 630a. The panel 600A is configured to extend by a predetermined amount toward the upper side (center side) along the front surface of the panel holder 630 in a state where a predetermined gap of a size that allows the engagement step portion 600c to be inserted is formed. By engaging the engagement step portion 600c of the game panel 600A with the engagement claws 630d and the engagement pieces 630e, the game panel 600A is detachably held with respect to the panel holder 630.

  Further, the panel holder 630 includes a boss insertion hole 630f that penetrates in the front-rear direction through which the positioning boss 601a provided in the front component 601 can be inserted, and the positioning boss of the front component 601 is inserted into the boss insertion hole 630f. By inserting 601a, the panel holder 630 and the front component 601 are positioned relative to each other.

  As shown in FIGS. 82 and 84, the panel holder 630 has a mounting support portion 630g that is recessed by a predetermined amount on the rear side so that the center in the vertical direction is slightly below the lower side and the outer peripheral edge. Is provided. The mounting support portion 630g causes the rear surface of the panel holder 630 to be recessed above the predetermined range from the lower end to a predetermined height, with the rear outer peripheral portion protruding rearward, and the amount of depression ( The depth (in this example, about 2.5 mm) that can accommodate the flange-like fixing portion 621a (see FIG. 154, etc.) of the back box 621 in the back unit 2000 attached and fixed to the attachment support portion 630g. It is desirable to be between 1 and 3 mm). By attaching and fixing a predetermined member to the mounting support portion 630g, it is possible to prevent the fixing portion 621a from projecting to the rear side of the panel holder 630, and the panel holder 630, that is, the game board 4 is connected to the pachinko machine 1. The game board can be securely installed in the game board installation recess 510.

  Further, the rear surface side of the panel holder 630 is formed below the position where the mounting support portion 630g is formed within a predetermined range from the lower end to a predetermined height, and is recessed toward the front side to accommodate the panel back plate 635. And a locking portion 630i that is disposed so as to penetrate through the receiving recess 630h in the front-rear direction and that can lock a locking claw 635c formed on the panel back plate 635. The housing recess 630h detachably accommodates the panel back plate 635 by engaging the locking claw 635c of the panel back plate 635 with the locking portion 630i, and the rear surface of the received panel back plate 635 is a panel. The holder 630 is formed so as to be substantially flush with the rear surface.

  Further, as shown in FIGS. 82 and 84, the panel holder 630 has a plurality of mounting holes 630j that are arranged in the mounting support portion 630g on the rear surface side and on the upper side of the housing recessed portion 630h and into which a predetermined screw can be screwed. They are arranged in a predetermined arrangement. Further, the panel holder 630 is provided with a plurality of positioning holes 630k arranged so as to correspond to the mounting holes 630j. The positioning hole 630k is a positioning protrusion (for example, a positioning protrusion (not shown) protruding forward from a fixing portion 621a formed in a flange shape on the front surface of the back box 621) formed on a member to be mounted and fixed using the mounting hole 630j. Is omitted))). In this example, the positioning hole 630k is a blind hole having a substantially rectangular shape (square hole shape) when viewed from the back.

  The mounting hole 630j has a large diameter and a small diameter so that the inner diameter of the hole is mixed, and depending on the size, weight, etc. of a predetermined member to be fixed, 630j may be used.

  Furthermore, the panel holder 630 is formed with a plurality of thinned portions 630l that open to the rear side at least in a predetermined range from the lower end to a predetermined height, so that the weight of the panel holder 630 is reduced by the thinned portions 630l. It has become. As shown in FIG. 83, these thinning portions 630l are not formed in a predetermined range from the front side of the housing recess 630h, that is, from the lower end on the front side of the panel holder 630 to a predetermined height. Then, since the front surface of the panel holder 630 becomes a substantially flat surface, the rear surface of the connection passage portion 609 of the front component member 601 disposed on the front surface becomes a substantially flat surface. The launched game ball is guided smoothly. In addition, as shown in the figure, the panel holder 630 is formed with a thinned portion 630 l so that the mounting holes 630 j and the like are formed in a boss shape, and support them and maintain the strength of the panel holder 630. For this reason, lattice-shaped ribs are formed.

  The panel holder 630 is formed with a obstacle nail planting device (not shown) and a positioning portion 630m corresponding to positioning means such as an assembly jig, and holds the game panel 600 on the obstacle nail planting device. Can be set in the state. Further, an opening 630n that communicates with the out port 606 of the front component 601 and a communication hole 630o that communicates with the foul port 610 of the front component 601 are further provided at the lower portion of the panel holder 630.

  Next, the panel back plate 635 is disposed on the rear surface side of the panel holder 630 so as to cover the thinned portion 630l within a predetermined range from the lower end to a predetermined height, and the rear surfaces of the housing back portion 635 are accommodated in the housing recess 630h of the panel holder 630. A plurality of screw holes 635a that can be accommodated so as to be substantially on the same surface, are arranged in a predetermined arrangement on a flat rear surface and can be screwed with a predetermined screw, and a plurality of screw holes 635a are arranged to correspond to the screw holes 635a. A positioning hole 635b, a locking claw 635c that can be locked to the locking portion 630i of the panel holder 630, and a weight-reducing concave portion 635d that is recessed so as not to penetrate from the front surface side are provided.

  The screw hole 635a and the positioning hole 635b in the panel back plate 635 have substantially the same configuration as the mounting hole 630j and the positioning hole 630k in the panel holder 630. Similarly to the panel holder 630, the panel back plate 635 is formed into a boss-like portion where the screw hole 635a and the positioning hole 635b are formed by the recessed portion 635d, and supports the panel back plate. In order to maintain the strength of 635, lattice-shaped ribs are formed. Further, the panel back plate 635 is provided with an opening 635e penetrating in the front-rear direction at a position corresponding to the opening 630n of the panel holder 630, the communication hole 630o, and the boss insertion hole 630f.

  The panel back plate 635 is housed in the housing recess 630 h of the panel holder 630, and the locking claw 635 c of the panel back plate 635 is locked to the locking portion 630 i of the panel holder 630, thereby being integrated with the panel holder 630. In this state, the rear surface of the panel back plate 635 is substantially flush with the rear surface of the panel holder 630. By integrating the panel holder 630 and the panel back plate 635 in this way, the mounting holes 630j and screw holes are arranged on the rear surface side of the panel holder 630 in a predetermined arrangement on the outer peripheral side of the through-hole 630b over substantially the entire circumference. An attachment hole made of 635a and the like and positioning holes 630k and 635b are arranged, and the presence of these attachment holes allows a predetermined member to be attached and fixed at an arbitrary position.

  As described above, according to the holding structure of the gaming panel 600A in the present example, the gaming panel 600A is fitted and inserted into the holding step portion 630a of the panel holder 630 from the front, and the engaging claws 630d and the engaging pieces 630e, By engaging the engaging step portion 600c, the panel holder 630 can hold the gaming panel 600A, and the gaming panel 600A and the front side of the panel holder 630 are substantially flush with each other. It is possible to set the gaming panel 600A in the state of holding the panel holder 630 in the conventional obstacle nail planting apparatus without modifying the obstacle nail planting apparatus used more and more. An increase in the cost can be suppressed.

  In addition, since the game board 4 having the game area 605 is divided into the game panel 600A, the panel holder 630, and the front component member 601, the positions of obstacle nails, winning holes, etc. are determined depending on the model of the pachinko machine 1. The changing gaming panel 600A can be used as a replacement part, and the panel holder 630 and the front constituent member 601 can be used as a common part. The panel holder 630, the front constituent member 601 and the like can be recycled and the gaming panel 600A can be recycled. It is possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 having a game board 4 that can be adapted to various types of machines by simply exchanging only.

  Further, since the panel holder 630 is provided with a plurality of mounting holes 630j in a predetermined arrangement in advance, various mounting units such as the back unit 2000 and the board substrate holder 623 mounted on the rear side of the panel holder 630 depending on the model. Even if the mounting and fixing positions of the predetermined members are different positions, the panel holder 630 is designed so as to correspond to the position of the mounting hole 630j, so that the panel holder 630 is common to the pachinko machine 1 independent of the model. It can be made into parts.

[1-3A-2. Board holder for panel]
Next, the detailed configuration of the board substrate holder 623 in the game board 4 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 85 and 86. This board substrate holder 623 is attached and fixed to the rear side of the game panel 600 or the panel holder 630, and as shown in the figure, is a box shape with the front and upper sides open, and its bottom is in the horizontal direction. It is inclined so as to become lower toward the front at the approximate center so that it can be discharged downward from the approximate center in the left-right direction after receiving the game balls discharged to the rear side of the game panels 600 and 600A. It has become. A main control board box mounting portion 623a for mounting the main control board box 624 is formed on the rear surface of the board substrate holder 623, and beside the main control board box mounting portion 623a (on the right side in the rear view). A sealed portion 623b corresponding to the sealed portion 624a provided in the main control board box 624 is formed. A drawer holder 636 that supports the relay terminal plate 625 and the drawer connectors 626 and 627 is fixed to the rear surface of the board substrate holder 623.

  The main control board box 624 of this example is supported by the main control board box mounting portion 623a on the rear surface of the board substrate holder 623, and the sealing portion 624a of the main control board box 624 is the main control board box mounting portion 623a. It is sealed to the horizontal sealed portion 623b. When the main control board box 624 is removed from the board substrate holder 623 in this state, an opening mark is left on the sealed portion 623b of the main control board box mounting portion 623a, and the main control board box 624 It can be visually confirmed whether or not it has been illegally removed.

[1-3A-3. Function display unit]
First, as shown in FIG. 87, the function display unit 640 in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment includes a function display board 640a and a cover member 640b. As shown in the figure, the function display board 640a includes segment indicators SEG1, SEG2, and LED1 to LED12. A first special symbol indicator 641 is assigned to the segment indicator SEG1, and a second special symbol indicator 641 is assigned to the segment SEG2. A symbol display 642 is assigned. The segment indicators SEG1 and SEG2 can display alphanumeric characters and graphics, etc., and by displaying these alphanumeric characters and graphics as special symbols, the first start of the attacker unit 2000 described later When a game ball wins the mouth 2001, the segment indicator SEG1 displays a predetermined special symbol in a variable manner. When a game ball wins the second start port 2002, the segment indicator SEG2 displays a predetermined special symbol in a variable manner. It has become.

  LED 1 is assigned a first special symbol memory lamp 643a, LED 2 is assigned a first special symbol memory lamp 643b, LED 3 is assigned a second special symbol memory lamp 644a, and LED 4 is assigned a second special symbol memory lamp 644b. Each is assigned. When the game ball won to the first starting port 2001 is not used in the special symbol fluctuation display, the first special symbol memory display 643 lights or blinks with the number of the game balls won as the number of reserves. Yes. Specifically, the first special symbol memory lamp 643a is turned on when the holding ball (starting memory) is one ball, the first special symbol memory lamp 643b is turned off, and the first special symbol memory when the holding ball is two balls. When both the indicators 643 are lit and the number of the holding balls is three, the first special symbol memory lamp 643a blinks and the first special symbol memory lamp 643b is lit, and when the number of the holding balls is four, the first special symbol memory display Both devices 643 flash. On the other hand, when the game ball won to the second starting port 2002 is not used in the special symbol change display, the second special symbol memory display 644 is turned on or blinking with the number of the game balls won as the holding number. It has become. Specifically, the second special symbol memory lamp 644a is turned on when the holding ball (starting memory) is one ball, the second special symbol memory lamp 644b is turned off, and the second special symbol memory when the holding ball is two balls. When both of the indicators 644 are turned on and the number of the holding balls is three, the second special symbol memory lamp 644a flashes and the second special symbol memory lamp 644b is lit, and when the number of the holding balls is four, the second special symbol memory display Both units 644 flash.

  Further, a normal symbol display 645 is assigned to the LED 5. The LED 5 is an LED capable of lighting red / green / orange, and can be turned on by combining these red / green / orange. The LED 5 displays the lit color as a normal symbol so that when a game ball passes through a gate 2201 of a gate member 2200 described later, a predetermined normal symbol is displayed in a variable manner.

  Further, a normal symbol memory display 646 is assigned to each of the LEDs 6 to 9. When the game ball that has passed through the gate 2201 is not used in the normal symbol fluctuation display (when the normal symbol display is performed on the normal symbol display 645 and when the movable piece 2005 is opened / closed) The game symbol which is not used for the normal symbol fluctuation display immediately after passing 2201) is turned on by the normal symbol memory display 646 with the number of the game balls passed as the holding number. Specifically, the normal symbol memory lamp 646a is turned on when the holding ball is one ball, and the normal symbol memory lamps 646b to 646d are turned off. When the holding ball is two balls, the normal symbol memory lamps 646a and 646b are turned on. The normal symbol memory lamps 646c and 646d are turned off, the normal symbol memory lamps 646a to 646c are turned on when the holding ball is three balls, the normal symbol memory lamp 646b is turned off, and the normal symbol memory indicator is displayed when the holding ball is four balls. All 646 lights up.

  Further, a gaming state indicator 647 is assigned to the LED 10. The LED 10 is an LED capable of lighting red / green / orange, and can be turned on by combining these red / green / orange. The LED 10 displays the lighting color as a gaming state, thereby notifying that the gaming state has a probability variation or a small hit.

  Further, a 2-round display lamp 648a is assigned to the LED 11, and a 15-round display lamp 648b is assigned to the LED 12. As described above, the 2-round display lamp 648a lights and notifies that the number of times (rounds) that the grand prize winning opening 2003 is in the open state from the closed state is two, while the 15-round display is displayed. The lamp 648b lights up and notifies that there are 15 rounds.

  Thus, the segment indicators SEG1, SEG2, LED1 to LED12 mounted on the function display board 640a are the first special symbol indicator 641, the second special symbol indicator 642, the first special symbol memory indicator 643, A second special symbol memory display 644, a normal symbol display 645, a normal symbol memory display 646, a game status indicator 647, and a round indicator 648 are assigned to each segment display SEG1, which displays various functions. SEG2, LED1 to LED12, that is, the first special symbol display 641, the second special symbol display 642, the first special symbol storage display 643, the second special symbol storage display 644, the normal symbol display 645, the normal symbol storage The display 646, the game status display 647, and the round display 648 are integrated on the function display board 640a. That.

  In addition, the first special symbol display 641 and the second special symbol display 642 each variably display the jackpot gaming state as a special symbol, so the first special symbol storage display 643, the second special symbol storage display 644, Differentiating from the normal symbol display 645, the normal symbol storage display 646, the gaming state display 647, and the round display 648, segment indicators SEG1 and SEG2 different from the LED1 to LED12 assigned to them are used to display alphanumeric characters and graphics. Etc. are variably displayed as special symbols.

  The sum of the number of LEDs 6 to 9 assigned to the normal symbol memory display 646 and the number of LEDs 11 and 12 assigned to the round display 648 is a fixed value 6.

  By the way, the function display board 640a is fixed to the cover member 640b with screws (not shown), and the cover member 640b is attached from the back surface of the front component member 601 of the game board 4 with screws (not shown). The front component 601 is provided with segment display openings 601c at positions corresponding to the segments SEG1 and SEG2 of the function display board 640a, so that the contents displayed by these segment displays SEG1 and SEG2 can be visually recognized. ing.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 87, the front component member 601 is provided with LED insertion holes 601d at positions corresponding to the LEDs 1 to 12 of the function display board 640a, and the cover member 640b is connected to the front component member 601. LED1 to LED12 do not interfere with the game board 4 when being attached to the back surface of the game board. These LED insertion holes 601d are formed in a cylindrical shape so that the lights of the LEDs 1 to 12 that are turned on or blinking are not mistaken for the lights of the adjacent LEDs that are turned on or blinked. The contents displayed by the segment indicators SEG1 and SEG2 and the contents displayed by turning on or blinking the LEDs 1 to 12 are printed on a function display sticker 649 described later. The front component member 601 is provided with a function display seal pasting portion 601e to which the function display seal 649 is pasted. In addition, a concave portion 601f is formed in the function display seal pasting portion 601e. The function display seal 649, which is pasted by inserting a tool such as a flat-blade screwdriver, into the recess 601f, is easily peeled off. Here, in order to make it easy to peel off the function display seal 649, it is conceivable to provide a protrusion on the function display seal 649. However, when the door frame 5 is opened and closed from the main body frame 3, the protrusion is pulled for some reason. The function display sticker 649 may be peeled off from the function display sticker pasting portion 601e. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the function display sticker 601e is formed in the function display sticker 601e so that the function display sticker 649 does not peel from the function display sticker 601e when the door frame 5 is opened and closed from the main body frame 3. ing.

[1-3A-4. Function display sticker]
Next, as shown in FIG. 88, the function display sticker 649 in the gaming machine 4 is printed on the surface by grouping it into groups Grp1 to Grp3 for each function display, and in the non-game area of the game board 4. It is affixed to a function display seal affixing portion 601e formed on a certain front component 601.

  As shown in FIG. 88, the group Grp1 includes a first special symbol display 641 and a first special symbol storage display 643. The first special symbol display 641 and the first special symbol storage display 643 is divided and printed on the function display sticker 649 in a state surrounded by a solid line SL1. The area surrounded by the solid line SL1 is displayed in the first special symbol display 641 and the first special symbol memory so that the display by the first special symbol display 641 and the lighting or blinking by the first special symbol memory display 643 can be visually recognized. The position corresponding to the display 643 is transparent. In the group Grp1, various kinds of information related to the special symbol change display by winning the game ball to the first start port 2001 are displayed. For example, when a winning prize is received at the first starting port 2001, the first special symbol display 641 displays a predetermined special symbol in a variable manner, or the first special symbol memory display 643 sets the number of winning game balls as a holding number. Lights up or flashes. Thus, by grouping the first special symbol display 641 and the first special symbol storage display 643 into one group Grp1, the first special symbol display 641 and the first special symbol storage display 643 Can indicate to the player that various types of information related to the display of variation of the special symbol due to the winning of the game ball at the first start port 2001 are shown. As a result, the player sees the group Grp1 that is partitioned and printed on the function display sticker 649 in a state surrounded by the solid line SL1, and changes the special symbol due to the start winning of the game ball to the first start port 2001. Various information related to the display can be easily confirmed.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 88, the group Grp2 includes a second special symbol display 642 and a second special symbol storage display 644. These second special symbol display 642 and second special symbol storage The display unit 644 is partitioned and printed on the function display sticker 649 in a state surrounded by a solid line SL2. The area surrounded by the solid line SL2 is the second special symbol display 642, the second special symbol storage so that the display by the second special symbol display 642 and the lighting or blinking by the second special symbol storage display 644 can be visually recognized. The position corresponding to the display 644 is transparent. In this group Grp2, various types of information related to the special symbol variation display by winning a game ball to the second starting port 2002 are displayed. For example, when a game ball starts winning a prize at the second start opening 2002, the second special symbol display 642 displays a predetermined special symbol in a variable manner, or displays the number of winning game balls as the number of reserves in the second special symbol memory display. The device 644 lights up or flashes. Thus, by grouping the second special symbol display 642 and the second special symbol storage display 644 into one group Grp2, the second special symbol display 642 and the second special symbol storage display 644 are combined. Can indicate to the player that various types of information related to the special symbol variation display due to the winning of the game ball at the second starting port 2002 are shown. As a result, the player can visually observe the group Grp2 which is partitioned in a state surrounded by the solid line SL2 and printed on the function display sticker 649, thereby changing the special symbol display by winning the game ball at the second starting port 2002. Various information regarding can be easily confirmed.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 88, the group Grp3 includes a normal symbol display 645 and a normal symbol storage display 646, and a solid line SL3 that allows the normal symbol display 645 and the normal symbol storage display 646 to be visually recognized. And is printed on the function display sticker 649. In the area surrounded by the solid line SL3, the positions corresponding to the normal symbol display 645 and the normal symbol storage display 646 are transparent so that the lighting by the normal symbol display 645 and the lighting by the normal symbol storage display 646 can be visually recognized. It has become. As described above, the normal symbol display unit 645 variably displays whether the movable piece 2005 is opened or closed as a predetermined normal symbol. When the movable piece 2005 is changed from the closed state to the open state, the game ball is moved to the second start port 2002. It becomes easy to win. Therefore, the normal symbol display 645 includes a first special symbol display 641, a first special symbol storage display 643, a second special symbol display 642, a second special symbol storage display 644, and a normal symbol storage display. Stars are printed so that they can be distinguished from the game display 646, the game status display 647, and the round display 648. In this group Grp3, various information related to the gate 2201 can also be displayed. For example, when a game ball passes through the gate 2201, the normal symbol display unit 645 displays a predetermined normal symbol in a variable manner, or the normal symbol storage display unit 646 lights up with the number of game balls passed as a holding number. As described above, the normal symbol display 645 and the normal symbol storage display 646 are grouped into one group Grp3, so that the normal symbol display 645 and the normal symbol storage display 646 can perform various operations related to the normal symbol variation display. The player can be informed that the information is shown. As a result, the player can easily confirm various information related to the variation display of the normal symbol by visually observing the group Grp3 which is partitioned in a state surrounded by the solid line SL3 and printed on the function display sticker 649.

  Furthermore, at the positions corresponding to the game status display 647 and the round display 648, as shown in FIG. 88, the game status display 647 and the round display 648 are surrounded by solid lines SL4 to SL6 that can be visually recognized. It is partitioned and printed. In the area surrounded by the solid lines SL4 to SL6, the positions corresponding to the game status indicator 647 and the round indicator 648 are transparent so that the lighting by the game status indicator 647 and the round indicator 648 can be visually recognized. In order to make it easy to understand the maximum number of rounds, the round indicator 648 is printed with a value 2 which is the maximum number of rounds at a position corresponding to the 2-round display lamp 648a, and a position corresponding to the 15-round display lamp 648b. Is printed with a value 15 which is the maximum number of rounds. As described above, the game state indicator 647 displays the lighting color as the game state, thereby notifying that the game state has a probability variation or a small hit, and the two-round display lamp 648a is displayed by the big prize opening 2003. The fact that the number of times (rounds) from the closed state to the open state (round) is 2 is turned on and notified, and the 15-round display lamp 648b lights and notifies that the round is 15 times. Thus, the player can easily check the gaming state by visually observing the gaming state indicator 647 that is partitioned and printed on the function display sticker 649 in a state surrounded by the solid line SL4. By visually observing the two-round display lamp 648a that is partitioned and printed on the function display sticker 649, it is possible to easily confirm whether or not the maximum number of rounds is two. Whether or not the maximum number of rounds is 15 can be easily confirmed by visually observing the 15-round display lamp 648b which is partitioned and printed on the function display sticker 649.

  In the present embodiment, as described above, the groups Grp1 to Grp3 are partitioned and surrounded by solid lines SL1 to SL6 and printed on the function display sticker 649. The position corresponding to 648 is partitioned and printed in a state surrounded by solid lines SL4 to SL6 that can be visually recognized by the game status display 647 and the round display 648.

  As described above, the function display seal 649 is grouped so that the functions of the segment display units SEG1, SEG2, LED1 to LED12, which are collectively mounted on the function display board 640a shown in FIG. 87, are grouped as groups Grp1 to Grp3. The contents are printed and partitioned. In addition, a star symbol is printed on the normal symbol display 645 or the like, and even if the contents displayed by the segment displays SEG1, SEG2, LED1 to LED12 are collectively printed on the function display sticker 649, their meanings are displayed. It can be easily understood.

  The correspondence between such functions and the printed contents is printed on the function display sticker 649 as a sticker management number 649a as shown in FIG. 88 and 89, this seal management number 649a is printed at a position that is difficult to see from the game window 101 through the game window 101 when the door frame 5 is closed to the main body frame 3. It is designed not to convey unnecessary information to the player. In addition, the concave portion 601f provided in the function display sticker pasting portion 601e is also formed at a position that is difficult to see through the game window 101 when the door frame 5 is closed to the main body frame 3, as shown in FIGS. This makes it difficult for the player to visually recognize the recess 601f.

  Further, the seal management number 649a is used to prevent a worker of a manufacturer who manufactures the pachinko machine 1 from erroneously attaching a function display seal of another specification when the pachinko machine 1 is assembled. The seal management number 649a is also used for inventory management of the function display sticker 649, and modes such as the group Grp1 to the group Grp3 are managed in association with the seal management number 649a. Thereby, when the seal management number 649a is examined, the stock of the function display sticker 649 corresponding to the seal management number 649a can be known.

  Here, with the recent shortening of the life cycle of the pachinko machine, the development period of the pachinko machine has been shortened. For this reason, in the present embodiment, for example, a 2-round display lamp and a 15-round display lamp for lighting and informing that the number of times (rounds) that the winning prize opening 2003 is changed from the closed state to the open state is 2 times and 15 times. In addition to adding 5 round display lamps and 8 round display lamps that light up and notify that the number of rounds is 5 or 8, depending on the case of reducing the number of starting ports from two to one, etc. The specification change of the pachinko machine 1 can be dealt with by using a common function display board 640a. In order to change the contents printed on the function display sticker in accordance with the specification change of the pachinko machine 1 as described above, the functions of the segment display units SEG1, SEG2, LED1 to LED12, the contents printed on the function display sticker, Is printed on the function display sticker as a sticker management number. Thereby, for example, the manufacturer of the pachinko machine 1 determines whether the specifications of the pachinko machine 1 correspond to the function display sticker 649 before the line operator attaches the function display sticker 649 to the game board 4. The seal management number 649a can be confirmed by visual observation, and the function display seal 649 that does not correspond to the specifications of the pachinko machine 1 can be prevented from being attached. Note that the function display seal 649 is a seal, and there is no work process for applying an adhesive or the like to the back surface of the function display seal 649, which contributes to improvement in productivity.

[1-3B. Hitting ball launcher]
Next, the ball hitting device 650 will be described with reference to FIGS. 90 to 95. FIG. 90 is an overall perspective view (A) of the hit ball launching device 650, a perspective view (B) with the launch motor portion removed, and FIG. 91 is an exploded perspective view of the hit ball launching device 650, FIG. These are the front view (A) which shows the relationship between the hit ball launcher 650 and the launch rail 515, and the perspective view (B) of the launch motor part, and FIG. 93 is the hit ball launch in the state where the operation handle 410 is not operated. 94 is a rear view showing the relationship between the device 650 and the firing rail 515, and FIG. 94 is a rear view showing the relationship between the ball hitting device 650 and the firing rail 515 in a state where the operation handle portion 410 is being operated. 95 is a plan view (A), a front view (B), a perspective view (C) from the front, and a cross-sectional view taken along the line A-A (D) of the front view (B) of the slide member 710 provided in the ball hitting device 650. It is.

  The hitting ball launching device 650 pivotally supports a hitting ball rod 687 on the firing base frame 651 and attaches a shot motor 695 for reciprocating rotation to the hitting ball rod 687 to the firing base frame 651, and further hits the hitting ball rod 687. The firing base frame 651 is provided with a slide rod 677 and a slide member 710 that adjust the urging force of the urging spring 684 that imparts the urging force that returns to the position.

  More specifically, as shown in FIG. 91, the launch base frame 651 is molded into a horizontally long rectangular shape with a synthetic resin, and a bearing in which a bearing 689 of a ball striking rod 687 is fitted at the approximate center thereof. A cylinder 652 is formed, and rubber stopper members 653 and 654 for restricting the firing origin position of the hitting ball 687 are attached and fixed to the upper part and the side thereof. That is, the rubber stopper members 653 and 654 receive the impact of the hitting ball rod 687 when the hitting ball rod 687 returns to the firing origin position by the biasing force of the biasing spring 684. In addition, a slide guide hole 655 having a horizontally elongated groove is formed on the rear side of the firing base frame 651 (on the opposite side of the portion corresponding to the lower side of the firing rail 515), and a slide member storage space is formed below the slide guide hole 655. 656 is formed.

  The slide guide hole 655 is configured to guide a slide movement of the slide rod 677 by inserting a guide locking piece 678 protruding from an upper rear end of a slide rod 677 described later. The slide member 710 is accommodated so as to be movable in the left-right direction. The slide guide of the front portion of the slide rod 677 is guided by a guide bush 681 fixed to a guide hole 680 formed in front of the slide rod 677 in a stop hole 662 formed in the firing base frame 651 by a set screw 682. This is done by penetrating through. In addition, a rectangular connection opening 664 is formed on the bottom surface of the slide member storage space 656 as shown in FIG.

  Further, a hook portion is formed on the front portion of the upper side of the firing base frame 651 with respect to the main body of the firing base frame 651, and an operating piece opening 657 is formed in the hook portion above the bearing cylinder 652. Yes. In this working piece opening 657, a weight 173 of a ball feeding member 172 (see FIG. 18) provided facing the hitting ball supply port 171b (see FIG. 18) on the downstream side of the dish unit 300 of the door frame 5. Is provided on a mounting portion 660 that protrudes from the rear upper part of the opening edge of the working piece opening 657 by a stop pin 659. The operating piece 658 is formed in a “te” shape, the rear end portion of the upper side thereof is pivotally supported by a stop pin 659, and the base plate rotates integrally with the ball striking rod 687 from the pivotal support portion to the arc portion below. 690 is in contact with the operating piece abutting portion 693 provided in a projecting manner at 690, and the upper side portion swings the ball feeding member 172 in conjunction with the reciprocating motion of the hitting ball rod 687. One hit ball that flows out from 171b is supplied to the launch position of launch rail 515 one by one.

  Further, on the firing base frame 651, motor mounting bosses 661 for fixing a motor cover 694 containing the firing motor 695 are projected in a total of three locations, two at the rear lower part and one at the front upper part. At the same time, a swinging piece boss 663 into which a shaft hole 673 at the lower end of the swinging piece 672 connected to the slide member 710 is inserted in a protruding manner is provided at the lower rear of the slide member storage space 656. ing.

  A metal plate 665 is attached to the above-described launch base frame 651 so that the hit ball launcher 650 has high rigidity. Therefore, the metal plate 665 has through-holes 666, 667, 668, 669, which correspond to the bearing cylinder 652, the lower rubber stopper member 653, the slide guide hole 655, the guide bush 681, and the swing piece boss 663, respectively. A horizontal oblong through hole 670 through which the connecting convex portion 712 of the slide member 710 passes is also formed. In the metal plate 665 configured as described above, after the slide member 710 is stored in the slide member storage space 656, each of the through holes 666 to 671 has the corresponding members 652, 653, 655, 681, 712, 663. It is fixed to the firing base frame 651 by being brought into close contact with the firing base frame 651 so as to penetrate or match with the screws.

  The tip of the swing piece boss 663 of the firing base frame 651 to which the metal plate 665 is attached protrudes from the through hole 671, and the shaft hole 673 of the swing piece 672 is inserted into the head portion. The swing piece 672 is pivotally supported so as to be swingable about the lower end. As shown in FIG. 91, the swinging piece 672 is formed in a vertically long bowl shape, a shaft hole 673 is formed at the lower end thereof, and the connecting convex portion 712 of the slide member 710 is inserted in the middle thereof. The connecting hole 674 is formed. The front surface above the connection hole 674 is an abutting portion 675 that abuts one end (rear end) of the slide rod 677. Accordingly, the rocking piece 672 is inserted into the rocking piece boss 663 and the connecting hole 674 is inserted into the connecting convex portion 712 of the slide member 710 protruding from the through hole 670 to connect the pin 676 with washer. The rocking piece 672 is attached to the firing base frame 651 by being fixed to the convex portion 712. The attached swinging piece 672 swings at the upper part around the lower end as the slide member 710 slides.

  Further, a horizontally long bowl-shaped slide bar 677 is attached to the upper front surface of the metal plate 665 so as to be slidable in the left-right direction. That is, an L-shaped guide locking piece 678 projecting from the rear upper part of the slide rod 677 is engaged with the through hole 668 of the metal plate 665, and the guide elongated hole 680 formed in front of the slide rod 677 is engaged. The guide bush 681 having the set screw 682 is passed through, and the set screw 682 is fixed in the set hole 662. The slide hook 677 is slidably mounted on the firing base frame 651 via the metal plate 665 by the guide locking piece 678 and the through hole 668, and the guide long hole 680 and the guide bush 681. The slide rod 677 is formed with a contacted portion 679 that contacts the contact portion 675 of the swing piece 672 described above at one end (rear end), and one end of the biasing spring 684 at the other end (front end). A spring locking portion 683 for hooking the locking ring 685 is projected.

  A bearing cylinder 652 of the launch base frame 651 to which the metal plate 665 is attached protrudes from the through hole 666, and the bearing cylinder 652 is fitted so that the bearing 689 of the hitting ball rod 687 does not fall off. The lower end portion of the hit ball 687 is fixed to the shaft of the bearing 689 and, at the same time, the base plate 690 is fixed. An operating piece abutting portion 693 that abuts against the operating piece 658 protrudes from the front back surface side of the base plate 690, and a spring for latching the locking ring 686 at the other end of the biasing spring 684 on the front front surface thereof. A locking portion 692 is projected, and a motor contact projection 691 that engages with and disengages from the motor cam 697 of the firing motor 695 is projected from the rear front surface. A synthetic resin rivet tip 688 is fixed to the upper end of the hitting ball 687, and the firing position formed by the lower end portion of the firing rail 515 and the firing position stopper 702 secured above the tip 688. I am going to rush into.

  On the other hand, a firing motor 695 housed in a motor cover 694 is attached to the above-described motor mounting boss 661 of the firing base frame 651. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 92 (B), the motor cover 694 includes a cylindrical portion formed so as to accommodate the firing motor 695 therein, and an enlarged motor mounting boss 661 that extends forward of the cylindrical portion. And an anti-rotation preventing cam 698 and a motor cam 697 at the tip of the motor shaft 696 of the firing motor 695 that are integrally formed and are accommodated inside the cylindrical portion. Is fixed.

  A large number of reverse teeth are formed on the outer periphery of the reverse rotation prevention cam 698, and engages with a stopper piece 700 (see FIG. 93) fixed to the stopper piece mounting boss 701 so as to be swingable. The reverse rotation of 695 is prevented. This is to prevent the motor cam 697 from rotating in the opposite direction so that the motor cam 697 and the motor abutting protrusion 691 mesh with each other and the ball hitting device 650 cannot be driven. Further, the motor cam 697 is formed in a ball shape, and reciprocates the hitting ball rod 687 while being engaged with and disengaged from the motor abutting protrusion piece 691 as the firing motor 695 rotates. When the motor cover 694 is attached to the motor attachment boss 661, as shown in FIG. 90A, the main structure of the ball hitting device 650 is covered as seen from the rear surface.

  By the way, as shown in FIG. 95, the slide member 710 housed in the slide member housing space 656 and slidably moving is formed in a rectangular parallelepiped shape with the rear open, and an elliptical oval convex portion 711 projects on the front surface thereof. Further, a circular connecting convex portion 712 is projected from the rear position of the elliptical convex portion 711. Further, on both the upper and lower surfaces, slide contact protrusions 713 having an arc cross section are provided at both ends so as to easily slide in the slide member storage space 656. On the other hand, the space of the slide member 710 formed in a rectangular parallelepiped shape is an insertion space 714 into which the slide protrusion 183 of the joint unit 180 provided at the lower back of the door frame 5 is inserted.

  The insertion space 714 has a first inclined surface 715 formed on the front side of the side wall in the sliding direction, and protrudes from the inside of the upper surface and the lower surface to the inside slightly behind the first inclined surface 715. In addition, a clamping piece 716 is formed in which a predetermined interval is formed between the tips of each other. A second inclined surface 717 is also formed on the front side of the sandwiching piece 716 so as to incline in a C shape when viewed from the side. Thus, in the state where the slide protrusion 183 is inserted into the insertion space 714, as shown in FIG. 95 (B), one end of the slide protrusion 183 on the inclined side 183a side abuts against the front side wall in the slide direction. In this state, it is inserted between the upper and lower clamping pieces 716. In addition, although the space part 718 is formed in the side of the insertion space 714 of the slide member 710, this space part 718 is not necessarily playing a function.

  Thus, the slide member 710 configured as described above is an ellipse formed on the bottom surface of the slide member storage space 656 as shown in FIG. 92A in the state of being stored in the slide member storage space 656. The insertion space 714 is formed so as to face the connection opening 664 having a shape, and the slide member 710 is in contact with one space inner wall of the slide member storage space 656 (in FIG. 92A, the left space inner wall Although it is illustrated as being in contact, in a normal state, it is in a state of being in contact with the inner wall of the right space.

  First, the relationship of adjusting the strength of the urging spring 684 of the slide member 710 and the ball hitting device 650 will be described. 93, the swing piece 672 connected to the connecting projection 712 of the slide member 710 is in a substantially vertical state. For this reason, the slide rod 677 in contact with the swing piece 672 is also urged in one direction (left side in FIG. 93) by the biasing force of the bias spring 684 and the contact portion 675 of the swing piece 672. The contacted portion 679 of the slide rod 677 is in contact. In this state, since the biasing spring 684 is not tensioned, even if the hitting ball rod 687 is reciprocatingly rotated following the rotation of the firing motor 695, the return force of the hitting ball rod 687 is weak, and the hit ball at the firing position is not elastic. Even if issued, the game area 605 of the game board 4 is not reached.

  On the other hand, when the slide member 710 moves in the other direction from the initial position inside the slide member storage space 656 (when moved toward the left inner wall in FIG. 92A), as shown in FIG. Since the swing piece 672 swings and tilts about the shaft hole 673 at the lower end, the slide rod 677 is moved in the other direction (right side in FIG. 94) by the contact between the contact portion 675 and the contacted portion 679. Slide towards you. Then, the biasing spring 684 locked to the spring locking portion 683 of the slide rod 677 is also tensioned and extended. In this state, since the biasing spring 684 is tensioned, the return force of the hitting ball rod 687 when the hitting ball rod 687 is reciprocally rotated following the rotation of the firing motor 695 is increased, and the hit ball at the firing position is increased. The game area 605 of the game board 4 is reached by being strongly bulleted. The strength of the impact force of the hit ball can be adjusted according to the amount of slide in the slide member storage space 656 of the slide member 710.

  As described above, by moving the slide member 710, it is possible to adjust the resilience by the hitting ball launching device 650. This is interlocked with the movement of the slide body 182 of the joint unit 180 that moves in accordance with the turning operation of the moving operation member 414. This point will be described with reference to FIG.

  As described above, when the rotation operation member 414 of the operation handle portion 410 of the handle device 400 is rotated, the slanting cam 416 fixed to the tip of the rotation shaft 415 is also rotated, so that the slide body of the joint unit 180 182 slides in one direction inside the joint unit mounting recess 110c. For this reason, the slide protrusion 183 protruding from the front surface of the slide body 182 also slides in the same direction. When the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the slide protrusion 183 of the slide body 182 passes through the connection opening 664 formed in the launching device mounting portion 520 of the main body frame 5 and inserts the slide member 710. It is inserted into the space 714. The insertion state in this case is a state in which one end side on the inclined side 183a side of the slide projecting piece 183 is in contact with the side wall in the sliding direction and is inserted between the upper and lower clamping pieces 716 as described above. . Therefore, when the slide protrusion 183 slides in one direction, the slide member 710 also slides in the same direction. At this time, as described above, since the slide rod 677 also slides as the slide member 710 slides, the biasing force of the biasing spring 684 can be adjusted. That is, by rotating the rotation operation member 414 of the handle device 400, the resilience of the hit ball of the hit ball launching device 650 can be adjusted.

  By the way, in this embodiment, since the handle device 400 is provided on the door frame 5 and the hitting ball launching device 650 is provided on the main body frame 3, the slide protrusion 183 of the handle device 400 is opened each time the door frame 5 is opened and closed. And the slide member 710 of the ball striking device 650 are linked or separated. However, in the present embodiment, as described above, by closing the door frame 5 with respect to the main body frame 3, the slide projecting piece 183 is automatically inserted into the insertion space 714 of the slide member 710, and the handle device 400. The ball striking device 650 is linked, and conversely, by opening the door frame 5 with respect to the main body frame 3, the slide protrusion 183 is separated from the insertion space 714 to separate the handle device 400 and the ball striking device 650. Therefore, the handle device 400 and the hitting ball launching device 650 can be linked and separated very easily as the door frame 5 is opened and closed. In particular, when the slide projecting piece 183 is inserted into the insertion space 714, even if the position of the slide projecting piece 183 is slightly shifted in the vertical direction, the second inclination of the sandwiching piece 716 projecting into the insertion space 714 is provided. The slide protrusion 183 is smoothly inserted into the clamping position by the surface 717.

  In some cases, a player may stuff the padding operation member 414 of the operation handle portion 410 and fix it at a position rotated to some extent. 5 may be opened and closed. Even in such a case, when the door frame 5 is opened, there is no problem because the slide projecting piece 183 is merely separated from the insertion space 714. However, when the door frame 5 is closed, the position of the slide projecting piece 183 is determined. Is slightly displaced in one direction, but the sliding member is accompanied with the closing operation of the door frame 5 by the cooperative action of the inclined side 183a of the sliding protrusion 183 and the first inclined surface 715 of the sliding member 710. The slide protrusion 183 and the slide member 710 are finally engaged while moving 710 in one direction. In other words, in the present embodiment, the operation handle device 400 and the hitting ball launching device 650 can be linked regardless of the rotation position of the rotation operation member 414 of the operation handle portion 410. It is.

[1-3C. Prize ball tank]
Next, the prize ball tank 720 attached to the upper part of the back surface of the main body frame 3 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. FIG. 96 is a perspective view (A), a plan view (B), and a side view (C) of the prize ball tank 720. As described above, the prize ball tank 720 is detachably attached to the tank attachment groove 550 (see FIG. 70) formed in the upper part of the back surface of the main body frame 3. Thus, the prize ball tank 720 is formed in a rectangular box shape, and when viewed from the front side of the pachinko machine 1, a notch 729 is formed in the front wall 721, and the bottom surface is formed from the upstream side wall 724 to the downstream side wall 723. A storage portion 728 is formed by a first inclined bottom surface 726 inclined toward the bottom and a second inclined bottom surface 727 inclined from the front wall 721 toward the discharge port 730 described below.

  In addition, a discharge port 730 is formed at the inclined lower end of the second inclined bottom surface 727, and this discharge port 730 protrudes outward from the rear wall 722 of the prize ball tank 720 when viewed from the front side of the pachinko machine 1. In this manner, the downstream side wall 723 and the rear wall 722 are formed so as to be surrounded by a discharge port projecting wall 725 that connects the U-shape. Further, on both outer sides of the front wall 721 of the prize ball tank 720, attachment flanges 733 that engage with the tank attachment groove 550 are formed, and the main frame 3 is arranged on the back side of the bottom surface of the prize ball tank 720. Placement contact pieces 731 and 732 for placement and contact with the four side walls 543 project, and a ball for attaching a ball leveling member 744 described later to the lower part of the rear surface wall 722 on the upstream side of the prize ball tank 720. A leveling attachment shaft 735 is protruded. Further, an overflow preventing member 734 for preventing the ball from jumping is detachably attached to the rear wall 722 and the upstream side wall 724 of the prize ball tank 720 excluding the discharge port 730.

  In the prize ball tank 720 configured as described above, the mounting flange 733 is attached to the tank mounting groove 550 of the main body frame 3 so as to be inserted from above, and the mounting contact pieces 731 and 732 are attached to the main body frame 3. It abuts on the fourth side wall 543. As a result, the prize ball tank 720 is placed and attached to the upper part on the back side of the main body frame 3. In this attached state, as shown in FIG. 74, the prize ball tank 720 is stored through the notch 729 of the front wall 721. The portion 728 and the relief recess 551 formed on the back surface of the main body frame 3 communicate with each other, and as shown in FIG. 4, the discharge port 730 faces the upstream end of the tank rail member 740 to be described next. ing. Therefore, in the prize ball tank 720, the width in the front-rear direction of the storage portion 728 that stores the sphere (the storage space portion corresponding to the first inclined bottom surface 726 and the second inclined bottom surface 727) is the second side wall 541 of the main body frame 3. It forms so that it may become substantially the same as the width | variety of the front-back direction to -4th side wall 543, and is mounted in the upper part to those side walls 541-543.

  Further, as described above, the first side wall 540 to the fourth side wall 543 of the main body frame 3 are deeply formed so as to cover the rear projecting space of the peripheral part of the game board 4, so that the side walls 541 to 541 are formed. Although the depth of the storage portion of the prize ball tank 720 placed on the upper part of the 543 is shallower than that of the conventional storage tank, the prize ball tank 720 is stored even if the prize ball is stored and increases in weight. Is supported by the side walls 542 to 543 of the main body frame 3, the stored sphere can be smoothly guided to the discharge port 730 without the inclined bottom surfaces 726 and 727 being deformed. Further, since the discharge port 730 is provided at a position outside the rear wall 722 of the prize ball tank 720, the flow of the sphere stored in the storage portion 728 flows outward from the second inclined bottom surface 727. It is configured. For this reason, as compared with the prize ball tank in which a part of the inclined bottom surface is provided with an opening as a discharge port as in the prior art, a spherical break-up protrusion for eliminating the clogging is formed in the storage portion near the discharge port. In addition, it is possible to obtain a structure in which ball clogging hardly occurs.

  In the present embodiment, as described above, the award ball tank 720 is placed on the outside of the upper portion of the rear side walls 541 to 543 that accommodates the rearward projecting portions of the gaming apparatus, and the award is given. Since the discharge port 730 of the ball tank 720 protrudes outward from the rear wall 722 of the storage unit, the tank rail member 740 is disposed outside the storage unit of the prize ball tank 720 (as viewed from the front of the pachinko machine 1). Since the tank rail member 740 and the storage portion 728 of the prize ball tank 720 do not overlap in the vertical direction, the rear protrusion of the gaming device provided on the back surface of the gaming board 4 is stored. The upper sides of the rear side walls 541 to 543 can be projected rearward at a position close to the upper side of the main body frame 3, so that even if the rearward protruding portion of the gaming device protrudes at the upper side portion of the game board 4. It can be comfortably accommodated in the interior of the side walls 541 to 543.

  Further, regardless of whether or not the storage part 728 of the prize ball tank 720 is placed on the upper outer side of the rear side walls 541 to 543 that house the rearward projecting part of the gaming apparatus, the discharge port 730 is provided in the prize ball tank 720. Only the configuration of being provided at a position outside the rear wall 722 provides a unique effect that is not found in the conventional prize ball tank. This will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 97 is a plan view showing the pressure state of the sphere at the discharge port portion of the conventional prize ball tanks (A), (B) and the prize ball tank (C) according to the present embodiment. In the figure, normally, the balls stored in the prize ball tank 720 are stored and retained in the storage part of the prize ball tank 720. In this case, when the discharge port 730A is formed by opening a part of the inclined bottom surface of the storage portion as in the conventional prize ball tank, for example, as shown in FIG. In the case of a prize-ball tank in which a discharge port 730A is formed on the opposite side of FIG. 97, or a discharge port 730B is formed adjacent to the ball collapse projection 736B as shown in FIG. , 730B, the ball pressure is always applied to the discharge ports 730A, 730B from four directions by the pressure of the stored sphere and the reaction from the side wall of the prize ball tank based on the pressure.

  For this reason, the pressure between the spheres happens to be balanced due to the degree of sphere overlap, and even when the sphere on the downstream side flows out, a sphere-engaged state may occur at the outlets 730A and 730B, and the sphere may be clogged. On the other hand, in the prize ball tank 720 according to this embodiment, the discharge port 730 is provided at a position outside the rear wall 722 of the prize ball tank 720, so as shown in FIG. The pressure of the stored sphere in the discharge port 730 is a pressure from only two directions, that is, an action force directed from the storage portion toward the discharge port 730 and a reaction thereof, and does not receive pressure from four directions as in the prior art. For this reason, even if the sphere on the downstream side flows out, it is difficult to generate a sphere-engaged state at the discharge port 730 portion, and an excellent effect that sphere clogging does not occur can be achieved.

[1-3D. Tank rail member]
Next, the tank rail member 740 disposed below the prize ball tank 720 will be described with reference mainly to FIGS. FIG. 98 is a perspective view of the relationship between the prize ball tank 720, the tank rail member 740, the ball passage unit 770, the prize ball unit 800, and the full tank unit 900 as seen from the back side of the pachinko machine 1, and FIG. FIG. 100 is a perspective view of the relationship between the prize ball tank 720, the tank rail member 740, the ball passage unit 770, the prize ball unit 800, and the full tank unit 900, as viewed from the front side of the pachinko machine 1, and FIG. They are sectional drawing (A) and a top view (B) which show the relationship between the downstream part of the member 740, and the upstream part of the ball passage unit 770.

  As described above, the tank rail member 740 is detachably attached to the rail locking grooves 553 and 554 (see FIG. 70) of the upper rear wall 545 of the main body frame 3. Therefore, the tank rail member 740 is provided with a plurality of locking protrusions 749 that are inserted from above into the rail locking groove 553 on the left and right sides and the lower side of the rear side surface, and the upper side of the rear side surface. At the center, a hook-shaped locking protrusion 750 is provided so as to be hooked on the rail locking groove 554 from above. Thus, the tank rail member 740 is formed in an inclined bowl shape with an open upper surface, the upper surface of the upstream end faces the discharge port 730 of the prize ball tank 720, and the lower surface of the downstream end of the tank rail member 740 forms a ball passage unit 770 described in detail later. I'm here. Further, as shown in FIG. 4, the inside of the tank rail member 740 serves as a passage 742 through which spheres flow down in two rows by a partition wall 741.

  The bottom surface of the passage 742 is notched with a narrow groove, and foreign substances that roll along the passage 742 together with the ball fall downward from the narrow groove. Further, a metal plate (not shown) for removing static electricity is attached to the side wall of the passage 742, and the downstream end of the metal plate is connected to the above-described ground wire connector 557 (see FIG. 68). ing. For this reason, static electricity charged in the sphere flowing down the tank rail member 740 is grounded from the metal plate to the outside via the ground wire connector 557 via the ground connector of the power supply board 1136.

  In addition, an egg-shaped ball leveling member 744 having a weight on the slightly downstream side of the midstream region of the tank rail member 740 is swingably provided. The ball leveling member 744 is pivotally supported by the ball leveling mounting shaft 735 of the award ball tank 720 described above, and moves toward the two paths 742 in the tank rail member 740. The spheres that are suspended and flow down the respective passages 742 flow down in a plurality of stages in the vertical direction so as to be rectified so as to become one stage. Further, the upper surface of the tank rail member 740 on the downstream side from the installation position of the ball leveling member 744 is covered with a ball pressing plate 745. The ball holding plate 745 is formed in an inclined arc shape so that the ball that has not been made one step by the ball leveling member 744 is forced to one step.

  Further, a pair of alignment gears 747 are rotatably supported by shaft pins 748 at the downstream end of the tank rail member 740 so as to face the respective passages 742. The alignment gear 747 has a plurality of teeth formed on the outer periphery, and is fixed to the shaft pin 748 so that the pitch of the teeth in the pair of alignment gears 747 is shifted by a half pitch. For this reason, when the upper part of the sphere that has flowed down each passage 742 of the tank rail member 740 flows downstream while meshing with the teeth of the alignment gear 747, the spheres in the two rows of passages 742 are alternately sent one by one. It will be. In this case, as shown in FIG. 100, the spheres flowing through the respective passages 742 are guided in the central direction along the inclined surfaces 743 formed in the lower portions of the two rows of passages 742 while meshing with the alignment gears 747, During the guidance, the spheres from the two rows of passages 742 fall in one row alternately at the upper end inlet 773 of the ball drop passage 772 of the ball passage unit 770 described below. The alignment gear 747 is covered with an arcuate gear cover 746 on its upper surface.

[1-3E. Ball passage unit]
Next, the ball path unit 770 for guiding the balls dropped from the tank rail member 740 in a line to the prize ball unit 800 will be described with reference mainly to FIGS. 101 is an exploded perspective view showing the relationship between the main body frame 3 and the ball passage unit 770 and the prize ball unit 800, and FIG. 102 is a rear view showing the relationship between the ball passage unit 770 and the prize ball unit 800. 103 is a perspective view of the ball path unit 770 as viewed from the back, FIG. 104 is a front view of the ball path unit 770, and FIG. 105 is a connection structure of the ball path unit 770 and the prize ball unit 800. It is a side view for demonstrating. In FIG. 102 and FIG. 103, the prize ball unit 800 portion has a gear cover 866, an aluminum heat sink 841, and a unit sub plate 825 removed, and the ball passage portion formed in the unit base body 801 is drawn in an easy-to-understand manner. It is. However, the gears and the like are indicated by alternate long and short dash lines for easy understanding of the relationship with the ball passage.

  In the spherical passage unit 770 of this example, a spherical drop passage 772 is formed by a pair of bent passage walls 771 bent to the back surface (the surface seen from the back surface) of a substantially rectangular plate material. As shown in FIG. 100 (A), the ball drop passage 772 communicates with the front / rear bent passage portion 772a whose upstream is bent in the front / rear direction (depth direction when viewed from the back) and the front / rear bent passage portion 772a. Left and right bent passage portions 772b bent in the direction (left and right direction when viewed from the back), and a vertical passage portion 772c communicating with the left and right bent passage portions 772b and having a substantially vertical shape.

  As shown in FIG. 100 (A), the front / rear bent passage 772a is located at the center of the two rows of passages 742, as described above, because the position of the upper end inlet 773 dropping from the tank rail member 740 is the main body. Since it is in a position away from the surface of the upper rear wall 545 of the frame 3 and the shaft support side rear wall 546 to the back surface side, a winning ball guide projection protruding from the front / rear bent passage 772a and the shaft support side rear wall 546 561 and the ball dropping passage 772 are bent in the front-rear direction so as to be positioned close to the surface of the shaft-supporting rear wall 546. Further, as shown in FIG. 104, the left and right bent passage portions 772b are formed in a U-shape so as to be almost full of the width of the ball passage unit 770 in order to weaken the momentum of the sphere that has fallen from the tank rail member 740 to the front and rear bent passage portions 772a. It is formed by bending.

  Further, although the vertical passage portion 772c is formed in a substantially vertical shape, the vertical passage portion 772c is slightly curved and formed, and a notch portion 775 is formed in one bent passage wall 771 constituting the vertical passage portion 772c. A ball breakage detecting piece 776 whose upper end is supported by a support shaft 777 is attached to 775 so as to be swingable. A ball break switch 778 is attached to the side of the ball break detection piece 776, and an actuator 779 of the ball break switch 778 is in contact with the ball break detection piece 776. The ball break detection piece 776 and the ball break switch 778 constitute a ball break detection mechanism for detecting a ball break in the vertical passage portion 772c.

  Thus, when a ball is present in the vertical passage portion 772c, the ball piece detection piece 776 is pressed by the ball present in the vertical passage portion 772c and the actuator 779 is pushed to turn on the ball piece switch 778. When no ball is present in the portion 772c due to clogging or ball deficiency, the ball piece detecting piece 776 swings into the vertical passage portion 772c, and the actuator 779 turns off the ball piece switch 778. When the ball break switch 778 is turned off, the rotation of the payout motor 815 of the prize ball unit 800, which will be described later, stops and the payout of the prize ball is stopped.

  A stopper protrusion 780 is formed at the lower end of the notch 775 to prevent excessive swinging of the ball breakage detection piece 776 to the opposite side of the passage, and the ball passage unit 770 has a ball. A ball clogging insertion groove 781 is formed in the vertical passage portion 772 c corresponding to the cut detection piece 776. The ball clogging insertion groove 781 inserts a pin from the rear surface side of the ball passage unit 770 to prevent clogging of the ball breakage detection piece 776 when it is difficult to swing the ball breakage detection piece 776 due to ball clogging or the like. This is provided to eliminate the problem. Further, the other bent passage wall 771 facing the ball piece detecting piece 776 is formed in a bulging shape slightly toward the ball piece detecting piece 776 side. This is because when a ball is present in the vertical passage portion 772c, the ball break detection piece 776 is surely pressed to turn on the ball break switch 778.

  Further, a stop hole 782 and a positioning boss 783 are formed in the ball path unit 770 at a position avoiding the above-described ball drop path 772. The positioning boss 783 is engaged with a positioning pin 574 formed on the shaft support side rear wall 546 of the main body frame 3, and the stop hole 782 is similarly a passage unit formed on the shaft support side rear wall 546. This corresponds to the mounting boss 562. Thus, in order to attach the ball passage unit 770 to the main body frame 3, as shown in FIG. 101, the passage unit mounting boss 562 and the stop hole 782 are made to coincide with each other while the positioning boss 783 is engaged with the positioning pin 574. In this state, the screw 784 can be screwed from the stop hole 782. Further, the ball passage unit 770 is formed with a cover body engaging groove 785 that engages with an engaging piece of the cover body 1250 in the middle of one side, and is connected to the prize ball unit 800 at the lower part. A connecting lid member 786 is rotatably provided.

  As shown in FIG. 103, the connecting lid member 786 is configured by projecting a pair of passage walls 790 projecting in a circular arc shape on the back surface of a rectangular plate member, and the lower surface of the ball passage unit 770 The projecting shaft 789 as the rotating shaft projecting from the tip of the support piece 788 extending from the both ends of the connecting lid member 786 is fitted into the supporting projecting piece 787 serving as the shaft support projecting from the left and right ends of the connecting lid 786. Thus, it is pivotally supported. In addition, the connecting lid member 786 is extended below the spherical passage unit 770 by closing and the passage formed by the passage wall 790 and the downstream end of the spherical drop passage 772 communicate with each other (see FIG. 105B). The state shown in FIG. 105 and the state where the passage formed by the passage wall 790 and the downstream end of the ball drop passage 772 do not communicate with each other (the state shown in FIG. 105A). A guide projection 791 that guides the support piece 788 of the connecting lid member 786 when projecting from the opened state to the closed state projects from the lower end of the rear surface of the ball path unit 770.

  Thus, in a state where the ball passage unit 770 is fixed to the shaft support side rear wall 546 of the main body frame 3, and the prize ball unit 800 is also mounted on the shaft support side rear wall 546 as described later (FIG. 105). In the state shown in (A)), the connecting lid member 786 is closed and the rear surface thereof is locked by the locking elastic claw 820 provided in the prize ball unit 800, so that the ball drop path 772 of the ball path unit 770 and the prize ball The bent passage 803 of the unit 800 is communicated with the passage wall 790 so that a ball falling on the ball dropping passage 772 of the ball passage unit 770 can be guided to the bent passage 803 of the prize ball unit 800. The reason why the rotatable connecting lid member 786 is provided in the ball passage unit 770 is that the award ball unit 800 can be easily attached to and detached from the main body frame 3 as will be described later, and the attachment and detachment thereof is possible. This is to prevent the space formed between the ball path unit 770 and the prize ball unit 800 from being hindered from falling smoothly.

  Further, between the pair of bent passage walls 771 projecting from the ball passage unit 770, the projecting height is provided on the pivot side rear surface wall 546 of the main body frame 3 so as to gradually decrease toward the downstream side. By inserting the award ball guide protrusion 561, the upstream portion of the ball drop passage 772 is placed on the rear side so that the upper end inlet 773 of the ball drop passage 772 is positioned substantially at the lower center of the two rows of passages 742 of the tank rail member 740. It is formed as a front / rear bent passage portion 772a that bends in the front / rear direction when viewed from the side. Accordingly, in the configuration in which the balls flowing down in two rows by the pair of alignment gears 747 are alternately sent one by one to the prize ball unit 800 side, the balls are smoothly sent one by one to the prize ball unit 800 through the ball drop passage 772. Can do. Further, according to this configuration, since it is not necessary to form the ball drop passage 772 from an assembly of a plurality of members, the number of parts constituting the ball drop passage 772 can be reduced, and the ball drop passage 772 can be assembled. Workability can be improved.

  In addition, the sphere that has fallen from the tank rail member 740 in the front / rear bent passage portion 772a weakens its momentum by passing through the left / right bent passage portion 772b, and then is sent to the winning ball unit 800 through the vertical passage portion 772c. . In addition, the vertical passage portion 772c into which the ball is fed in a state where the momentum is weakened is provided with a ball break detection mechanism (a ball break detection piece 776 and a ball break switch 778) for detecting the ball break. Accordingly, it is possible to reliably detect a break in the ball drop passage 772, in other words, a break in the ball supplied to the winning ball unit 800 (a ball break).

[1-3F. Prize ball unit]
Next, the prize ball unit 800 disposed on the downstream side of the above-described ball path unit 770 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 106 is an exploded perspective view as seen from the back side of the prize ball unit 800, FIG. 107 is a rear view for explaining the relationship between the payout motor 815 and the sprocket 807 as a payout member, and FIG. FIG. 109 is a rear view for explaining the path and drive relationship of the prize ball unit 800, and FIG. 109 is a cross-sectional view taken along line AA of FIG.

  106, a prize ball unit 800 includes a unit base body 801 in which a bent path 803, a prize ball path 810, and a ball extraction path 811 forming a ball path by a pair of bent path walls 802, and a unit base body 801. A unit sub-plate 825 covering the rear surface of the unit sub-plate, an intra-prize ball relay terminal plate 830 attached to the upper surface (rear side) of the unit sub-plate 825, and a substantially central surface region (rear side region) of the unit sub-plate 825. And a gear cover 866 that covers the detection disk 850 (rotation transmission member). Hereinafter, these configurations will be sequentially described.

  The unit base body 801 is formed in a substantially rectangular plate shape (this plate portion may be referred to as a “bottom surface”), and a pair of bent passages projecting toward the plate-like unit sub plate 825 side. A bent passage 803 is formed by the wall 802. The bent passage wall 802 protrudes from the center of the upper part of the unit base body 801 to a substantially middle position on the downstream side at a distance slightly larger than the diameter of the sphere. It also serves as side walls on both ends of the unit base body 801 from the downstream end to the downstream end. In addition, the middle bent passage wall 802 is largely divided into left and right portions to form a distribution space 805 in which a sprocket 807 serving as a ball feed rotating body is arranged, and a unit base body 801 from the lower portion of the distribution space 805. A passage partition wall 809 is formed in a projecting manner so as to form a pair of bent passage walls 802 divided to the left and right until the downstream end.

  That is, the right and left bent passage walls 802 and the passage partition wall 809 on the downstream side from the middle form two passages on the left and right from the distribution space 805, and one passage constitutes the prize ball passage 810, The other passage forms a ball passage 811. The passage partition wall 809 is also largely divided into left and right, and a motor storage space 814 for storing the payout motor 815 is formed inside the divided passage partition wall 809. In other words, the payout motor 815 is stored in a motor storage space 814 formed at a position avoiding the ball passage (bending passage 803, prize ball passage 810, ball removal passage 811) and within the depth width dimension of the ball passage. Fixed. The bent passage 803 is formed in a meandering shape so as to weaken the pressure applied to the sprocket 807 of a sphere staying in the passage 803 and reaches the distribution space 805, but on the upstream side of the distribution space 805 An elliptical opening 804 is formed on the bottom surface. The opening 804 stores small dust or the like that has entered the bent passage 803, and can collect dust or the like that is collected when the prize ball unit 800 is removed from the main body frame 3.

  In the distribution space 805, a sprocket 807 serving as a payout member having a plurality of (three in the illustrated example) recesses in which a sphere fits on the outer periphery is rotatably disposed. A bearing cylinder 806 that pivotally supports the other end of the rotary shaft 808 to which the 807 is fixed is formed on the bottom surface of the distribution space 805. Further, the upper end portion of the passage partition wall 809 constituting the bottom portion of the distribution space 805 is formed in a concave arc shape along the rotation arc of the sprocket 807, and in the upstream portion of the prize ball passage 810 formed on one side thereof The counting switch 812 is detachably attached.

  The counting switch 812 is formed of a rectangular parallelepiped magnetic sensor having a circular passage hole through which a sphere passes, and a switch fitting recess 865 that matches the shape of the rear end is formed by a bent passage wall 802. By doing so, it can be easily attached and detached. A wiring (not shown) from the counting switch 812 is connected to a prize ball unit relay terminal plate 830 to be described later. Further, on the downstream side of the bent passage wall 802 constituting the prize ball passage 810, a locking claw that engages with a locking portion 860 formed on a passage lid plate portion 859 formed integrally with the unit sub plate 825. A plurality of 813 are formed. However, among the plurality of locking claws 813, the locking claw 813 that engages with one locking portion 860 at the lower end of the passage lid plate portion 859 is formed on the passage partition wall 809 side.

  In addition, a circular motor storage space 814 for storing the payout motor 815 is formed below the unit base body 801 and between the prize ball passage 810 and the ball removal passage 811. This motor storage space 814 The cylindrical main body of the payout motor 815 is accommodated in the inside. However, the payout motor 815 is fixed to the back side of the aluminum heat dissipating plate 841 attached below the unit sub plate 825 with a pair of mounting pieces 816 formed on the front surface thereof with screws 817. Then, in a state where the payout motor 815 is attached to the aluminum heat radiating plate 841 of the unit sub-plate 825, the motor shaft 818 of the payout motor 815 passes through the shaft insertion hole 842 drilled in the aluminum heat radiating plate 841. The gear 843 is fixed.

  In addition, a space in the depth width direction in which the bent passage 803, the prize ball passage 810, and the ball removal passage 811 described above are formed by covering the rear side of the unit base body 801 with the unit sub plate 825 and the aluminum heat sink 841. The cylindrical main body portion of the dispensing motor 815 is also accommodated in the inside. Since the motor storage space 814 for storing the payout motor 815 and the distribution space 805 in which the sprocket 807 described above is arranged are formed in an extremely close positional relationship in the vertical direction, the unit base body 801 in the vertical direction The length can be shortened, and as a result, the prize ball unit 800 can be made compact.

  Further, the unit base body 801 is provided with a guide protrusion 819 that guides the ball extracted at the lowermost end of the above-described ball extraction path 811 to the back side of the prize ball unit 800, and the guide protrusion 819 The guided sphere is guided to a ball outlet connecting passage 880 described later, and finally discharged to the outside of the pachinko machine 1 (a collection basket provided below the island platform). A locking elastic claw 820 that locks the connecting lid member 786 of the above-described ball passage unit 770 protrudes from the upper portion of the unit base body 801, and the prize ball unit 800 is mounted on the shaft support side of the main body frame 3. A mounting boss for connecting the button insertion engagement hole 821 and the hook-shaped engagement portion 824 for removably attaching to the rear wall 546 and the gear cover 866 with the unit base body 801 and the unit sub plate 825 sandwiched therebetween. 823 is provided.

  The button insertion engagement hole 821 is provided on one side of the upper portion of the unit base body 801, and a rod-like attachment / detachment button 822 is slidably attached in the depth width direction. Corresponds to the locking elastic claw 564 formed on the pivot side rear surface wall 546 of the main body frame 3. Further, as shown in FIG. 101, the rear end surface of the button insertion engagement hole 821 has a concave shape so that the distal end portion of the lock elastic claw 564 enters. The hook-shaped engaging portion 824 engages with an engaging protrusion 565 formed on the shaft support side rear wall 546 of the main body frame 3, and presses the prize ball unit 800 against the shaft support side rear wall 546. By pushing down downward, the hook-like engagement portion 824 and the engagement protrusion 565 are engaged. In this engaged state, the lock elastic claw 564 engages with the button insertion engagement hole 821, so that the upward movement of the prize ball unit 800 cannot be performed.

  Note that the hook-shaped engagement portions 824 are formed on the upper left and right of the unit base body 801. In addition, the mounting boss 823 for connecting the unit base body 801 and the gear cover 866 with the unit sub plate 825 sandwiched therebetween is long and protrudes toward the rear surface side, and penetrates through the unit sub plate 825. After passing through the hole 858, the unit base body 801 and the gear cover are held in a state where the unit sub-plate 825 is sandwiched by fitting a screw 868 from the surface of the gear cover 866 so as to correspond to the mounting hole 867 of the gear cover 866. 866.

  The configuration of the unit sub-plate 825 that covers the unit base body 801 will be described. The unit sub-plate 825 is a composite that covers the bent passage 803 portion, the distribution space 805 portion, and the prize ball passage 810 portion of the unit base body 801. A payout motor 815 is attached to a resin plate, and an aluminum heat dissipating plate 841 that covers the downstream portion of the ball extraction passage 811 is attached. On the front side (rear side) of the synthetic resin plate portion of the unit sub-plate 825, a relay board region 826 for attaching the prize ball unit relay terminal plate 830 is formed in the upper part, and a plurality of gears 843 are provided below the relay board area 826. A gear region 840 to which 844, 847 and the detection disk 850 are attached is formed.

  The relay board region 826 is formed in a substantially square shape, and mounting ribs 827 for placing the prize ball unit relay terminal plate 830 are projected along the square shape. An engaging groove portion 828 that engages with an engaging protrusion 836 of the substrate cover 835 is formed, and a locking claw portion 829 that engages with a locking protrusion 837 of the substrate cover 835 is formed at the center of the other side vertical side. Yes. The relay board region 826 is formed with a button insertion hole 834 through which the attachment / detachment button 822 is inserted and a mounting boss portion 832 for fixing the prize ball unit relay terminal plate 830 with screws (not shown). .

  The prize ball unit relay terminal plate 830 attached to the relay board area 826 is connected to the above-described counting switch 812, payout motor 815, and rotation angle switch 855, which will be described later, provided in the prize ball unit 800, as will be described later. It relays the wiring from the payout control board 1186 (see FIGS. 71 and 126). For this purpose, a plurality of connectors are provided, and the button insertion hole 833 through which the detachable button 822 is inserted and the mounting boss portion 832 are provided. Corresponding mounting holes 831 are formed. The award ball unit relay terminal plate 830 is placed on the placement rib 827 of the relay board region 826, and the mounting hole 831 and the mounting boss portion 832 are aligned with each other and fastened with screws (not shown). The intra-sphere relay terminal plate 830 can be fixed to the surface (rear surface) of the unit sub-plate 825.

  Further, the prize ball unit relay terminal plate 830 attached as described above is covered with the substrate cover 835. The substrate cover 835 is formed in a box shape having a substantially square front side open, and an engagement protrusion 836 is formed on the upper and lower bases of one vertical side, and a locking projection 837 is formed on the substantially central side surface of the other vertical side. ing. Further, a button opening 838 and a connection opening 839 are formed on the square vertical surface of the substrate cover 835. Thus, after the engagement protrusion 836 of the substrate cover 835 is inserted into the engagement groove portion 828 of the relay substrate region 826 and engaged, the engagement protrusion 837 and the engagement claw portion 829 are engaged with each other. The baseball unit relay terminal plate 830 can be covered with the substrate cover 835. On the other hand, when removing, the latching claw portion 829 is elastically deformed to release the engagement with the latching projection 837 and the substrate cover 835 is pulled diagonally forward to engage the engagement projection 836 and the engagement groove 828. The engagement with can be released. In the state where the substrate cover 835 is covered, the head of the detachable button 822 engaged with the button insertion engagement hole 821 passes through the button insertion holes 833 and 834 and slightly faces the outside from the button opening 838. Yes. Further, the wiring connected to the inward prize unit relay terminal plate 830 is drawn out from the connection opening 839 to the outside.

  Next, the gears 843, 844, 847 and the detection disk 850 provided in the gear region 840 formed in the unit sub plate 825 will be described. As described above, the tip of the motor shaft 818 of the payout motor 815 projects through the shaft insertion hole 842 formed in the aluminum heat radiating plate 841 of the unit sub plate 825 and protrudes to the surface (rear side) of the unit sub plate 825. The first gear 843 (drive gear) is fixed to the protruding portion. Above the first gear 843, a second gear 844 (rotation transmission gear) that meshes with the first gear 843 is press-fitted into the back surface (front side) of the gear cover 866 and drilled in the aluminum heat sink 841. A third gear 847 (rotation transmission gear) that meshes with the second gear 844 is provided above the second gear 844 so as to be rotatable on a shaft 845 that is supported at the other end in the shaft hole 846. A shaft 848 press-fitted in a shaft hole 849 formed in the shaft is rotatably provided. Further, above the third gear 847, a detection disk 850 having a gear portion 852 (driven gear) that meshes with the third gear 847 is rotatably provided on a rotary shaft 808 that supports the sprocket 807.

  As shown in FIG. 109, the tip end portion of the motor shaft 818 is loosely fitted in a receiving hole formed in the gear cover 866. One end of the rotary shaft 808 is supported by being press-fitted into a bearing cylinder 806 formed on the unit base body 801, and the other end is supported by a bearing hole formed on the gear cover 866. The sprocket 807 is rotatably supported in the distribution space 805 through a shaft through hole 864 formed slightly below the center of the region 840, and detected in the space formed by the unit sub plate 825 and the gear cover 866. A disk 850 is rotatably supported. However, as shown in FIG. 109, since the rear end portion of the sprocket 807 is engaged with the center front surface portion of the detection disk 850, the sprocket 807 and the detection disk 850 are integrated with each other about the rotation shaft 808. It is designed to rotate. Therefore, when the dispensing motor 815 is driven to rotate, the rotation is transmitted to rotate the sprocket 807 via the first gear 843, the second gear 844, the third gear 847, and the gear portion 852 of the detection disk 850.

  The outer periphery of the detection disk 850 is formed to be slightly larger than the circle of the gear portion 852, and the outer peripheral portion protruding outward from the gear portion 852 has the same number as the recesses of the sprocket 807 (in the case of illustration). 3) detection notches 851 are formed. This detection notch 851 is detected by a light projection / reception type rotation angle switch 855 (rotation position detection means) provided on a sensor substrate 854 sandwiched and supported by a substrate mounting portion 857 formed on the surface of the unit sub-plate 825. It is. The rotation angle switch 855 is for monitoring whether or not the sprocket 807 is rotating normally by detecting the number of detection notches 851 within a predetermined interval during the payout operation. If abnormal rotation is detected by the rotation angle switch 855 (in many cases, the ball is engaged with the sprocket 807), the sprocket 807 is rotated forward and backward a predetermined number of times to eliminate the abnormal state (for example, the ball engagement state). To do. Note that the number of balls actually paid out is detected by the counting switch 812 provided in the prize ball passage 810 and used for counting. As shown in FIG. 109, the other end side of the sensor substrate 854 is also sandwiched between substrate mounting portions formed on the gear cover 866.

  As described above, of the plurality of gears provided in the gear region 840, only the second gear 844 is rotatably provided on the rotary shaft 845 that is press-fitted into the gear cover 866 side. The cover 866 is formed with a mounting hole 867 that is provided at a position corresponding to the tip of the mounting boss 823 that protrudes from the unit base body 801 and passes through the through hole 858 of the unit sub-plate 825. The mounting hole 867 and the mounting boss 823 are engaged with the teeth of the second gear 844 provided on the gear cover 866 side and the teeth of the first gear 843 and the third gear 847 provided on the unit sub-plate 825 side. The unit base body 801 and the gear cover 866 are integrally fixed in a state where the unit sub plate 825 is sandwiched by screwing with the screw 868 from the rear surface of the gear cover 866 in the matched state. Further, on one side surface of the gear cover 866, wiring connected to the relay terminal plate 830 in the prize ball unit (for example, wiring connecting the relay terminal board 830 in the prize ball unit and a payout control board 1186 described later). A wiring processing piece 869 that is hooked and gathered is projected.

  The configuration of the prize ball unit 800 has been described above. In the state where the unit base body 801, the unit sub board 825, the prize ball unit relay terminal board 830, the board cover 835, and the gear cover 866 are assembled, FIG. As shown, the cylindrical main body portion of the payout motor 815 is housed in a position below the bent passage 803 through which the ball to be paid out is guided. Further, the unit base body 801 includes a sprocket 807 arranged in a ball passage (bending passage 803, prize ball passage 810, ball removal passage 811) and a depth width dimension of the ball passage at a position avoiding the ball passage. A payout motor 815 housed in a motor housing space 814 formed therein, and the rotation of the motor shaft 818 of the payout motor 815 along the non-blocking surface side of the unit sub-plate 825 is rotated by the sprocket 807. A rotation transmitting member (first gear 843, second and third gears 844, 847, and a gear portion 852 of the detection disk 850) for transmitting to the shaft 808 is provided, and in the distribution space 805 of the dispensing motor 815 and the bending passage 803. A plurality of gears 843, 844, 84 provided in the gear region 840 on the rear surface of the unit sub-plate 825 with the sprocket 807 as the disposing member disposed. It has become a consolidated structure to be driven to rotate by 850 (852). That is, the sprocket 807 and the payout motor 815 are accommodated within the depth width of the ball passage (bending passage 803, prize ball passage 810, ball removal passage 811) formed between the unit base body 801 and the unit sub plate 825. In addition, the rotation transmission member (the first gear 843, the second and third gears 844, 847, and the gear portion 852 of the detection disk 850) that connects the sprocket 807 and the payout motor 815 is connected to the non-blocking surface side of the unit sub-plate 825. Therefore, the prize ball unit 800 can be made thinner than the one in which a payout motor and a part of the sprocket are arranged outside the ball passage.

  In addition, such a prize ball unit 800 is further thinned by forming the ball passages (the bent passage 803, the prize ball passage 810, and the ball passage 811) in the prize ball unit 800 in a single passage shape. It is planned. That is, unlike the conventional case in which the payout motor 815 protrudes to the front side, the rear side or the side of the prize ball unit, when attached to the rear side of the shaft support side rear wall 546 of the main body frame 3, Any part of the prize ball unit 800 can be structured not to protrude further rearward. In FIG. 109, the front end portion of the payout motor 815 is configured to slightly protrude from the rear surface of the unit base body 801. This protruding portion is formed on the shaft support side rear wall 546 as shown in FIG. Since it faces the front portion of the main body frame 3 from the lower discharge motor escape opening 572, as a result, it protrudes by a dimension obtained by subtracting the thickness of the shaft support side rear wall 546 from the protruding dimension. Thus, the amount of protrusion toward the front side relative to the shaft support side rear wall 546 is small. In addition, by adopting such a configuration, in the present embodiment, the game board 4 is provided between the pivot side rear wall 546 of the main body frame 3 to which the prize ball unit 800 is attached and the back surface of the game board 4. A storage space for storing the rearward protruding portion of the gaming apparatus can be increased in the depth width direction.

  Furthermore, in order to attach the prize ball unit 800 configured as described above to the pivotal support side rear wall 546 of the main body frame 3, as shown in FIG. 101, a hook-shaped engaging portion 824, an engaging protrusion 565, After the alignment, the lower end of the prize ball unit 800 is hooked in the locking groove 573, and the prize ball unit 800 is pivotally supported to engage the hook-like engagement portion 824 and the engagement protrusion 565. The lower side wall 546 is pressed down while being in close contact with the side rear wall 546. At this time, since the lower end portion of the prize ball unit 800 and the locking groove 573 are engaged, and the hook-shaped engaging portion 824 and the engaging protrusion 565 are engaged, the mounting itself is completed. When the prize ball unit 800 is moved upward, the respective engagement states are easily released. To prevent this, the lock elastic claw 564 is engaged with the button insertion engagement hole 821. It is supposed to be.

  That is, the lock elastic claw 564 and the button insertion engagement hole 821 are engaged to prevent the prize ball unit 800 from moving upward in the attached state. Thus, after the prize ball unit 800 is attached, the connecting lid member 786 of the ball path unit 770 is rotated as described above and locked by the locking elastic claw 820, so that the ball path of the ball path unit 770 drops. The downstream end of the passage 772 and the upstream end of the bent passage 803 of the prize ball unit 800 can be communicated with each other through a passage constituted by a pair of passage walls 790. When the prize ball unit 800 is attached, the downstream end of the prize ball passage 810 is connected to the prize ball inlet 927 of the full tank unit 900 described in detail later, and the downstream end of the ball removal path 811 is connected to the ball removal connection path. Connected to the upstream end of 880.

  On the other hand, when the prize ball unit 800 is removed, the engagement by the latching elastic claws 820 is released and the connecting lid member 786 is rotated forward, and then the detachable button 822 is pressed to release the locking elastic claws 564. It is moved to the front side to release the engagement between the lock elastic claw 564 and the button insertion engagement hole 821, and then the prize ball unit 800 is pulled upward with the detachable button 822 pressed, and the prize ball unit 800. By releasing the engagement between the lower end portion of the lens and the locking groove 573 and the engagement between the hook-shaped engagement portion 824 and the engagement protrusion 565 and pulling out the prize ball unit 800 to the front side, Easy to remove.

[1-3G. Full tank unit]
Next, the full tank unit 900 disposed on the downstream side of the above-described prize ball unit 800 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 110 to 116. 110 is a perspective view showing the relationship between the prize ball unit 800 and the full tank unit 900, FIG. 111 is a perspective view of the full tank unit 900, and FIG. 112 is a front view of the full tank unit 900. 113 is an exploded perspective view, FIG. 113 is an exploded perspective view seen from the back of the full tank unit 900, and FIG. 114 is a partially broken perspective view showing the relationship between the full tank unit 900 and the foul port 610, 115 is a cross-sectional view taken along the bottom rocking plate 907 provided in the full tank unit 900, and FIG. 116 is a cross-sectional view showing the relationship between the full unit 900 and the foul port 610.

  As described above, the full tank unit 900 is mounted and fixed on the full tank unit mounting portion 531 of the main body frame 3, and as shown in FIG. 112, the main body of the box is formed in a box shape having an open upper surface. 901 and a lid body 926 that covers the upper surface of the box main body 901. The box main body 901 is configured such that the sphere that has flowed in from the downstream end of the prize ball passage 810 is guided in a zigzag shape inside and discharged from the outlet 921. Therefore, a side guide passage 902 that guides a sphere that has flowed in from a prize ball inlet 927 formed in the lid 926 to the side from one end to the other end is formed in the upstream portion. A side guide receiving portion 903 formed in a concave arc shape so as to guide the sphere toward the side is provided at one end portion of the side guide passage 902 directly below the prize ball entrance 927, and the side guide passage is provided. A buffer member 904 is provided on the inner surface of the other end of 902 to receive the impact of the sphere flowing through the side guide passage 902 and guide the sphere downstream.

  Further, the ball that collides with the buffer member 904 provided on the inner surface of the other end of the side guide passage 902 is guided to flow in the opposite direction to the flow of the sphere in the side guide passage 902 after changing the direction to the downstream side. A reverse side guide passage 905 is formed. The sphere that has flowed through the reverse side guide passage 905 is then guided to the front guide passage 920 formed toward the front, and the award of the dish unit 300 described above from the outlet 921 formed at the lower end of the front guide passage 920. Guided to the ball contact 343.

  By the way, a bottom surface opening 906 that opens over the entire bottom surface is formed on the bottom surface on the upstream side of the reverse side guide passage 905, and the bottom surface swinging plate 907 is closed so that the bottom surface swinging plate 907 can swing freely. Yes. The bottom surface opening 906 is formed in a substantially square concave shape having an open top surface, and a pair of shaft projections 911 project from the side walls in the front-rear direction when viewed from the front inside. A circular spring mounting recess 912 for positioning the lower end of the spring 913 is formed on the concave bottom surface of the bottom surface opening 906. On the other hand, the bottom rocking plate 907 that closes the bottom opening 906 is formed in a substantially square shape, and is a semicircular bearing that is pivotally supported by being fitted to a pivot projection 911 as viewed from the front on the downstream side of the back surface. A portion 908 is formed to project.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 115, a spring locking projection 910 that locks the upper end of the spring 913 projects downward from the center of the bottom surface of the bottom rocking plate 907. Therefore, the bottom rocking plate 907 is biased in the direction in which the upstream side is always rocked upward by the biasing force of the spring 913. The spring 913 does not swing the bottom rocking plate 907 downward even when the number of normal prize balls paid out (for example, 15) is placed on the bottom rocking plate 907 at a time. A predetermined number of balls equal to or greater than the payout number is formed by a spring member having a spring coefficient that swings downward when placed on the bottom swing plate 907. Further, a detection protrusion 909 protrudes forward on the upstream side of the bottom rocking plate 907. The detection protrusion 909 passes through the communication hole 929 and is positioned in a switch storage space 914 described below when the bearing portion 908 of the bottom rocking plate 907 is fitted and supported on the shaft support protrusion 911. It has become.

  In addition, a switch storage space 914 for storing the full tank switch 916 is integrally formed on the outer side of the upstream end side wall of the reverse side guide passage 905. In order to mount the full switch 916 in the switch storage space 914, a switch mounting portion 918 is formed on the outer surface of the side wall of the upstream end portion of the reverse side guide passage 905 above the switch storage space 914. A mounting piece 917 of the switch holder 915 that holds the full switch 916 is fixed to the portion 918 by a screw 919. The full tank switch 916 is configured as a switch composed of a projector and a light receiver, and detects ON / OFF when the detection protrusion 909 swings up and down between the light receiver and the light projector.

  Further, a foul ball passage 922 is formed on one side downstream of the reverse side guide passage 905. As shown in FIG. 114, the foul ball passage 922 is bent and formed so that the foul ball inlet 923 communicates with the foul port 610 described above and the downstream side communicates with the upstream side of the front guide passage 920. Has been. Therefore, the foul ball taken into the foul port 610 is guided from the foul ball inlet 923 through the bent foul ball passage 922 to the front guide passage 920, and further through the outlet 921 and the prize ball connecting rod 343 to the dish unit. Returned to 300.

  The box main body 901 has engaging pieces 924 that are engaged with unit engaging grooves 532 formed in the full unit mounting portion 531 on both sides of the outlet 921 and one side of the foul ball inlet 923. A latching protrusion 925 that engages with a latching piece 928 formed on the lid 926 is formed. The latching protrusion 925 is appropriately formed on the upper left and right side walls of the box main body 901.

  On the other hand, the lid 926 is formed in a plate shape so as to cover the upper surfaces of the side guide passage 902, the reverse side guide passage 905, the front guide passage 920, and the foul ball passage 922 of the box main body 901. A square prize ball entrance 927 is opened at a position corresponding to the upstream end at 902. In addition, a latching piece 928 for engaging with a latching protrusion 925 of the box main body 901 is provided around the lid 926 so as to project downward.

  In the full tank unit 900 configured as described above, as shown in FIG. 110, the balls paid out from the prize ball path 810 of the prize ball unit 800 are moved upstream from the prize ball entrance 927 to the upstream side of the side guidance path 902. It enters and is guided toward the side by the side guide receiving portion 903 and collides with the buffer member 904. The ball colliding with the buffer member 904 is guided in the reverse side guide passage 905 toward the downstream side in the direction opposite to the guide direction of the side guide passage 902 and guided to the front guide passage 920. The exit 921 is led to the dish unit 300 through the prize ball communication rod 343. Further, the foul sphere entered from the foul ball entrance 923 is also weakened by the bent foul ball passage 922 and joined to the front guide passage 920, and passes through the prize ball connection rod 343 from the exit 921 of the front guide passage 920. Guided to the dish unit 300.

  In normal times, when the sphere naturally flows in the full tank unit 900, when the sphere moves from the side guide passage 902 to the reverse side guide passage 905, it falls to the bottom rocking plate 907. When the number of payout balls is about the normal, the spring 913 has a strong resilience, so that the bottom rocking plate 907 does not rock. As shown by the solid line in FIG. The full tank switch 916 is placed between the projector and the light receiver, and the switch is not conductive (OFF). On the other hand, when the prize balls are stored in the dish unit 300 and the full tank unit 900 is also filled with balls, the bottom fluctuations formed in the entire upstream area of the front guide path 920 and the reverse side guide path 905 are formed. The bottom rocking plate 907 rocks downward against the urging force of the spring 913 due to the pressure of the sphere stored on the moving plate 907, and the detection protrusion 909 is projected as shown by a two-dot chain line in FIG. The light receiving full tank switch 916 is disconnected from the light projector and the light receiver, and the switch becomes conductive (ON). When the full tank switch 916 is turned on, the rotational driving of the payout motor 815 of the prize ball unit 800 is stopped (if the ON signal is derived while the predetermined number of prize balls are being paid out, the predetermined number of prize balls). Will be stopped after it has been paid out).

  As described above, in the full tank unit 900, the full tank switch is operated by the bottom rocking plate 907 having substantially the same width as the width of the bottom of the path of the path through which the ball flows (in the illustrated case, the reverse side guide path 905). 916 is actuated and biased by a biasing member (spring 913) so that the bottom rocking plate 907 swings when a certain amount of balls are placed without swinging due to the normal flow of the balls. Therefore, compared to the conventional case where a ball is placed on the bottom surface of some passages or the like to detect a clogged ball, the placement of the balls in that portion of the passage is not detected due to the clogging. It can be surely prevented. This can reliably detect a full tank.

  Moreover, in the full unit 900 according to the present embodiment, the full unit is formed on the main body frame as in the prior art because it is detachably attached to the full unit mounting portion 531 of the main body frame 3. It is not necessary to form a passage for a full tank structure in the main body frame as compared with the one assembled in the dispensing passage. Further, by making the inside of the full tank unit 900 a zigzag passage, it is possible to guide to the dish unit 300 while weakening the momentum of the balls paid out from the prize ball passage 810 of the prize ball unit 800. The awarded ball does not jump out of the dish unit 300. Further, in the full tank unit 900 according to the present embodiment, the foul ball passage 922 that guides the foul ball joins the ball in the middle of the front guide passage 920 that pays out the award ball. The foul sphere can be merged without hindering the flow of the sphere.

[1-4. Locking device]
Next, the lock device 1000 attached in the vertical direction along the back side edge of the main body frame 3 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 117 to 125. 117 is a rear perspective view showing the relationship between the locking device 1000 and the main body frame 3, and FIG. 118 is an enlarged side sectional view showing a latching structure of the locking device 1000 to the main body frame 3. FIG. FIG. 120 is a partial cross-sectional view cut in the horizontal direction at a position slightly below the vertical center of the pachinko machine 1, and FIG. 120 shows a detailed relationship between the lock device 1000 and the side walls 540 and 541 of the main body frame 3. 121 is an enlarged cross-sectional view, FIG. 121 is a side view (A) of the locking device 1000, a perspective view (B) viewed from the front side, and FIG. 122 is a perspective view (A) viewed from the back side of the locking device 1000. ) Are perspective views (B) and (C) of a door frame sliding rod 1040 and a body frame sliding rod 1050 slidably provided inside the U-shaped base 1001 of the lock device 1000, and FIG. Fig. 124 is an exploded perspective view of the lock device 1000, and Fig. 124 is for a door frame. Is a front view for explaining the action of Do杆 1040 and the main frame for sliding rod 1050, FIG. 125 is a front view for explaining the action of the anti-fraud members 1023,1032.

  The locking device 1000 is attached from the substantially upper end to the lower end of the main body frame 3 along the first side wall 540 on the open side of the main body frame 3, and as shown in FIG. A plurality of (three in the illustrated example) lock locking holes 548 formed in the middle and middle of the upper and lower ends between the rising portions of the first side wall 540 and the upper part of the vertical surface of the first side wall 540 The U-shaped base 1001 of the locking device 1000 described below is supported by the lock mounting hole 547 formed by being cut out in the middle and the lock mounting hole 547 formed near the upper portion of the cylinder lock through hole 526. It is fixed. Therefore, the structure of the lock device 1000 will be described in detail below.

  As shown in FIGS. 121 to 123, a locking device 1000 includes a U-shaped base 1001 as a locking base formed in a U-shaped cross section, and a door frame that is slidably provided in the U-shaped base 1001. The U-shaped sliding rod 1040, the main body frame sliding rod 1050 slidably provided in the U-shaped base 1001, and the main body frame sliding rod 1050 cannot be illegally slid. And tamper-proof members 1023 and 1032 attached to the lower part of the base body 1001.

  The U-shaped base body 1001 is formed by bending a metal so as to have a U-shaped cross section, and slidably providing a door frame sliding rod 1040 and a body frame sliding rod 1050 therein. The width dimension is extremely thin as compared with a conventional locking device that is concentrated on a base body having an L-shaped cross section. As described above, the size of the game board 4 in the horizontal direction and the vertical direction is greatly increased, and the space surrounded by the side walls 540 to 543 of the main body frame 3 is increased. A mounting structure that allows the locking device 1000 to be attached to the back side of the main body frame 3 by reducing the width of the locking device 1000 according to the present embodiment by making the dimension between the outer periphery and the outer periphery extremely small. It is because it improved as. And since the open side of the U-shaped cross section of the U-shaped base body 1001 is mounted so as to face the back surface of the main body frame 3, when the lock device 1000 is mounted on the main body frame 3, the door frame is provided inside. The sliding rod 1040 and the body frame sliding rod 1050 have a tamper-proof structure in which the U-shaped base 1001 is completely covered except for the hook portions 1041, 1054, and 1065.

  First, a rectangular hook penetration opening 1002 through which the hook portions 1054 and 1065 of the main body frame sliding rod 1050 pass is opened on the closed side opposite to the open side of the U-shaped base 1001 and on the closed side. A screwing portion 1003 protrudes horizontally in the upper and middle sides 1001b (see FIG. 123) that is in close contact with the first side wall 540 and is not in close contact with the first side wall 540 on the open side. Locking projections 1004 are formed so as to project from the upper end portion and the intermediate portion (see FIG. 123) and the lower end portions of both open side surfaces 1001a and 1001b.

  The screw stoppers 1003 and the locking protrusions 1004 are for attaching the locking device 1000 to the back surface of the main body frame 3. The locking protrusions 1004 are inserted into the lock locking holes 548 of the main body frame 3 and moved upward. (See FIG. 118) Since the screw fixing portion 1003 and the lock mounting hole 547 coincide with each other in this state, the locking device 1000 is firmly attached to the main body frame 3 by screwing a screw (not shown) into the coincident hole. Can be fixed. The locking device 1000 is attached not only to the upper and middle screw fixing portions 1003 but also in the vicinity of the screw fixing portion 1003 formed on the lock mounting piece 1008 described later and the cylinder lock through hole 526. The lower part of the lock device 1000 can be attached by fixing the lock attachment hole 547 with a screw (not shown).

  In addition, when mounting, the locking projections 1004 formed at the upper, middle, and lower three positions on the open side (front portion) of the U-shaped base 1001 are inserted into the locking holes 548 to be positioned and locked, and the U-shaped Screw fixing portions 1003 formed at two positions on the closed side (rear portion) of the base body 1001 and screw fixing portions 1003 formed on the open side (front portion) of the U-shaped base body 1001 are formed in the lock mounting holes 547. Since the structure is fixed with screws, the front portion of the locking device 1000 is locked by the locking protrusion 1004 and the locking locking hole 548, and the rear portion of the locking device 1000 is fixed by the screw locking portion 1003 and the lock mounting hole 547. In addition, since the lower portion of the locking device 1000 is fixed by the screw fixing portion 1003 and the lock mounting hole 547, the locking device 1000 can be firmly fixed to the main body frame 3 with an extremely simple structure.

  In other words, even when the locking device 1000 is configured by concentrating on the U-shaped base body 1001 having a very small width, the locking device 1000 is fixed to the main body frame 3 by locking and fixing the front portion and the rear portion of the locking device 1000. It can be firmly fixed to. In particular, in the case of the present embodiment, the locking protrusion 1004 constituting the locking structure (or a fixed structure) at the front portion protrudes from the side surface 1001 a that does not adhere to the first side wall 540 of the U-shaped base body 1001. On the other hand, the screw fixing portion 1003 and the screw fixing portion 1003 constituting the fixing structure of the rear portion are formed so as to protrude in the horizontal direction from the side surface 1001b in close contact with the first side wall 540 of the U-shaped base body 1001. Therefore, the locking device 1000 can be fixed to the main body frame 3 so that the locking structure of the front part is not loosened as compared with the case where the locking structure of the front part is formed on the side surface 1001b in close contact with the first side wall 540. is there.

  Further, insertion holes 1005 are formed in the upper, middle, and lower portions of both side surfaces 1001a and 1001b of the U-shaped base 1001, and the door frame sliding rod 1040 and the body frame sliding rod 1050 are provided in the U-shaped substrate 1001. The door frame sliding rod 1040 and the body frame sliding rod 1050 can be slidably attached to the inside of the U-shaped base 1001 by inserting and crimping a rivet 1006 into the insertion hole 1005 in the stored state. it can. That is, one rivet slot 1042 is formed in each of the upper, middle, and lower portions of the door frame sliding rod 1040, and the upper hook member 1051 and the lower hook member 1052 are respectively formed in the main frame sliding rod 1050. By passing the rivet 1006 through the rivet long holes 1055 and 1061, the door frame sliding rod 1040 can move upward, and the main body frame sliding rod 1050 can move downward. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 122 (B), the rivet 1006 passes through the lower ends of the rivet slots 1055 and 1061 of the main body frame sliding rod 1050, and as shown in FIG. A rivet 1006 passes through the upper end of the rivet slot 1042 of the sliding rod 1040.

  Further, a tamper-proof notch 1007 is formed on the closed side of the lower portion of the U-shaped base 1001, and at the front end of the side 1001b in close contact with the first side wall 540 of the body frame 3 on the open side. A lock mounting piece 1008 for mounting the cylinder lock 1010 is provided projecting sideways, and an insertion vertical opening 1020, a spring locking piece 1021, and a relief lateral hole 1022 are provided on a side surface 1001b that is in close contact with the first side wall 540. Each is formed. The fraud prevention notch 1007 is configured such that a stopper piece 1027 of a first fraud prevention member 1023 described later advances and retreats. This will be described in detail later. Further, the lock attachment piece 1008 has a front end of the side surface 1001b of the U-shaped base body 1001 so as to be positioned below the lower end side of the game board installation recess 510 in a state where the lock device 1000 is attached to the back surface of the main body frame 3. The lock mounting piece 1008 is formed with a lock insertion hole 1009 through which the cylinder lock 1010 penetrates and a mounting hole formed in the lock mounting substrate 1011 of the cylinder lock 1010. Mounting holes 1014 for mounting 1013 with screws 1012 are formed in two upper and lower positions, and further, screw fixing portions 1003 for mounting the lower part of the locking device 1000 on the back surface of the main body frame 3 are formed.

  The insertion vertical opening 1020 is an opening through which the first engagement protrusion 1017 and the second engagement protrusion 1018 of the engagement cam 1016 fixed to the cylinder lock 1010 enter when the cylinder lock 1010 rotates. The spring locking piece 1021 is for locking the spring 1035 provided on the tamper-proof members 1023 and 1032, and the clearance lateral hole 1022 constitutes a clearance hole so as not to obstruct the movement of the connecting pin 1034. It is. This point will be described in detail later.

  The cylinder lock 1010 attached to the lock attachment piece 1008 will be described. The cylinder lock 1010 has a cylindrical cylinder lock body fixed to the front of the lock attachment board 1011, and the lock shaft 1015 of the cylinder lock body is a lock attachment board. The engagement cam 1016 is fixed to the rear end of the lock shaft 1015 with a screw 1019. The engagement cam 1016 is formed in a boomerang shape, and one end side thereof is a first engagement projection piece 1017 that engages with the lowering engagement hole 1062 of the main body frame sliding rod 1050 when rotating. The side is a second engagement protrusion 1018 that engages with the ascending engagement hole 1045 of the door frame sliding rod 1040 when rotating. The cylinder lock 1010 configured as described above has a cylindrical cylinder lock body portion inserted into the lock insertion hole 1009 and mounting holes 1013 and lock mounting pieces 1008 formed at two positions on the lock mounting substrate 1011. The cylinder lock 1010 can be fixed to the U-shaped base body 1001 by making the mounting holes 1014 coincide with each other and screwed with screws 1012.

  Next, fraud prevention members 1023 and 1032 attached to the U-shaped base 1001 will be described with reference to FIG. The fraud prevention members 1023 and 1032 are for preventing the body frame sliding rod 1050 from being illegally lowered by, for example, a piano wire or a wire without rotating the cylinder lock 1010 with an official key. . Therefore, each of the anti-tamper members 1023 and 1032 has a structure in which the first anti-tamper member 1023 and the second anti-tamper member 1032 are connected by the connecting pin 1034. The first fraud prevention member 1023 is formed in a vertically long plate shape that is swingable around the swing shaft hole 1025 at the upper end, and the swing shaft hole 1025 is formed inside the U-shaped base body 1001 described above. Of the insertion hole 1005 and the rivet 1006 for slidably attaching the door frame sliding rod 1040 and the body frame sliding rod 1050, the lowermost insertion hole 1005 and the rivet 1006 are attached.

  Further, the first fraud prevention member 1023 is provided with a vertically long protruding piece insertion hole 1026 that overlaps the insertion vertical opening 1020 on the plate-like surface, and the second engaging protruding piece 1018 is inserted into the protruding piece insertion hole 1026. It has come to be able to do. That is, when the second engagement protrusion 1018 passes through the protrusion insertion hole 1026 and the insertion vertical opening 1020, the upward engagement hole 1045 of the sliding frame 1040 for the door frame provided inside the U-shaped base body 1001. The second engagement protrusion 1018 is engaged. In addition, an outline line obliquely above the opening position of the protruding piece insertion hole 1026 of the first fraud prevention member 1023 is an inclined portion 1024. The inclined portion 1024 contacts the rear surface side of the first engaging protrusion 1017 when the engaging cam 1016 rotates, and the first engaging protrusion 1017 and the inclined portion 1024 are rotated when the engaging cam 1016 rotates. , The first fraud prevention member 1023 swings about the swing shaft hole 1025 (clockwise direction in FIG. 125B).

  Further, the first fraud prevention member 1023 is provided with a stopper piece 1027 protruding on the outline line obliquely below the protruding piece insertion hole 1026, and a restricting protrusion 1031 protruding below the stopper piece 1027. A pin hole 1029 and a connecting hole 1030 are formed vertically on the front portion of the protruding piece 1031. The stopper piece 1027 enters and engages with the tamper-proof notch 1007 and the engagement notch 1066 of the main body frame sliding rod 1050 when the main body frame sliding rod 1050 is locked. It is intended to prevent sliding. Further, in the restricting protruding piece 1031, the first tamper-proof member 1023 and the second tamper-proof member 1032 are connected by a spring 1035, and the second tamper-proof member 1032 is biased when connected by the spring 1035. The movement to is restricted. The pin hole 1029 is for fixing the guide pin 1028. With the guide pin 1028 fixed to the pin hole 1029 from the back surface side of the first fraud prevention member 1023, the guide pin 1028 is inserted into the vertical opening 1020. The first fraud prevention member 1023 is guided along the side surface 1001b of the U-shaped base 1001 by engaging with a horizontally long opening formed at the lowermost end. Further, the connection hole 1030 is for connecting the first fraud prevention member 1023 and the second fraud prevention member 1032 with a connection pin 1034.

  The second tamper-proof member 1032 connected to the first tamper-proof member 1023 is formed of a reverse “te” -shaped plate material, a connection hole 1033 is formed at one upper end thereof, and a spring engagement is formed at the other upper end. A stop hole 1036 is formed, and a contact portion 1037 is provided at the lower end. The connection hole 1033 is for connecting with the connection pin 1034 so as to coincide with the connection hole 1030 of the first fraud prevention member 1023, and one end of the spring locking hole 1036 is a spring locking piece of the U-shaped base body 1001. The other end of the spring 1035 locked to 1021 is locked. Further, the abutting portion 1037 abuts on a closing projection 41 fixed to the inner lower portion of the outer frame 2 when the main body frame 3 is closed. The operation of the first fraud prevention member 1023 and the second fraud prevention member 1032 will be described in detail later.

  Next, the door frame sliding rod 1040 and the body frame sliding rod 1050 which are slidably provided inside the U-shaped base body 1001 will be described. First, the door frame sliding rod 1040 is formed of a vertically long metal plate-like member, and the door frame hook portions 1041 are integrally formed forward and downward at three locations on the upper, middle, and lower sides of the one side. Projected. The door frame hook portion 1041 protrudes forward from the open side when housed in the U-shaped base body 1001, and when the lock device 1000 is fixed to the back surface of the main body frame 3, 3 protrudes forward from a door hook hole 549 (see FIGS. 67 and 68) formed on the door 3 and engages with a hook cover 158 (see FIG. 18) formed on the back surface of the door frame 5. Since the door frame hook portion 1041 has a downward engaging claw shape, the door frame hook portion 1041 and the hook cover 158 are locked by raising the door frame sliding rod 1040. It can be canceled.

  Further, a vertically long rivet slot 1042 through which the rivet 1006 is inserted is formed at the center of the upper, middle, and lower side surfaces of the door frame sliding rod 1040, and the uppermost rivet slot in the rivet slot 1042 is formed. A guide protrusion 1043 protrudes below 1042 and at the lowermost end of the door frame sliding rod 1040. The rivet long hole 1042 is a hole through which the rivet 1006 inserted into the insertion hole 1005 of the U-shaped base body 1001 passes, and the rivet 1006 does not interfere with the ascending operation of the door frame sliding rod 1040. It is formed vertically. In the normal state, the rivet 1006 is in contact with the upper end portion of the rivet slot 1042. The guide projection 1043 is inserted into the protruding piece moving holes 1056 and 1064 formed in the upper hook member 1051 and the lower hook member 1052 of the main body frame sliding rod 1050, and the door frame sliding rod 1040 is inserted. And the sliding motion 1050 for the main body frame are guided.

  Further, a spring hook portion 1046 is formed at the upper end portion of the door frame sliding rod 1040, one end of the spring 1048 is locked to the spring hook portion 1046, and the other end of the spring 1048 is the main body frame sliding rod 1050. The upper hook member 1051 is engaged with a spring hook portion 1057. As a result, the door frame sliding rod 1040 is biased downward, and the body frame sliding rod 1050 is biased upward. In the middle of the door frame sliding rod 1040, a contact elastic piece 1047 is formed in a convex shape. This abutting elastic piece 1047 is formed by pressing from one side surface of the door frame sliding rod 1040 with a press, and is in contact with the inner side surface of the U-shaped base body 1001 so as to be internally used for the door frame. This prevents the sliding rod 1040 from rattling.

  Further, a vertically long play hole 1044 and a rising engagement hole 1045 are formed in the side surface of the lower portion of the door frame sliding rod 1040. When the first engagement protrusion 1017 of the engagement cam 1016 is inserted and rotated, the play hole 1044 moves the tip of the first engagement protrusion 1017 so as not to obstruct the rotation operation. It constitutes a space. Further, when the second engagement protrusion 1018 of the engagement cam 1016 is inserted and rotated, the rising engagement hole 1045 is engaged so that the door frame sliding rod 1040 is raised by the rotation operation. Is to do. An escape notch 1049 that is a larger notch in the vertical direction than the fraud prevention notch 1007 is formed at the rear of the lower part of the vertical side of the door frame sliding rod 1040. The escape notch 1049 is formed so as not to interfere with the stopper piece 1027 of the first tamper-proof member 1023 so as to be surely engaged with the tamper-proof notch 1007 and the engagement notch 1066.

  On the other hand, the body frame sliding rod 1050 includes an upper hook member 1051 made of a metal plate, a lower hook member 1052 made of a metal plate, a connecting wire rod 1052 connecting the upper hook member 1051 and the lower hook member 1052, and It is composed of That is, the main body frame sliding rod 1050 is not composed of a single vertically long metal plate as in the prior art, but the upper hook member 1051 having the hook portions 1054 and 1065 and the lower hook member 1052 are made of metal. A plate member made of metal is formed by pressing, and the metal upper hook member 1051 and lower hook member 1052 are connected by a thin metal connecting wire rod 1053. Therefore, the door frame sliding rod 1040 and the body frame sliding rod 1050 can be efficiently stored in the narrow space of the U-shaped base 1001.

  By the way, the upper hook member 1051 is provided with a hook portion 1054 projecting rearward from the upper end portion thereof, and a rivet long hole 1055 and a projecting piece moving hole 1056 are formed on the plate surface portion. A spring hook portion 1057 and a connecting hole 1058 are formed at the lower end of the vertical side, and contact portions 1059 are formed at the upper and lower sides thereof. The hook portion 1054 penetrates the hook penetration opening 1002 above the U-shaped base body 1001 and engages with a closing projection 38 provided on the inner side on the open side of the outer frame 2. Is formed.

  The rivet slot 1055 corresponds to the rivet slot 1042 formed in the upper part of the door frame sliding rod 1040, and in a normal state in which the rivet 1006 is penetrated through the rivet slot 1055. The rivet 1006 penetrates the lowermost end portion of the rivet slot 1055. Thereby, the upper hook member 1051 can move downward. As described above, the guide piece 1043 above the door frame sliding rod 1040 is inserted into the protruding piece moving hole 1056 so that the door frame sliding rod 1040 and the main body frame sliding rod 1050 move relative to each other. Is to guide you. The spring hook portion 1057 is for locking the other end of the spring 1048 as described above. The connecting hole 1058 is inserted by bending the upper end of the connecting wire rod 1053. Further, when the abutting portion 1059 is housed in the U-shaped base 1001, the abutting portion 1059 comes into contact with the inner side wall of the U-shaped base 1001 so that the sliding motion of the upper hook member 1051 is smooth and smooth. It is for making.

  On the other hand, the lower hook member 1052 is provided with a hook portion 1065 protruding rearward at the lower end portion thereof, and protrudes from the upper portion to the lower portion of the plate surface portion with the elongated rivet hole 1061, the descending engagement hole 1062, and the play hole 1063. One moving hole 1064 is sequentially formed, a connection hole 1060 is formed at the upper end of the front vertical side, an engagement notch 1066 is formed at the lower part of the rear vertical side, and the upper side and the lower side are contacted. A contact portion 1067 is formed. The hook portion 1065 penetrates the hook penetration opening 1002 below the U-shaped base body 1001 and engages with a closing protrusion 41 provided on the lower part on the open side of the outer frame 2. Is formed. The rivet slot 1061 corresponds to the rivet slot 1042 formed in the lower portion of the door frame sliding rod 1040. In a normal state where the rivet 1006 is penetrated through the rivet slot 1061, The rivet 1006 is in a state of penetrating the lowermost end portion of the rivet long hole 1061.

  As a result, the lower hook member 1052 can move downward. When the first engagement protrusion 1017 of the engagement cam 1016 is inserted and rotated, the lowering engagement hole 1062 is engaged so that the main body frame sliding rod 1050 is lowered by the rotation operation. belongs to. Further, the play hole 1063 has a tip portion of the second engagement protrusion 1018 that does not interfere with the rotation operation when the second engagement protrusion 1018 of the engagement cam 1016 is inserted and rotated. It constitutes a space that can move. As described above, the guide piece 1043 below the door frame sliding rod 1040 is inserted into the projecting piece moving hole 1064 so that the door frame sliding rod 1040 and the main body frame sliding rod 1050 move relative to each other. Is to guide you. Further, the connecting hole 1060 is inserted by bending the lower end of the connecting wire rod 1053. Further, when the abutting portion 1067 is housed in the U-shaped base 1001, the abutting portion 1067 comes into contact with the inner side wall of the U-shaped base 1001 so that the sliding operation of the lower hook member 1052 can be smoothly performed without rattling. It is for making.

  The members constituting the locking device 1000 have been described above. To attach the locking device 1000, the upper hook member 1051 and the lower hook member 1052 of the main body frame sliding rod 1050 are connected by the connecting wire rod 1053. In this state, the guide protrusion 1043 of the door frame sliding rod 1040 is inserted into the protrusion moving holes 1056 and 1064 of the upper hook member 1051 and the lower hook member 1052, and the rivet long hole 1042 and the rivet length The holes 1055 and 1061 are aligned and overlapped, and in the overlapped state, the hook portion 1054 of the upper hook member 1051 and the hook portion 1065 of the lower hook member 1052 are passed through the hook penetration opening 1002 of the U-shaped base body 1001. However, the door frame sliding rod 1040 and the body frame sliding rod 1050 are placed in the U-shaped space of the U-shaped substrate 1001. You type. Thereafter, the rivet 1006 is inserted from the insertion hole 1005.

  At this time, the rivet 1006 is inserted so as to pass through the rivet slots 1055, 1061, 1042. However, when the lowermost rivet 1006 is inserted, it is necessary to insert the rivet 1006 also into the swing shaft hole 1025 of the first fraud prevention member 1023 and attach the first fraud prevention member 1023 to the U-shaped base body 1001 at the same time. Before attaching the first fraud prevention member 1023 to the U-shaped base 1001, the first fraud prevention member 1023 and the second fraud prevention member 1032 are connected by the connection pin 1034 and the guide pin 1028 is illustrated in the pin hole 1029. The guide pin 1028 needs to be inserted into the lowermost opening of the insertion vertical opening 1020.

  Furthermore, with the rivet 1006, the door frame sliding rod 1040 and the body frame sliding rod 1050 are housed and fixed in the U-shaped base 1001, and the spring 1048 is spanned between the spring hook portions 1046 and 1057, The frame sliding rod 1040 and the body frame sliding rod 1050 are biased in opposite directions, and further, the spring 1035 is stretched over the spring locking pieces (holes) 1021 and 1036, and the second fraud prevention member 1032. Is in contact with the restricting protrusion 1031. Thereafter, the cylindrical main body portion of the cylinder lock 1010 is inserted into the lock insertion hole 1009 of the lock attachment piece 1008, and the cylinder lock 1010 is fixed to the attachment hole 1014 with screws 1012. At this time, the tip end portion of the first engagement projection piece 1017 of the engagement cam 1016 is slightly inserted outside the inclined portion 1024 and into the insertion vertical opening 1020, and the second engagement projection piece 1018 of the engagement cam 1016 is inserted. The cylinder lock 1010 is attached to the lock attachment piece 1008 so that the tip end portion is slightly inserted into the protruding piece insertion hole 1026 and the insertion vertical opening 1020 of the first fraud prevention member 1023.

  In order to attach the locking device 1000 assembled as described above to the back surface of the main body frame 3, as described above, the door frame hook portion 1041 of the door frame sliding rod 1040 is formed on the main body frame 3. While being inserted into the hook hole 549, the locking projection 1004 protruding in a hook shape is inserted into the locking locking hole 548 of the main body frame 3 and moved upward, and in this state the screw fixing portion 1003 and screw fixing protruding horizontally By aligning the portion 1003 with the lock mounting hole 547 and screwing a screw (not shown) into the matched hole, the lock device 1000 can be firmly fixed to the back surface of the main body frame 3 as shown in FIG. . In particular, in the case of the present embodiment, the locking projection 1004 constituting the locking structure of the front portion is formed to protrude from the side surface 1001a that does not adhere to the first side wall 540 of the U-shaped base body 1001, while the rear portion Since the screw fixing part 1003 and the screw fixing part 1003 constituting the fixing structure of the U-shaped base 1001 are formed so as to protrude in the horizontal direction from the side surface 1001b in close contact with the first side wall 540 of the U-shaped base body 1001, Compared to the case where the locking structure is formed on the side surface 1001b that is in close contact with the first side wall 540, the locking device 1000 can be fixed to the main body frame 3 so that the backlash does not occur.

  By the way, the operation of the lock device 1000 attached to the back surface of the main body frame 3 will be described with reference to FIGS. 124 and 125. First, the opening / closing operation of the main body frame 3 and the opening / closing operation of the door frame 5 will be described with reference to FIG. In a state where the main body frame 3 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2 and the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, as shown in FIG. 124 (A), the closing protrusions 38 and 41 of the outer frame 2 The hook portions 1054 and 1065 of the main body frame sliding rod 1050 are locked, and the door frame hook portion 1041 of the door frame sliding rod 1040 and the hook cover 158 of the door frame 5 are locked. Yes. In this state, when a key (not shown) is inserted into the cylinder lock 1010 and the first engagement protrusion 1017 of the engagement cam 1016 is rotated in a direction to enter the insertion vertical opening 1020, as shown in FIG. 124 (B). The tip of the first engagement protrusion 1017 engages with the lower engagement hole 1062 of the main body frame sliding rod 1050 to push the lower hook member 1052 downward against the urging force of the spring 1048. The connecting wire rod 1053 and the upper hook member 1051 which are connected are also pushed down and lowered. For this reason, since the locking projections 38 and 41 of the outer frame 2 and the hook portions 1054 and 1065 of the sliding rod 1050 for the main body frame are released, the main body frame 3 is pulled by pulling the main body frame 3 to the front side. 3 can be opened to the outer frame 2.

  Note that when the main body frame 3 is closed, the hook portions 1054 and 1065 are raised by the urging force of the spring 1048 (the same raised position as that shown in FIG. 124A), but the hook portion 1054 is in the raised state. , 1065 is inclined downward toward the outer side, so that the upper side inclined portion of the hook portions 1054, 1065 is forced into the closing projections 38, 41 by forcibly pressing the main body frame 3 against the outer frame 2. Since the main body frame sliding rod 1050 is lowered downward, the upward claw portions of the hook portions 1054 and 1065 and the closing projections 38 and 41 are locked again. The body frame sliding rod 1050 rises and returns to the locked state.

  On the other hand, when a key (not shown) is inserted into the cylinder lock 1010 and the second engagement protrusion 1018 of the engagement cam 1016 is rotated in the direction of entering the insertion vertical opening 1020, as shown in FIG. The front end of the two engaging protrusions 1018 engages with the ascending engagement hole 1045 of the door frame sliding rod 1040 and pushes the door frame sliding rod 1040 upwardly against the urging force of the spring 1048. For this reason, since the hook state 158 of the door frame 5 and the door frame hook portion 1041 of the door frame sliding rod 1040 are released, the door frame 5 is pulled by pulling the door frame 5 forward. The main frame 3 can be opened.

  When the door frame 5 is closed, the door frame hook portion 1041 is lowered by the urging force of the spring 1048 (the same lowered position as in the state shown in FIG. 124A). Since the lower side of the hook part 1041 is inclined upward toward the outside, the door frame 5 is forcibly pressed against the main body frame 3, so that the lower side inclined part of the door frame hook part 1041 becomes the hook cover 158. Since the door frame sliding rod 1040 rises upward, the door frame hook portion 1041 and the hook cover 158 are locked again again. The sliding rod 1040 moves down and returns to the locked state. The door frame sliding rod 1040 according to the present embodiment is formed to have a length substantially the same as the full length of the U-shaped base 1001, and the U-shaped base 1001 is substantially the vertical side surface of the main body frame 3. The door frame hook portion 1041 that is attached over the entire length and is a locking portion with the door frame 5 is formed at three locations of the upper end portion, the center portion, and the lower end portion of the door frame sliding rod 1040. For this reason, the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3 are securely locked in the entire length in the vertical direction. There is also the advantage that it cannot be done.

  As described above, the lock device 1000 according to this embodiment releases the lock of the main body frame 3 with respect to the outer frame 2 by rotating the key inserted into the cylinder lock 1010 in one direction, and rotates in the other direction. By doing so, locking of the door frame 5 with respect to the main body frame 3 can be cancelled | released. In this case, an illegal act of hooking a piano wire or the like on the hook portions 1054 and 1065 of the main body frame sliding rod 1050 without inserting a key into the cylinder lock 1010 and lowering it may be performed. Are not allowed to perform such cheating. The first structure for preventing such fraud is a lock mechanism composed of a first fraud prevention member 1023 and a second fraud prevention member 1032, and the second fraud prevention structure is a U-shaped base 1001. The door frame sliding rod 1040 and the body frame sliding rod 1050 are accommodated in the closed space.

  First, the operation of the lock mechanism, which is the first fraud prevention structure, will be described with reference to FIG. First, in a state where the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 3 are closed, as shown in FIG. 125 (A), the closing projection 41 of the outer frame 2 and the contact portion 1037 of the second fraud prevention member 1032 are It is in a contact state. In this state, the first tamper-proof member 1023 is rotated counterclockwise by the biasing force of the spring 1035 so that the stopper piece 1027 enters the tamper-proof notch 1007 and the stopper piece 1027 is tamper-proof notch. The main body frame sliding rod 1050 at a position corresponding to 1007 is engaged with an engagement notch 1066 formed on the lower hook member 1052. Therefore, even if the piano wire or the like is hooked onto the main body frame sliding rod 1050 and pulled down, the stopper piece portion 1027 and the engagement notch portion 1066 are engaged. Unauthorized pulling down (unlocking) becomes impossible, and an illegal act of opening the main body frame 3 cannot be performed.

  On the other hand, when the main body frame 3 is normally unlocked by inserting the key into the cylinder lock 1010, the first engagement protrusion of the engagement cam 1016 is rotated by rotating the key as shown in FIG. The piece 1017 is rotated so as to enter the insertion vertical opening 1020. When the first engagement protrusion 1017 is rotated, the inclined portion 1024 of the first fraud prevention member 1023 and the side surface of the first engagement protrusion 1017 come into contact with each other. The stopper piece 1027 starts to rotate around the angle 1025 in the clockwise direction shown in the figure, and the stopper piece 1027 also moves away from the tamper-proof cutout 1007. For this reason, the engagement between the stopper piece 1027 and the engagement notch 1066 is released. At this time, the second fraud prevention member 1032 is in a position where the spring 1035 is extended and the contact portion 1037 is retracted. When the engagement cam 1016 is further rotated in this state and the first engagement protrusion 1017 is also rotated, the tip of the first engagement protrusion 1017 is engaged with the lower engagement hole 1062 of the lower hook member 1052. Since the entire body frame sliding rod 1050 is lowered, the locking state between the hook portions 1054 and 1065 and the closing projections 38 and 41 of the outer frame 2 is released, and the main body frame 3 is attached to the outer frame 2. Can be opened.

  Note that when the main body frame 3 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the second fraud prevention member 1032 is in contact with the restriction protrusion 1031, and thus the first fraud prevention member 1023 and the second fraud prevention member The positional relationship with 1032 is substantially the same as the state shown in FIG. When the main body frame 3 is closed in this state, the closing protrusion 41 of the outer frame 2 and the contact portion 1037 of the second fraud prevention member 1032 contact from the front, and finally the state shown in FIG. 125 (A) is obtained. . For this reason, the first fraud prevention member 1023 and the second fraud prevention member 1032 do not get in the way when the main body frame 3 is closed. In the present embodiment, the first tamper-proof member 1023 and the second tamper-proof member 1032 prevent only the lowering operation of the main body frame sliding rod 1050 from being illegally performed. If the frame sliding rod 1050 is opened improperly, the door frame sliding rod 1040 can be easily opened manually after being released, and the illegal act of raising the sliding rod with a piano wire or the like is practically difficult to perform. For this reason, it has been devised to prevent unauthorized operation of the body frame sliding rod 1050.

  Further, even in the lock mechanism that is the above-described first fraud prevention structure, it is impossible to disable the function of the lock mechanism by swinging the first fraud prevention member 1023 with a piano wire or the like. Absent. Therefore, assuming that the lock function of the lock mechanism is disabled by an unauthorized action, in the present embodiment, in the state where the lock device 1000 is attached to the main body frame 3, the door frame is provided inside. Since the sliding rod 1040 and the body frame sliding rod 1050 are housed in the closed space of the U-shaped base 1001 except for the hook portions 1041, 1054, and 1065, they are completely covered. Even if an attempt is made to pull down the main body frame sliding rod 1050 provided inside the closed space of the U-shaped base body 1001 by inserting a piano wire or the like, the both sides 1001a and 1001b of the U-shaped base body 1001 close the closed space Since the intrusion is prevented, fraudulent acts cannot be easily performed.

  As described above in detail, the lock device 1000 according to the present embodiment has an extremely thin U-shaped base 1001 for a door frame, compared with a lock device whose lateral width is concentrated on a conventional L-shaped base. The sliding hook 1040 and the main body frame sliding hook 1050 are slidably provided, and the mounting position of the cylinder lock 1010 for operating the locking device 1000 to the U-shaped base 1001 is lower than the lower end side of the game board. Therefore, even if the size of the game board 4 in the horizontal direction and the vertical direction is extremely large and the space surrounded by the side walls 540 to 543 of the main body frame 3 is increased, the lock device 1000 can be 3 can be firmly attached to the back side. And since the open side of the U-shaped cross section is attached so as to face the back surface of the main body frame 3, when the lock device 1000 is attached to the main body frame 3, the door frame sliding rod 1040 provided inside and the main body Since the frame sliding rod 1050 is completely covered with the U-shaped base body 1001 except for the hooks 1041, 1054, and 1065, the main body provided inside by inserting a piano wire or the like. Unauthorized acts such as lowering the frame sliding rod 1050 cannot be easily performed.

  Further, when the locking device 1000 is attached, the locking protrusions 1004 formed at the upper, middle, and lower three positions on the open side (front part) of the U-shaped base 1001 are inserted into the locking holes 548 to be positioned and locked. Since the screw fixing portions 1003 and the screw fixing portions 1003 formed at the upper, middle, and lower portions of the closed side (rear portion) of the U-shaped base 1001 are fixed to the lock mounting holes 547 with screws, the locking device 1000 The front portion of the lock device is locked by the locking protrusion 1004 and the lock locking hole 548, and the rear portion of the locking device 1000 is fixed by the screw fixing portion 1003 and the screw fixing portion 1003 and the lock mounting hole 547, so that the structure is extremely simple. The locking device 1000 can be firmly fixed to the main body frame 3.

  In the embodiment described above, the screw fixing portion 1003 formed in the lock mounting piece 1008 and the cylinder lock through hole 526 of the main body frame 3 are formed near the upper portion of the lock mounting piece 1008 as a structure for screwing the lower portion of the U-shaped base 1001. However, instead of this, a screw 1012 for attaching the cylinder lock 1010 to the lock attachment piece 1008 is used, and the tip of the screw 1012 penetrates the lock attachment piece 1008. A structure may be employed in which the lock mounting holes to be screwed are formed above and below the cylinder lock through hole 526. Further, even if the lower portion of the U-shaped base 1001 is not screwed, the locking device 1000 can be attached to the back surface of the main body frame 3 only by fixing the screw fixing portion 1003 and the lock mounting hole 547 at the rear portion of the locking device 1000. It is confirmed that it is firmly fixed.

  In the above-described embodiment, the door frame sliding rod 1040 and the body frame sliding rod 1050 are completely covered with the U-shaped base body 1001 having the left and right side surfaces 1001a and 1001b. The door frame sliding rod 1040 and the main body frame sliding rod 1050 are slidably mounted on the opposite side surface 1001a not in close contact with the first side wall 540 with a rivet or the like, and the side surface 1001b in close contact with the first side wall 540 The L-shaped base (lock base) is omitted, and the door frame sliding rod 1040 and the main body frame are formed in a closed space formed by the side surface 1001a and the first side wall 540 of the L-shaped base (lock base). It is good also as a structure which accommodates the sliding rod 1050. FIG. Even in this case, the same mounting structure and tamper-proof structure as in the embodiment can be obtained.

[1-5. Substrate unit]
Next, the board unit 1100 attached to the lower part of the back surface of the main body frame 3 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 126 to 134. 126 is a perspective view of the board unit as seen from the back side, FIG. 127 is an exploded perspective view of the board unit as seen from the back side, and FIG. 128 is a perspective view of the board unit as seen from the front side. FIG. 129 is an exploded perspective view as seen from the front side of the substrate unit, FIG. 130 is a front view as seen from the front side of the substrate holder for the frame which is the main body of the substrate unit, and FIG. 132 is a rear view of the board unit, FIG. 133 is a rear view of the board unit with the dispensing control board box and the terminal board box removed, and FIG. FIG. 135 is a plan view showing the connection relationship between the boards provided in the board unit, FIG. 135 is a schematic diagram showing the electrical connection between the board unit and the game board, and FIG. 136 shows the payout control board and the board unit. of FIG. 137 is a game board for explaining a cross-sectional portion of the cross-sectional view of FIG. 138 (however, this game board is removed as shown in FIGS. 76 to 80). FIG. 138 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line CC of FIG. 137.

  The substrate unit 1100 is attached to a plurality of holder mounting holes 527 (see FIGS. 68 and 70) formed in the lower part of the back surface of the main body frame 3, and as shown in FIGS. Various substrates such as a door relay substrate 1102, a power supply substrate box 1103, a terminal substrate box 1104, a payout control substrate box 1105, a main drawer relay substrate 1107, and a sub drawer relay substrate 1108 are attached to the resin-molded frame substrate holder 1101. It is comprised by. Among the above boards, the door relay board 1102, the power board box 1103, the terminal board box 1104, and the payout control board box 1105 are attached to the rear side of the frame board holder 1101 overlapping in the front-rear direction, and the main drawer relay The substrate 1107 and the sub drawer relay substrate 1108 are attached to the front side of the frame substrate holder 1101. As will be described later, since the power supply board 1136 creates and supplies + 34V, + 18V and + 9V, it becomes a very high-temperature heat source, and the heat generated from the power supply board 1136 rises. For this reason, the payout control board box 1105 that houses the payout control board 1186 is attached to the upper surface of the power supply board box 1103 so as not to receive the rising heat. A metal shield heat dissipating plate 1106 is attached to the back surface of the payout control board box 1105 in order to prevent the influence of electromagnetic waves from the power supply board 1136 and the like and to dissipate heat generated from the power supply board 1136. The main drawer relay board 1107 and the sub drawer relay board 1108 are covered and attached to the board cover 1109. Hereinafter, each member constituting the substrate unit 1100 will be described in detail.

  It should be noted that the shield heat dissipation plate 1106 according to the present embodiment has a shield heat dissipation function, as shown in FIGS. The plate surface of the plate 1106 is formed as an uneven surface 1106a. Heat transmitted to the payout control board 1186 by the shield heat sink 1106 can be kept small. The uneven surface 1106a increases the contact area with the outside (outside air) to enhance the heat dissipation effect. The uneven surface 1106a is desirably formed in a vertical or inclined shape so that heat can be easily dissipated when installed. Of course, even if the uneven surface 1106a is formed on the shield heat sink 1106, the shielding effect against electromagnetic waves is not impaired. The shield heat sink 1106 prevents the influence of electromagnetic waves from the power supply board 1136 and the like. Thereby, since the influence of the noise by electromagnetic waves can be suppressed, the malfunctioning of the payout control board 1186 accommodated in the payout control board box 1105 by the influence of noise can be prevented. Further, the shield heat dissipation function of the shield heat sink 1106 is not only between the power supply board box 1103 and the payout control board box 1105 but also when a plurality of other board boxes are attached to the frame board holder 1101 in an overlapping manner. Is also achieved by providing the same shield heat dissipating plate 1106 as that of the present embodiment between the lower and upper substrate boxes.

  First, the frame substrate holder 1101 is formed in a horizontally long synthetic resin, and as shown in FIGS. 127 and 130, a wiring opening 1124 is formed on one side of the rear surface side (right side in FIG. 130). A relay board recess 1110 for attaching the door relay board 1102 is formed inside the wiring opening 1124. The relay substrate recess 1110 is formed as a square recess so as to match the outer shape of the substantially square door relay substrate 1102, and on the upper and lower sides of the relay substrate recess 1110, the back surface of the door relay substrate 1102 is formed. And a retaining claw 1111 that is engaged with the surface of one vertical side of the door relay board 1102 in a state where the door relay board 1102 is stored in the relay board recess 1110. ing. Also, on the upper and lower sides of the relay board recess 1110, there are mounting bosses 1112 that are engaged with engagement locking holes 1135 formed at one end of the power supply board box 1103 and are fastened with screws (not shown). Projected.

  Further, on the rear surface side of the frame substrate holder 1101, two wiring processing pieces 1114 are formed for locking and collecting wirings passing through the inside closer to the center than the above-described relay substrate recess 1110. The wiring processing piece 1114 is formed so as to project in an L shape when viewed from the side with respect to the vertical surface, and the wiring is hung between the vertical surface and the L-shaped projecting piece. ing. Further, the area from the upper part of the relay board recess 1110 of the frame board holder 1101 to a part slightly closer to the other end side than the center is an area for attaching the power supply board box 1103 (the lower area on the right side described below). Abutting protrusions 1115 that abut against the back surface of the power supply board box 1103 are provided on the upper and lower sides. Therefore, in a state where the power supply board box 1103 is attached to the power supply board box attachment area so as to contact the contact protrusion 1115, there is a space between the back surface of the power supply board box 1103 and the vertical surface of the frame substrate holder 1101. The wirings that are formed and connect the substrates to each other are accommodated in this space, and the two wiring processing pieces 1114 hold and hold the accommodated wirings together.

  Note that a large amount of rearward protrusion is formed from the other end side of the region to which the power supply board box 1103 is attached to the other end side of the frame substrate holder 1101 (left side in FIG. 130). In other words, the frame substrate holder 1101 is formed in a stepped shape slightly higher on the left side and lower on the right side at a position slightly left of the center when viewed from the back, and the lower region on the right side is for attaching the power supply board box 1103. (Hereinafter sometimes referred to as “power supply board box mounting region”). An insertion port 1115a is formed on the other end side of the power supply board box mounting region. Therefore, in order to attach the power supply board box 1103, after inserting the insertion protrusion 1134 into the insertion slot 1115 a, the engagement locking holes 1135 formed on the upper and lower ends of the one end side of the power supply board box 1103 are formed on the attachment boss 1112 from above. The power supply board box 1103 can be fixed to the frame board holder 1101 by being inserted and fastened with screws (not shown).

  Further, on the back side of the frame substrate holder 1101, the above step-like high region is one of regions for attaching the payout control board box 1105 (hereinafter, sometimes referred to as “payout control board box attachment region”). A horizontal L-shaped concave wiring routing space 1116 is formed in a part of the step-like high region. A wiring opening 1121 (see FIGS. 129 to 132) is formed in the bottom surface of the wiring routing space 1116, and the wirings hung on the two wiring processing pieces 1114 in the power supply board box mounting region are connected. The wiring routing space 1116 and the wiring opening 1121 are pulled out to the front side of the frame substrate holder 1101. In addition, a locking projection 1117 for engaging with the engagement elastic piece 1184 of the dispensing control board box 1105 is formed to project from the other end side (the left end side in FIG. 127) of the dispensing control board box mounting region. ing.

  Next, the configuration of the front side of the frame substrate holder 1101 will be described. As shown in FIGS. 128, 129, and 131, the out-ball path 1119 is inverted at the approximate center of the front side of the frame substrate holder 1101. It is formed in an L shape. The out-ball passage 1119 is located above the outlet 606 (see FIG. 78), the downstream side of the ball discharge passage 524 (see FIG. 68), and the drop opening 629 (see FIG. 75). Is formed wide, and the downstream side is formed narrow so that the spheres are discharged in a row. Therefore, when the board unit 1100 is attached to the main body frame 3, as shown in FIG. ing. Then, an out ball, a winning ball, or a ball without ball is discharged from the downstream end of the out ball passage 1119 toward the outside of the pachinko machine (generally, an island recovery basket).

  In addition, on the front side of the frame substrate holder 1101 corresponding to the payout control board box mounting area, a main drawer relay board 1107 and a sub drawer relay board 1108 are laterally spaced at a predetermined interval in the upper area. A drawer mounting area 1120 is formed to be spaced and mounted in parallel. In the drawer mounting area 1120, support holes 1204 and 1205 formed in the respective relay boards 1107 and 1108 are penetrated, and drawer mounting bosses 1118 for supporting the relay boards 1107 and 1108 are projected and provided. The junction guide hole 1126 and the guide hole 1125 are formed above and below the intermediate position of the relay boards 1107 and 1108. As shown in FIG. 138, the joint guide holes 1126 are connected to drawer connectors 1200 and 1202 (holder side connectors) provided on the board unit 1100 side and the game board 4 when the game board 4 is attached to the main body frame 3. Insertion guide protrusions 628 (see FIG. 78) formed on the board substrate holder 623 of the game board 4 are inserted so that the drawer connectors 626 and 627 (game board side connectors) provided on the side are naturally connected. Is. On the other hand, when the board unit 1100 is attached to the main body frame 3, the guide hole 1125 is inserted with a guide protrusion 525 (see FIGS. 68 and 70) that protrudes from the main body frame 3. The positioning is performed and the mounting operation is facilitated. Further, on both the left and right sides and the lower side of the frame substrate holder 1101, attachment pieces 1122 for attaching the substrate unit 1100 to the main body frame 3 protrude outward, and the attachment pieces 1122 are attached to the attachment holes 527 of the main body frame 3. The board unit 1100 is attached to the lower part of the back surface of the main body frame 3 by fastening with screws (not shown) corresponding to (see FIG. 68). As shown in FIG. 70, the attachment hole portion 527 has an outer peripheral wall that matches the outer shape of the attachment piece 1122. Further, a wiring latching piece 1123 for locking the wiring is formed on the outside of the side wall on the other end side (right side in FIG. 128) of the frame substrate holder 1101.

  The configuration of the frame substrate holder 1101 is generally as described above, and the configurations of various substrates attached to the frame substrate holder 1101 having such a configuration will be described. First, the door relay board 1102 mounted in the relay board recess 1110 on the rear surface side of the frame board holder 1101 will be described. As shown in FIG. 127, the door relay board 1102 has a multi-pin connector type internal connection terminal. 1130 and a door frame connection terminal 1131 are provided. As shown in FIG. 132, the door frame connection terminal 1131 can be seen from the outside as viewed from the back, even when all the substrates are attached to the frame substrate holder 1101, and is provided on the door frame 5. The door frame wiring 1212 (see FIG. 134) such as an electric decoration component and a speaker composed of a lamp and an LED is connected to the door frame connection terminal 1131 through the wiring opening 1124. The internal connection terminal 1130 is connected to a door frame connector 1203 provided on the sub drawer relay board 1108 by an internal wiring 1213 (see FIG. 134). However, the internal wiring 1213 is provided inside the frame substrate holder 1101 so that the wiring processing piece 1114, the wiring routing space 1116, and the wiring opening 1124 are laid.

  The power board box 1103 attached to the power board box mounting area on the rear surface side of the frame board holder 1101 includes a box main body 1132 for fixing the power board 1136 (see FIG. 133) and a cover body covering the box main body 1132. 1133. The box main body 1132 is integrally formed with engagement locking holes 1135 that engage with the mounting boss 1112 at the top and bottom of one end thereof, and the insertion protrusion 1134 that is inserted into the insertion port 1115a at the top and bottom of the other end. Is formed. Further, on the portion of the power supply board 1136 that is not covered with the cover body 1133 (the right side portion and the lower left portion in FIG. 133), as shown in FIG. A connector 1140 and a payout control board power connector 1141 are provided. The power switch 1137 is a switch for supplying power to all electrical devices of the pachinko machine 1 and is turned on when the pachinko machine 1 is used. In addition, the power line connector 1138 connects the power line from the AC 24V (AC 24V) power line supplied to the island, and grounds the noise charged in the pachinko machine 1 to the outside as a frame ground. It is a connector for. The CR unit power connector 1139 is a connector for supplying power to a card-type ball lending machine (not shown; generally referred to as a CR unit) adjacent to the pachinko machine 1. The ground connector 1140 is electrically connected to various antistatic ground wires provided in the pachinko machine 1, and noise or the like that has entered the pachinko machine 1 is grounded to the outside via the power line connector 1138. It is a connector to do. Specifically, a ground wire that removes noise from the door frame 5 (reinforcing plates 211 to 214) is electrically connected to the ground connector 1140a as a frame ground, and noise from a sphere flowing down the tank rail member 740 The ground wire for removing the noise and the like is electrically connected to the ground connector 1140b as the frame ground FG1, and the ground wire for removing noise from the prize ball unit 800 is electrically connected to the ground connector 1140c as the frame ground FG1. An earth wire for removing noise from the CR unit is electrically connected to the earth connector 1140d as a frame ground. These frame grounds are electrically connected to the frame ground of the power line connector 1138, and are grounded to the outside of the pachinko machine 1 through the frame ground. Further, as shown in FIG. 134, the power supply wiring 1214 is connected to the power supply connector 1141 for the payout control board, and the power supply wiring 1214 is connected to the power supply terminal 1192 of the payout control board 1186. Then, by this power supply wiring 1214, another control board (for example, a liquid crystal control board 4150 housed in the peripheral board box 622 or a main control board 4100 housed in the main control board box 624 via the payout control board 1186. ) Etc. are supplied with power. The power supply wiring 1214 is led from the payout control board power supply connector 1141 to the wiring routing space 1116 and drawn backward from the back surface of the payout control board box 1105 to be connected to the power supply terminal 1192. Yes. That is, the power supply wiring 1214 is also laid inside the frame substrate holder 1101.

  By the way, as shown in FIG. 127, the rear surface of the cover body 1133 of the power supply board box 1103 is formed in a stepped shape, and a region having a high step is an attachment region 1142 for attaching the terminal board box 1104. Is a mounting region 1143 for mounting the dispensing control board box 1105. The attachment area 1143 constitutes an attachment area for attaching the horizontally long payout control board box 1105 together with the above-mentioned payout control board box attachment area of the frame substrate holder 1101. In addition, an engagement hole 1146 into which an engagement piece 1182 (see FIG. 129) described later of the payout control board box 1105 is inserted is formed substantially at the center of the stepped portion.

  The cover body 1133 constituting the attachment region 1142 for attaching the terminal board box 1104 has a positioning hole 1145 for positioning or engaging with the positioning pin 1148 and the engaging piece 1147 formed on the back surface side of the terminal board box 1104. A mounting engagement hole 1144 is formed. The engagement piece portion 1147 is formed in an L-shaped cross section, while the attachment engagement hole 1144 is formed in a hole shape in which the wide portion and the narrow portion are continuous, so the engagement piece portion 1147 is attached. After being inserted into the wide portion of the engagement hole 1144, the L-shaped engagement piece 1147 and the mounting engagement hole are slid in one direction (in the illustrated case, the center direction of the frame substrate holder 1101). The narrow portion 1144 is engaged. Note that a latching piece 1149 protrudes from the lower part of the other side of the terminal board box 1104, and when the terminal board box 1104 is slidably engaged with the cover body 1133, the latching piece 1149 is disengaged from the payout control board box 1105. The box main body 1180 is engaged with a part of the box main body 1180. This engagement is an engagement state that can be easily released by sliding the terminal board box 1104 in the non-engagement direction with a little force.

  Further, in the terminal board box 1104, as shown in FIG. 132, an external terminal board 1150a provided with a plurality of external information terminals 1151 and payout control board terminals 1156, a frequency indicator terminal 1152, a power ground terminal 1153, Two boards, a CR unit terminal board 1150b provided with a CR unit terminal 1154 and a payout control board terminal 1155, are housed in parallel in the vertical direction. A plurality of external information terminals 1151 provided on the external terminal board 1150a are used for externally (for example, installing a variety of information signals necessary for the management of the pachinko machine 1 such as a jackpot information output signal and a start opening prize information output signal in a game hall). The information signal is mainly sent from the main control board 4100 housed in the main control board box 624 to the main drawer relay connector 1200 described in detail later. Is transmitted to the payout control board 1186, and is further transmitted to each of the plurality of external information terminals 1151 by connection of the external terminal board terminal 1188 and the payout control board terminal 1156 provided on the payout control board 1186. The The frequency indicator terminal 1152 of the CR unit terminal board 1150b is connected to the wiring of the remaining frequency indicator, a lending switch, and a return switch of the prepaid card provided in the plate unit 300 of the pachinko machine 1, for example. . The power ground terminal 1153 includes two connectors. One connector (left side in FIG. 132) is connected to the wiring from the CR unit power connector 1139 of the power board 1136, and the other connector is the power board 1136. The wiring from one earth connector 1140 of the plurality of earth connectors 1140 is connected. Further, the CR unit terminal 1154 is connected to a wiring from a CR unit (not shown), and the CR unit terminal board terminal 1189 of the payout control board 1186 and the payout control board terminal 1155 are connected. The payout control board 1186 and the CR unit are connected.

  As described above, the terminal board box 1104 connects the external terminal board 1150a for leading game information from the main control board 4100 housed in the main control board box 624 to the outside, and the payout control board 1186 and the CR unit. Both the CR unit terminal plate 1150b to be relayed are accommodated, and these are conventionally accommodated in separate substrate boxes and provided at different positions on the back surface of the pachinko machine 1, but this embodiment In FIG. 4, the terminal board box 1104 is collectively attached to the frame board holder 1101. For this reason, in particular, in the case of the present embodiment, the main control board 4100 and the external terminal board 1150a have a unique configuration in which the main control board 4100 and the external terminal board 1150a are connected via the payout control board 1186 without being directly connected.

  Next, the payout control board box 1105 that can be mounted over the payout control board box mounting area of the frame substrate holder 1101 and the mounting area 1143 formed on the cover body 1133 of the power board box 1103 will be mainly described with reference to FIGS. Reference will be made to FIG. The payout control board box 1105 includes a box main body 1180 to which a horizontally long payout control board 1186 is fixed with a screw (not shown), a cover body 1181 attached to the box main body 1180 and covering the surface of the payout control board 1186, It is composed of The box main body 1180 and the cover body 1181 are engaged with one side (the right side in FIG. 132), and fixed to the other side (the left side in FIG. 132) by a separation cutting portion 1183. Thus, in order to separate the box main body 1180 and the cover body 1181, the separation cannot be performed unless the separation / cutting portion 1183 is cut. However, caulking and fixing in the separation / cutting portion 1183 may be performed by caulking any one of a plurality of locations (in the illustrated case, four locations indicated by numerals 1 to 4) with a caulking member. If necessary, it can be done up to 3 times. Of course, in the case of an illegal separation, a cut trace remains, so that it is possible to immediately know whether there has been an illegal act. In addition, an engagement piece 1182 that is inserted into an engagement hole 1146 formed in the cover body 1133 of the power supply board box 1103 is projected and formed at the center of one side short side of the box main body 1180, and the other side short side lower portion is formed. An engagement elastic piece 1184 is formed which elastically engages with a locking projection 1117 formed on the frame substrate holder 1101. Therefore, in order to attach the payout control board box 1105 to the frame board holder 1101, the engaging piece 1182 is inserted into the engaging hole 1146, and then the engaging elastic piece 1184 is engaged with the locking protrusion 1117. Can be installed easily. In the state where the payout control board box 1105 is attached across the payout control board box attachment area of the frame substrate holder 1101 and the attachment area 1143 formed on the cover body 1133 of the power supply board box 1103, The payout control board box 1105 is housed in a fixed state so that it cannot move in the left-right direction or the up-down direction. On the contrary, when removing, the engaging elastic piece 1184 is pressed in the direction opposite to the elastic direction to disengage the engaging elastic piece 1184 and the locking projection 1117 and pulling up the dispensing control board box 1105, By pulling out the engagement piece 1182 from the engagement hole 1146, the payout control board box 1105 can be removed from the frame board holder 1101.

  Further, the dispensing control board 1186 covered by the box main body 1180 and the cover body 1181 has a door frame opening switch terminal 1185a and a body frame opening switch terminal 1185b on one side (the right side in FIG. 132). , A prize ball unit terminal 1187, an external terminal board terminal 1188, a CR unit terminal board terminal 1189, an operation handle terminal 1194, an error LED indicator 4130, an error release switch 4131, and a ball removal switch 4132 are provided. A full switch terminal 1190, an inspection output terminal 1191, a power supply terminal 1192, a firing motor terminal 1193, and an internal connection terminal 1195 are provided on the lower side (the left side in FIG. 132).

  The door frame opening switch terminal 1185a is a connector to which wiring from a door frame opening switch 4133 that detects that the door frame 5 is opened from the main body frame 3 is connected. The main body frame opening switch terminal 1185b is a connector to which wiring from the main body frame opening switch 4134 for detecting that the main body frame 3 is released from the outer frame 2 is connected. The prize ball unit terminal 1187 is a multi-pin connector to which the wiring from the relay board 480 of the prize ball unit 800 described above is connected. The external terminal board terminal 1188 is a multi-pin connector connected to the payout control board terminal 1156 of the external terminal board 1150a as described above. The CR unit terminal board terminal 1189 is a multi-pin connector connected to the payout control board terminal 1155 of the CR unit terminal board 1150b as described above. The full tank switch terminal 1190 is a connector to which wiring from the full tank switch 916 of the full unit 900 is connected. The error LED display 4130 displays the state of the pachinko machine such as CR unit connection abnormality. When the error cancel switch 4131 is operated, a guide for a cancel method corresponding to the error displayed on the error LED display 4130 flows from the side speaker 121 or the lower speaker 391. When operated, the ball removal switch 4132 starts discharging the balls stored in the prize ball tank 720 and the tank rail member 740 (starts ball removal). The inspection output terminal 1191 is a connector for connecting to an inspection device when the dispensing control board 1186 is inspected, and is a terminal for outputting various output signals for inspection. The power supply terminal 1192 is a connector connected to the payout control board power connector 1141 of the power supply board 1136 by the power supply wiring 1214 as described above. The launch motor terminal 1193 is a connector to which the wiring from the launch motor 695 of the hit ball launcher 650 is connected. The operation handle terminal 1194 is a connector to which wiring from the touch sensor 420 and the firing stop switch 422 provided in the operation handle portion 410 of the handle device 400 is connected. The internal connection terminal 1195 is a connector connected to the payout control board connector 1201 provided on the main drawer relay board 1107 by the signal power supply wiring 1215.

  In addition, resistors R1194a to R1194d are arranged near the left side of the error release switch 4131 as shown in FIG. These resistors R1194a to R1194d are connected to the ground (GND) when noise or the like from the door frame 5 (the reinforcing plates 211 to 214 shown in FIG. 18) enters the various detection signals input to the operation handle terminal 1194. Is described in detail later.

  Next, the main drawer relay board 1107 and the sub drawer relay board 1108 attached to the drawer attachment area 1120 formed on the front side of the frame substrate holder 1101 will be described. As shown in FIG. 129, the main drawer relay board 1107 is connected to a main drawer connector 626 (game board side connector: see FIG. 78) provided on a relay terminal plate 625 attached to the back side of the game board 4. A main drawer relay connector 1200 (holder side connector), a payout control board connector 1201 connected via an internal connection terminal 1195 of the payout control board 1186 and a signal power supply wiring 1215 are provided vertically. Further, the sub drawer relay board 1108 is connected to a sub drawer connector 627 (game board side connector: see FIG. 78) provided on a relay terminal plate 625 attached to the back side of the game board 4. (Holder side connector) and a door frame connector 1203 connected via an internal connection terminal 1130 of the door relay board 1102 and an internal wiring 1213 are provided vertically. The main drawer relay board 1107 and the sub drawer relay board 1108 are provided with support holes 1204 and 1205 on the left and right sides of each board, and the support holes 1204 and 1205 are provided in the drawer mounting area 1120 so as to protrude. By inserting into 1118, the main drawer relay board 1107 and the sub drawer relay board 1108 are positioned and supported in the drawer mounting area 1120, and then firmly fixed by covering with the board cover 1109.

  By the way, the board cover 1109 includes a main drawer relay connector 1200 and a payout control board connector 1201 provided on the main drawer relay board 1107, a sub drawer relay connector 1202 and a door frame connector 1203 provided on the sub drawer relay board 1108. Are formed in rectangular connector openings 1206, 1207, 1208, 1209 for projecting outward from the substrate cover 1109, and a pin through which the tip of the drawer mounting boss 1118 is inserted on the back surface side of the substrate cover 1109. Insertion holes 1210 (see FIG. 127) are formed, and stop holes 1211 for fixing the substrate cover 1109 to the frame substrate holder 1101 with screws (not shown) are formed on the left and right ends. Therefore, the support holes 1204 and 1205 of the main drawer relay board 1107 and the sub drawer relay board 1108 are inserted into the drawer mounting boss 1118 protruding from the drawer mounting area 1120, and the leading end of the drawer mounting boss 1118 is inserted into the pin insertion hole 1210. The main drawer relay board 1107 and the sub drawer relay board 1108 can be firmly fixed in the drawer mounting area 1120 by covering with the board cover 1109 while being inserted and fixing with a screw (not shown) in the stop hole 1211.

  Although the configuration of the board unit 1100 has been described above, in the case of the present embodiment, of the various boards necessary for driving and controlling the pachinko machine 1, the main board that is exchanged with the change of the game board 4 is used. Door relay board 1102, which is a board other than control board 4100 and liquid crystal control board 4150, power board 1136 housed in power board box 1103, external terminal board 1150 housed in terminal board box 1104, housed in dispensing control board box 1105 The dispense control board 1186 thus assembled is preassembled into a frame substrate holder 1101 to form a unit, and the assembled and unitized board unit 1100 is attached to the lower part on the back side of the main body frame 3 by a simple operation. Improve work efficiency compared to various board mounting work that was attached to the back side of frame 3. It can be. Further, in this case, the wiring between the substrates unitized in the substrate unit 1100 can also be accommodated in the frame substrate holder 1101, so that the wiring connecting the substrates is not messed up and disturbed, and is laid out neatly. can do.

  In the present embodiment, a main drawer relay board 1107 having a main drawer relay connector 1200 (holder side connector) on the front surface of the board unit 1100 and a sub drawer relay board 1108 having a sub drawer relay connector 1202 (holder side connector); 138, as shown in FIG. 138, the main drawer connector of the relay terminal plate 625 provided on the back side of the game board 4 as the game board 4 is mounted on the main body frame 3 from the front side. 626 and the sub drawer connector 627 (game board side connector) are connected to the corresponding main drawer relay connector 1200 and sub drawer relay connector 1202 (holder side connector), respectively. Can be performed simultaneously. For this reason, the exchange work of the game board 4 can be performed skillfully.

  Further, in the present embodiment, after the substrate unit 1100 is fixed to the back surface of the main body frame 3, a payout control board box 1105 that requires wiring work with various electric devices provided on the main body frame 3, and an external A terminal board box 1104 that needs to be connected to a CR unit or a management computer is arranged in parallel at the rearmost position of the board unit 1100 where it can be easily seen, while a power supply board that requires less external connection work. Since the box 1103 and the door relay substrate 1102 are arranged inside, a plurality of substrates can be efficiently overlapped in the front-rear direction, and the size of the substrate unit 1100 can be designed to a minimum. However, even in the power supply board box 1103 and the door relay board 1102 arranged inside, all the terminal portions connected to the outside can be visually recognized from the outside, so that the connection work becomes a problem. There is no.

[1-5A-1. Electrical connection between board unit and game board (connection using drawer connector)]
Next, electrical connection between the board unit 1100 and the game board 4 will be described with reference to FIG. As described above, the drawer connectors 626 and 627 are provided on the game board 4 side, and the drawer connectors 1200 and 1202 are provided on the board unit 1100 side. As shown in FIG. 135 (a), the drawer connectors 626 and 627 on the game board 4 side can be electrically connected by inserting them into the drawer connectors 1200 and 1202 on the board unit 1100 side. As shown in FIG. 135 (b), the drawer connectors 626 and 627 on the game board 4 side include terminals 626a and 627a, and the drawer connectors 1200 and 1202 on the board unit 1100 side are shown in FIG. 135 (c). As shown, contacts 1200a and 1202a are provided. When the drawer connectors 626 and 627 on the game board 4 side are inserted into the drawer connectors 1200 and 1202 on the board unit 1100 side, the terminals 626a and 627a push down the contacts 1200a and 1202a as shown in FIG. Is displaced. The repulsive force of the contacts 1200a and 1202a generated by this displacement is brought into an electrically conductive state by strongly contacting the terminals 626a and 627a. As a result, the drawer connectors 626 and 627 on the game board 4 side and the drawer connectors 1200 and 1202 on the board unit 1100 side are mutually controlled by various control boards (for example, by the main control board 4100 and the payout control board 1186). Control signal lines for transmitting various control signals are formed. The drawer connector 626 on the game board 4 side and the drawer connector 1200 on the board unit 1100 side are further formed with voltage supply lines for supplying various voltages created by the power supply board 1136. In this way, by attaching the game board 4 to the main body frame 3 in a detachable manner, control signal lines and voltages by the drawer connectors 626 and 627 on the game board 4 side and the drawer connectors 1200 and 1202 on the board unit 1100 side are provided. The supply line can be connected freely.

  In this embodiment, the terminals 626a and 627a and the contacts 1200a and 1202a are of the bellows type. In the case of the pin type, there is a risk that the pin may be inadvertently touched and bent during the work, but in the case of the bellows type, there is no such risk. Further, gold plating with a small friction coefficient is adopted for plating of the terminals 626a and 627a and the contacts 1200a and 1202a. Thereby, the sliding goodness (goodness of fitting) at the time of attachment and detachment of game board 4 is secured.

  Here, when the game board 4 is attached to the main body frame 3, if the operation is performed with the power switch 1137 shown in FIG. 133 being turned on, the contact between the terminal 626a and the contact 1200a, specifically, Since a large current (an inrush current described later) flows at the contact points for various voltage supply lines, welding occurs. If the game board 4 is forcibly pushed into and attached to the main body frame 3 in this welded state, the contact 1200a is bent and broken, or the contact 1200a is removed from the main body frame when the game board 4 is removed from the main body frame. The drawer connector 1200 cannot be used due to being peeled off and damaged.

  Further, when the terminal 626a and the contact 1200a are welded, various control boards may malfunction or electronic components mounted on the various control boards may be damaged due to breakage of the connector. Therefore, in the present embodiment, a circuit for preventing welding is provided on the main control board 4100 described later. Detailed description thereof will be described later.

[1-5A-2. Wiring with prize ball unit]
Next, wiring and the like between the payout control board 1186 housed in the payout control board box 1105 and the prize ball unit 800 will be described with reference to FIG. As described above, the prize ball unit relay terminal plate 830 includes the counting switch connector 830a, the payout motor connector 830b, the rotation angle switch connector 830c, the ball break switch connector 830d, the ground connector 830e, and the payout control. A board connector 830f is provided.

  The count switch connector 830a is connected to the wiring from the count switch 812, the payout motor connector 830b is connected to the wire from the payout motor 815, the rotation angle switch connector 830c is connected to the wiring from the rotation angle switch 855, The ball break switch connector 830d is connected to the wire from the ball break switch 778 of the ball passage unit 770, and the ground connector 830e is connected to the ground wire from the payout motor 815. The payout control board connector 830f is connected to the prize ball unit terminal 1187 of the payout control board 1186 by wiring (harness).

  The wiring from the counting switch 812, the wiring from the payout motor 815, the ground wire from the payout motor 815, and the prize ball unit terminal 1187, excluding the wiring from the ball break switch 778 and the wiring from the rotation angle switch 855, The harness is assembled by being hooked by a wiring processing piece 869.

  As described above, the balls supplied from the island are stored in the prize ball tank 720 and the tank rail member 740, taken into the ball path unit 770, and guided to the prize ball unit 800. When the spheres rub against each other and are charged, electrostatic discharge occurs to generate noise. Therefore, the prize ball unit 800 is susceptible to noise and is in an environment.

  As described above, the rotation angle switch 855 is provided on the sensor substrate 854 of the prize ball unit 800, and the detection signal from the rotation angle switch 855 is easily affected by noise due to electrostatic discharge of the sphere. The harness connecting the payout control connector 480f and the prize ball unit terminal 1187, that is, the harness connecting the prize ball unit 800 and the payout control board 1186, is also affected by noise due to electrostatic discharge of the ball. Cheap.

[1-6. Cover body]
Next, the cover body 1250 will be described with reference to FIGS. The cover body 1250 covers the rear surface opening 580 of the main body frame 3, and is inserted from above into a cover body supporting cylinder portion 575 formed on one side of the back surface of the main body frame 3 at one of the upper, middle, and lower sides on one side. A shaft support pin 1251 is formed, and an engagement piece 1252 that engages with a cover body engagement groove 785 formed in the spherical passage unit 770 is formed in the approximate center on the other side. Thus, by inserting the shaft support pin 1251 of the cover body 1250 into the cover body support cylinder portion 575, the cover body 1250 is pivotally supported by the main body frame 3 so as to be freely opened and closed, and the engagement piece 1252 is inserted into the cover body engagement groove 785. By locking, the cover body 1250 can be closed to the main body frame 3, and the back of various components provided on the game board 4 can be protected. In the case of releasing, the engagement between the engagement piece 1252 and the cover body engagement groove 785 may be released.

  Further, in the cover body 1250 in the illustrated case, a locking hole 1253 is formed on the upper and lower sides of the engagement piece 1252 on the open side, and a locking protruding hook piece 570 protruding from the locking wall 569 of the main body frame 3 is provided. A through hole 1254 to be penetrated is formed, and although not shown in detail, a connection operation opening 1255, a standing wall, an abutting protrusion, and a reinforcing rib are formed in the same manner as a cover body 1270 according to a second embodiment described below. Has been. The connection operation opening 1255, the standing wall, the contact protrusion, and the reinforcing rib are provided at the same position as the connection operation opening 1303, the standing wall 1304, the contact protrusion 1305, and the reinforcing rib of the cover body 1300 according to the second embodiment. It performs the same function. Then, in a state where the cover body 1250 is closed, the stop hole 1253 of the cover body 1250 and the stop hole 568 on the main body frame 3 side are matched and fixed with a screw (not shown), whereby the cover body 1250 is attached to the main body frame 3. The rear opening 580 can be closed and fixed. Since the locking protrusion 570 passes through the through hole 1254 of the cover body 1250 with the cover body 1250 closed with respect to the main body frame 3, for example, a lock such as a padlock is locked. The cover body 1250 can be opened only by the person in charge having the padlock key.

[1-6A. Other embodiments of cover body]
The cover body 1250 (hereinafter referred to as “the cover body 1250 according to the first embodiment”) shown in FIG. 5 and FIG. 74 is attached to the lower part of the back surface of the game board 4 as is apparent from FIG. Although it is formed so as to cover the back surface of the game board 4 excluding the main control board box 624, it may be a cover body that covers the entire back surface of the game board 4 including the main control board box 624. A pachinko machine to which such a cover body 1300 (hereinafter referred to as “cover body 1300 according to the second embodiment”) is attached will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 139 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine with the cover body according to the second embodiment, viewed from the back in a state in which the cover body is opened, and FIG. 140 is attached with the cover body according to the second embodiment. FIG. 141 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine to which the cover body according to the second embodiment is attached, and is a perspective view seen from the open side of the cover body, and FIG. 142 is the second embodiment. FIG. 143 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine to which the cover body according to the present invention is attached and is viewed from the shaft support side of the cover body. FIG. 143 is a rear view of the pachinko machine to which the cover body according to the second embodiment is attached. 144 is a rear view of the pachinko machine with the cover body according to the second embodiment removed, and FIG. 145 is a perspective view of the dispensing control board box that is in contact with the lower side of the cover body according to the second embodiment. FIG. 146 shows the second It is the perspective view seen from the inside of the cover body which concerns on embodiment, FIG. 147 is a rear view for demonstrating the effect | action of the cylinder lock provided in the cover body which concerns on 2nd embodiment, FIG. 143 is a cross-sectional view taken along line AA of FIG. 143, FIG. 149 is a cross-sectional view taken along line BB of FIG. 143, and FIG. 150 is a cross-sectional view taken along line CC of FIG. Note that in FIGS. 139 to 150, the same reference numerals are given to configurations that exhibit the same functions as the configurations displayed in the previous drawings.

  As shown in FIGS. 139 and 140, the outer frame 2A of the pachinko machine 1 to which the cover body 1300 according to the second embodiment is attached is the outer frame 2A according to the second embodiment described above. The shape of the provided dish unit 300 is also slightly different. Furthermore, the structure of the main body frame 3 is also a point of a locking wall 569 having a later-described locking hole 568, locking hole 569a, and guide hole 569b formed on the open end side of the pivot support side rear wall 546 (see FIG. 144), and The third side wall 542 and the fourth side wall 543 constituting the rear side wall are different in that the positions of the cutout portions 221 extend downward (see FIG. 140). Also in the configuration, the only difference is that the contact lower step surface 1181a is formed on the cover body 1181 (see FIG. 145). However, the main control board box 624 displayed in FIG. 139 and FIG. 144 is attached to the board substrate holder 623 attached to the lower back of the game board 4 as in the embodiment shown in FIG. In FIG. 139 and FIG. 144, illustration of the game board 4 is omitted.

  First, the cover body 1300 according to the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. The cover body 1300 is formed of a synthetic resin in a dish shape with a slightly vertically long peripheral side wall standing up (a large number of air holes are formed in the upper half of the side wall portion and the rectangular plate portion). A plurality of (four in the illustrated case) pivot pins 1301 are integrally formed on the side wall on one side of the vertical side and inserted into the cover body support cylinder portion 575 formed on the main body frame 3 and pivotally supported. An engagement piece 1302 that engages with a cover body engagement groove 785 formed in the spherical passage unit 770 is integrally formed slightly closer to the upper side of the side wall on the other side of the vertical side. As with the cover body 1250 according to the first embodiment, the shaft support pin 1301 and the engagement piece 1302 are inserted into the cover body support cylinder 575 to insert the cover body 1300 into the main body. The cover body 1300 can be closed to the main body frame 3 by being pivotally supported by the frame 3 so as to be freely opened and closed, and the engaging piece 1302 is locked in the cover body engaging groove 785. The back surface of various components including the main control board box 624 can be protected. The difference between the cover body 1300 according to the second embodiment and the cover body 1250 according to the first embodiment is that the cover body 1300 is not simply provided to be openable and closable, but cannot be illegally opened in the closed state. Since the cylinder lock 1309 is provided on the main control board box 624 and the back surface of the main control board box 624 is covered, the RAM clear switch 624a provided exposed to the outside of the main control board box 624 is connected to a test terminal for testing. The contact operation opening 1303 is provided at a position corresponding to 624b and 624c, and the surface of the cover body 1181 of the payout control board box 1105 is contacted with the front end side of the lower side wall of the cover body 1300 closed. It is a point of contact. Therefore, a characteristic configuration of the cover body 1300 according to these second embodiments will be described below.

  First, the connection operation opening 1303 will be described. The connection operation opening 1303 is formed in a rectangular shape at the upper part of the lower contact side wall 1306 of the lower side of the cover body 1300, and the size thereof is as shown in FIG. The RAM clear switch 624a provided exposed to the outside of the main control board box 624 and the test terminals 624b and 624c to which the inspection equipment is connected are opened. In addition, a standing wall 1304 and an abutting protrusion 1305 that project against the outer peripheral surface of the main control board box 624 in a closed state project from the inside of the connection operation opening 1303. The standing wall 1304 is formed to be relatively high along the left and right opening edges of the connection operation opening 1303, and the contact protrusion 1305 is provided to be relatively low along the one side opening edge from the upper opening edge of the connection operation opening 1303. As shown in FIGS. 148 and 149, the standing wall 1304 and the contact protrusion 1305 are formed on the outer peripheral surface of the main control board box 624 (the surface of the main control board 4100 housed in the main control board box 624). In order to prevent unauthorized actions on the main control board box 624 by inserting an unauthorized tool from the connection operation opening 1303.

  Next, the contact lower side wall 1306 formed on the lower side of the cover body 1300 will be described. When the cover body 1300 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the contact lower side wall 1306 is shown in FIGS. As described above, the upper side portion of the cover body 1181 of the payout control board box 1105 attached to the frame board holder 1101 is brought into contact. Therefore, on the upper side of the cover body 1181 of the payout control board box 1105 attached to the frame board holder 1101 of the pachinko machine 1 to which the cover body 1300 according to the second embodiment is attached, as shown in FIG. A contact low step surface 1181a is formed which is formed to be lower than the surface. Accordingly, the payout control board box 1105 attached to the frame substrate holder 1101 is formed in the payout control board box attachment region of the frame board holder 1101 and the cover body 1133 of the power supply board box 1103 as shown in FIG. In a state of being attached over the attachment region 1143, the payout control board box 1105 is housed in the attachment region 1143, and is fixed so as not to move in the left-right direction or the up-down direction. For this reason, the abutting low step surface 1181a which is a part of the upper surface of the cover body 1181 of the payout control board box 1105 is abutted and covered by the abutting lower side wall 1306 of the cover body 1300, so that the cover body 1300 is not opened. As long as the payout control board box 1105 cannot be removed from the frame board holder 1101.

  Next, a configuration related to the cylinder lock 1309 will be described. In FIG. 146, an elliptical lock hole 1308 for penetrating the cylinder lock 1309 is opened near the lower side of the cover body 1300. A threaded portion 1310 having an elliptical cross section of the cylinder lock 1309 is passed through the lock hole 1308, and a nut 1312 is screwed into the threaded portion 1310 from the inside to fix the cylinder lock 1309 in the lock hole 1308. The cylinder lock 1309 has a lock shaft 1311 projecting from the center of the screw portion 1310 toward the inside of the cover body 1300, and the lock shaft 1311 is a screw that is drilled in a lower portion of the elliptical locking piece 1313. The locking piece 1313 is fixed to the rear end of the cylinder lock 1309 by passing through the hole 1314 and fastening with a nut 1315. With this configuration, the locking piece 1313 can be rotated within a range of 90 degrees by inserting and rotating a key (owned by a manager in charge of the game hall) into the cylinder lock 1309. Yes. In addition, a guide projection 1316 for guiding opening and closing when the cover body 1300 is closed is provided on the lower portion of the lock hole 1308 so as to project inward. Furthermore, a screwing hole 1307 for screwing a screw is formed in the upper part on the open side of the cover body 1300 and above and below the engagement piece 1302.

  On the other hand, a stop hole 568, a lock hole 569a, and a guide hole 569b are formed on the main body frame 3 side so as to correspond to the above-described screw stop hole 1307, lock piece 1313, and guide protrusion 1316. This configuration will be described with reference to FIG. 144. As described above, the cover body contact groove 567 is formed in the shaft support side rear wall 546 of the main body frame 3. Stop holes 568 corresponding to the screw holes 1307 are formed in the upper and lower portions of 567 (up and down with the cover body engaging groove 785 of the ball passage unit 770 sandwiched). Further, as shown in FIG. 147, a locking wall 569 extends in the vertical center line direction of the main body frame 3 at a lower portion of the pivot side rear wall 546 of the main body frame 3, and the locking wall 569. A locking hole 569a and a guide hole 569b are formed on the upper and lower sides. The locking hole 569a is formed in an elliptical shape so that the locking piece 1313 passes therethrough, and the reinforcing wall 569 around the front side of the locking hole 569a is provided with a reinforcing rib.

  Thus, by rotating the cover body 1300 from the open state to the closed state, the guide protrusion 1316 is inserted into the guide hole 569b and the lock piece 1313 of the cylinder lock 1309 is locked as shown in FIG. It will be in the state which penetrated the hole 569a. In this state, by inserting a key into the cylinder lock 1309 and turning it, as shown in FIG. 147 (B), the locking piece 1313 rotates 90 degrees, and one end of the locking piece 1313 is connected to the front side of the locking wall 569. Engage. For this reason, the cover body 1300 is locked to the main body frame 3. Further, since the cover body 1300 is locked by the cylinder lock 1309 at the lower portion of the cover body 1300, the screw holes that match in the closed state are used to fix the upper portion of the cover body 1300 to the main body frame 3. The upper portion of the cover body 1300 is also fixed to the main body frame 3 by screwing screws (not shown) in 1307 and the retaining holes 568. In addition, a cylinder lock may be provided also in the upper part of the cover body 1300, and the cover body 1300 may be locked to the main body frame 3 by the cylinder lock up and down.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 140, the cover body 1300 according to the second embodiment is in a closed state, and the back side is the rearmost end portion of the prize ball tank 720 (in the case of this embodiment, the rear of the discharge port 730). The surface wall) and the rear end wall of the tank rail member 740 and the same vertical surface when viewed from the side. For this reason, when viewed from the back of the pachinko machine 1, there is no unevenness from the upper part to the lower part on the back side, and the shape is extremely refreshing. It is easy to grasp, so it is easy to load and stack, and when it is actually installed on the island base of the amusement hall, it protrudes from the back of the opponent's pachinko machine on the back of the pachinko machine 1 lined up It can be installed very smoothly without worrying about wiring to be performed. In this respect, the pachinko machine 1 using the cover body 1250 according to the first embodiment has the same effect as shown in FIG.

  In the second embodiment described above, the reason why the cover body 1300 is closed by both the upper screw and the lower cylinder lock 1309 is that the cover body 1300 is the same as the first embodiment. Since the covering area is larger in the vertical direction than the cover body 1250, the upper and lower portions may be deformed by heat if the closed state is maintained only at the center of the cover body 1300. It was configured to hold. As a second reason, as described above, the lower side wall 1306 of the cover body 1300 is brought into contact with the upper side portion of the dispensing control board box 1105. In addition, it is necessary to firmly maintain the closed state of the lower part of the cover body 1300, and as a result, the upper part of the cover body 1300 must be closed. For this second reason, in order to maintain the closed state of the lower side portion in particular, a locking device such as the cylinder lock 1309 (not limited to the cylinder lock, any locking device that can be unlocked only by a game hall administrator may be used. ) Is desirable.

  The cover body 1300 according to the second embodiment has been described above. The cover body 1300 according to the second embodiment is configured such that the lower side portion of the cover body 1300 when the cover body 1300 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3. Since the abutting lower side wall 1306 abuts and covers the upper side portion of the cover body 1181 of the dispensing control board box 1105 attached to the frame substrate holder 1101, the dispensing control is performed unless the cover body 1300 is opened. The substrate box 1105 cannot be removed from the frame substrate holder 1101. Further, since the cover body 1300 is locked by the cylinder lock 1309, not only an illegal act on the main control board box 624 covered by the cover body 1300 but also an illegal action on the dispensing control board box 1105 not covered by the cover body 1300 is prevented. be able to. Even when the cover body 1300 is closed and the cylinder lock 1309 is locked, since the connection operation opening 1303 is opened in the cover body 1300, the test terminals 624b and 624c for testing are inspected. The RAM clear switch 624a can be operated when a device is connected or when software or the like runs out of control and recovers. Further, a standing wall 1304 and a contact protrusion 1305 are formed inside the connection operation opening 1303 so that no gap is formed between the connection operation opening 1303 and the main control board box 624. A piano wire or the like can be inserted to prevent fraudulent acts on the back of the game board 4.

  Furthermore, the cover body 1300 according to the second embodiment is in a closed state, and the back side thereof is the same vertical plane when viewed from the rear end wall of the prize ball tank 720 and the rear end wall of the tank rail member 740. Therefore, when viewed from the back of the pachinko machine 1, there is no unevenness from the upper part to the lower part on the back side, and the shape is extremely refreshing. Because it is uniform and easy to grasp, it is easy to load and superimpose, and when it is actually installed on the island base of the amusement hall, the back side of the pachinko machine 1 that is lined up behind the back of the opponent's pachinko machine It can be installed very smoothly without worrying about the wiring that protrudes from the top.

[2. Detailed configuration of game board]
Next, a detailed configuration of the game board 4 in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 151 to 159. FIG. 151 is a front view of the game board, and FIG. 152 is a perspective view of the game board as viewed obliquely from the front right. FIG. 153 is a perspective view of the game board viewed from diagonally left front, and FIG. 154 is a perspective view of the game board viewed from diagonally rear. Further, FIG. 155 is a perspective view disassembled for each main member constituting the game board and viewed obliquely from the front, and FIG. 156 is an exploded view for each main member constituting the game board and viewed from the oblique rear. It is a perspective view. FIG. 157 (A) is a perspective view showing the attacker unit, the side prize port member, and the gate member in the game board from an oblique front, and (B) is a perspective view showing (A) from the oblique rear. Further, FIG. 158 (A) is a perspective view showing the center role in the game board from an oblique front, (B) is a perspective view showing (A) from the rear, and FIG. 159 is a center role in the game board. FIG.

  As shown in the figure, the game board 4 in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment has an outer rail 602 and an inner rail 603, and a player operates a control ball 461 as a game ball (simply “ A frame-shaped front component member 601 that defines the outer periphery of the game area 605 into which the game area 605 is to be shot, and a game panel 600 that is attached to the rear side of the front component member 601 and is disposed so as to close the game area 605. A function display unit 640 disposed on the lower side of the front component 601 outside the game area 605 and on the right side of the out port 606, a function display seal 649 affixed to the front surface of the function display unit 640, and the game area 605 An attacker unit 2000 that is disposed at the approximate center of the right and left direction above the out port 606 and supported by the front surface of the game panel 600, and the attacker unit A side prize opening member 2100 which is arranged along the outer periphery of the game area 605 on the left side of the game area 605 and supported by the front surface of the game panel 600, and a game panel which is arranged on the left side slightly above the center in the vertical direction in the game area 605. 600, a gate member 2200 supported on the front surface of the game area 600, a frame-shaped center accessory 2300 which is disposed at a substantially central portion of the game area 605 and supported by the game panel 600, and a back unit 3000 attached to the rear side of the game panel 600. And a liquid crystal display device 1400 as an effect display means that is attached to the rear side of the back unit 3000 so as to be visible from the player side through the frame of the transparent game panel 600 and the center accessory 2300 and can display a predetermined effect image. , Mainly.

  In the liquid crystal display device 1400 in the game board 4 of this example, two liquid crystal display films, that is, a first display panel 1400a, a second display panel 1400b, and a backlight 1406 (see FIG. 179) are assembled to the frame 1400c. (FIG. 155). The two display panels 1400a and 1400b have a multilayer structure that is arranged apart from each other in the front-rear direction. For example, a character is displayed on the first display panel 1400a on the front side, and a background is displayed on the second display panel 1400b on the rear side. By displaying each of them, it is possible to display a pseudo three-dimensional image having a sense of depth when viewed from the player side. On the rear side of the liquid crystal display device 1400, a peripheral substrate box 622 accommodating the peripheral substrate 4010 and a plurality of cooling fans for air-cooling the liquid crystal display device 1400 are provided. The liquid crystal display device 1400 is detachably attached to the rear side of the back box 621 in the back unit 3000 via a lock member 3134.

    The first display panel 1400a and the second display panel 1400b are formed of a transparent liquid crystal panel using a rectangular transparent electrode. In the present embodiment, the first display panel 1400a and the second display panel 1400b are liquid crystal panels having the same number of pixels, aspect ratio, and size. The backlight is formed of a cold cathode tube or a white LED that is turned on by an inverter circuit (not shown) built in the liquid crystal control board 4150. In the state assembled to the frame 1400c, the interval between the first display panel 1400a and the second display panel 1400b is La.

  Each of the first display panel 1400a and the second display panel 1400b incorporates an LCD driver (liquid crystal drive circuit) and is controlled by a liquid crystal control board 4150, which will be described later, such as an effect design, a character image, or a background image It is possible to display various images and change the display mode. In the present embodiment, in the liquid crystal display device 1400, the first display panel 1400a and the second display panel 1400b are arranged in parallel. As shown in FIG. 155, the second display panel 1400b is disposed behind the first display panel 1400a and overlaps the first display panel 1400a when viewed from the player. Specifically, the first display panel 1400a and the second display panel 1400b include a projection (not shown) projected from a direction perpendicular to the display surface in the first display panel 1400a, and a second display panel 1400b. The projections (not shown) projected from the direction perpendicular to the display surface are arranged so as to coincide with each other. Therefore, in the liquid crystal display device 1400, if the first display panel 1400a is in a transparent state and an image is displayed on the second display panel 1400b, the player displays the image displayed on the second display panel 1400b. It can be visually recognized. In the liquid crystal display device 1400, if the first display panel 1400a is in a transparent state and the second display panel 1400b is also in a transparent state, the player visually recognizes the color of the backlight, that is, “white”. In the liquid crystal display device 1400, the second display panel 1400b is disposed behind the first display panel 1400a so as to overlap the first display panel 1400a when viewed from the player. Therefore, in the liquid crystal display device 1400, if the first display panel 1400a is in a transparent state and an image is displayed on the second display panel 1400b, the player displays the image displayed on the second display panel 1400b. It can be visually recognized. In the liquid crystal display device 1400, if the first display panel 1400a is in a transparent state and the second display panel 1400b is also in a transparent state, the player visually recognizes the color of the backlight, that is, “white”.

  Note that the first display panel 115a or the second display panel 1400b can use a transmissive MEMS (Micro Electro Mechanical Systems). As the backlight, a light bulb, a fluorescent lamp, or an electroluminescence panel (ELP) can be used. The first display panel 115a and the second display panel 1400b can also use an organic EL or a plasma display. In this case, a black background panel is disposed behind the second display panel 1400b as viewed from the player without using a backlight.

  The interval La between the first display panel 1400a and the second display panel 1400b is, for example, the first display so that a three-dimensional visual effect is obtained for the player in the liquid crystal display device 1400. The size is appropriately set based on the size of the panel 1400a or the second display panel 1400b, the display mode of an image displayed on the display panel, and the like. Specifically, the interval La is set to, for example, 5 to 40 mm, and preferably set to 15 to 25 mm. If the interval La is too narrow, it is difficult for the player to feel a stereoscopic effect that appears stereoscopically in the effect display, and if the interval La is too wide, the effect display may appear unnatural to the player. La is preferably set to a value that is most effectively seen by the player in accordance with the specific contents of the effect display.

[2-1. Attacker unit]
The attacker unit 2000 of the game board 4 in the pachinko machine 1 of the present example is inserted into the opening 600e formed in the lower part of the center in the horizontal direction of the game panel 600 from the front side as shown in FIG. Thus, the game panel 600 is fixed to the front surface. The attacker unit 2000 has a plurality of entrances (winning entrances) through which game balls that have been driven into the game area 605 can be received. The first start port 2001, the second start port 2002 disposed below the first start port 2001, and the first start port 2001 and the second start port 2002 disposed below the second start port 2002. And a general winning opening 2003 that is arranged slightly above the left side of the winning prize opening 2003.

  The first start port 2001 of the attacker unit 2000 is open on the upper side so that game balls can be received (winning) at all times. The game ball received in the first start port 2001 is detected by the first start port sensor 3115 in the first start port guide passage 621g formed on the front surface of the back box 621 of the back unit 3000, which will be described later. To be discharged.

  On the other hand, a pair of movable pieces 2005 that can be expanded by a start port solenoid 2010 is disposed between the second start port 2002 disposed below the first start port 2001 and the first start port 2001. In a state where the pair of movable pieces 2005 rises substantially vertically, the first starting port 2001 and the pair of movable pieces 2005 make it impossible to receive the game ball into the second starting port 2002, whereas the pair of movable pieces 2005 In a state where 2005 is expanded in the left-right direction, a game ball can be received at the second start port 2002. That is, the second starting port 2002 is a variable winning port by the pair of movable pieces 2005. The pair of movable pieces 2005 are opened and closed by driving the start opening solenoid 2010 based on detection of the passage of a game ball by a gate sensor 2202 of a gate member 2200 described later. The game ball received in the second starter port 2002 is detected by a second starter port sensor 2012 provided in the attacker unit 2000 and then discharged downward.

  Further, the special winning opening 2003 of the attacker unit 2000 can be opened and closed by a horizontally-long rectangular opening / closing member 2006 capable of closing the opening. The opening / closing member 2006 is pivotally supported at its lower side, and in a substantially vertical state, the special winning opening 2003 can be closed to make it impossible to receive a game ball, and the upper side can move forward. When it is turned, the special winning opening 2003 is opened so that a game ball can be received. The game ball received in the special winning opening 2003 is detected by a count sensor 2014 provided in the attacker unit 2000 and then discharged downward. Further, the opening / closing member 2006 is in a state in which the big prize opening 2003 is closed in the normal gaming state, and the game ball is received (starts winning) at the first starting opening 2001 and the second starting opening 2002. In response to the result of the lottery (special lottery) performed (special lottery result) (when the special lottery result is “big hit” or “small hit”), the attacker solenoid 2016 is driven to open and close.

  Further, as shown in the drawing, the general winning opening 2004 of the attacker unit 2000 is opened upward to the left so that game balls can be received (winned) at all times. After the game ball received in the general winning port 2004 of the attacker unit 2000 is detected by the general winning port sensor 3108 in the general winning port guiding passage 621h formed on the front surface of the back box 621 of the back unit 3000 described later. It is designed to be discharged downward.

  Also, the attacker unit 2000 includes a start port side decoration board 2020 that illuminates and decorates both the left and right sides of the first start port 2001, a grand prize opening decoration board (not shown) that illuminates and decorates the inside of the big prize opening 2003, The lower left relay board 2022 connected to the start opening side decoration board 2020 and the grand prize opening decoration board and illuminating and decorating the lower side of the general winning opening 2004 and connected to a lamp driving board 3120 to be described later, a start opening solenoid 2010, A second starter sensor 2012, a count sensor 2014, and an attacker solenoid 2016 are connected to each other, and an attacker unit relay terminal plate 2024 that relays them to a main control board 4100 and a panel relay board 3124 described later is provided. .

[2-2. Side prize opening member]
In addition, the side prize port member 2100 in the game board 4 is a lower part of the game panel 600 that is located on the left side from the center in the left-right direction, and an opening 600e that is formed on the left side of the opening 600e into which the attacker unit 2000 is inserted and fixed. The three are inserted from the front side and fixed to the front surface of the game panel 600, and are arranged along the outer periphery of the game area 605 so as to be aligned with the general winning port 2004 on the left side of the front view of the attacker unit 2000. One general winning opening 2101 is provided. As shown in the drawing, these two general winning ports 2101 are opened upward so that game balls can always be received (winning).

  Further, the side prize opening member 2100 is arranged at a position where the left end is substantially in contact with the outer periphery of the game area 605 at the upper left end of the side prize opening member 2100 and is inclined so as to become lower toward the right end. The shelf 2102 is provided, and the game balls that have flowed down along the outer periphery of the game area 605 by the side shelf 2102 can be brought toward the center of the game area 605. Note that the three general winning openings 2101 are arranged on the right side of the right end of the side shelf 2102, and even if the game balls are drawn toward the center of the game area 605 by the shelf 2102, the general winning openings There is a possibility of winning 2102.

  This side prize opening member 2100 is formed so as to have a light-transmitting property as a whole, and although not shown, a side lamp decorative board having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the surface is disposed inside. The side winning opening member 2100 can be decorated with light emission by appropriately emitting light from each LED.

[2-3. Gate member]
Further, the gate member 2200 in the game board 4 is inserted from the front side into the opening 600e formed on the left side of the game panel 600 in the left-right direction center and slightly above the center in the vertical direction. The game panel 600 is fixed to the front surface. The gate member 2200 has a gate 2201 having a width through which only one game ball can pass, and a game ball passed through the gate 2201 can be detected by a gate sensor 2202 disposed in the gate 2201. It is like that.

[2-4. Center character]
Further, the center accessory 2300 in the game board 4 is inserted from the front side into the opening 600e that is formed so as to penetrate substantially the center of the transparent game panel 600, and is then placed on the front surface of the game panel 600. As shown in the figure, the frame occupies most of the game area 605 and is formed in a frame shape. The outer peripheral surface on the right side in front view is between the outer diameter of the game area 605 and the outer diameter of the game ball. Are formed in an arc shape so that a slightly larger gap is formed, and the outer peripheral surface on the left side is formed on a substantially straight line that hangs down so as to form an area of a predetermined width with the outer periphery of the game area 605. Has been.

  As shown in FIG. 158, FIG. 159, etc., the center accessory 2300 includes a frame-shaped center frame 2301 substantially along the inner periphery of an opening 600e that opens largely at the approximate center of the game panel 600. The center frame 2301 has a thin plate-like flange portion 2301a that contacts the front surface of the game panel 600, and an insertion wall portion that extends from the flange portion 2301a into the opening portion 600e of the game panel 600. 2301b. Further, the center accessory 2300 is attached to the front surface of the center frame 2301 and protrudes into the game area 605, a stage member 2320 disposed at the lower part of the center frame 2301, and the center frame 2301. And a logo decoration body 2330 which is arranged in the upper part and allows the player to recognize the concept of the pachinko machine 1.

  The front wall member 2310 of the center accessory 2300 protrudes from the front surface of the game panel 600 to the front side, so that the game balls flowing down along the front surface of the game panel 600 in the game area 605 enter the frame. As shown in the figure, the surface is formed in a predetermined shape so that the inside of the game area 605 can be decorated. The front wall member 2310 includes a stepped upper shelf portion 2311 formed on the left side from a substantially central position in the left-right direction on the outer peripheral surface on the upper side and inclined so as to become lower toward the left direction, and on the right side of the upper shelf portion 2311 And an outer peripheral guide wall 2312 extending substantially parallel to the outer periphery of the substantially circular gaming area 605 in front view, and a warp that is open to the left outer peripheral surface and allows the game ball flowing down the gaming area 605 to enter. An inlet 2313 (see FIG. 153) and a warp outlet 2314 for releasing the game ball that has entered the warp inlet 2313 into the frame are provided.

  The front wall member 2310 can flow down through the left side of the center accessory 2300 when a game ball driven into the upper portion of the game area 605 flows down to the upper shelf 2311, and on the right side of the upper shelf 2311. A game ball that has flowed down (approached) to the outer peripheral guide wall 2312 flows down to the lower part of the game area 605 through the right side of the center accessory 2300. That is, if the game ball is driven so that the game ball enters the outer peripheral guide wall 2312 on the right side of the upper shelf 2311 in the center accessory 2300, the chance of enjoying the flow of the game ball is reduced. The hitting strength of the ball can be adjusted as appropriate, and the tension can be maintained to prevent the game from being messy.

  In addition, the stage member 2320 of the center accessory 2300 may cause the game ball released from the warp outlet 2314 of the front wall member 2310 to roll in the left-right direction and then be released into the game area 605 on the upper side of the attacker unit 2000. It can be done. The stage member 2320 is arranged on the front side of the first stage 2321 to which the game ball discharged from the warp outlet 2314 is supplied, and the game ball is supplied from the first stage 2321 and in the game area 605. And a second stage 2322 capable of releasing a game ball. The first stage 2321 is formed in a smooth wavefront shape such that the left and right sides are lowest than the center in the left-right direction, and the second stage 2322 is a curved surface in which the substantially center in the left-right direction is lowered. It is formed in a shape.

  Further, the stage member 2320 is formed with a chance entrance 2323 into which a game ball can enter at the rear side of the first stage 2321 substantially in the left-right direction, and the game ball that has entered the chance entrance 2323 is substantially in the center in the left-right direction. Thus, the game is discharged into the game area 605 from a chance exit 2324 opened at a position below the second stage 2322. As shown in the figure, this chance exit 2324 is arranged immediately above the first start opening 2001 in the attacker unit 2000, and the game balls released from the chance exit 2324 are accepted into the first start opening 2001 with a high probability. (Wins). It should be noted that the stage member 2320 in the center accessory 2300 of this example is formed of a partially transparent member.

  Further, as shown in the figure, the logo decoration body 2330 of the center accessory 2300 is arranged on the upper side of the upper shelf 2311 and the outer peripheral guide wall 2312 at the upper part of the frame, and the letters “MATRIX” indicating the concept of the pachinko machine 1 are shown. Is formed in a relief shape. The logo decoration body 2330 of this example has a left and right “M” and “X” logo fixing body 2330a fixed in position, and an intermediate “ATRRI” logo movable body 2330b extending in the front-rear direction. It is designed to rotate around. More specifically, the logo decoration body 2320 is disposed between the two logo fixing bodies 2330a and the two logo fixing bodies 2330b which are arranged apart from each other in the left-right direction and fixed to the front wall member 2310, and substantially in the left-right direction. A horizontally long logo movable body 2330b rotatably supported around a predetermined axis extending in the front-rear direction with respect to the center frame 2301 at the center, and a gear fixed on the rear side of the logo movable body 2330b and concentrically with the predetermined axis. An arc-shaped movable body side gear (not shown) having teeth, a disk-like drive gear (not shown) meshing with the movable body side gear, and the drive gear are rotationally driven and fixed to the center frame 2301. The logo decoration body drive motor 2333 and the detection piece 233 that protrudes rearward from an arc-shaped slit 2301c fixed to the rear side of the logo decoration body 2330b and formed in the center frame 2301. A detection member 2334 having an a, mainly equipped with a rotation detection sensor 2335 fixed to the rear side of the detection strip 2334a is capable detecting the center underframe 2301 of the detecting member 2334.

  Although not shown, the logo decoration body 2320 is arranged on the rear side of the left and right logo fixing bodies 2330a and on the rear side of the logo movable body 2330b and the logo fixing body decoration board on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the front surface. And a logo movable body decorative board which is rotatably arranged together with the logo movable body 2330b and has a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface. The logo decoration body 2320 rotates the logo movable body 2330b so as to swing around the predetermined axis by repeating normal rotation and reverse rotation of the rotation axis of the logo decoration body driving motor 2333 within a predetermined rotation angle range. In addition, the logo fixing body 2330a and the logo moving body 2330a can be appropriately decorated with light emission by the logo fixing body decoration substrate and the logo moving body decoration substrate.

  Further, the center accessory 2300 has a substantially cylindrical housing portion 2340 with the axial direction shortened in the front-rear direction and opened upward at a position on the right side and lower side of the position where the stage member 2320 is disposed in front view. I have. The housing portion 2340 covers the base end side of the right movable decorative body 3301 and the outer periphery of the base end decorative member 3326 and the like in the right movable decorative body unit 3300 in the back unit 3000 described later. Between this accommodating part 2340 and the 1st stage 2321 and the 2nd stage 2322, the plate-shaped rolling control part 2341 extended upwards so that an upper end may fall to the center side of the left-right direction is provided, and this rolling It is possible to prevent the game balls supplied on the stages 2321 and 2322 by the restricting portion 2341 from entering the housing portion 2340 side. In this example, the height of the rolling restricting portion 2341 is about five times the outer diameter of the game ball.

  Further, as shown in FIGS. 159, 180, etc., the center accessory 2300 is a plate-like extension regulating member 2350 attached so as to be exposed downward in the vicinity of the left end portion in the rear view in the upper part of the frame. The extension regulating member 2350 is an impact absorbing plate made of an elastomer and having a very low coefficient of restitution. As will be described in detail later, the expansion / contraction restricting member 2350 is disposed so as to be located immediately above the tip of the right movable decorative body 3301 when the right movable decorative body 3301 is in the first upright position. The distal end of the right movable decorative body 3301 extended in the state of the first position is in contact with the front end, and the distal end of the right movable decorative body 3301 is in contact with the distal end so that the right movable decorative body 3301 can be prevented from further extending. It has become.

  Further, although the detailed illustration is omitted in the center accessory 2300, a plurality of decorative boards are provided along the frame, and the center accessory 2300 is appropriately illuminated by causing the LEDs mounted on the decorative boards to emit light appropriately. Can be decorated with light emission.

[2-5. Back unit]
Next, a detailed configuration of the back unit 3000 of the game board 4 in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described with reference mainly to FIGS. 160 to 188. FIG. 160 (A) is a perspective view of the back unit viewed from an oblique front, and FIG. 160 (B) is a perspective view of the back unit viewed from an oblique rear. 161 is an exploded perspective view in which the back unit is disassembled for each main configuration and viewed obliquely from the front, and FIG. 162 is an exploded perspective view in which the back unit is disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from the oblique rear. is there. FIG. 163 is a perspective view in which the back box unit in the back unit is disassembled for each main configuration and viewed obliquely from the front, and FIG. 164 is a perspective view in which the back box unit is disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from the oblique rear. FIG. FIG. 165 is a perspective view showing the left movable decorative body unit with the slide rack cover and the lifting rail cover removed, and FIG. 166 is an explanatory view showing the movement of the left movable decorative body unit.

  FIG. 167 (A) is a perspective view of the right movable decorative body unit in the back unit as seen from an oblique front, and (B) is a perspective view of the right movable decorative body unit as seen from an oblique rear. FIG. 168 is an exploded perspective view of the right movable decorative body unit disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from diagonally front, and FIG. 169 is an exploded perspective view of the right movable decorative body unit for each main configuration and viewed obliquely from the rear. It is a disassembled perspective view. FIG. 170 is an explanatory view showing the rotation operation of the right movable decorative body in the right movable decorative body unit, and FIG. 171 is an explanatory view showing the expansion and contraction operation of the right movable decorative body in the right movable decorative body unit. FIG. 172 is a perspective view of the upper left movable decorative body unit in the rear unit as seen from an oblique front, FIG. 173 is a perspective view of the upper left movable decorative body unit as seen from an oblique rear, and FIG. 174 is an upper left movable decorative body. FIG. 175 is an exploded perspective view of the main unit disassembled for each main configuration and viewed obliquely from above, and FIG. 175 is an exploded perspective view of the upper left movable decorative body unit disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from obliquely rear bottom. It is. FIG. 176 (A) is a perspective view of the upper middle movable decorative body unit in the back unit as seen from an oblique front, and FIG. 176 (B) is a perspective view of the upper middle movable decorative body unit as seen from an oblique rear. (A) is an exploded perspective view of the upper middle movable decorative body unit disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from the front, and (B) is an exploded view of the upper middle movable decorative body unit for each main configuration and viewed from the rear. FIG.

  Further, FIG. 178 is a perspective view of the game board as viewed from the upper right, FIG. 179 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line AA in FIG. 151, and FIG. 180 is a perspective of the game board as viewed from the lower right. FIG. FIG. 181 is a front view of the game board showing a state in which the left movable decorative body has moved to the right, and FIG. 182 is a front view of the game board showing a state in which the sub-decorative body of the left movable decorative body has been moved to the right. FIG. FIG. 183 is a front view of the game board showing a state in which the right movable decorative body is turned upright, and FIG. 184 shows a state in which the right movable decorative body is turned to the left and the upper left movable decorative body is lowered. 185 is a front view of the game board, FIG. 185 is a front view of the game board showing a state in which the right movable decorative body is extended from the state of FIG. 184, and FIG. 186 is a further view of the right movable decorative body from the state of FIG. It is a front view of the game board showing the extended state. FIG. 187 is an explanatory diagram showing the movement of the upper middle movable decorative body. FIG. 188 is a cross-sectional view taken along the lateral direction along with the game board at a portion above the liquid crystal display device of the back unit.

  The back unit 3000 in the game board 4 of this embodiment is arranged and fixed on the rear side of the game panel 600, and supports the liquid crystal display device 1400 at a position away from the game panel 600 to the rear side by a predetermined distance as shown in the figure. In addition, a back box unit 3100 having a back box 621 attached to the rear side of the game panel 600, and a left movable decorative body unit 3200 disposed near the left end of the liquid crystal display device 1400 in the back box 621 of the back box unit 3100. A right movable decorative unit 3300 disposed near the right end of the liquid crystal display device 1400 in the back box 621, and an upper left disposed in the back box 621 on the upper side of the liquid crystal display device 1400 and on the left side of the horizontal center. The movable decorative body unit 3400 and the upper middle movable device disposed in the back box 621 on the upper side of the liquid crystal display device 1400 and at substantially the center in the left-right direction. A body 3500, a mainly equipped.

[2-5A. Back box unit]
As shown in FIGS. 163 and 164, the back box unit 3100 in the back unit 3000 includes a box-shaped back box 621 that forms a skeleton of the back unit 3000, is attached to the rear side of the game panel 600, and is opened on the front side. A vertically long right decorative body 3102 disposed at the right end in front view in the back box 621, a right decorative body decorative substrate 31404 disposed on the rear side of the right decorative body 3102 and mounted with a plurality of LEDs on the front surface, and the back box A plurality of guide passages 3106a, 3106b, and 3106c that are arranged at positions corresponding to the side prize port member 2100 at the lower part of the front face in 621 and extend in the vertical direction corresponding to the respective general prize ports 2101 of the side prize port member 2100 are provided. The back box guide member 3106 and the game balls circulating in the guide passages 3106a, 3106b, 3106c of the back box guide member 3106 can be detected. It is provided with a winning hole sensor. In this example, the left two guide passages 3106a and 3106b in the back box guide member 3106 are formed so as to merge on the downstream side, and the general prize opening sensor 3108 is attached below the merged position. It is like that.

  The back box unit 3100 includes an exhaust fan 3112 disposed in the upper right corner of the back box 621 in the front view, a fan mounting cover 3114 fixed in the back box 621 so as to cover the front end of the exhaust fan 3112, It has. The exhaust fan 3112 is a sirocco fan, and although not shown, a suction port is formed on the left side and a discharge port is formed on the bottom. Although details will be described later, the exhaust fan 3112 can discharge the hot air that has spread in the upper portion of the back box 621 to the outside.

  Further, the back box unit 3100 includes a horizontally long rectangular lamp drive board box 3122 which is disposed at the lower rear side of the back box 621 and accommodates the lamp drive board 3120, and is fixed to the rear side of the back box 621 and is fixed to the lamp drive board box. 3122 is a panel relay board 3124 arranged on the left side in the rear view of the panel 3122, a lamp driving board 3120 arranged on the left side in the rear view of the panel relay board 3124, and the right decorative body upper decorative board of the right movable decorative body unit 3300, which will be described later. A lower right drive relay board 3126 that relays connection to the decoration board in the decorative body 3303c, the lower decorative body decoration board 3338, etc., a horizontally-long rectangular upper resistance board 3128 disposed above the back box 621, and the right A rectangular middle resistance board 313 which is arranged on the left side in the rear view of the rear side of the back box 621 on the upper side of the lower drive relay board 3126 and extends long in the vertical direction. When, a, a lower resistance substrate 3132 disposed in front of the lamp driving substrate box 3122 in the rear side of the back box 621.

  The panel relay board 3124 relays connection between a main control board 4100 and a peripheral control board 4140 described later. The panel relay board 3124 is connected to the main control board 4100, the magnetic detection sensor 3116, the count sensor 2014, the general prize opening sensor 3108, the gate sensor 2202, the start opening solenoid 2010, the attacker solenoid 2016, and the function display board 640a. It is also a relay.

  On the other hand, the lamp driving board 3120 drives the LEDs mounted on the decorative boards 2020, 3104, 3205, 3303c, 3338, 3414, 3524, etc. provided in the game board 4 and the movable decorative bodies 2330, 3201, etc. In addition to driving the drive motors 2333, 3220, 3244, 3314, 3348, 3404, 3504 and solenoid 3514 that drive 3301, 3401, 3501, the left rotation of the top lamp illumination unit 200 provided in the door frame 5 The lamp motor 245, the right rotating lamp motor 265, and the central rotating lamp motor 285 are driven. The lamp driving board 3120 is provided with a resistor having a relatively large calorific value on the circuit and separately provided for the upper resistance board 3128, the middle resistance board 3130, and the lower resistance board 3132. The resistance substrates 3128, 3130, and 3132 are exposed rearward on the rear side of the back box 621 so that the heat radiation effect is enhanced and the influence of heat is avoided as much as possible. .

  The back box unit 3100 has a lock member 3134 attached to the rear side of the back box 621 and detachably holding the liquid crystal display device 1400, and is disposed on the left side of the back box guide member 3106 in the back box 621 and will be described later. A left lower drive relay board 3136 that relays the main decorative body drive motor 3220 and the sub-decorative body drive motor 3244 and the like in the left movable decorative body unit 3200 and the lamp drive board 3120, and a right that will be described later, disposed in the lower right corner of the back box 621. And a lower right guide member 3138 for slidably guiding the lower end of the right decorative body base 3302 in the right movable decorative body 3301 in the movable decorative body unit 3300.

  As shown in the figure, the back box 621 in the back box unit 3100 is formed in a box shape with the front side open, and is provided with a plurality of flange-like fixing portions 621 a protruding outward at the front end. It is fixed to the rear side of the game panel 600 through 621a. Further, the back box 621 has a rectangular opening 621c formed substantially at the center of the rear wall 621b, and the liquid crystal display device 1400 supported on the rear side through the opening 621c can be viewed from the player side. Yes. In this example, the opening 621c is formed in a rectangular cylinder shape that extends forward from the rear wall 621b, and the liquid crystal display device 1400 is fitted into the cylindrical opening 621c from the rear side. It has become. In addition, the cylindrical opening 621c has a configuration in which the outer periphery of the opening 621c is recessed backward in the back box 621.

  The back box 621 includes a plurality of reinforcing ribs 621d that connect the left and right peripheral walls of the opening 621c formed in a cylindrical shape and the outer wall of the back box 621, and a triangular plate-like reinforcement at the lower left corner of the front end of the opening 621c. And a placement portion 621f that forms the bottom of the opening 621c and can support the placement of the liquid crystal display device 1400. The strength and rigidity of the cylindrical opening 621c are enhanced by the reinforcing ribs 621d, and the front end of the mounting portion 621f is prevented from being bent downward by the reinforcing portion 621e. The weight of the liquid crystal display device 1400 Can be fully supported.

  Further, the back box 621 has a first start port guide passage 621g for guiding a game ball received in the first start port 2001 of the attacker unit 2000 downward on the lower front surface of the opening 621c, and a general winning of the attacker unit 2000. A general winning opening guide passage 621h for guiding the game ball received in the mouth 2004 downward is formed. The first start port guide passage 621g extends in a crank shape from the substantially center in the left-right direction to the lower right and is formed in a state where the front side is open. A first start port sensor 3115 is attached from the rear side in the middle of the first start port guide passage 621g, and is received by the first start port sensor 3115 into the first start port 2001 to be received in the first start port guide passage. A game ball circulating in 621g can be detected. On the other hand, the general winning opening guide passage 621h is formed in a state where the front side is opened while being linearly extending downward and shorter than the first starting port guide passage 621g at a position slightly to the left from the center in the left-right direction. . A general winning port sensor 3108 is attached to the middle of the general starting port guide passage 621h from the rear side, and is received by the general winning port 2004 of the attacker unit 2000 and circulates in the general winning port guide passage 621h. Can be detected.

  The back box 621 includes a magnetic sensor support 621i that supports the magnetic detection sensor 3116 at a position corresponding to the first start port 2001 in the attacker unit 2000, and the magnetic detection supported by the magnetic sensor support 621i. The sensor 3116 can detect suspicious magnetism that induces a game ball.

  In the back box 621, a game ball that is supplied to the stage member 2320 in the center accessory 2300 and rolls in the left-right direction on the right side of the first start-port guide passage 621g is moved to the first stage 2321 and the second stage for some reason. An intrusion ball discharge passage 621j is formed for discharging the invading game balls when the two stage 2322 passes over the rolling restriction portion 2341 at the right end of the second stage 2322 and enters the right accommodation portion 2340 side. The intrusion ball discharge passage 621j is configured such that the front side is open, and the back box unit 3100 has a ball discharge passage cover that closes the front side of the intrusion ball discharge passage 621j and forms an intrusion ball discharge port 3117. 3118 (see FIGS. 178 and 179).

  Further, the back box 621 is formed with a horizontally long drive motor housing portion 621k whose front side is opened above the opening 621c. The drive motor accommodating portion 621k is configured such that an exhaust fan 3112 is attached to the right end on the front surface, and a ventilation port 621l opening downward is formed on the rear side of the position where the exhaust fan 3112 is attached (FIG. 188). The exhaust fan 3112 discharges air (hot air) in the drive motor housing portion 621k from the ventilation port 621l. By the way, the drive motor housing portion 621k is configured such that a part of the left end in front view faces the front side from the notch portion 612 of the game panel 600 or the front component 601 with the back box 621 attached to the game panel 600 ( 151), the air is sucked from this portion into the drive motor housing portion 621k by the exhaust fan 3112 and discharged from the ventilation port 621l.

  As shown in FIG. 188, the drive motor housing portion 621k in the back box 621 includes a logo decoration body drive motor 2333 of the center accessory 2300, a secondary decoration body drive motor 3244 in the left movable decoration body unit 3200, which will be described later, and an upper left movable body. The upper left drive motor 3404 of the decoration body unit 3400 and the upper middle rotation drive motor 3504 of the upper middle movable decoration body unit 3500 are formed to be received from the drive motors 2333, 3244, 3404, 3504. The heat can be discharged to the outside by the exhaust fan 3112, and the drive motors 2333, 3244, 3404, and 3504 can be cooled by the air sucked in from the left end of the drive motor housing portion 621k. . Thereby, it is possible to prevent heat from being generated in the game board 4, and it is possible to prevent the internal temperature from being increased due to the heat being generated and the occurrence of a malfunction due to melting of the resin member, solder, or the like. It is like that.

  In addition, the back box 621 includes a liquid crystal support portion on the right side of the opening 621c when viewed from the back, and for inserting and locking one fixing piece 1402 that protrudes outward from the left and right sides of the liquid crystal display device 1400 (right side when viewed from the back). In addition, a lock member 3134 is attached to the left side of the opening 621c when viewed from the back, and the other fixing piece 1402 (left side when viewed from the back) of the liquid crystal display device 1400 is supported by the lock member 3134. 1400 is detachably attached to the rear side of the back box 621.

  Further, the back box 621 is not described in detail, but each unit 3200, 3300, 3400, 3500, each board 3104, 3124, 3126, 31283130, 3132, 3136, the right decorative body 3102 and the lamp driving board box. Attachment portions for attaching and fixing 3122 and the like are formed at appropriate positions.

[2-5B. Left movable decorative body unit]
As shown in FIGS. 165 and 166, the left movable decorative body unit 3200 in the back unit 3000 includes a left movable decorative body 3201 formed in the shape of a mobile phone as a predetermined item. This left movable decorative body 3201 includes a main decorative body 3202 that constitutes the main body of the mobile phone, and a sub-decorative body 3203 that opens and closes a portion corresponding to the display unit of the mobile phone. The sub decorative body 3203 in the left movable decorative body 3201 is supported by the main decorative body 3202 on both the left and right sides so as to slide in the vertical direction at a position on the upper side from the substantially vertical center of the main decorative body 3202. The sub-decorative body 3203 has a connecting rod 3203a extending upward from the approximate center in the left-right direction, and the connecting rod 3203a represents an antenna in a mobile phone.

  Further, in the left movable decorative body 3201, the sub decorative body 3203 is raised so that an opening window 3204 whose rear side can be visually recognized with the main decorative body 3202 is formed on the lower side. An effect image displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1400 on the rear side can be viewed through the window 3204. Even when the sub decorative body 3203 is in the lowered position, the opening window 3204 is slightly opened.

  Furthermore, the left movable decorative body 3201 includes a main decorative body decoration board 3205 that is disposed on the rear side of the main decorative body 3202 and has a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface (see FIG. 162). With this main decoration body decoration substrate 3205, the numeric keypad formed on the main decoration body 3205 can be appropriately decorated with light emission.

  The left movable decorative body unit 3200 includes a left traversing unit 3210 that traverses the left movable decorative body 3201 in the left-right direction, and a left lifting unit 3240 that lifts and lowers the auxiliary decorative body 3203 of the left movable decorative body 3201 in the vertical direction. ing. Although details will be described later, the main decorative body 3202 can be moved in the left and right direction together with the sub decorative body 3203 by the left traversing unit 3210, and the sub decorative body 3203 is moved in the vertical direction from the main decorative body 3202 by the left lifting unit 3240 ( Can be moved up and down).

  The left traversing unit 3210 in the left movable decorative body unit 3200 is disposed and supported under the mounting portion 621f on which the liquid crystal display device 1400 is mounted in the back box 621, and extends in the left-right direction. And a pair of rail members 3214 supported at both ends by the main decorative body moving base 3212 and arranged in parallel in the front-rear direction, and a rack gear 3216a that is supported by the pair of rail members 3214 so as to be slidable in the left-right direction and extends in the left-right direction. A slide rack 3216, a pinion gear 3218 that meshes with the rack gear 3216 a of the slide rack 3216, a main decoration body drive motor 3220 fixed to the lower side of the main decoration body moving base 3212 by rotating the pinion gear 3218, and The base end is fixed to the front left end of the slide rack 3216 A main decorative body stay 3222 having an extended end extending upward above the opening 621c of the back box 621 and connected to the main decorative body 3202 at a position below the extended end, and a main decorative body stay An extension end guide member 3224 that guides the extension end of 3222 in the left-right direction and is attached to the back box 621 and a detection piece 3216b extending downward from the slide rack 3216 can be detected and fixed to the main decoration body moving base 3212. The main decoration body position detection sensor 3226 is provided.

  The main decorative body moving base 3212 in the left traversing unit 3210 is formed by bending a metal plate having a predetermined thickness. Direction) A rail support portion 3212b that is bent upward at both ends and supports both ends of the rail member 3214; It is equipped with. A main decoration body drive motor 3220 is attached to a predetermined position below the main body 212a so that the rotation shaft extends upward through the main body 3212a. Further, two through holes arranged in the front-rear direction are formed in the rail support portions 3212b at both ends, and the end portion of the rail member 3214 is inserted through the through holes. Further, a main decoration body position detection sensor 3226 is attached to the front surface of the left mounting fixing portion 3212c in front view. A ground wire 3228 is attached to the left mounting fixing portion 3212c.

  The rail member 3214 of the left traversing unit 3210 is a metal shaft having a circular cross section. Both ends of the rail member 3214 are inserted into the through holes of the rail support portion 3212b in the main decoration body moving base 3212, and the rail member 3214 is more than the rail support portion 3212b. The main decoration body moving base 3212 is supported by attaching an E-ring at an outer position.

  The slide rack 3216 of the left traversing unit 3210 is formed in a box shape having a low height extending in the left-right direction and opened on the upper side, and the rail member 3214 penetrates through the standing wall portions at both ends in the left-right direction. It is slidably supported with respect to 3214. Further, as shown in the figure, a rack gear 3216a is formed inside the front wall portion on the front side, and the bottom wall portion can be inserted with the rotation shaft of the main decorative body drive motor 3220 and is a slit extending long in the left-right direction. 3216c is formed. A stay fixing portion 3216d that protrudes forward and fixes the base end of the main decorative body stay 3222 is formed on the left end front side of the slide rack 3216. A detection piece 3216b extends downward from the lower surface of the stay fixing portion 3216d. Yes. The left traversing unit 3210 further includes a slide rack cover 3230 that closes the upper opening of the slide rack 3216 as shown in FIGS. 161 and 162.

  The main decoration body stay 3222 of the left traversing unit 3210 is formed by bending a metal plate having a predetermined thickness, and extends in the vertical direction and extends in the front-rear direction, and has a plate-like stay main body 3222a and a lower end of the stay main body. A fixed piece 3222b bent rearward from the (base end) and fixed to the stay fixing portion 3216d of the slide rack 3216, and a reinforcing piece 3222c bent rearward along the left side of the stay main body (see FIG. 162). I have. A stay main body 3222a of the main decorative body stay 3222 is formed in a shape in which a predetermined amount is cut from the right end to the left side from a substantially lower side in the vertical direction to the vicinity of the lower end. The right movable decorative body 3201 (main decorative body 3202) is connected and fixed so as to extend to the right side from the approximate center to the upper rear surface side.

  Although not shown in detail, a shaft member protruding upward is attached to the rear surface of the upper end (extending end) of the main decoration stay 3222, and the rolling member rotates at the tip of the shaft member. The rolling member is guided so as to be sandwiched in the front-rear direction by the extended end guide member 3224.

  On the other hand, the left raising / lowering unit 3240 in the left movable decorative body unit 3200 is provided with a plate-like sub-decor body moving base 3242 attached at a predetermined position above the opening 621c in the back box 621, and a rear of the sub-decor body moving base 3242. A sub-decoration body drive motor 3244 that is fixed to the side and passes through the sub-decoration body moving base 3242 and that the rotation axis extends to the front side, and a position that is fixed to the rotation axis of the sub-decoration body drive motor 3244 and is eccentric to the rotation axis A disc-shaped drive gear 3246 having a first action shaft 3246a protruding forward, and meshed with the drive gear 3246 and the same diameter as the drive gear 3246 and disposed on the left side of the drive gear 3246 and with respect to the vertical direction A disc-shaped driven gear 3248 having a second action shaft 3248a protruding forward at a position in phase with the first action shaft 3246a, and a first action The 3246a and the second working shaft 3248a have a first moving slit 3250a and a second moving slit 3250b, which are slidably inserted in the left and right directions, respectively, and left and right below the first moving slit 3250a and the second moving slit 3250b. The plate-like slide member 3250 having a connection slit 3250c that extends in the direction and slidably connects the tip of the connection rod 3203a in the sub-decorative body 3203, and the left and right sides of the slide member 3250 can slide in the vertical direction. And a pair of elevating rails 3252 fixed to the front surface of the auxiliary decorative body moving base 3242, and a plate-like elevating rail cover 3254 that is fixed to the front side of the elevating rail 3252 and can conceal the front surface of the slide member 3250 (see FIG. 161). Reference).

  Although detailed illustration of the left elevating unit 3240 is omitted, the sub-decor body moving base 3242 is formed with an arc-shaped slit arranged coaxially with the rotation axis of the driven gear 3248 and the driven gear 3248. On the rear surface, a detection piece extending through the slit of the auxiliary decoration body moving base 3242 and extending to the rear side is formed, and the auxiliary decoration body position detection sensor 3256 capable of detecting the detection piece is moved to the auxiliary decoration body. It is attached to the rear side of the base 3242 (see FIG. 162). Markers 3246b, which are formed on the front side of the drive gear 3246 and the driven gear 3248 so as to face each other when the first action shaft 3246a and the second action shaft 3248a are located at the bottom dead center, 3248b, and when the driving gear 3245 and the driven gear 3248 are engaged (assembled), the first operating shaft 3246a and the second operating shaft are engaged by engaging the respective markers 3246b and 3248b so as to coincide with each other. 3248b can be assembled to automatically have the same phase.

  Next, the movement of the left movable decorative body 3201 in the left movable decorative body unit 3200 of this example will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 151, 166, 181, and 182. In the normal gaming state, the left movable decorative body 3201 is located at the retracted position on the left outside of the frame of the center accessory 2300 as shown in FIG. 151, and is almost from the player side in the front view. It is in a state where it cannot be visually recognized. In this state, as shown in FIG. 166 (A), the left end of the slide rack 3216 in the left traversing unit 3210 is in contact with the right side of the left rail support portion 3212b in the main decoration body moving base 3212. At the same time, the detection piece 3216b of the slide rack 3216 is detected by the main decorative body position detection sensor 3226.

  In this state, when the main decoration body drive motor 3220 is driven and the pinion gear 3218 fixed to the rotation shaft is driven to rotate counterclockwise in plan view, the slide rack having a rack gear 3216a meshing with the pinion gear 3218 is obtained. 3216 is guided by the pair of rail members 3214 and moves to the right. As the slide rat 3216 moves, the main decorative body stay 3222 fixed to the stay fixing portion 3216d of the slide rack 3216 moves, and the left movable decorative body 3201 supported by the main decorative body stay 3222 moves to the right. (See FIG. 166 (B)). As a result, the left movable decorative body 3201 moves from the retracted position that is not visible from the player side to the appearance position that is located on the front side of the liquid crystal display device 1400 that is visible (see FIG. 181). .

  Note that the extension end guide member 3224 of the left traversing unit 3210 has a position in the front-rear direction substantially the same as the sub-decoration body 3203 of the left movable decoration body 3210, and the extension end guide member 3224 has a subordinate position directly below the extension end guide member 3224. In a state where the decorative body 3203 is positioned, the sub-decorative body 3203 cannot be raised. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 166 (B) and the like, the appearance position of the left movable decorative body 3201 is a position where at least the auxiliary decorative body 3203 has moved to the right side of the right end of the extended end guide member 3224.

  Further, in this example, as shown in the drawing, even when the left movable decorative body 3201 is located at the appearance position, it is located between the right end of the slide rack 3216 and the right rail support portion 3212b of the main decorative body moving base 3212. The rotational driving of the main decorative body drive motor 3220 stops at a position where a fixed gap is formed, so that the right end of the slide rack 3216 is prevented from coming into contact with the right rail support portion 3212b. It has become. The upper end of the connecting rod 3203a of the sub decorative body 3203 in the left movable decorative body 3201 is slidably connected in the left-right direction by the connecting slit 3250c of the slide member 3250 in the left elevating unit 3240, and a pair of elevating rails The connecting rod 3203a, that is, the left movable decorative body 3201 can be moved in the left-right direction without any problem with respect to the slide member 3250 whose left-right position is fixed by 3252.

  In a state where the left movable decorative body 3201 is located at the appearance position, the left movable decorative body 3201 is positioned in front of the liquid crystal display device 1400, and an effect image can be seen from the slightly opened opening window 3204 of the left movable decorative body 3201. It is like that. This makes it possible for the first player to think that the secondary decorative body 3203 is raised and the opening window 3204 becomes large, and not only the movement of the left movable decorative body 3201 but also the secondary decorative body. An expectation can be given depending on whether 3203 rises or not, and the interest of the player can be enhanced.

  Subsequently, from the state where the left movable decorative body 3201 is located at the appearance position, the sub decorative body 3203 is raised by the left elevating unit. More specifically, when the sub decorative body 3203 of the left movable decorative body 3201 is in the lowered position, the first operating shaft 3246a and the second operating shaft 3248a provided in the drive gear 3246 and the driven gear 3248 have the same height. The first operating shaft 3246a is positioned at the left end of the first moving slit 3250a in the slide member 3250, and the second operating shaft 3248a is positioned at the right end of the second moving slit 3250b in the slide member 3250. It is in a state. From this state, when the auxiliary decoration body drive motor 3244 in the left elevating unit 3240 is driven to rotate the drive gear 3246 counterclockwise when viewed from the front, the driven gear 3248 meshing with the drive gear 3246 rotates clockwise. To do. As the drive gear 3246 and the driven gear 3248 rotate, the first action shaft 3246a and the second action shaft 3248a rotate in the opposite directions from the position of the bottom dead center while keeping the same vertical position. In other words, it circulates in a state where the vertical direction is substantially in phase.

  As the first action shaft 3246a and the second action shaft 3248a move around, the action shafts 3246a and 3248a slide in the first movement slit 3250a and the second movement slit 3250b to the right and left, respectively. At the same time, the slide member 3250 guided by the pair of elevating rails 3252 slides upward. Along with the upward movement of the slide member 3250, the auxiliary decoration body 3203 is pulled up through the connection rod 3203 a whose upper end is inserted and connected to the connection slit 3250 c, and the auxiliary decoration body 3203 is raised with respect to the main decoration body 3202. As the sub-decorative body 3203 is raised, the opening window 3204 of the left movable decorative body 3201 is greatly expanded upward (see FIG. 166C).

  And when the 1st action shaft 3246a and the 2nd action shaft 3248a which go around reach the top dead center, while the rotation drive of the sub decoration body drive motor 3244 stops, the upward movement of the slide member 3250 stops, The sub decorative body 3203 stops at the raised position. As described above, the left movable decorative body 3201 positioned at the appearance position is positioned on the front surface of the liquid crystal display device 1400, and the rear side effect is displayed from the opening window 3204 that is widened by the rising of the sub decorative body 3203. The image can be sufficiently visually recognized.

  Although detailed illustration is omitted, in the liquid crystal display device 1400 of this example, different effect images are displayed in the area corresponding to the opening window 3204 of the left movable decorative body 3201 and the other areas. As a result, an independent effect image is displayed on the opening window 3204, so that the game is as if the image is displayed on the display unit (opening window 3204) of the mobile phone as if viewed from the left movable decorative body 3201. So that the player can have an illusion, the moving image of the left movable decorative body 3201 can be moved and the effect image displayed on the opening window 3204 can be enjoyed, and the player's interest in the game can be suppressed from decreasing. It has become.

  Further, in the left elevating unit 3240, the first action shaft 3246a and the second action shaft 3248a are moved around in a direction away from the position where the drive gear 3246 and the driven gear 3248 mesh with each other, and the first action shaft 3246a. Since the slide member 3250 is slid in the vertical direction at a position where the second action shaft 3248a approaches the left and right lift rails 3252 that slidably support the slide member 3250, the lift rail 3252 and the slide member 3250 are also slidable. As a result, the occurrence of rattling can be reduced as much as possible, and the slide member 3250 can be raised and lowered smoothly.

  On the other hand, when the left movable decorative body 3201 is returned to the retracted position, an operation reverse to the above is performed. First, the first decorative shaft projecting from the drive gear 3246 and the driven gear 3248 is driven by rotating the auxiliary decorative body driving motor 3244 clockwise in front view with respect to the auxiliary decorative body 3203 in the raised position. 3246a and the second action shaft 3248a each move so as to move downward from the top dead center toward the bottom dead center, and the slide member moves along with the orbital movement of the first action shaft 3246a and the second action shaft 3248a. 3250 also slides downward, and sub-decorative body 3203 descends. Then, when the first action shaft 3246a and the second action shaft 3248a reach the bottom dead center, the rotational driving of the auxiliary decoration body drive motor 3244 stops, and the first and second action shafts 3246a and 3248a move around. The slide member 3250, that is, the descent of the sub decorative body 3203 stops, and the sub decorative body 3203 is positioned at the lowered position.

  When the main decorative body drive motor 3220 of the left traversing unit 3210 is driven to rotate clockwise in plan view with the secondary decorative body 3203 positioned at the lowered position, the secondary decorative body 3203 slides by meshing the pinion gear 3218 and the rack gear 3216a. At the same time as the rack 3216 moves to the left, the main decoration body 3202 moves to the left together with the sub decoration body 3203 via the main decoration body stay 3222 fixed to the slide rack 3216. Thereafter, when the detection piece 3216b of the slide rack 3216 is detected by the main decoration body position detection sensor 3226, the rotation of the main decoration body drive motor 3220 stops and simultaneously the movement of the main decoration body 3202 to the left stops, The main decorative body 3202, that is, the left movable decorative body 3201 is located at the retracted position, and the left movable decorative body 3201 returns to the normal state.

  Thus, according to the left movable decorative body unit 3200 of this example, the left movable decorative body 3201 imitating a mobile phone hidden on the left side of the liquid crystal display device 1400 is traversed in accordance with the gaming state. 1400 appears on the front side of 1400, and the secondary decorative body 3203 rises from the main decorative body 3202, and the opening window 3204 as a display unit of the mobile phone expands. Therefore, the left movable decoration that moves in two directions in two stages The movement of the body 3201 can entertain the player, and an effect image as if the image is displayed can be displayed on the open window 3204 enlarged by the liquid crystal display device 1400. The player can be entertained not only by the movement of the decorative body 3201 but also by the effect image displayed on the opening window 3204. There can be suppressed.

  In addition, since the left movable decorative body 3201 appears and a predetermined effect image can be seen through the opening window 3204, it is possible to remind the player that something is likely to be good. Thus, it is possible to increase a sense of expectation for the occurrence of an advantageous game state such as a “hit” game, and to suppress a decrease in interest for the game.

[2-5C. Right movable decorative body unit]
As shown in FIGS. 167 to 171 and the like, the right movable decorative unit 3300 in the back unit 3000 includes a right movable decorative body 3301 having a long and narrow shape with a sharp upper end. The right movable decorative body 3301 is supported by a right decorative body base 3302 whose base end side (lower end side) is rotatable about an axis extending in the front-rear direction, and a right decorative body base 3302 that is slidable upward in the longitudinal direction. And a distal end member 3304 supported so as to be able to advance and retreat in the longitudinal direction from the distal end (upper end) of the right decorative body main body 3303. As shown in the drawing, the right movable decorative body 3301 has a base end side disposed below the liquid crystal display device 1400, and in a normal state (a contracted state), the tip (the tip of the tip member 3304) is a liquid crystal display. The whole extending to a height slightly lower than the upper side of the device 1400 is formed in a long shape.

  Although details will be described later, the tip member 3304 is urged in a forward direction protruding from the tip of the right decorative body main body 3303 and can be retracted into the right decorative body main body 3303. The right movable decorative body 3301 further includes a movable decorative portion 3305 that is movable in accordance with the advancement and retreat of the distal end member 3304 on the distal end side, as will be described in detail later.

  In this example, the right decorative body base 3302 in the right movable decorative body 3301 is formed in a thin box shape with the rear side open and extending in the up-down direction, as shown in the figure, and extends from the lower end to the upper end. The rotation shaft 3302a extending to the front side is provided at about 1/3 of the total length. In this example, the portion where the rotation shaft 3302a is disposed is referred to as the base end side, and the rotation shaft The upper end side in the longitudinal direction from 3302a is referred to as the front end side. As shown in the figure, the right decorative body base 3302 is provided with a predetermined decoration on the front surface on the tip side of the rotating shaft 3302a.

  The right decorative body base 3302 is formed on the front side of the rotation shaft 3302a on the axis extending in the longitudinal direction through the axis of the rotation shaft 3302a, and has a first slide slit 3302b having a predetermined length penetrating in the front-rear direction. And a second slide slit 3302c that is disposed on the front end side of the first slide slit 3302b and is formed on the same axis as the first slide slit 3303b and substantially the same length. The first decorative slit main body 3303 can be slidably supported in the longitudinal direction by the first slide slit 3302b and the second slide slit 3302c. Further, the right decorative body base 3302 is formed in a rectangular shape in a front view with respect to the rotation shaft 3302a, and a rack housing capable of accommodating a slide rack 3344 of a right decorative body expansion / contraction unit 3340, which will be described later, on the rear side. A portion 3302d is formed.

  Note that a ball receiving portion opened to the front side is formed at the lower end of the right decorative body base 3302, and a rolling ball 3306 is inserted into the ball receiving portion so as to protrude forward. The rolling ball 3306 comes into contact with the rear surface of the lower right guide member 3138 fixed to the back box 621, and the contacted rolling ball 3306 rolls on the rear surface of the lower right guide member 3138. Thus, the lower end of the right decorative body base 3302 can be smoothly rotated, and the lower end of the right decorative body base 3302 moves forward by the rolling ball 3306 coming into contact with the rear surface of the lower right guide member 3138. Can be prevented. That is, it is possible to prevent the distal end side of the right movable decorative body 3301 sandwiching the rotation shaft 3302a from moving backward, and the right movable decorative body 3301 swings in the front-rear direction due to the rotation and expansion / contraction of the right movable decorative body 3301. In addition, it is possible to prevent the tip of the liquid crystal display device 1400 from being in contact with the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 1400 disposed on the rear side, and to prevent the liquid crystal display device 1400 from being troubled by the contact with the right movable decorative body 3301. Be able to. 1400

  On the other hand, as shown in the drawing, the right decorative body main body 3303 is disposed in the lens part 3303a, a lens part 3303a having a cylindrical shape and translucency, four fin decorations 3303b extending along the lens part 3303a, and the lens part 3303a. A right decorative body interior decoration board 3303c having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface and a cap part 3303d provided at the tip of the lens part 3303a are provided. The lower end of the tip member 3304 is inserted into the lens portion 3303a of the right decorative body 3303 from the tip side through a cap portion 3303d. Further, in the right decorative body main body 3303, a strip-shaped wiring cable 3303e connected to the right decorative body decorative board 3303c extends from the left end of the lower end. Further, the right decorative body 3303 has a first fixed shaft 3303f that protrudes rearward from the rear side of the lower end of the lens portion 3303a, and a second fixed that protrudes rearward by being spaced apart from the first fixed shaft 3303f by a predetermined distance. And a shaft 3303g. The first fixed shaft 3303f and the second fixed shaft 3303g correspond to the first slide slit 3302b and the second slide slit 3302c of the right decorative body base 3302, respectively. Although details will be described later, the slide slits 3302b and 3302c It is slidably supported in the longitudinal direction.

  The tip member 3304 includes a cylindrical main body portion 3304a, a substantially transparent plug portion 3304b extending upward from the main body portion 3304a and having a sharp tip, and a lower end extending downward from the main body portion 3304a. A substantially transparent cylindrical plug shaft 3304c that is inserted into the lens portion 3303a through the cap portion 3303d, and a coil spring that is inserted outside the plug shaft 3304c and biases the main body portion 3304a and the right decorative body main body 3303 away from each other. 3304d. Although not shown, the main body 3304a is provided with a decorative board on the right decorative body on which an LED capable of irradiating light toward the plug portion 3304b at the tip is provided, and the plug portion 3304b emits light. It can be decorated. Although illustration is omitted, a projection protruding in a direction perpendicular to the axis is formed at the lower end of the plug shaft 3304c, and the projection prevents the plug shaft 3304c from coming out of the right decorative body main body 3303 upward. Like to do. That is, the upward moving end of the tip member 3304 urged upward by the coil spring 3304d is restricted by the protrusion of the plug shaft 3304c.

  Further, the movable decorative portion 3305 is disposed along the longitudinal direction of the right decorative body main body 3303 and the tip member 3304 in a front view, the upper end is fixed to the main body portion 3304a of the tip member 3304, and the lower end is a cap portion in the right decorative body main body 3303. A decorative portion 3305a extending to the upper end of 3303d is provided. The lower end of the decorative portion 3305a is located in front of the cap portion 3303d, and does not come into contact with the right decorative body main body 3303 even if the tip member 3304 advances or retreats. The movable decorative portion 3305 has a lower collar member 3305b whose lower end is rotatably supported at positions on both the left and right sides of the cap portion 3303d in the right decorative body main body 3303, and a lower end that is rotatable at the upper end of the lower collar member 3305b. And an upper collar member 3305c that is connected and rotatably supported at positions on the left and right sides of the main body 3304a of the tip member 3304. The combined length of the lower collar member 3305b and the upper collar member 3305c is longer than the linear distance between the cap portion 3303d and the main body portion 3304a that are rotatably supported. A portion where the lower collar member 3305b and the upper collar member 3305c are rotatably connected to each other is a position away from the axis of the right movable decorative body 3301 (plug shaft 3304c). As shown in FIGS. 171 (B) and 171 (C), in the movable decorative portion 3305, when the tip member 3304 advances and retreats with respect to the right decorative body main body 3303, the lower collar member 3305b and the upper collar member 3305c are pivotally supported. As the pantograph turns, the whole part is movable and deformed like a link.

  This right movable decorative body unit 3300 has a right decorative body rotating unit 3310 for rotating the base end side of the right decorative body base 3302 around a rotational axis extending in the front-rear direction, and a right decorative body base 3302 with a right decoration. A right decorative body expansion / contraction unit 3340 that expands / contracts the body main body 3303 in the longitudinal direction. The right movable decorative body 3301 will be described in detail later, but the right decorative body rotating unit 3310 moves the distal end side of the right movable decorative body 3201 to the right side from the vertical state when viewed from the front, so that it is near the right end of the liquid crystal display device 1400. It is possible to rotate between a right tilt state as a normal state and a left tilt state in which the tip side moves to the left side from the vertical state and is positioned in front of the liquid crystal display device 1400. Also, the right decorative body main body 3303 slides upward in the longitudinal direction with respect to the right decorative body base 3302 by the right decorative body expansion / contraction unit 3340, so that the whole is extended and its length is increased. In the extended state, the tip of the tip part 3304 extends upward beyond the upper side of the liquid crystal display device 1400.

  The right decorative body rotating unit 3310 in the right movable decorative body unit 3300 of the present example supports the base end side of the right decorative body base 3302 so as to be rotatable around a rotating shaft 3302a extending in the front-rear direction, and the back box 621. A plate-shaped right decorative body unit base 3312 which is attached to the left side of the right side below the opening 621c facing the liquid crystal display device 1400, and a right decorative body fixed to the rear side of the right decorative body unit base 3312. The body rotation drive motor 3314, the disk-shaped drive gear 3316 fixed to the rotation shaft of the right decorative body rotation drive motor 3314, and the drive gear 3316 mesh with the rotation shaft 3302a and are formed in a circular arc shape. A rotation gear 3318 fixed to the front surface of the right decorative body base 3302 and a rotation detection piece 3318a extending from the outer periphery of the rotation gear 3318 can be detected. A right decorative body rotation detecting sensor 3320 is fixed to the rear side of the right decorations unit base 3312, a mainly provided.

  Further, the right decorative body rotation unit 3310 rotates together with the rotation gear 3318 disposed on the front side of the right decorative body unit base 3312 and has an arcuate accommodation recess 3322a that is open in one of the front and circumferential directions. A member 3322, a housing recess cover 3324 that closes the opened front end of the housing recess 3322a in the holding member 3322, and a rotating shaft 3302a in the right decorative body base 3302 so as to cover the front side of the housing recess cover 3324 and the holding member 3322. A base end decoration member 3326 that is fixed to the front end of the base and has a substantially circular shape in front view, and a decoration is formed on the surface thereof, and is fixed and opened to the front side of the right decoration base 3302 so as to be connected to the upper part of the base end decoration member 3326 And a base decoration member 3328 having a substantially U shape in plan view.

  The right decorative body unit base 3312 in the right decorative body rotating unit 3310 has a substantially rectangular shape extending in the left-right direction, is formed by bending a metal plate having a predetermined thickness, and has a back box 621 at both ends in the left-right direction. There is a fixing portion 3312a for fixing to the head. A cylindrical bearing member 3330 extending forward is fixed to the upper front surface of the right decorative body unit base 3312 substantially in the left-right direction, and the rotation shaft 3302a of the right decorative body base 33020 is rotated by the bearing member 3330. It can be supported as possible. Also, the right decorative body unit base 3312 has a substantially semicircular arc-shaped through-hole 3312b formed coaxially with its axis below the fixed bearing member 3330, and more than the through-hole 3312b. An opening 3312c which is disposed on the left side of the bearing member 3330 fixed on the outer periphery and penetrates in a rectangular shape. Through this through-hole 3312b, the rotation gear 3318 and the holding member 3322 are connected so as to sandwich the right decorative body unit base 3312 therebetween. Further, the right decorative body rotation detection sensor 3320 fixed to the rear side through the opening 3312c can be viewed from the front side.

  The right decorative body rotation drive motor 3314 of the right decorative body rotation unit 3310 is fixed to the rear side of the right decorative body unit base 3312 via the motor base 3332 so that the rotation shaft extends forward. As shown in the figure, the motor base 3332 is formed in a box shape with the front and left sides open, and the rotation shaft of the right decorative body rotation drive motor 3314 protrudes inside, and the drive gear 3316 is accommodated. It has become so.

  In addition, the rotation gear 3318 of the right decorative body rotating unit 3310 is formed in an arc shape with the length of approximately 2/3 of the circumference centered on the rotating shaft 3302a of the right decorative body base 3302 and the upper side removed. The gear teeth meshing with the drive gear 3316 are formed on the outer periphery within an angle range of about 50 degrees from the right end, and the rotation detecting piece 3318a extending outward is formed on the outer periphery near the left end. Yes. Further, the rotation gear 3318 is provided with three connecting bosses 3318b protruding in the circumferential direction and spaced apart from each other by a predetermined distance in the vicinity of the inner periphery on the front surface. These connecting bosses 3318b are formed so as to extend forward through the through hole 3312b of the right decorative body unit base 3312, and the holding member 3322 is connected and fixed to the front end of the connecting boss 3318b. Yes. Furthermore, ball receiving portions formed at predetermined intervals in the circumferential direction are formed in the vicinity of the outer periphery on the front surface of the rotating gear 3318, and the rolling balls 3334 are projected into the ball receiving portions so as to protrude forward. Are inserted respectively. The rolling ball 3334 rolls with its front end in contact with the rear surface of the right decorative unit base 3312, and the rotating gear 3318 (right decorative body base 3302) is rolled by the rolling ball 3334. Can be smoothly rotated with respect to the rear surface of the right decorative body unit base 3312.

  Further, as described above, the holding member 3322 of the right decorative body rotating unit 3310 is formed in a substantially semicircular arc shape, and includes an accommodation recess 3322a in which the left end and the front end are opened. A wiring cable 3303e of a right decorative body expansion / contraction unit 3340, which will be described later, is accommodated in the housing recess 3322a so as to be able to protrude and retract from the left end. Further, the holding member 3322 is connected to the connecting boss 3318b of the rotating gear 3318 whose rear side protrudes forward through the through-hole 3312b of the right decorative body unit base 3312. The rotation gear 3318 and the rotation axis 3302a of the right decorative body base 3302 can be rotated. Further, near the outer periphery of the rear surface of the holding member 3322, three ball receiving portions are formed that are spaced apart from each other in the circumferential direction by a predetermined distance, and rolls so as to protrude rearward in these ball receiving portions. Balls 3336 are respectively inserted. The rolling ball 3336 rolls with its rear end in contact with the front surface of the right decorative body unit base 3312, and the rolling ball 3336 rolls so that the holding member 3322 moves to the right decorative body unit. The base 3312 can be smoothly rotated with respect to the front surface. Therefore, in the right decorative body rotating unit 3310 of this example, the right decorative body unit base 3312 is sandwiched from the front and rear via the rolling balls 3336 and 3334 by the holding member 3322 and the rotating gear 3318, so The right decoration body base 3302 side such as the rotation gear 3318 and the like can be smoothly rotated without stress with respect to the body unit base 3310 and the right decoration with respect to the surface of the right decoration body unit base 3312 The body base 3302 side is not inclined.

  Further, the base decoration member 3326 of the right decorative body rotating unit 3310 is formed so that the letters “PLUG IN” are formed on the front surface and partially translucent as shown in the figure. Yes. As shown in FIG. 151 and the like, the base decoration member 3326 of the right decorative body rotating unit 3310 is accommodated in the accommodating portion 2340 of the center accessory 2300, and the outer periphery excluding the upper side is the accommodating portion. 2340. On the rear side of the base end decoration member 3326 is provided with a right decorative lower decoration board 3338 on which a plurality of LEDs capable of emitting light toward the front side are mounted, and the base end decoration member 3326 can be appropriately decorated with light emission. It can be done. Further, the base decorative member 3328 of the right decorative body rotating unit 3310 is configured such that the lower part of the right decorative body main body 3303 is accommodated in a substantially U shape in plan view, and is similar to the base end decorative member 3326. It is formed so as to be partially translucent, and is decorated with light emission by the right decorative body middle decorative substrate 3303c of the right decorative body main body 3303.

  On the other hand, the right decorative body expansion / contraction unit 3340 in the right movable decorative body unit 3300 is supported so as to be slidable in the longitudinal direction in the first slide slit 3302b and the second slide slit 3302c of the right decorative body base 3302, and the right decorative body. A slide bush 3342 through which the first fixed shaft 3303f and the second fixed shaft 3303g of the main body 3303 can be inserted and fixed, and the rear end of the right decorative body base 3302, and the upper end thereof is the first slide slit of the right decorative body base 3302 A slide rack 3344 having a linear rack gear 3344a connected to the first fixed shaft 3303f of the right decorative body main body 3303 penetrating from the front side through the slide bush 3342 supported by 3302b, and a rack gear of the slide rack 3344 Meshes with 3344a A disk-shaped pinion gear 3346, a right decorative body slide drive motor 3348 that rotates and drives the pinion gear 3346, a right decorative body slide drive motor 3348 are supported on the rear side, and a slide rack 3344 is slidably supported in the longitudinal direction. , And a base cover 3350 attached to the rear side of the right decorative body base 3302.

  The slide rack 3344 of the right decorative body expansion / contraction unit 3340 has a rectangular shape extending in the longitudinal direction of the right movable decorative body 3301, and the rack gear 3344 a is directed to the center side along the left side of the rear view on the back surface. Is formed. The slide rack 3344 includes a slide detection piece 3344b that protrudes rearward from the vicinity of the rear end of the side where the rack gear 3344a is formed. The slide detection piece 3344b extends rearward through a detection slit 3350a (see FIG. 167B) formed in the base cover 3350, and is fixed to the rear side of the base cover 3350. It is detected by a decorative body slide detection sensor 3352.

  The base cover 3350 of the right decorative body expansion / contraction unit 3340 has a pair of rail portions 3350b extending in the longitudinal direction at a predetermined interval on the front surface side, and a slide rack 3344 is disposed between the rail portions 3350b. Thus, the slide rack 3344 can be slidably supported in the longitudinal direction. A detection slit 3350a is disposed between the pair of rail portions 3350b. This base cover 3350 is formed so as to close the rear end of a shallow box-shaped right decorative body base 3302 whose rear side is open, and a slide rack 3344 is provided between the right decorative body base 3302 and the base cover 3350. The arrangement is supported.

  The right decorative body slide drive motor 3348 is fixed to the rear side of the base cover 3350 through a box-shaped motor base 3354 having an open front side so that the rotating shaft extends to the front side, and the pinion gear 3346 is It is disposed between the pair of rail members 3350b on the front side of the base cover 3350.

  Next, the movement of the right movable decorative body 3301 in the right movable decorative unit 3300 of this example will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 170 and 171. In the normal gaming state, as shown in FIG. 151, the right movable decorative body 3301 is in an initial position state in which the distal end tilts to the right with respect to the proximal end at the right end in the frame of the center accessory 2300. . In this state, the tip of the right movable decorative body 3301 is not visible from the player side by the frame of the center accessory 2300, and the right movable decorative body 3301 is in a contracted state. When the right movable ornament 3301 is in the initial position, the rotation detection piece 3318a of the rotation gear 3318 is detected by the right ornament rotation detection sensor 3320. From this state, when the right decorative body rotation drive motor 3314 is driven to rotate the drive gear 3316 in a clockwise direction in a front view, the rotation gear meshes with the rotation of the drive gear 3316. 3318 rotates in the counterclockwise direction around the axis of the bearing member 3330 fixed to the right decorative body unit base 3312 (around the rotation shaft 3302a of the right decorative body base 3302). At the same time, the right decorative body base 3302 and the right decorative body main body 3303 are rotated in the counterclockwise direction.

  In this example, the rotation gear 3318 is rotated within an angle range of about 40 degrees by the right decoration body rotation drive motor 3314, and the right movable decoration body 3301 is moved from the initial position described above. When the counterclockwise rotation is about 8 degrees, the right movable decorative body 3301 is in a first vertical position (see FIGS. 170 and 183), and is counterclockwise from the initial position described above. When rotated about 40 degrees, the right movable decorative body is in the second position (see FIGS. 170 and 184) where the tip of the right movable decorative body points to the letter “A” on the left side of the logo decorative body 2330 It becomes. In the contracted state in the first position and the second position, the tip of the right movable decorative body 3301 is positioned below the upper side of the liquid crystal display device 1400. In the state of the second position, the tip member 3304 of the right movable decorative body is positioned at the approximate center in the left-right direction on the front surface of the liquid crystal display device 1400, and the right movable decorative body 3301 is very It is designed to stand out.

  In order to return the right movable decorative body 3301 rotated to the first position or the second position to the initial position where the tip is inclined to the right, the right decorative body rotation drive motor 3314 is rotated in the opposite direction. The right movable decorative body 3301 can be rotated around the rotation shaft 3302a on the proximal end side in the clockwise direction when viewed from the front. When the rotation detection piece 3318a of the rotation gear 3318 is detected by the right decoration body rotation detection sensor 3320, the rotation of the right decoration body rotation drive motor 3314 is stopped, so that the right movable decoration body 3301 is moved. The tip can be returned to the initial position tilted to the right.

  The right movable decorative body 3301 is not extended in the initial position with the tip tilted to the right, and the right movable decorative body 3301 rotates from the initial position and extends when the first position or the second position is reached. It is like that. The right movable decorative body 3301 is configured such that the slide detecting piece 3344b of the slide rack 3344 is detected by the right decorative body slide detection sensor 3352 in a normal contracted state. The right movable decorative body 3301 is expanded and contracted in a counterclockwise direction when the pinion gear 3346 is viewed from the front by a right decorative body slide drive motor 3348 fixed to the rear side of the base cover 3350 that rotates together with the right decorative body base 3302. When driven to rotate, the slide rack 3344 is slid to the front end side (upper side) by the rack gear 3344a meshed with the pinion gear 3346. The right decorative body main body 3303 is connected to the upper end of the slide rack 3344 through the first slide slit 3302b of the right decorative body base 3302, and the right decorative body main body 3303 moves to the front end side as the slide rack 3344 moves. It will be.

  In order to contract the extended right movable decorative body 3303, the right decorative body main body 3303 is slid in the contracting direction (base end direction) by rotating the right decorative body slide drive motor 3348 in the opposite direction. Can be made. When the slide detection piece 3344b of the slide rack 3344 is detected by the right decorative body slide detection sensor 3352, the right movable decorative body 3301 contracts by stopping the rotation of the right decorative body slide drive motor 3348. It is possible to return to the state of.

  In the pachinko machine 1 (game board 4) of this example, when the right movable decorative body 3301 is in the first position and the second position, the tip of the right movable decorative body 3301 is located at a position away from the tip in the extending direction by a predetermined distance. Stretch restricting members 2350 and 3401c that are in contact with each other and restrict the stretch of the right movable decorative body 3301 are disposed (see FIG. 171 and the like). In the right movable decorative body 3301, the distal end of the distal end member 3304 disposed on the distal end side of the right decorative body main body 3303 that moves in the extending direction in accordance with the movement of the slide rack 3344 toward the distal end side becomes the extension regulating members 2350 and 3401c. When abutting, the tip member 3304 is prevented from further moving in the extending direction, and the extension of the entire length of the right movable decorative body 3301 is stopped.

  When the right movable decorative body 3301 slides the slide rack 3344 further to the front end side by driving the right decorative body slide drive motor 3348 with the front end of the front end member 3304 in contact with the extension regulating members 2350 and 3401c, The right decorative body main body 3303 moves in the extending direction against the urging force of the coil spring 3304d arranged between the right decorative body main body 3304 and, at the same time, the lower end of the plug shaft 3304c of the front end member 3344 is the lens portion of the right decorative body main body 3303. It will be immersed in 3303a.

  In the right movable decorative body 3301, the plug shaft 3304 c of the tip member 3304 is immersed in the lens portion 3303 a of the right decorative body main body 3303 so that the main body portion 3304 a of the tip member 3304 and the cap portion 3303 d of the right decorative body main body 3303 are relative to each other. When the distance changes, the movable decorative portion 3305 arranged therebetween moves. More specifically, as described above, the movable decorative portion 3305 is supported by the upper end of the lower collar member 3305b whose lower end is rotatably supported by the right decorative body main body 3303 and the upper end of the movable member 3305 by the tip member 3304. Since the lower end of the upper collar member 3305c is rotatably connected, the lower collar member 3305b and the upper collar member 3305c are pivotally supported when the relative distance between the right decorative body main body 3303 and the tip member 3304 changes. It is designed to rotate at the part. Therefore, for example, when the right decorative body main body 3303 and the tip member 3304 are relatively close to each other, the portion where the lower collar member 3305b and the upper collar member 3305c are connected is away from the longitudinal axis of the right movable decorative body 3301. When the right decorative body main body 3303 and the distal end member 3304 are relatively separated from each other, the portion where the lower collar member 3305b and the upper collar member 3305c are connected moves in a direction approaching the longitudinal axis. The lower eaves member 3305b and the upper eaves member 3305c arranged symmetrically on both sides with respect to the direction axis line move like a pantograph (see FIGS. 171 (B) and (C)).

  In the right movable decorative body 3301 of this example, the slide rack 3344, that is, the right decorative body main body 3303 is extended in the extending direction while maintaining the state where the distal end of the plug portion 3304b of the distal end member 3304 is in contact with the expansion / contraction restriction members 2350 and 3401c. The movement of the movable decorative portion 3305 is deformed and movable by the expansion and contraction of the right decorative body main body 3303. Since it repeats, the movement of the right movable decorative body 3301 can be made more conspicuous and the movement can be enjoyed.

  Although details will be described later, the upper left movable decorative body 3401 appears to descend in the extending direction when the right movable decorative body 3301 is tilted to the left and tilted to the second position, and the right movable decorative body 3301 is movable to the right. The front end of the decorative body 3301 can come into contact with an expansion / contraction regulating member 3401c provided inside the upper left movable decorative body 3401. As a result, the front end of the right movable decorative body 3301 obliquely cuts the front side of the liquid crystal display device 1400 and is inserted into the upper left movable decorative body 3401 so as to show the player a movable effect with higher impact. Can surprise the player and attract attention.

  By the way, as shown in FIG. 178 and the like, in the right movable decorative body 3301 of this example, the base end decoration member 3326 on the base end side supported so as to be rotatable is provided in the arcuate accommodation portion 2340 of the center accessory 2300. And an intrusion ball discharge port 3117 is opened in the housing portion 2340, and the game ball supplied to the stage member 2320 is at the right end of the first stage 2321 or the second stage 2322 for some reason. In the case of entering the housing portion 2340 beyond the arranged rolling restricting portion 2341, it can be discharged to the outside from the intruding ball discharge port 3117. Further, even when the game ball that has entered the housing portion 2340 stays near the intrusion ball discharge port 3117, the right movable decorative body 3301 rotates from the initial position to the second position, so that the right movable decorative body 3301 The base decoration member 3328 moves in a direction approaching the rolling restricting portion 2341, and the game ball in the storage portion 2340 is pushed by the base decoration member 3328 toward the intrusion ball discharge port 3117, and the outside from the intrusion ball discharge port 3117. Will be discharged.

  Therefore, the game ball that has entered the housing portion 2340 beyond the rolling restricting portion 2341 can be reliably discharged from the intrusion ball discharge port 3117, and the rotation of the right movable decorative body 3301 is hindered by the entered game ball. It is possible to rotate smoothly without being done. When the right movable decorative body 3301 is in the second position, as shown in FIG. 184 and the like, the right movable decorative body 3301 is positioned so as to be substantially in contact with the rolling restricting portion 2341. As a result, the rolling restricting portion 2341 is extended further upward, and even if the game ball on the stage member 2320 exceeds the rolling restricting portion 2341 for some reason, the right movable decorative body 3301 causes the stage 2321, 2322 side. The game ball is prevented from deviating from the stage member 2320.

  As described above, according to the right movable decorative body unit 3300 of the present example, the base end side disposed below the liquid crystal display device 1400 in the right movable decorative body 3301 rotates around the rotation shaft 3302a according to the gaming state. Since the right decoration body body 3303 of the right movable decoration body 3301 extends upward so as to obliquely cut the front surface of the liquid crystal display apparatus 1400 after substantially the entire body is positioned on the front surface of the liquid crystal display apparatus 1400, It is possible to make a complicated movement that is completely different from the movable ornament of the conventional pachinko machine. The movement of the right movable ornament 3301 can surprise the player and draw attention to the right movable ornament 3301, etc. Since the decorative body 3301 rotates and expands and contracts, the type of movement (movable pattern) can be diversified, and the movement of the right movable decorative body 3301 can be made difficult to get tired. Interest is made to be able to suppress a decrease with respect to users of the game.

  Further, since the right movable decorative body 3301 can be decorated with light emission by the respective decorative boards 3303c, 3338 and the like provided, not only the movable effect of the right movable decorative body 3301 but also the light emission effect can be shown to the player. The number of types of effect patterns by the right movable decorative body 3301 can be increased, and it is possible to prevent the interest of the game from deteriorating by delighting the player, and to make the right movable decorative body 3301 more prominent. Thus, the pachinko machine 1 that can attract the player's interest strongly can be obtained.

[2-5D. Upper left movable decorative body unit]
As shown in FIGS. 172 to 175 and the like, the upper left movable decorative body unit 3400 in the back unit 3000 is lowered to frame the center accessory 2300 from the lower side of the logo decorative body 2330 of the center accessory 2300 when viewed from the front. Between the appearance position that can be seen from the player side by moving inward, and the immersion position that cannot be seen from the player side by moving to the rear side of the center accessory 2300 and the game panel 600 by moving up. An upper left movable decorative body 3401 that can be moved up and down is provided. The upper left movable decorative body 3401 is formed in a cylindrical shape that is slanted obliquely downward to the lower right, and is partially formed to have translucency. The upper left movable decorative body 3401 is provided with a receiving portion 3401a (see FIG. 175) opened at the lower end, and the plug portion 3304b of the tip member 3305 in the right movable decorative body 3301 is inserted into the receiving portion 3401a. It is possible.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 175, the upper left movable decorative body 3401 has a tapered elliptical cone-shaped guide portion 3401b that becomes narrower upward along an obliquely inclined axis in the interior of the receiving portion 3401a. And a plate-like extension regulating member 3401c that is disposed on the upper side of the guide portion 3401b and extends in a direction perpendicular to the inclined axis. The upper left movable decorative body 3401 guides the plug portion 3304b at the tip of the right movable decorative body 3301 extending toward the receiving portion 3401a onto the inclined axis by the guide portion 3401b, and securely attaches to the extension regulating member 3401c. It can be made to contact with. In this example, the extension regulating member 3401c is an impact absorbing plate made of an elastomer and having a very low coefficient of restitution.

  The upper left movable decorative body unit 3400 of this example is attached to a predetermined position in the back box 621 and penetrates the upper left unit base 3402 having a substantially rectangular shape whose front view extends in the vertical direction and the upper left unit base 3402. The upper left drive motor 3404 is fixed to the rear side of the upper left unit base 3402 so that the rotation shaft extends forward, and the rotation shaft of the upper left drive motor 3404 is fixed to the front surface of the upper left unit base 3402. A disc-shaped drive gear 3406, and a substantially rectangular slide member 3408 that has a rack gear 3408a (see FIG. 175) that meshes with the drive gear 3406 and extends in the vertical direction and that extends in the vertical direction when viewed from the front. The unit base fixed to the front side of the upper left unit base 3402 by guiding the slide member 3408 so as to be slidable in the vertical direction. A cover 3410, a plate-like sliding plate 3412 which is arranged on the front side of the unit base cover 3410 and slides up and down together with the slide rack 3408, and the upper left movable decorative body 3401 is fixed to the lower part of the front surface; An upper left decorative body decorative substrate 3414 disposed between the left movable decorative body 3401 and a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface.

  As shown in the figure, the slide rack 3408 of the upper left movable decorative body unit 3400 is configured such that the left and right sides of a substantially rectangular plate extending in the vertical direction are bent rearward. A rack gear 3408a is formed inside the left side. The slide rack 3408 includes two slide protrusions 3408b that protrude in the front side and vertically in the approximate center in the left-right direction, a fixed boss 3408c that protrudes longer forward than the slide protrusion 3408b, and is disposed at the lower portions of the left and right ends. A detection piece 3408d extending leftward from the left side in a front view. The detection piece 3408d of the slide rack 3408 is detected by an upper left decorative body detection sensor 3416 attached to the upper left unit base 3402.

  Further, the upper left unit base cover 3410 of the upper left movable decorative body unit 3400 is formed in a thin box shape with the rear side and the upper side opened, and has a substantially full length (total height) in the vertical direction at the approximate center in the horizontal direction. The slide slit 3410a is formed so as to extend long and the two slide protrusions 3408b of the slide rack 3408 can be inserted, and the fixed boss 3408c of the slide rack 3408 which is disposed on both the left and right sides of the slide slit 3410a can pass therethrough. And a long hole-shaped passage port 3410b. By inserting the slide protrusion 3408b of the slide rack 3408 into the slide slit 3410a of the upper left unit base cover 3410, the slide rack 3408 can be guided to be slidable in the vertical direction.

  Next, the movement of the upper left movable decorative body 3401 in the upper left movable decorative body unit 3400 of this example will be described. In the normal state, the upper left movable decorative body unit 3400 is located at an immersive position where the upper left movable decorative body 3401 is raised and becomes invisible from the player side. In this state, the detection piece 3408d of the slide rack 3408 is detected by the upper left decorative body detection sensor 3416. When the upper left movable decorative body 3401 positioned at the immersive position is driven to rotate clockwise in the front view by the upper left drive motor 3404, the slide rack 3408 is moved downward by the rack gear 3408a meshed with the drive gear 3406. And the upper left movable decorative body 3401 is lowered via the sliding plate 3412 fixed to the slide rack 3408.

  When the upper left movable decorative body 3401 is lowered from the immersion position, the upper left movable decorative body 3401 is lowered into the frame of the center accessory 2300 and the liquid crystal display device from a position above the upper side of the liquid crystal display device 1400. The display screen is lowered to the front side of the display screen 1400 and can be viewed from the player side. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 184 and the like, the upper left movable decorative body 3401 descends below the letter “A” of the upper logo decorative body 2330 in the center accessory 2300 and is visible to the player. It stops at the appearance position.

  At the appearance position, the upper left movable decorative body 3401 has an inclined axis substantially coincident with the axis of the right movable decorative body 3301 when the right movable decorative body 3301 is rotated to the second position. The plug portion 3304b at the tip of the right movable decorative body 3301 extended at the second position can be received by the receiving portion 3401a of the upper left movable decorative body 3401, and the right extended in this state. When the distal end of the movable decorative body 3401 comes into contact with the expansion regulating member 3401c in the receiving port 3401a, the expansion of the right movable decorative body 3401 can be stopped (see FIGS. 185 and 186).

  In order to raise the upper left movable decorative body 3401 located at the appearance position to the immersive position, the upper left movable decorative body 3401 is rotated by rotating the drive gear 3406 in the direction opposite to the above by the upper left drive motor 3404. Can be raised. When the upper left decorative body detection sensor 3416 detects the detection piece 3408d of the slide rack 3408, the upper left movable decorative body 3401 can be stopped at the immersive position by stopping the rotation of the upper left drive motor 3404. .

  As described above, according to the upper left movable decorative body unit 3400 of this example, the upper left movable decorative body 3401 can be moved up and down between the immersion position that cannot be visually recognized from the player side and the appearance position that can be viewed. Therefore, the player's expectation can be increased by the appearance of the upper left movable decorative body 3401, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest in the game. When the upper left movable decorative body 3401 is in the appearance position, when the right movable decorative body 3301 disposed near the right end of the liquid crystal display device 1400 is rotated to the second position and extended, the tip of the movable movable decorative body 3401 is moved to the receiving portion. 3401a so that the right movable decorative body 3301 and the upper left movable decorative body 3401 are combined with the liquid crystal display device 1400 interposed therebetween, and the greatly changed movable decorative bodies 3301 and 3401 surprise the player. It is possible to attract the player's interest and to have a premonition that something good will happen, and to increase expectations and prevent the interest in the game from falling. Can do.

[2-5E. Upper middle movable decorative body unit]
As shown in FIGS. 176 and 177, the upper middle movable decorative body unit 3500 in the rear unit 3000 includes an upper middle movable decorative body 3501 having five protrusions 3501a at the cylindrical front end. The movable decorative body 3501 is supported so that the base end side opposite to the distal end side provided with the protrusion 3501a is rotatable around an axis extending in the front-rear direction.

  The upper middle movable decorative body unit 3500 is formed of a metal plate having a predetermined thickness and is vertically long and has an upper middle unit base 3502 having a rotation shaft 3502a extending forward to the lower portion, and a rear side of the upper middle unit base 3502 An upper middle rotation drive motor 3504 that is fixed to the upper portion and extends forward through the upper middle unit base 3502, and a disk-shaped drive gear 3506 that is fixed to the rotation shaft of the upper middle rotation drive motor 3504. And a disc-shaped transmission gear 3508 that meshes with the drive gear 3506 and is rotatably supported by the upper middle unit base 3502 between the drive gear 3506 and the rotation shaft 3502a. A driven gear 3510 that can be rotated around, and the driven gear 3510 supported at the base end and around the rotation shaft 3502a An upper middle decorative body base 3512 having a support portion 3512a that is rotatable and extends in a predetermined direction (rightward in FIG. 177) in a direction perpendicular to the rotation shaft 3502a, and a support portion 3512a of the upper middle decorative body base 3512 The upper middle telescopic drive solenoid 3514 in which the plunger 3514a can be moved forward and backward from the end on the distal side away from the rotation shaft 3502a, and the upper middle telescopic drive solenoid 3514 fixed to the distal end of the plunger 3514a and supported together with the plunger 3514a. A slide member 3516 slidable in the direction in which the portion 3512a extends, and an upper middle movable decorative body 3501 is disposed so as to cover the upper middle telescopic drive solenoid 3514 and the slide member 3516 from the front side, The member 3516 has an upper middle movable decorative body 35. 1 is fixed.

  Further, the upper middle movable decorative body unit 3500 is attached to the front side of the upper middle unit base 3502 and covers the drive gear 3506 and the transmission gear 3508 from the front side. A shaft cover 3520 that covers the tip of 3502a and the front surface of the driven gear 3510, a slide support member 3522 that is fixed to the support portion 3512a of the upper middle decorative body base 3512 and that supports the slide member 3516 to be slidable in the longitudinal direction of the support portion 3512a. , And an upper middle decorative body decoration board 3524 mounted with a plurality of LEDs arranged inside the upper middle movable decorative body 3501 and facing the front end side. The gear cover 3518 is provided with a plurality of fixing portions 3518a at both left and right ends. By fixing the fixing portions 3518a at predetermined positions in the back box 621, the upper middle movable decorative body unit 3500 is interposed via the gear cover 3518. Can be mounted in the back box 621. Further, the upper middle decorative body decoration substrate 3524 can appropriately decorate the plurality of protrusions 3501a of the upper middle movable decorative body 3501 with light emission.

  The drive gear 3506 of the upper middle movable decorative body unit 3500 includes a rotation detection piece 3506a extending outward, and the rotation detection piece 3506a is fixed to the upper middle unit base 3502. By detecting with the detection sensor 3526, the rotation position of the upper middle movable decorative body 3501 can be detected. The upper middle decorative body base 3512 is formed of a metal plate having a predetermined thickness. As shown in the figure, the support portion 3512a is formed in a substantially U-shaped cross section with the front side open. Further, the upper middle expansion / contraction drive solenoid 3514 is urged by a coil spring 3514b in the direction in which the plunger 3514a advances, and is normally in a forward movement state. When the upper middle expansion / contraction drive solenoid 3514 is driven, the coil spring The plunger 3514a is retracted against the urging force of 3514b.

  Further, the slide member 3516 of the upper middle movable decorative body unit 3500 is formed in a substantially L shape in a plan view, and includes two projecting shafts 3516a projecting to the front side. On the other hand, the slide support member 3522 that slidably supports the slide member 3516 is formed by bending a metal plate having a predetermined thickness, and is a slide slit that can be inserted so that the protruding shaft 3516a of the slide member 3516 passes through the front surface. 3522a is formed to extend in the longitudinal direction. By inserting the projecting shaft 3516a of the slide member 3516 into the slide slit 3522a, the slide member 3516 can be slidably supported along the slide slit 3522a, and the upper middle is movable at the front end of the inserted projecting shaft 3516a. A decorative body 3501 is attached.

  Next, the movement of the upper middle movable decorative body 3501 in the upper middle movable decorative body unit 3500 of this example will be described. As shown in FIG. 151, the upper middle movable decorative body 3501 is, in a normal state, a retracted position in which the upper middle movable decorative body 3501 is hidden behind the logo decorative body 2330 disposed on the upper portion of the center accessory 2300. In this retracted position, the player cannot see from the player side in front view. Further, the upper middle movable decorative body 3501 is in a state where its longitudinal direction extends substantially horizontally in the retracted position. In this state, when the drive gear 3506 is rotated clockwise in front view by the upper middle rotation drive motor 3504, the driven gear 3510 is connected to the upper middle ornament base 3512 via the transmission gear 3508 that meshes with the drive gear 3506. At the same time, it rotates in the clockwise direction. The upper middle movable decorative body 3501 is rotated clockwise, so that the tip side moves to the appearance position on the front side of the display screen in the liquid crystal display device 1400 within the frame of the center accessory 2300, and is visible from the player side. It becomes possible.

  This upper middle movable decorative body 3501 can be rotated within an angle range of about 135 degrees clockwise (within a range indicated by a two-dot chain line in FIG. 187) from the substantially horizontal retracted position. Thus, the rotation can be stopped at an arbitrary position. When the upper middle expansion / contraction driving solenoid 3514 is driven in a state where the distal end side is rotated to the front side of the liquid crystal display device 1400, the plunger 3514a is opposed to the urging force of the coil spring 3514b. The upper middle movable decorative body 3501 is also retracted to the proximal end side via a slide member 3516 fixed to the distal end of the plunger 3514a. When the driving of the upper middle telescopic drive solenoid 3514 is stopped from this state, the plunger 3514a moves forward by the biasing force of the coil spring 3514b, and the upper middle movable decorative body 3501 returns to the initial position. In this example, the advance / retreat amount of the plunger 3514a in the upper middle extension / contraction drive solenoid 3514 is in the range of 2 mm to 15 mm, and the extension / contraction amount of the upper middle movable decorative body 3501 is the same as the extension / contraction amount of the plunger 3514a. It has become.

  In the upper middle movable decorative body 3501 of this example, the upper middle expansion / contraction drive solenoid 3514 is continuously driven in a cycle of 0.2 to 2 seconds. At the same time, the LED on the upper middle decorative body decoration board 3524 is blinked so that the protrusion 3501a at the distal end blinks and light is emitted, as if something (for example, bullets and shells) is continuously fired from the distal end of the upper middle movable decorative body 3501. It is possible to perform a movable production as if it were being done.

  As described above, according to the upper middle movable decorative body unit 3500 of this example, the upper middle movable decorative body 3501 rotates to the front side of the liquid crystal display device 1400 and becomes visible from the player side. It is possible to entertain the movement of a movable decorative body that is not found in conventional pachinko machines, and to suppress the decrease in interest in games. Further, for example, the effect image displayed at the position corresponding to the front end side of the upper middle movable decorative body 3501 may be changed so as to correspond to the expansion and contraction of the upper middle movable decorative body 3501 and the flashing light emission. By this, it becomes possible to give the player the illusion that the effect image is changing by the movable light emitting effect of the upper middle movable decorative body 3501, and the image effect can be more enjoyed together with the movable effect. The player's interest can be further enhanced.

[3. Main board / peripheral board]
Next, a control board that performs various controls of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 189 is a block diagram of the main board and the peripheral board. As shown in the figure, the control configuration of the pachinko machine 1 is composed of a group of main boards 4000 and a group of peripheral boards 4010, and various controls are shared by these two groups. The group of main boards 4000 includes a main control board 4100 that controls game operations (game progress), and a payout control board 1186 that controls payout of game balls and the like. Further, the group of peripheral boards 4010 includes a peripheral control board 4140 that controls various effects during the game based on commands from the main control board 4100, and effects on the liquid crystal display device 1400 based on commands from the peripheral control board 4140. And a liquid crystal control board 4150 for controlling image display.

[3-1. Main control board]
As shown in FIG. 189, the main control board 4100 for controlling the progress of the game includes a main control MPU 4100a as a microprocessor, a main control I / O port 4100b as an input / output device (I / O device), and the above-mentioned RAM clear switch 624a. The main control MPU 4100a includes a ROM for storing various processing programs and various commands and a RAM for temporarily storing data, as well as a watchdog timer for monitoring its operation (system) and preventing fraud. It also has built-in functions.

  The main control MPU 4100a includes a first start port sensor 3115 that detects a game ball received in the first start port 2001, a second start port sensor 2012 that detects a game ball received in the second start port 2002, and a part thereof. The detection signals from the general prize opening sensor 3108 are input via the main control I / O port 4100b, or the magnetic detection sensors attached to the gate sensor 2202, the general prize opening sensor 3108, the count sensor 2014, and the back unit 3000, respectively. A detection signal from 3116 is input via the panel relay board 3124 attached to the game board 4 and the main control I / O port 4100b. Based on these detection signals, the main control MPU 4100a outputs drive signals to the start port solenoid 2010 and the attacker solenoid 2016 via the main control I / O port 4100b and the panel relay board 3124, or the main control I / O First special symbol display 641, second special symbol display 642, first special symbol storage display 643, second special symbol storage display 644, normal via port 4100b, panel relay board 3124, function display board 640a A drive signal is output to the symbol display 645, the normal symbol storage display 646, the gaming state display 647, and the round display 648.

  Further, the main control MPU 4100a transmits various information related to the game (game information) and various commands related to payout to the payout control board 1186 via the main drawer relay board 1107 described above, and the pachinko machine from the payout control board 1186. Various commands relating to the state of 1 are received via the main drawer relay board 1107. Further, the main control MPU 4100a transmits various commands related to the control of the game effects and various commands related to the state of the pachinko machine 1 to the peripheral control board 4140 of the peripheral board 4010 described later via the main control I / O port 4100b ( The boards between the main control board 4100 and the peripheral control board 4140 are electrically connected by a harness (not shown). The main control MPU 4100a, which will be described in detail later, receives various commands related to the state of the pachinko machine 1 from the payout control board 1186, and shapes these various commands and transmits them to the peripheral control board 4140.

  The main control board 4100 is supplied with various voltages from the power supply board 1136, as will be described in detail later. The power supply board 1136 includes an electric double layer capacitor (hereinafter simply referred to as “capacitor”) as a backup power supply that supplies power to the main control board 4100 for a predetermined time even when the power is shut off. With this capacitor, the main control MPU 4100a can store various types of information in its built-in RAM even when the power is shut off. The stored various information is erased (cleared) from the built-in RAM when the RAM clear switch 624a of the main control board 4100 is operated when the power is turned on. The operation signal (detection signal) of the RAM clear switch 624a is also output to the payout control board 1186 via the main drawer relay board 1107.

  The main control board 4100 is provided with a power failure monitoring circuit. This power failure monitoring circuit monitors the reduction of various voltages supplied from the power supply board 1136, and outputs a power failure warning signal as a power failure warning signal when those voltages are equal to or lower than the power failure warning voltage. In addition to being input to the main control MPU 4100a via the main control I / O port 4100b, the power failure notice signal is also transmitted to the payout control board 1186 and the like via a harness (not shown).

[3-2. Dispensing control board]
As shown in FIG. 189, the payout control board 1186 for controlling the payout of game balls, etc. includes a payout control unit 4110 for performing various controls relating to payout, the firing control unit 4120 for performing the firing control of the above-described firing motor 695, and the above-mentioned. The error LED display 4130, the error release switch 4131, and the ball removal switch 4132 are provided.

  As shown in FIG. 189, a payout control unit 4110 that performs various controls related to payout on the payout control board 1186, a payout control MPU 4110a as a microprocessor, a payout control I / O port 4110b as an I / O device, and a payout control. An external watchdog timer 4110c (hereinafter referred to as “external WDT 4110c”) that monitors whether the MPU 4110a is operating normally, a payout motor drive circuit 4110d that outputs a drive signal to the payout motor 815 described above, It is configured with. The payout control MPU 4110a includes a ROM for storing various processing programs and various commands and a RAM for temporarily storing data, and also has a function for preventing fraud.

  The payout control MPU 4110a receives various information (game information) related to the game (game information) and various commands related to payout from the main control board 4100, and operates the RAM clear switch 624a from the main control board 4100. In addition to receiving a signal (detection signal), a detection signal from the full switch 916 is input, or detection signals from the ball break switch 778, the count switch 812, and the rotation angle switch 855 are used as relay terminals within the prize ball unit. Or input via the plate 830.

  When the payout control MPU 4110a receives various commands related to payout from the main control board 4100, it outputs a drive signal from the payout motor drive circuit 4110d to the payout motor 815 based on the received various commands related to payout, or a ball removal switch. When 4132 is operated, a payout motor drive circuit 4110d is used to discharge (remove) the game balls stored in the prize ball tank 720 and the tank rail member 740 based on this operation signal (detection signal). When a driving signal is output to the payout motor 815, or a ball rental request signal from a CR unit (ball lending machine) (not shown) is input via the CR unit terminal plate 1150b, payout is performed based on the ball rental request signal. A drive signal is output from the motor drive circuit 4110d to the payout motor 815, When the detection signal from the switch 916 is input, or stop the dispensing motor 815 stops the drive signal from the payout motor drive circuit 4110d to payout motor 815 on the basis of the detection signal.

  Further, the payout control MPU 4110a displays the state of the pachinko machine 1 on the error LED display 4130, transmits various commands indicating the state to the main control board 4100, or receives a detection signal from the counting switch 812. Based on this detection signal, the number of game balls actually paid out is output to the external terminal board 1150a. The external terminal board 1150a is electrically connected to a hall computer installed in the game hall (hall). This hall computer monitors the player's game by grasping the number of game balls paid out by the pachinko machine 1, game information of the pachinko machine 1, and the like.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 189, a launch control unit 4120 that performs launch control of the launch motor 695 on the payout control board 1186 includes an input circuit 4120a to which various signals are input, and a transmission circuit that outputs a clock signal at regular intervals. 4120b, a firing control circuit 4120c that outputs a reference pulse for determining the rotation speed of the firing motor 695 based on the clock signal, and a drive signal is output to the firing motor 695 based on the reference pulse from the firing control circuit 4120c. And a firing motor drive circuit 4120d. The launch control circuit 4120c controls the rotation speed of the launch motor 695 so that approximately 99.95 game balls per minute are launched toward the game area 605 based on the clock signal from the transmission circuit 4120b. . That is, the movement of the hitting ball 687 described above is controlled.

  As described above, the handle device 460 (operation handle portion 461) includes the touch sensor 420 and the firing stop switch 422. When the touch operation sensor 464 of the operation handle portion 461 is touched, the touch sensor. When the single button 421 is operated, it is detected by the firing stop switch 422. Although these detection signals will be described in detail later, they are input to the input circuit 4120a via the handle relay terminal plate 194 described above. When the CR unit is electrically connected to the CR unit terminal plate 1150b, a CR connection signal is input to the input circuit 4120a via the CR unit terminal plate 1150b.

  Various voltages are supplied to the payout control board 1186 from the power supply board 1136 in the same manner as the main control board 4100. The power supply board 1136 includes a capacitor that supplies power to the payout control board 1186 for a predetermined time even when the power supply is shut off. With this capacitor, the payout control MPU 4110a can store various payout information related to payout in the built-in RAM even when the power is shut off. The stored payout information is erased (cleared) from the built-in RAM when the RAM clear switch 624a of the main control board 4100 is operated when the power is turned on.

[3-3. Peripheral control board]
As shown in FIG. 189, the peripheral control board 4140 for effect control in the peripheral board 4010 performs a high-quality performance with a peripheral control MPU 4140a as a microprocessor, a peripheral control ROM 4140b for storing various processing programs and various commands, and the like. A sound source IC 4140c and a sound ROM 4140d in which sound information such as music and sound effects referred to by the sound source IC 4140c are stored are configured.

  The peripheral control MPU 4140a incorporates various input / output ports such as a parallel input / output port, a serial input / output port, and a watchdog timer (WDT). When various commands are received from the main control board 4100, based on these various commands. , A door frame side lighting / flashing command for outputting a lighting signal or a flashing signal to the LEDs of the decorative boards 126, 190, 224, 226, 296, and 453 provided in the door frame 5 is output to the lamp driving board 3120 or a game A game board side lighting / flashing command for outputting a lighting signal or a flashing signal to the LEDs mounted on the decorative boards 2020, 3104, 3205, 3303c, 3338, 3414, 3524 provided in the board 4 is output to the lamp driving board 3120. Or the left-rotating lamp motor of the top lamp illumination unit 200 provided in the door frame 5 45, a door frame side motor driving command for outputting a rotation driving signal to the right rotating lamp motor 265 and the central rotating lamp motor 285 is output to the motor driving board 3013, and the logo decoration body driving motor 2333 provided in the game board 4 is provided. , A main decoration body drive motor 3220, a sub decoration body drive motor 3244, a right decoration body rotation drive motor 3314, a right decoration body slide drive motor 3348, an upper left drive motor 3404, and an upper middle rotation drive motor 3504. A game board side motor drive command to be output, a game board side solenoid drive command to output a drive signal to the upper middle expansion / contraction solenoid 3514, etc. are output to the lamp drive board 3120, or a control signal indicating sound information extracted from the sound ROM 4140d ( Sound command) is output to the sound source IC 4140c or displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1400. A display command showing a screen for and outputs to the liquid crystal control circuit board 4150.

  A display command output from the peripheral control MPU 4140a to the liquid crystal control board 4150 is performed by a serial input / output port. BPS (bits per second, hereinafter referred to as “bps”) is set. On the other hand, it is different from the initial data, door frame side lighting / flashing command, game board side lighting / flashing command, door frame side motor driving command, game board side motor driving command, and display command output from the peripheral control MPU 4140a to the lamp driving board 3120. This is performed by a plurality of serial input / output ports, and in this embodiment, 250 kbps is set as the bit rate.

  The lamp driving board 3120 sends a lighting signal or a blinking signal to the decorative boards 126, 190, 206, and 224 provided in the door frame 5 via the sub drawer relay board 1108 based on the received door frame side lighting / flashing command. , 225, 296, etc., and each of the decorative boards 2020, 3104, 3205, 3303c, 3338, 3414 provided in the game board 4 based on the received game board side lighting / flashing command. , 3524, etc., and the LED 453a of the glass decorative substrate 453 in the glass unit 450 of the door frame 5. Further, the lamp driving board 3120 sends a rotation driving signal based on the received door frame side motor driving command to the left rotating lamp motor 245 and the right rotating lamp motor 265 provided in the door frame 5 via the sub drawer relay board 1108. , And a logo decoration body drive motor 2333, a main decoration body drive motor 3220, and a secondary decoration provided on the game board 4, based on the game board side motor drive command that is output to the central rotary lamp motor 285. The body drive motor 3244, the right decoration body rotation drive motor 3314, the right decoration body slide drive motor 3348, the upper left drive motor 3404, the upper middle rotation drive motor 3504, and the received game board side solenoid drive Based on the command, a drive signal is output to the upper middle telescopic solenoid 3514 provided in the game board.

  Further, the peripheral control MPU 4140a is configured such that the logo movable body 2330b in the logo ornament 2330 of the game board 4, the main ornament 3202 and the sub ornament 3203 in the left movable ornament 3201, the right ornament base 3302 and the right ornament in the right movable ornament. Detection signals from detection sensors 2335, 3266, 3256, 3320, 3352, 3416, and 3526 that detect the movable positions of the body main body 3303, the upper left movable decorative body 3401, and the upper middle movable decorative body 3501 are transmitted to the lamp driving substrate 3120. Based on these detection signals, a logo movable body 2330b, a main decorative body 3202, a secondary decorative body 3203, a right decorative body base 3302, a right decorative body main body 3303, an upper left movable decorative body 3401, The original position of the upper middle movable decorative body 3501 is grasped.

  Further, the peripheral control MPU 4140a receives detection signals from the left rotation position detection sensor 250, the right rotation position detection sensor 270, and the center rotation position detection sensor 290 that detect the rotation positions of the rotary lights 244, 264, and 284 of the door frame 5, respectively. Are input via the sub-drawer relay board 108 and the motor drive board 3013, respectively, and the rotational positions of the rotary lamps 224, 264 and 284 are grasped based on these detection signals. Further, the peripheral control MPU 4140a receives a signal (operation signal) indicating that the liquid crystal control board 4150 is operating normally from the liquid crystal control board 4150 or the operation button unit 370 provided in the plate unit 300 in the door frame 5. An operation detection signal from the main button sensor 376 or the sub button sensor 378 for detecting the operation of the main button 371 or the sub button 372 is input via the sub drawer relay board 1108 and the lamp driving board 3120. The main button 371 includes a vibrating body 371c, and a driving signal is sent from the peripheral control MPU 4140a to the vibrating body 371c via the sub drawer relay board 1108 and the lamp driving board 3120. Yes.

  The sound source IC 4140c extracts sound information from the sound ROM 4140d based on the sound command output from the peripheral control MPU 4140a, and the side speaker 121 and the lower speaker 391 of the door frame 5 via the lamp driving board 3120 and the auxiliary drawer relay board 1108. Control is performed so that music, sound effects, etc. according to various productions flow.

  The peripheral control board 4140 also includes an external watchdog timer (external WDT) (not shown), and the peripheral control MPU 4140a performs peripheral control using the built-in watchdog timer (internal WDT) and the external WDT together. It is diagnosed whether the system of the MPU 4140a is running out of control.

[3-4. LCD control board]
Next, a liquid crystal control board 4150 that performs drawing control of the liquid crystal display device 1400 on the peripheral board 4010, as illustrated, a liquid crystal control MPU 4150a as a microprocessor, and a liquid crystal control that stores various processing programs, various commands, and various data. ROM 4150b, VDP (Video Display Processor) 4150c for controlling the display of the above-described liquid crystal display device 1400, character ROM 4150d for storing various screen data displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1400, and character ROM 4150d. And a character RAM 4150e to which various data are transferred and copied.

  The liquid crystal control MPU 4150a includes a parallel input / output port, a serial input / output port, and the like. When the display command described above is received from the peripheral control board 4140, the detailed description thereof will be described later, but based on the received display command. The VDP 4150c is controlled to perform drawing control of the liquid crystal display device 1400. When the liquid crystal control MPU 4150a is operating normally, as described above, the liquid crystal control MPU 4150a outputs an operation signal to that effect to the peripheral control board 4140.

  The liquid crystal control ROM 4150b stores a plurality of schedule data corresponding to display commands, non-resident area transfer schedule data corresponding to display commands, and the like in addition to various programs for generating a screen to be drawn on the liquid crystal display device 1400. The schedule data is configured by arranging screen data defining the screen configuration in time series, and the order of screens drawn on the liquid crystal display device 1400 is defined. The non-resident area transfer schedule data is constituted by arranging non-resident area transfer data that defines the order when transferring various data stored in the character ROM 4150d to a non-resident area (to be described later) of the character RAM 4150e. . In this non-resident area transfer data, the order of transferring various data from the character ROM 4150d to the non-resident area of the character RAM 4150e in advance is defined for the screen data drawn on the liquid crystal display device 1400 according to the progress of the schedule data.

  Upon receiving a display command from the peripheral control board 4140, the liquid crystal control MPU 4150a extracts schedule data corresponding to the display command, extracts the top screen data of the extracted schedule data from the liquid crystal control ROM 4150b, and outputs it to the VDP 4150c. . Then, the liquid crystal control MPU 4150a extracts screen data following the top screen data and outputs the screen data to the VDP 4150c. As described above, the liquid crystal control MPU 4150a extracts screen data arranged in time series in the schedule data one by one from the head screen data, and outputs the extracted screen data to the VDP 4150c.

  The VDP 4150c is a drawing circuit capable of directly operating an LCD driver incorporated in the first display panel 1400a or the second display panel 1400b, and a first register (not shown) corresponding to the first display panel 1400a. And a second register (not shown) corresponding to the second display panel 1400b. When the screen data is input to the first register and the second register by the liquid crystal control MPU 4150a, the VDP 4150c extracts sprite data to be described later from the character RAM 4150e based on the input screen data, and the first display panel 1400a and the first display panel 1400a. The drawing data to be displayed on the two display panel 1400b is generated, and the LCD drivers of the first display panel 1400a and the second display panel 1400b are controlled based on the generated drawing data, and the first display panel 1400a and the second display panel 1400b. Display an image. The VDP 4150c employs a line buffer method. In this “line buffer method”, drawing data for one line for drawing the left and right directions of the first display panel 1400a and the second display panel 1400b is held in a line buffer, and drawing for one line held in the line buffer is performed. In this method, data is output to the first display panel 1400a and the second display panel 1400b.

  The character ROM 4150d stores an extremely large amount of sprite data and has a large capacity. If the capacity of the character ROM 4150d increases, that is, if the number of sprites drawn on the liquid crystal display device 1400 increases, the access speed of the character ROM 4150d cannot be ignored, and the drawing speed on the first display panel 1400a and the second display panel 1400b is affected. Will be. Therefore, in this embodiment, the sprite data stored in the character ROM 4150d is transferred and copied to the character RAM 4150e having a high access speed, and the sprite data is extracted from the character RAM 4150e. The sprite data is base data that is data before the sprite is expanded into the bitmap format, and is stored in the character ROM 4150d in a compressed state.

  Here, the “sprite” is an image displayed as a unit on the first display panel 1400a and the second display panel 1400b. For example, when various persons are displayed on the first display panel 1400a and the second display panel 1400b, data for drawing each person is referred to as “sprite”. Accordingly, when a plurality of persons are displayed on the first display panel 1400a and the second display panel 1400b, a plurality of sprites are used. In addition to a person, a house, a mountain, a road, and the like constituting the background are also sprites, and the entire background can be a single sprite. The first display panel 1400a and the second display panel are set with respect to the positions of the sprites and the vertical relationship when the sprites overlap each other (hereinafter referred to as “sprite superposition order”). 1400b.

  Note that the sprite is formed by bonding a plurality of rectangular regions of 64 pixels vertically and horizontally. Data for drawing this rectangular area is called a “character”. In the case of a small sprite, it can be expressed using one character, and in the case of a relatively large sprite such as a person, for example, it is expressed using a total of six characters arranged in 2 × 3 horizontal, for example. be able to. In the case of a larger sprite such as the background, it can be expressed using a larger number of characters. Thus, the number and arrangement of characters can be arbitrarily designated for each sprite.

  The first display panel 1400a and the second display panel 1400b each have 800 pixels in the left-right direction and 600 pixels (SVGA) in the up-down direction, and sequentially follow the pixels from the left to the right of each display panel. In addition, driving is performed by main scanning for setting a display state for each pixel in one direction and sub-scanning for repeatedly performing main scanning in a direction crossing the one direction. When the drawing data for one line output from the liquid crystal control board 4150 is input to the LCD drivers of the first display panel 1400a and the second display panel 1400b, the LCD driver is based on the drawing data for one line. Then, the pixels are sequentially output to the pixels for one line from the left to the right of the display panel (first display panel 1400a or second display panel 1400b) as main scanning. When the output for one line is completed, the process proceeds to the line immediately below as sub-scanning. Similarly, when drawing data for the next line is input, the display panel is used as the main scanning based on the drawing data for the next line. Are sequentially output from the left to the right for pixels for one line.

[4. Game contents]
The game content in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described mainly with reference to FIG. FIG. 190 is a block diagram showing a functional configuration of the main control board. First, a functional configuration related to game effect control on the main control board 4100 in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 190 and the like. Note that a functional configuration relating to payout of game balls will be omitted. In the main control board 4100 of this example, various game controls, performance controls, and the like are realized by executing a predetermined program stored in advance in a ROM (not shown) by the main control MPU 4100a. When a game ball detection signal is input from the gate sensor 2202 to the main control board 4100, a normal random number generating means 4200 for generating a predetermined normal random number that becomes a lottery result for the normal symbol, and the generated normal random number are determined in advance. ROM of main control board 4100 for normal symbol hold storage means 4202 for temporarily storing according to the above conditions, and normal symbol variation pattern corresponding to the normal random number stored and executed by normal symbol hold storage means 4202 Normal symbol variation pattern selection means 4204 for selecting from a predetermined normal symbol variation pattern table stored in the normal symbol display control means for variably displaying the normal symbol of the normal symbol display unit 645 based on the selected normal symbol variation pattern 4206 and the normal symbol display 645 displayed by the normal symbol display control means 4206 If the lottery result based on the number (ordinary lottery result) is a win, the start opening / closing control means 4208 for driving the start opening solenoid 2010 to expand the pair of movable pieces 2005 and the normal symbol holding storage means 4202 are held and stored. And a normal symbol memory number display control means 4210 for displaying the number of normal symbol random numbers as a memory number on the normal symbol memory display 646.

  The above-described normal symbol hold storage means 4202 generates a predetermined number of normal random numbers (for example, four) generated by the detection signal of the game ball from the gate sensor 2202 while the normal symbol display is changed by the normal symbol display control means 4206. ) And the execution of the stored normal random number is suspended until the normal symbol can be displayed in a variable manner.

  The main control board 4100 includes a first special random number generation unit 4212, a first special symbol storage unit 4214, a first special symbol variation pattern selection unit 4216, a first special symbol display control unit 4218, Special symbol memory number display control means 4220. The first special random number generating means 4212 is a predetermined first lottery result for the first special symbol based on the detection signal detected by the first start port sensor 3115 by the start winning to the first start port 2001. Generate special random numbers. The first special symbol hold storage unit 4214 generates the first special random number generated by the first special random number generation unit 4212 and various data acquired together with the generation of the first special random number (for example, a design random number, a reach determination random number described later, First variation pattern random numbers, second variation pattern random numbers, variation type random numbers) are temporarily stored according to predetermined conditions. In the following, a group of data generated / acquired based on the start winning at the first start port 2001 (for example, first special random number, symbol random number, reach determination random number, first variation pattern random number, second variation Pattern random numbers and variable type random numbers) are also called first special symbol lottery unit data. The first special symbol variation pattern selection means 4216 obtains a first special symbol variation pattern based on one first special symbol lottery unit data from a predetermined special symbol variation display pattern table stored in advance in the ROM of the main control board 4100. select. The first special symbol display control unit 4218 variably displays the first special symbol on the first special symbol display unit 641 based on the first special symbol variation pattern selected by the first special symbol variation pattern selection unit 4216. The first special symbol memory number display control unit 4220 stores the number of first special symbol lottery unit data stored in the first special symbol storage unit 4214 (hereinafter referred to as the first special symbol storage number). Is displayed on the first special symbol memory display 643.

  Further, the main control board 4100 includes second special random number generation means 4222, second special symbol hold storage means 4224, second special symbol variation pattern selection means 4226, second special symbol display control means 4228, Special symbol memory number display control means 4230. The second special random number generating means 4222 is a predetermined second lottery result for the second special symbol based on the detection signal detected by the second start port sensor 2012 by the start winning to the second start port 2002. Generate special random numbers. The second special symbol hold storage unit 4224 has a second special random number generated by the second special random number generation unit 4222 and various data acquired together with the generation of the second special random number (for example, a design random number, a reach determination random number described later, First random number for variation pattern, second variation pattern, variation type random number) are temporarily stored according to a predetermined condition. In the following, a group of data generated / acquired based on the start winning at the second start port 2002 (for example, second special random number, symbol random number, reach determination random number, first variation pattern random number, second variation Pattern random numbers and variable type random numbers) are also called second special symbol lottery unit data. The second special symbol variation pattern selection means 4226 obtains a second special symbol variation pattern based on one second special symbol lottery unit data from a predetermined special symbol variation display pattern table stored in advance in the ROM of the main control board 4100. select. The second special symbol display control unit 4228 variably displays the second special symbol on the second special symbol display unit 642 based on the second special symbol variation pattern selected by the second special symbol variation pattern selection unit 4226. The second special symbol memory number display control unit 4230 stores the number of second special symbol lottery unit data stored in the second special symbol storage unit 4224 (hereinafter referred to as the second special symbol storage number). And a second special symbol memory number display control means 4230 to be displayed on the second special symbol memory display 644.

  These first special symbol hold storage means 4214 and second special symbol hold storage means 4224 are newly added special symbols such as the first and second special symbol display control means 4218 and 4228 are variably displayed. When the first and second special symbol lottery unit data based on the start winnings at the first and second start ports 2001 and 2002 are stored, respectively, up to a predetermined number (for example, four each). The execution of the stored first and second special symbol lottery unit data is suspended until the special symbol can be changed.

  Note that the main control board 4100 starts the first and second special symbol lottery unit data held by the first special symbol hold storage unit 4214 and the second special symbol hold storage unit 4224 to the start ports 2001 and 2002. Priority holding digest means 4231 for executing (digesting) the second special symbol lottery unit data in preference to the winning timing is provided, and the second special symbol lottery unit data, that is, The suspension of the lottery result relating to the second start port 2002 is preferentially executed (digested).

  Further, the main control board 4100 has a jackpot which will be described later according to a lottery result based on the first special symbol lottery unit data (first special lottery result) and a lottery result based on the second special symbol lottery unit data (second special lottery result). An advantageous game state generating means 4232 for executing a game or a small hit game, and an opening / closing member 2006 for closing the special winning opening 2003 based on an instruction from the advantageous game state generating means 4232 is opened and closed in a predetermined pattern. And a prize winning opening / closing control means 4234 for controlling the driving of 2016.

  The main control board 4100 further includes game state control means 4236 for determining which game state the pachinko machine 1 is in, and controlling the game state based on the determined game state.

  In the present embodiment, the game state of the pachinko machine 1 is an external game state in which the game state can be grasped from the appearance of the pachinko machine 1, and the player is more external than the external normal game state (normal game state) and this external normal game state. The game state is controlled to any one of the external advantageous game states (chance game state) that is advantageous to the game.

  The external normal gaming state is a gaming state in which the opening extension function (the function in which the opening time of the movable piece 2005 becomes longer than normal) and the time-shortening function (the function in which the fluctuation time of the normal symbol and the special symbol is shortened) are not activated. The pair of movable pieces 2005 is in a gaming state that is not controlled by a promotion mode described later. In other words, as described above, the pair of movable pieces 2005 open and close when the result of the normal lottery is won, thereby enabling the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 2002. However, as the operation mode when the movable piece 2005 operates, the first operation mode (normal mode) and the second operation mode (promotion mode) that is more advantageous to the player than the first operation mode. ) And are prepared.

  In the present embodiment, in a gaming state where the opening extension function and the time reduction function do not operate, as a first operation mode, the probability that the normal lottery result is won is 2%, the variation time of the normal symbol is 10 sec, and the pair of movable pieces 2005 Is set to be opened once per winning with an opening time of 0.18 sec per opening. In the game state in which the opening extension function and the time-shortening function are activated, the second operation mode is that the probability of winning the normal lottery result is 99.6%, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is 0.5 sec, and a pair of movable pieces 2005 is set to be opened 3 times per winning with an opening time of 0.95 sec per opening.

  In the external normal game state, the first operation mode is adopted as the operation mode when the movable piece 2005 operates. As described above, the first operation mode is a mode in which winning of a game ball to the second start port 2002 is less likely to be promoted as compared to the second operation mode.

  On the other hand, the external advantageous game state is a game state in which the opening extension function and the time-shortening function are activated, and the second operation mode (promotion mode) is adopted as an operation mode when the pair of movable pieces 2005 operate. A gaming state. Here, the “promotion mode” is a mode in which winning of a game ball to the second start port 2002 is promoted.

  In the “promotion mode”, any of the three modes of increasing the probability that the normal lottery result is won, shortening the lottery time (shortening the fluctuation time of the normal symbol), and increasing the opening time of the pair of movable pieces 2005 is selected. The promotion mode may be performed by performing only one or two, or the promotion mode may be performed by performing all three.

  In addition, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 1 includes an internally controlled gaming state that is difficult to grasp from the appearance. In the present embodiment, a gaming state in which the probability changing function (so-called probability changing function) is activated and a gaming state in which the probability changing function is not activated correspond to it.

  When the probability changing function is not activated, the probability that the first special lottery result and the second special lottery result are won in a big win is set to a predetermined low probability (first probability: about 1/350 in the present embodiment). On the other hand, when the probability variation function is activated, a predetermined high probability that the probability of winning the first special lottery result and the second special lottery result is at least twice as large as the first probability (second probability: this implementation) In the embodiment, the second probability (about 1/35) set to 10 times the first probability is set. In this way, when the probability variation function is activated, the probability of winning the jackpot is at least double that when the probability variation function is not activated when the probability variation function is not activated when the probability variation function is activated. This is to reduce the interest by reducing the number of fluctuations in the special symbol so that it can win the jackpot.

  In the present embodiment, the external normal gaming state in which the probability changing function is not activated is referred to as “external normal gaming state A”, and the external normal gaming state in which the probability changing function is activated is referred to as “external normal gaming state B”. Further, the external advantageous gaming state in which the probability changing function is not activated is referred to as “external advantageous gaming state A”, and the external advantageous gaming state in which the probability varying function is activated is referred to as “external advantageous gaming state B”.

  In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the player cannot distinguish between the external normal gaming state A and the external normal gaming state B depending on the operation of the movable piece 2005. Similarly, the external advantageous gaming state A And the external advantageous game state B cannot be distinguished by the operation of the movable piece 2005.

  In addition, a change from one of the gaming states to a gaming state that is more advantageous to the player is performed only when the condition device is activated based on a special lottery result. Of the four game states (external normal game state A, external normal game state B, external advantageous game state A, external advantageous game state B), the most advantageous game state for the player is external advantageous game state B. Yes, the most disadvantageous game state for the player is the external normal game state A. Accordingly, a change from the external normal game state A to another game state (external normal game state B, external advantageous game state A and external advantageous game state B), a change from the external advantageous game state A to the external advantageous game state B, etc. Is not performed unless the condition device is activated.

  Further, the main control board 4100 includes command generation means 4238 for generating predetermined control commands such as effect commands based on the first special symbol lottery unit data and the second special symbol lottery unit data, and command generation means. Command transmission means 4240 for transmitting the command generated in 4238 to the peripheral control board 4140.

  In the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the game ball stored in the storage tray 311 of the tray unit 300 is transparent when the player rotates the operation handle portion 461 disposed at the lower right of the door frame 5. A game is started with a game ball by being driven into the upper part of the game area 605 disposed on the front surface of the game panel 600. The game ball that has been driven into the upper part of the game area 605 flows down in the game area 605 on the upper left side or the right side of the center accessory 2300 depending on the driving strength. Note that the game ball driving strength can be adjusted by the amount of rotation of the operation handle portion 461, and the game ball can be driven more strongly as it is rotated in the clockwise direction. Also, in the game area 605, a plurality of obstacle nails are planted on the front surface of the game panel 600 in a predetermined gauge arrangement at appropriate positions, and the game balls come into contact with the obstacle nails so that the game balls flow down. The speed is suppressed, and various movements are given to the game ball so that the movements can be enjoyed.

  When a game ball driven into the upper part of the center accessory 2300 flows down from the left and right sides to the upper shelf 2311 of the center accessory 2300, the upper shelf 2311 moves to the left area of the center accessory 2300. It is induced. Then, when a game ball flowing down the left side of the center accessory 2300 enters the gate 2201 of the gate member 2200 disposed on the left side surface of the center accessory 2300 and is detected by the gate sensor 2202, based on the detection signal. In the main control board 4100, ordinary random number generation means 4200 generates ordinary random numbers. Then, according to the normal lottery result based on the normal random number, the normal symbol of the normal symbol display 645 in the function display unit 640 is displayed in a variable manner (the normal symbol display 645 including one LED is alternately displayed in red, green, and orange. The normal symbol extracted based on the normal lottery result is stopped and displayed (the normal symbol display 645 emits red or green). The normal symbol fluctuation display is performed based on the normal symbol fluctuation pattern selected from the predetermined normal symbol fluctuation pattern selection table by the normal symbol fluctuation pattern selection means 4204.

  Specifically, when the lottery result based on the normal random number is a win, the normal symbol indicating the winning is stopped (the normal symbol display 645 emits green light), and when the lottery result based on the normal random number is lost, Is displayed with a normal symbol indicating that the normal symbol indicator 645 emits red light. When the normal symbol indicating the hit is stopped and displayed, the pair of movable pieces 2005 for closing the second start port 2002 are opened for a predetermined time and a predetermined number of times as described above, and the second start port 2002 is opened. Game balls can be won.

  In the pachinko machine 1 of the present example, on the upper side of the center accessory 2300, an area where game balls can flow is provided from the center to the left side in the left-right direction, but the right side from the center follows the outer periphery of the game area 605. An arc-shaped area extending downward is provided, and when a game ball enters this area, the game ball is sent to the lower side of the center accessory 2300 without obtaining an opportunity to enter the gate 2201 or the warp inlet 2313. As a result, the chances are reduced and the movement of the game ball becomes less enjoyable. Accordingly, the player plays the game by adjusting the amount of rotation of the operation handle portion 461 as appropriate so that the game ball flows down from the center in the left-right direction on the upper side of the center accessory 2300. It is possible to prevent the game from being reduced by reducing the game operation such that the player is strongly driven and entertaining the game by operating the operation handle portion 461 of the pachinko machine 1.

  By the way, in this example, when the normal symbol display unit 645 displays the fluctuation of the normal symbol and the gate sensor 2202 detects the passing of the game ball, the normal symbol of the fluctuation is stopped and the normal symbol generated and extracted first is stopped. Until the result of the random number is confirmed, the normal random number (including the normal symbol variation pattern) extracted based on the detection signal from the gate sensor 2202 is temporarily stored in the normal symbol storage holding means 4202 and displayed. The number of stored ordinary random numbers (also referred to as the number of holdings) is displayed on the normal symbol storage display 646. This normal symbol memory display 646 is composed of four LEDs, and suggests the number of memories according to the number of each LED to be lit. In this example, up to four are stored and displayed. ing. When the number of memories exceeds four, the ordinary random number extracted based on the detection signal of the gate sensor 2202 is discarded.

  In addition, the game balls that have been driven into the game area 605 and have flowed down the left side of the center prize 2300 are drawn to the center of the game area 605 below the center prize 2300 by the shelf 2102 of the side prize port member 2100. It has become. Then, when a game ball wins a general winning opening 2004, 2101 disposed below the center accessory 2300 and is detected by the general winning opening sensor 3108, the main control board 4100 performs payout control based on the detection signal. A predetermined payout command is transmitted to the board 1186, and the payout control board 1186 controls the payout motor 815 of the prize ball unit 800 in accordance with the payout command to store a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls. The tray 311 is paid out.

  Note that if the game ball that has been driven into the game area 605 does not win any of the general winning opening 2004, 2101, the first starting opening 2001, the second starting opening 2002, and the big winning opening 2003, the gaming area It is provided at the lower center of the left and right direction of 605 and is discharged from the out port 606 to the lower rear side of the game board 4. In addition, regardless of whether the game ball wins the general winning opening 2004, 2101, the first starting opening 2001, the second starting opening 2002, or the big winning opening 2003, the winning game ball is returned to the gaming area 605. It is discharged to the lower rear side of the game board 4 without being discharged.

  On the other hand, when the game ball flowing down the left side of the center accessory 2300 enters the warp entrance 2313 that opens to the left side surface of the center accessory 2300, the game ball moves to the first stage 2321 on the rear side of the stage member 2320 of the center accessory 2300. It comes to be supplied. The game ball supplied onto the first stage 2321 rolls on the first stage 2321 in the left-right direction, is released forward, and is supplied onto the second stage 2322. Also in the second stage 2322, the game ball rolls in the left-right direction and is released into the game area 605 above the attacker unit 2000. When the game ball supplied to the stage member 2320 enters the central chance entrance 2323 in the first stage 2321, the game ball enters the game area 605 from the chance exit 2324 disposed immediately above the first start opening 2001 in the attacker unit 2000. The game balls are released and can be accepted into the first starting port 2001 with a high probability. When a game ball is received by the first start port 2001 and detected by the first start port sensor 3115, a predetermined number (for example, three) of game balls from the prize ball unit 800 via the main control board 4100 or the like. Is paid out to the storage tray 311.

  In the pachinko machine 1 of the present example, the first starting port 2001, the second starting port 2002, and the big winning port 2003 are arranged side by side in the vertical direction, so that the game balls released from the stage member 2320 are If the game ball is released from the stage member 2320 or the chance exit 2324 when the second start port 2002 or the big prize port 2003 is acceptable, the first start port 2001 can be received with high probability. Since there is a high possibility of being accepted, not only the first starting port 2001 but also the second starting port 2002 and the grand prize winning port 2003 can be expected to have a sense of expectation regarding the acceptance of game balls so as to enhance the interest. It has become.

  By the way, when the game ball enters the gate 2201 of the gate member 2200 and is detected by the gate sensor 2202 and a normal random number is acquired, and the normal lottery result based on the normal random number is a win, as described above, the second start port A pair of movable pieces 2005 that close 2002 are spread for a predetermined time to be able to win a prize, and when the prize can be won, a game ball is received by the second start opening 2002 and detected by the second start opening sensor 2012. Then, a predetermined number (for example, four) of game balls are paid out to the storage tray 311 from the prize ball unit 800 via the main control board 4100 and the like.

  On the main control board 4100, when a game ball wins the first start port 2001 and the second start port 2002 and is detected by the first start port sensor 3115 and the second start port sensor 2012, the first start port At the port 2001, the first special random number generator 4212 generates and extracts a predetermined first special random number. At the second start port 2002, the second special random number generator 4222 generates and extracts a predetermined second special random number. Is called. Then, based on the extracted special random number, it is extracted after the display of variation of the special symbol displayed on the first special symbol display 641 or the second special symbol display 642 corresponding to the function display unit 640 is started. The special symbol corresponding to the special random number is stopped and displayed as a special lottery result. In the first special symbol display 641 and the second special symbol display 642, when the special symbol is stopped and displayed in a manner suggesting “big hit”, the opening / closing member 2006 of the attacker unit 2000 opens and closes in a predetermined pattern. A big hit game (special advantageous game state) occurs, and a game ball is awarded to the big prize opening 2003 during that time, so that more game balls can be acquired. When one game ball wins the big prize opening 2003, a predetermined number (for example, 14) of game balls are paid out from the prize ball unit 800 to the storage tray 311.

  Note that, in the first start port 2001 and the second start port 2002, the first special symbol display 641 and the second special symbol display 642 are displayed in the same manner as the normal symbol variation display by the entry of the game ball into the gate 2201. When the special symbol is variably displayed or when the special symbol such as the big hit game cannot be variably displayed, the game ball is won at the start ports 2001 and 2002 and the first start port sensor 3115 and the second start port sensor 2012 are displayed. The first and second special random numbers extracted based on the detection signals from the first start port sensor 3115 and the second start port sensor 2012 until the special symbol variation display is enabled. The special symbol lottery unit data including the first special symbol hold storage means 4214 and the second special symbol hold storage means 4224 are stored and the display thereof is held. The number of stored special symbol lottery unit data was the (number pending), and displays in the first special symbol memory indicator 643 or the second special symbol memory indicator 644. Each of the first special symbol memory display 643 and the second special symbol memory display 644 is composed of two LEDs, and suggests the number of memories depending on the combination of the light emission state of each LED that is turned off / on / flashing. In this example, up to four each are stored and displayed. In addition, when the number of reservations exceeds four, the extracted special random number or the like is discarded. In addition, the second special symbol lottery unit data stored (held) in the second special symbol hold storage unit 4224 by the priority reservation digest unit 4231 is stored in the first special symbol hold storage unit 4214. Execution (digestion) is prioritized over unit data. That is, the lottery result hold related to the second start port 2002 is executed (digested) with priority over the lottery result hold related to the first start port 2001.

  Further, in the main control board 4100, the first and second special symbol lottery unit data extracted based on the detection of the first start port sensor 3115 and the second start port sensor 2012 are used as a predetermined determination table determined in advance. By collating, it is determined whether the first and second special symbol lottery unit data is “losing”, “small hit”, or “big hit”, and “big hit A” for “big hit” It is also determined whether it is any one of “big hit B”, “big hit C”, “big hit D”, and “big hit E”.

  The lottery result (special lottery result) based on the first and second special symbol lottery unit data extracted in response to the start winning of the game ball at the first start port 2001 and the second start port 2002 is “small hits”. ”, The main control board 4100 executes a small hit game. In the small hit game, the main control board 4100 repeats opening / closing of the opening / closing member 2006 of the attacker unit 2000 by the advantageous game state generating means 4232 a plurality of times (15 times in this embodiment) in a short opening / closing pattern. Yes. The short-time opening / closing pattern is a condition that a predetermined short time (for example, 0.05 seconds to 0.6 seconds elapses) or a predetermined number (for example, two) of game balls wins the big winning opening 2003. Is satisfied, the opening / closing member 2006 is closed.

  On the other hand, when the special lottery result is “big hit A” or “big hit B”, the main control board 4100 executes the long open big hit game. In the long open big hit game, the main control board 4100 repeats opening / closing of the opening / closing member 2006 of the attacker unit 2000 by the advantageous game state generating means 4232 a plurality of times (15 times in this embodiment) in a long time opening / closing pattern. ing. In the long open / close pattern, a predetermined long time (for example, 26 seconds to 33 seconds) elapses after the open / close member 2006 is opened, or a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls wins the grand prize opening 2003. When any of the conditions is satisfied, the opening / closing member 2006 is in a closed state.

  Further, when the special lottery result is “big hit C” or “big hit D”, the main control board 4100 executes the short open big hit game. In the short open big hit game, the main control board 4100 repeats the opening / closing of the opening / closing member 2006 of the attacker unit 2000 by the advantageous game state generating means 4232 a plurality of times (15 times in the present embodiment) in the short-time opening / closing pattern described above. It has become. When the special lottery result is “big hit E”, the main control board 4100 executes the long open big hit game after the short open. In the long open big hit game after the short opening, the main control board 4100 opens and closes the opening / closing member 2006 of the attacker unit 2000 by the advantageous game state generating means 4232 a plurality of times (in this embodiment, 15 times). ) After repeating, the above-described long-time opening / closing pattern is repeated a plurality of times (in this embodiment, 15 times).

  The operation of the opening / closing member 2006 performed in the case of the “small hit” described above and the operation of the opening / closing member 2006 performed in the case of the “big hit C” and “big hit D” are the same. Whether the special lottery result is “small hit”, “big hit C”, or “big hit D” cannot be determined only by the opening / closing operation of the opening / closing member 2006. Further, the operation of the opening / closing member 2006 performed in the case of “small hit”, “big hit C” and “big hit D” and the operation in the short time opening / closing pattern of the opening / closing member 2006 performed in the case of “big hit E” are: Identical. As a result, the player operates the opening / closing member 2006 in a short-time opening / closing pattern to determine whether the special lottery result is “small jackpot”, “big jackpot C”, “big jackpot D”, or “big jackpot E”. I cannot judge while I am. That is, the player recognizes from the operation of the opening / closing member 2006 that the special lottery result is “hit E” when the opening / closing member 2006 operates in the short-time opening / closing pattern and then starts to operate in the long-time opening / closing pattern. it can. Then, when the opening / closing member 2006 operates in a short-time opening / closing pattern and the player does not operate in a long-time opening / closing pattern, the player has a special lottery result of “small hit”, “big hit C”, or “big hit D”. Can be recognized from the operation of the opening and closing member 2006. After the predetermined number of rounds, for “big hit”, processing for exchanging the random number determination table with a high-probability time / short table is performed by the lottery condition changing unit 4236 based on the big hit type.

  By the way, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the first special symbol display 641 and the second special symbol display 642 of the function display unit 640 are variably displayed according to the special lottery result, and the liquid crystal display device 1400 is displayed. Also, the effect image according to the special lottery result is displayed. Specifically, in the liquid crystal display device 1400, the variable display of each symbol row is started in a state where a series of symbol rows composed of a plurality of different symbols is displayed (for example, three rows), and then sequentially stopped. When all the symbol sequences are finally displayed in a stopped state, the determination result of the special random number extracted by the combination of the symbols displayed in a stopped state is suggested to the player side. That is, according to the special lottery result by the start winning, an effect image that is stopped and displayed so as to suggest the special lottery result after a plurality of symbol sequences are variably displayed is displayed. Note that since the symbols displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1400 are larger and easier to see than the special symbols on the first and second special symbol displays 641 and 642, the player is generally displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1400. Pay attention to the design. The liquid crystal display device 1400 can display not only an effect display related to the start winning prize but also a “hit game effect image” displayed during the jackpot game.

  Note that the special symbol variation display on the first special symbol display 641 and the second special symbol display 642 is directly controlled by the main control board 4100 (see FIG. 189). The symbol variation display on the liquid crystal display device 1400 is controlled by the peripheral control board 4140 and the liquid crystal control board 4150 based on a command related to the lottery result transmitted from the main control board 4100 to the peripheral control board 4140. ing. As a result, the variable display of the symbols on the liquid crystal display device 1400 that is particularly noticed by the player is controlled by the peripheral control board 4140 or the like, so that a certain one related to the lottery result transmitted from the main control board 4100 is obtained. A plurality of symbol variation patterns can be prepared in advance for one command to increase the symbol variation patterns in the liquid crystal display device 1400. Also, the “hit game effect image” displayed during the jackpot game is controlled by the peripheral control board 4140 and the like, and the effect images of various patterns are prepared in advance. Thereby, the display pattern of the effect image displayed without increasing the calculation processing load on the main control board 4100 can be increased, and the pachinko machine 1 that makes the player more entertaining and less likely to get bored can be obtained. It has become.

  In addition, in the peripheral control board 4140, in addition to the control of the effect image, various movable decorative bodies 2330b, 3201, 3301, 3401, 3501, and the like provided in the back unit 3000 are appropriately set based on a command related to the lottery result. In addition to being operated, the LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards 2020, 3104, 3205, 3303c, 3338, 3414, and 3524 provided in the game board 4 and the like are appropriately driven. Can be entertained.

  Thus, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the rolling restriction portion 2341 is provided at the right end opposite to the warp outlet 2314 that discharges and supplies the game balls onto the stages 2321 and 2322. The rolling end of the game ball rolling in the left-right direction can be restricted, and the game ball can be prevented from entering the right movable decorative body 3301 side outside the right end portions of the stages 2321 and 2322. Further, when the game ball exceeds the rolling restricting portion 2341 of the center accessory 2300, the intrusion ball discharge port 3117 is provided in the accommodation portion 2340 that can accommodate the lower end portion of the right movable decorative body 3301, so that the stage The game balls that deviate from 2321 and 2322 can be quickly discharged, and the movement of the right movable decorative body 3301 can be prevented from being hindered by the game balls that have entered the housing portion 2340. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game from being interrupted and to prevent the player's interest in the game from being lowered.

  Further, the game balls that have entered the warp inlet 2313 formed on the left outer periphery of the front wall member 2310 in the center accessory 2300 are supplied onto the stages 2321 and 2322 in the frame. In order to enjoy the movement of the rolling game ball, it is necessary to enter the game ball into the warp inlet 2313 of the front wall member 2310. Therefore, the player can perform a driving operation aiming at the warp inlet 2313. By giving a goal to the player, it is possible to prevent the interest from being reduced by focusing on the game.

  Further, since the right movable decorative body 3301 is provided on the opposite side of the stages 2321 and 2322 with the rolling restricting portion 2341 interposed therebetween, the right movable decorative body 3301 provided on the side of the stages 2321 and 2322 allows the other movable decorative body 3301 to be provided. The pachinko machine 1 can have a higher visual impact than the pachinko machine, and the pachinko machine 1 can increase the appeal of the pachinko machine 1 and attract the player's attention, and roll on the stages 2321 and 2322. Not only the movement of the game ball, but also the movement of the right movable decorative body 3301 can be enjoyed by the player, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the player in the game.

  Further, the intrusion ball discharge port 3117 is formed in the right decoration body 3102 that closes the rear end of the accommodating portion 2340 that can accommodate the base end side of the right movable ornament 3301. Is open so as to face the player side, so that even if a game ball enters the storage portion 2340 from the stages 2321 and 2322, the player can easily see the intrusion ball discharge port 3117, so that the deviating game It becomes possible to recognize naturally that the ball is discharged from the intrusion ball discharge port 3117, and it is possible to alleviate the player's anxiety about the trouble that may occur due to the game ball stagnation, It is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in games by continuing the game.

  In addition, the right decorative body 3102 that closes the rear end of the housing portion 2340 is provided with an intrusion ball discharge port 3117 so that game balls that deviate from the stages 2321 and 2322 are discharged in a direction away from the player. Therefore, it becomes possible to make the game ball received to the intrusion ball discharge port 3117 invisible from the player side, and when the game ball becomes invisible, the game ball received by the player is discharged without being involved in the game. It can be recognized that the interest is transferred to other game balls and the like, and it is possible to prevent the interest from deteriorating.

  Furthermore, even if the game ball passes through the rolling restricting portion 2341 at the right end of the stages 2321 and 2322 and enters the storage portion 2340, the right movable decorative body 3301 moves, so that the game ball in the storage portion 2340 is intruded. Since the pressure guide is guided to the discharge port 3117, the game ball that has entered the storage unit 2340 by the movement of the right movable decorative body 3301 can be automatically discharged from the intrusion ball discharge port 3117. It is possible to reliably prevent the game ball from stagnating in the portion 2340 and causing the ball clogging, and the same effects as described above can be achieved. Further, since the game ball in the storage portion 2340 is guided and discharged to the intrusion ball discharge port 3117 by the movement of the right movable decorative body 3301, the game ball that has entered the storage portion 2340 beyond the rolling restriction portion 2341. However, it is possible to reliably prevent the right movable decorative body 3301 from being hindered from moving, and to allow the player to enjoy the movable effect of the right movable decorative body 3301 without any problem and to suppress the interest in the game from being reduced. can do.

  Further, the height of the rolling restricting portion 2341 is about five times as high as the outer dimensions of the game ball from the rolling surfaces of the stages 2321 and 2322, and toward the center of the stages 2321 and 2322 as it goes upward. The game balls supplied (released) onto the stages 2321 and 2322 from the warp outlet 2314 at the left end of the stages 2321 and 2322 are arranged at the right end on the opposite side because they are inclined to fall down. Even if the rolling restricting portion 2341 is vigorously contacted, it is possible to reliably prevent the rolling restricting portion 2341 from being overcome, and it is ensured that the game ball deviates from the stages 2321 and 2322 and is not involved in the game. It is possible to avoid the feelings that the player has lost by deviating and to prevent the interest in the game from falling. Rukoto can.

  Furthermore, when the game balls supplied on the stages 2321 and 2322 in the center accessory 2300 enter the opposite side of the stages 2321 and 2322 beyond the rolling restricting portion 2341 and are received in the intrusion ball discharge port 3117, Stages 2321, 2322 are guided to the rear side of the out port 606 through the intrusion ball discharge passage 621 j formed in the back box 621, merged with the game ball received in the out port 606 and discharged. It is possible to count the game balls that have deviated from the game balls as discharged game balls, and to prevent inconsistencies (problems) between the number of game balls thrown by the player and the number of discharged game balls. It is possible to prevent the game from being interrupted due to the occurrence of a malfunction and thereby reducing the interest of the player.

  In addition, the back box 621 that supports the liquid crystal display device 1400 is formed with an intrusion ball discharge passage 621j that guides the game ball received in the intrusion ball discharge port 3117 to the rear side of the out port 606. Compared to the case where the ball discharge path 621j is configured by a separate member, the number of parts can be reduced, and the cost associated with the pachinko machine 1 can be reduced.

  Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the drive motors 2333, 3244, 3404, 3504 for driving the movable decorative bodies 2330b, 3203, 3401, 3501 disposed above the liquid crystal display device 1400 are provided on the gaming panel 600. The rear side is covered by the drive motor housing portion 621k of the back box 621, and the air in the drive motor housing portion 621k is forcibly ventilated by the exhaust fan 3112. Therefore, the drive motors 2333, 3244, 3404, 3504 The generated heat can be immediately discharged to the outside of the pachinko machine 1, and heat is generated in the pachinko machine 1 to melt the synthetic resin and solder, and various electronic components for control (for example, CPU, MPU, IC, transistor) , Resistors, capacitors, sensors, relays, etc.) malfunctions It is possible to prevent. Therefore, even if the drive motors 2333, 3244, 3404, and 3504, which are heat sources, are increased by providing the plurality of movable decorative bodies 2330b, 3203, 3401, and 3501, the drive motors 2333, 3244, 3404, Since the heat from 3504 can be quickly discharged to prevent the temperature in the pachinko machine 1 from rising, the pachinko machine 1 can be provided with a plurality of movable decorative bodies 2330b, 3203, 3401, 3501 without problems. Thus, the pachinko machine 1 having a higher impact can be obtained, and the player's interest can be strongly attracted and the player's interest can be suppressed from decreasing.

  In addition, as described above, the pachinko machine 1 can be provided with a plurality of movable decorative bodies 2330b, 3203, 3401, 3501, etc. without any problem, so that the plurality of movable decorative bodies 2330b, 3203, 3401, 3501, etc. It is possible to increase the visual impact of the pachinko machine 1, it can be further differentiated from the same kind of pachinko machine, it can be a pachinko machine 1 that attracts the player's attention strongly, This pachinko machine 1 can be easily selected as the pachinko machine to be played, and it is possible to entertain the pachinko machine 1 and prevent the player's interest from deteriorating.

  The exhaust fan 3112 forcibly ventilates the air in the drive motor housing portion 621k of the back box 621 in which the drive motors 2333, 3244, 3404, and 3504 are housed. Since the flow is generated and the drive motors 2333, 3244, 3404, and 3504 can be cooled by the air flow, the drive motors 2333, 3244, 3404, and 3504 are overheated, causing problems in the drive motors 2333, 3244, 3404, and 3504. Or power consumption due to an increase in electrical resistance can be prevented, and the drive motors 2333, 3244, 3404, 3504 can be reliably operated to move the movable decorative bodies 2330b, 3203, 3401, 3501. Can be moved and movable Kazaritai 2330b, the movable rendition of 3203,3401,3501, can entertain a player, interest in the game of the player can be suppressed.

  Further, since the drive motors 2333, 3244, 3404, 3504 of the movable decorative bodies 2330b, 3203, 3401, 3501 serving as heat sources are accommodated in the drive motor accommodating portion 621k, the drive motors 2333, 3244, 3404, 3504 are accommodated. The main control board 4100 for controlling the game, the peripheral control board 4140 for controlling the movable decorative bodies 2330b, 3203, 3401, 3501, the light emitting decorative body, etc., or a predetermined effect image can be displayed. It can be transmitted to the liquid crystal display device 1400 and the like, and the control by them can be prevented from becoming unstable, the pachinko machine 1 can be maintained in an optimal state, and the game by the pachinko machine 1 can be enjoyed with certainty Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the player in the game.

  In addition, since the back box 621 attached to the rear side of the game panel 600 is provided with the drive motor accommodating portion 621k, the air in the drive motor accommodating portion 621k is exhausted by the exhaust fan 3112 of the game panel 600 (pachinko machine 1). It is possible to exhaust to the rear side, that is, the island facility in the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed, and to prevent the exhaust heat in the drive motor housing portion 621k from hitting the player and causing discomfort. It is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the player.

  Further, since the drive motor housing portion 621k is formed and the exhaust fan 3112 is supported on the back box 621 attached to the rear side of the game panel 600 and detachably supporting the liquid crystal display device 1400 on the rear side. There is no need to separately form the drive motor housing portion 621k and attach it to the game panel 600, the configuration such as the number of parts related to the drive motor housing portion 621k can be simplified, and the labor involved in assembly can be simplified. At the same time, it is possible to suppress an increase in cost related to the pachinko machine 1.

  Further, since the drive motor accommodating portion 621k of the back box 621 is formed to have a predetermined length and the ventilation port 621l is provided at one end, the exhaust fan 3112 is driven from the ventilation port 621l provided at the end. Since the air in the motor accommodating portion 621k can be exhausted, the entire air in the driving motor accommodating portion 621k can be flowed, and the driving motors 2333, 3244, 3404, 3504 accommodated in the driving motor accommodating portion 621k. The heat from etc. can be ventilated reliably.

  Further, the drive motors 2333, 3244, 3404, and 3504 disposed above the opening 621c (the liquid crystal display device 1400) of the back box 621 are covered with the drive motor housing 621k, that is, the drive motor housing 621k. Is formed in the vicinity of the upper portion of the back box 621 (game panel 600), so that when the air in the drive motor housing portion 621k is ventilated by the exhaust fan 3112, it rises to the upper portion of the pachinko machine 1. At least part of the heat from the heat source and the heat from the liquid crystal display device 1400 can be exhausted together, it is possible to suppress the heat from entering the pachinko machine 1, and the pachinko machine 1 due to the rise in temperature. Can prevent the game from being interrupted due to a malfunction, and to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable and deteriorating the interest. It can be.

  Further, since the ventilation port 621l in the drive motor housing portion 621k of the back box 621 is opened downward, the pachinko machine 1 is compared with the case where the ventilation port 621l is opened upward. On the rear side (in the island facility in the game hall), it is possible to reduce as much as possible the possibility that dust, dust, etc. that have fallen from the upper side will enter the drive motor housing portion 621k through the ventilation port 621l. It is possible to prevent a problem from occurring when dust or the like enters the drive motor housing portion 621k. Further, the ventilation port 621l is opened downward, and the air in the drive motor housing portion 621k is exhausted downward from the ventilation port 621l, so that it is compared with the case where the ventilation port 621l is opened backward. Thus, it is possible to prevent the exhaust heat from being sent to other pachinko machines arranged in the back direction in the island facilities of the game hall, and to prevent the occurrence of problems in other pachinko machines. be able to.

  Further, since the ventilation port 621l is opened downward, the drive motor housing portion 621k in the back box 621 is received by receiving a game ball in a winning port provided on the upper part of a general pachinko machine. Even if it is arranged at a position as close as possible to the prize ball tank 720 for storing the game balls to be paid out, it is possible to prevent the ventilation hole 621l from being closed by the prize ball tank 720 or the like. The air in the drive motor housing 621k can be reliably ventilated through the ventilation port 621l, and the drive motor housing 621k can be disposed above the opening 621c (the liquid crystal display device 1400). Similar effects can be obtained.

  In addition, since the exhaust fan 3112 is a sirocco fan and the intake shaft and the exhaust shaft are substantially orthogonal to each other, by arranging the intake shaft so as to be substantially along the game panel 600, the exhaust shaft is directed downward in the pachinko machine. They can be easily arranged, and the configuration related to the exhaust fan 3112 can be reduced in size and simplified. Also, since the sirocco fan is less likely to change the air flow even when static pressure is applied compared to the propeller fan, even if there is only one ventilation port 621k as in this embodiment, the air in the drive motor housing portion 621k is surely secured. Therefore, it is possible to surely exhibit the above-described effects.

  Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, after the left movable decorative body 3201 moves rightward from the left outer side of the liquid crystal display device 1400 outside the frame of the center accessory 2300 and is positioned on the front surface of the liquid crystal display device 1400. The left decorative decorative body 3201 can move from the main decorative body 3202 to the secondary decorative body 3203 in the upward direction, and a movable effect can be performed such that the opening window 3204 opens between the main decorative body 3202 and the secondary decorative body 3203. Because it is possible, the player can be shown a movable effect of the left movable ornament 3201 movable in two stages, and the player can be entertained by the movement of the movable ornament that could not be seen with a conventional pachinko machine. In addition, the main decorative body 3202 and the sub decorative body 3203 of the left movable decorative body 3201 can be used to produce a movable performance that is hard to get tired of. That interest can be suppressed.

  Further, since the secondary decorative body 3203 is further slid upward from the main decorative body 3202 of the left movable decorative body 3201 that appears on the front side of the liquid crystal display device 1400 from the left side, the secondary decorative body 3203 slides. As a result, the combined size of the main decorative body 3202 and the sub decorative body 3203 can be increased, and the left movable decorative body 3201 can be enlarged, so that “something good happens to the player”. ? "Can be made to increase the sense of expectation for the game, and the player can be prevented from being entertained and the interest in the game being reduced. Further, when the secondary decorative body 3203 slides from the main decorative body 3202 that appears on the front surface of the liquid crystal display device 1400, the movable left movable decorative body 3201 as a whole becomes large as described above, which may surprise the player. It is possible to strongly attract the player's interest to the left movable ornament 3201 and suppress the interest in the game from decreasing, and by increasing the size, the left movable ornament 3201 can stand out, This pachinko machine 1 can be easily selected as a pachinko machine that is differentiated from the pachinko machine and plays.

  Further, the sub decorative body 3203 in the left movable decorative body 3201 can be moved in the vertical direction when the main decorative body 3202 moves to the front surface of the liquid crystal display device 1400 within the frame of the center accessory 2300. The main decorative body 3202 is moved into the frame of the center accessory 2300 so that the main decorative body 3202 and the sub decorative body 3203 are sufficiently visible to the player, and the secondary decorative body 3203 is moved. Therefore, the player can surely recognize the movement of the main decorative body 3202 and the secondary decorative body 3203, and the entertaining effect by the main decorative body 3202 and the secondary decorative body 3203 can be surely enjoyed and the game can be enjoyed. It can suppress that it falls. Further, since the secondary decorative body 3203 is moved after the main decorative body 3202 moves, as a movable effect by the left movable decorative body 3201, a pattern in which only the main decorative body 3202 is movable and the main decorative body 3202 are movable. After that, the second decorative pattern 3203 can be moved to two movable patterns, and the player can be made tired by various movable patterns.

  Further, a left traversing unit 3210 for moving the main decorative body 3202 in the left movable decorative body 3201 in the left-right direction is disposed below the liquid crystal display device 1400 that is perpendicular to the moving direction, and the sub-decorative body 3203 is provided. The left elevating unit 3240 that moves in the vertical direction is arranged on the opposite side of the left horizontal unit 3210 with the liquid crystal display device 1400 interposed therebetween. In other words, the left horizontal unit 3210 has a long left-right length. Since the left elevating unit 3240 is arranged outside the main decorative body 3202, the range of movement of the main decorative body 3202 that moves in the left-right direction can be made as wide as possible (longer). The main decoration body 3202 that moves greatly can attract the player's interest strongly. In addition, since the auxiliary decorative body 3203 is moved from the outside of the main decorative body 3202 by the left elevating / lowering unit 3240, the size of the left elevating / lowering unit 3240 can be prevented from being restricted by the main decorative body 3202. The range of movement of the auxiliary decoration 3203 can be widened as much as possible to entertain the player, and the weight of the left movable decoration 3201 such as the main decoration 3202 to be moved by the left traversing unit 3210 increases. It is possible to suppress the load on the left traversing unit 3210 and prevent the durability from being lowered.

  Further, since the left traversing unit 3210 and the left lifting unit 3240 of the left movable decorative body unit 3200 are arranged on both upper and lower sides with the liquid crystal display device 1400 interposed therebetween, the left traversing unit 3210 and the left lifting unit 3240 are mutually connected. It is possible to avoid interference in terms of space, and the left traversing unit 3210 and the left lifting unit 3240 can be surely arranged. The left traversing unit 3210 and the left lifting unit 3240 allow the main decoration body 3202 and the sub-decoration. By moving the body 3203, the main decorative body 3202 and the sub decorative body 3203 capable of the above-described movable effect can be reliably realized.

  Further, a left traversing unit 3210 that requires a space along the liquid crystal display device 1400 is disposed below the liquid crystal display device 1400, and a left lifting unit 3240 that requires a space extending outward from the liquid crystal display device 1400 is provided in the liquid crystal display device. The horizontally long left traversing unit 3210 is disposed below the liquid crystal display device 1400 with relatively little free space, and is disposed above the liquid crystal display device 1400 with relatively large free space. Since the vertically long left elevating unit 3240 is arranged, it is possible to easily secure an installation space (arrangement space) for the left transverse unit 3210 and the left elevating unit 3240. The left transverse unit 3210 and the left elevating unit 3240 To secure the main decorative body 3202 and the secondary decorative body 3203. The can be movable (move), it can be pachinko machine 1 functions and effects described above.

  When the sub decorative body 3203 slides upward from the main decorative body 3202 in the left movable decorative body 3201, the liquid crystal display device 1400 disposed on the rear side between the main decorative body 3202 and the sub decorative body 3203 is played. Since the opening window 3204 that can be seen from the person's side is formed, the effect image partially blocked by the main decoration body 3202 and the sub decoration body 3203 can be visually recognized through the opening window 3204. When a player recognizes the effect image hidden by the main decoration 3202 or the like, it is possible to increase the expectation for the game, and it is possible to prevent the entertainment from deteriorating by delighting the player. In addition, a predetermined effect image may be displayed at a position corresponding to the opening window 3204 formed by the main decorative body 3202 and the sub decorative body 3203 in the liquid crystal display device 1400. Since it is possible to make the illusion that the effect image is displayed on the opening window 3204, the effect image displayed on the opening window 3204 can be enjoyed, and the auxiliary decorative body 3203 slides to open the opening window. When the 3204 is formed (when the opening window 3204 is opened), the player can be excited by what kind of effect image is displayed, and the player's expectation is enhanced and the interest in the game is reduced. Can be suppressed.

  Further, when the pinion gear 3218 is rotationally driven in a predetermined direction by the main decorative body drive motor 3220 in the left traversing unit 3210, the slide rack 3216 having the rack gear 3216a meshing with the pinion gear 3218 is guided by the rail member 3214 and left and right. At the same time, the main decorative body 3202 moves in the left-right direction via the main decorative body stay 3222 fixed to the slide rack 3216. Therefore, the main decorative body 3202 can be reliably moved in the left-right direction. It is possible to achieve the above-described effects. Further, since the main decorative body drive motor 3220 is fixed to the side away from the liquid crystal display device 1400 with respect to the main decorative body moving base 3212, the main decorative body drive motor 3220 is placed on the front surface of the liquid crystal display device 1400. It is possible to prevent the appearance from deteriorating.

  Further, the extended end (upper end) of the main decorative body stay 3222 opposite to the side fixed to the slide rack 3216 is guided and supported by the extended end guide member 3224, and both ends of the main decorative body stay 3222 are supported. Can be supported by the slide rack 3216 and the extended end guide member 3224, so that the main decoration body stay 3222 can be moved by moving the main decoration body 3202 (slide rack 3216), so It is possible to prevent the decoration body stay 3222 from bending, and the main decoration body 3202 connected to and supported by the main decoration body stay 3222 can be prevented from vibrating or tilting. It is possible to avoid causing the player to feel distrust and anxiety by acting unnaturally, and to move Entertaining movement Kazaritai 3202 interest in the game and can be inhibited from reduction.

  Further, when the drive gear 3246 is rotated in a predetermined direction by the auxiliary decoration body drive motor 3244 in the left elevating unit 3240, the driven gear 3248 that meshes with the gear teeth on the outer periphery of the drive gear 3246 is opposite to the drive gear 3246, but the drive gear. By rotating at the same speed as 3246, the second action shaft 3248a of the driven gear 3248 revolves while being synchronized so that the vertical position is substantially the same as the position of the first action shaft 3246a of the drive gear 3246. At the same time, the second action 3248a axis and the first action shaft 3246a slide in the left and right directions in the second moving slit 3250b and the first moving slit 3250a of the slide member 3250, respectively, and at the same time, the sub decorative body moving base 3242 moves up and down. Slide member 3250 supported so as to be slidable in the vertical direction slides Thus, since the secondary decorative body 3203 connected to the slide member 3250 moves in the vertical direction together with the slide member 3250, the secondary decorative body 3203 can be reliably slid in the vertical direction, and the above-described action An effect can be produced reliably. In addition, since the slide member 3250 is slid in the vertical direction with the two action shafts of the first action shaft 3246a and the second action shaft 3248a, compared to the case of sliding with one action shaft, It becomes possible to make the slide member 3250 difficult to tilt, and the slide member 3250, that is, the sub decorative body 3203 can be smoothly moved in the vertical direction. It is possible to suppress a sense of incongruity and a decrease in interest in games.

  In addition, a stage member 2320 that recirculates the game ball into the game area 605 after rolling the game ball in the left-right direction by supplying the game ball driven into the game area 605 within the frame of the center accessory 2300. And at least a part of the left traversing unit 3210 for moving the main decorative body 3202 by the stage member 2320 so as to be invisible from the player side. Is supplied to the stages 2321 and 2322 within the frame of the center accessory 2300, the game balls roll in the left and right directions on the stages 2321 and 2322, and are then returned to the game area 605, so that the stage 2321 , 2322 A game that rolls on the pachinko machine 1 with the game ball rolling on it is offered to the player. It can be, entertaining movement game ball interest in the game can be suppressed. Further, since at least a part of the left traversing unit 3210 is covered with the stages 2321 and 2322 of the center accessory 2300, the player is aware of the presence of the left traversing unit 3210 for moving the main decoration 3202. The pachinko machine 1 can be made difficult and can improve the appearance of the pachinko machine and attract the player's interest.

  Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the base end side is pivotally supported on the lower side of the lower side of the liquid crystal display device 1400 so that the front end side rotates between the vicinity of the right side of the liquid crystal display device 1400 and the front surface. A right movable decorative body 3301 that can be expanded and contracted in the direction, and an outer side and a front side of the liquid crystal display device 1400 near the upper side opposite to the base end side of the right movable decorative body 3301 across the liquid crystal display device 1400 And an upper left movable decorative body 3401 capable of covering the tip of the extended right movable decorative body 3301 when the movable movable body 3301 is positioned in front of the liquid crystal display device 1400. When the distal end of the right movable decorative body 3301 is covered with the upper left movable decorative body 3401 when rotated from the vicinity of the right side to the front side and then rotated, the liquid crystal display device 1400 is rotated to the front surface. In addition, the movement of the right movable decorative body 3301 whose tip is united with the upper left movable decorative body 3401 can be enjoyed when extended, and the right movable decorative body 3301 can be rotated, expanded and contracted, and the upper left movable decorative body. Types of movable effects by the right movable decorative body 3301 and the upper left movable decorative body 3401 by appropriately combining at least four operations of covering the tip in cooperation with 3401 and moving the upper left movable decorative body 3401 up and down Can be further diversified, making it difficult to get bored of the movable performance and suppressing the player's interest in the game from being reduced.

  Further, since the right movable decorative body 3301 extends and the tip thereof can be covered with the upper left movable decorative body 3401, the right movable decorative body 3301 extends and the right movable decorative body 3301 and the upper left movable decorative body 3401 extend. The movable decorative body 3401 can be combined to form one large decorative body, the player can be surprised by the appearance of the large decorative body, and the apparent impact of the pachinko machine 1 is enhanced by the large decorative body. Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 can attract the player's interest. In addition, since the right movable decorative body 3301 and the upper left movable decorative body 3401 are united, it is possible to make the player think that “something good will happen” and to expect the game. It is possible to suppress the interest from deteriorating.

  In addition, as described above, when the right movable decorative body 3301 is rotated to the front surface of the liquid crystal display device 1400 and extended, the tip is covered with the upper left movable decorative body 3401, and a sense of expectation with impact as if they are combined is obtained. Since it is in a raised state, the player can first be thrilled by whether or not the front end side of the right movable decorative body 3301 rotates to the front surface of the liquid crystal display device 1400, and then the right movable decorative body. In addition to being excited by whether or not 3301 is rotated and then extended, it is further irritated by whether or not the tip of the extended right movable decorative body 3301 is covered by the upper left movable decorative body 3401. It is possible to focus on the player's consciousness with respect to the movable effect of the right movable decorative body 3301, and to attract attention, so that it is hard to get bored. Interest in the game Te can be suppressed.

  Further, the upper left movable decorative body 3401 capable of covering the distal end of the extended right movable decorative body 3301 is arranged on the opposite side to the base end side of the right movable decorative body 3301 with the liquid crystal display device 1400 interposed therebetween. Therefore, when the right movable decorative body 3301 extends and the tip is covered with the upper left movable decorative body 3401, the front surface of the liquid crystal display device 1400 is divided into two parts by the right movable decorative body 3301 and the upper left movable decorative body 3401. Thus, it is possible to show the player a movable effect that could not be seen with the movable ornaments so far, and to prevent the player from having fun and reducing the interest in the game. In addition, on the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 1400 divided by the right movable decorative body 3301 and the upper left movable decorative body 3401, an effect image related to the division (for example, a predetermined item or character by the expanding right movable decorative body 3301). May be displayed on the both sides of the right movable decorative body 3301 and the like, thereby causing not only the movable effect of the right movable decorative body 3301 but also the liquid crystal display device. Since the image production by 1400 can also be enjoyed, the pachinko machine 1 that is hard to get tired of by presenting more various productions can be prevented, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the player in the game.

  In addition, the right movable decorative body 3301 can be rotated between the vicinity of the right side of the liquid crystal display device 1400 and the front surface, and the upper left movable decorative body 3401 is disposed between the outer side and the front surface of the liquid crystal display device 1400. Since the right movable decorative body 3301 and the upper left movable decorative body 3401 are positioned in the vicinity of the right side of the liquid crystal display device 1400 or on the upper side when the movable effect is not produced, the right movable decorative body 3301 and the upper left movable body 3401 are positioned. It is possible to reduce the effect image displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1400 by the movable decorative body 3401 as much as possible, making it easier for the player to see the effect image, and entertaining the effect image. It can suppress that the interest with respect to a game falls.

  Further, the right movable decorative body 3301 and the upper left movable decorative body 3401 are arranged so as to sandwich the liquid crystal display device 1400, and the upper left movable decorative body 3401 moves to the front surface of the liquid crystal display device 1400 according to the gaming state. At the same time, the right movable decorative body 3301 that moves like the conventional pachinko machine such that the right movable decorative body 3301 rotates and extends toward the front surface of the liquid crystal display device 1400 and merges with the upper left movable decorative body 3401. And the upper left movable decoration body 3401, it is possible to strongly attract the player's interest by the movable right movable decoration body 3301 and the upper left movable decoration body 3401, which greatly differentiates from other pachinko machines. The pachinko machine 1 can be easily selected as the pachinko machine to be played.

  Further, since the right movable decorative body 3301 can be rotated between the vicinity of the right side of the liquid crystal display device 1400 and the front surface in front view, the upper left movable decorative body 3401 does not exist in the extending direction of the right movable decorative body 3301. The right movable decorative body 3301 may be extended by stopping the rotation at the position, so that the rotating right movable decorative body 3301 reaches the position where the tip is covered by the upper left movable decorative body 3401. It is possible to give the player a sense of expectation depending on whether or not it rotates, and entertains not only the combination with the upper left movable decorative body 3401 but also the movement of the right movable decorative body 3301 itself, so that it is difficult to get tired of the pachinko machine 1 It can be.

  Further, when the upper left movable decorative body 340 moves downward to the front in the front view of the liquid crystal display device 1400, the tip of the right movable decorative body 3301 can be covered, so that the right movable decorative body 3301 rotates. Alternatively, the upper left movable decorative body 3401 may be moved to the front surface of the liquid crystal display device 1400 before extending, so that the right movable decorative body 3301 is rotated and then extended to cover the tip. It is possible to attract the player's interest to the right movable decorative body 3301, and it is possible to increase the player's expectation for the movable effect and suppress the interest from deteriorating.

  In addition, with a distal end member 3304 that protrudes forward and backward in the longitudinal direction and is urged in the forward direction at the distal end of the right movable decorative body 3301, and a movable decorative portion 3305 that is movable by the forward and backward movement of the distal end member 3304, The upper left movable decorative body 3401 is provided with an extension regulating member 3401c that regulates the extension of the right movable decorative body 3301 by coming into contact with the distal end of the distal end member 3304. When the tip of 3304 is covered with the upper left movable decorative body 3401 and abuts against the tip restricting member 3401c, the right movable decorative body 3301 is restricted from further extending in the extension direction (the forward direction in the longitudinal direction). If the right movable decorative body 3301 is further extended by the right decorative body expansion / contraction unit 3340 in this state, the tip member 3304 resists the urging force. Since the movable body 3303 can be retreated so as to be immersed in the decorative body main body 3303 and the movable decoration portion 3305 can be moved as the distal end member 3304 is retreated, the movable effect of the right movable decorative body 3301 can be produced. It can be further diversified and the player can be entertained by moving the movable decorative portion 3305 and the like, and can be made a pachinko machine 1 that is less tired than conventional pachinko machines, and has a higher visual impact. The pachinko machine 1 that can attract the attention of a person can be obtained.

  Further, with the tip of the tip member 3304 in the right movable decorative body 3301 in contact with the extension regulating member 3401c of the upper left movable decorative body 3401, the tip member 3304 is attached to the right decorative body main body 3303 by the right decorative body expansion / contraction unit 3340. On the other hand, since it can be slid in the longitudinal direction so as to repeat advancement and retreat, the movable decorative portion 3305 can repeatedly move in a state where the right movable decorative body 3301 and the upper left movable decorative body 3401 are combined. Such a movable effect can be shown to the player, and the player can be prevented from being entertained and the interest in the game being reduced.

  Further, the extension restricting member 3401c that comes into contact with the tip of the tip member 3304 is configured by a low-repulsion member, an impact absorbing member, or the like, and even if the tip of the tip member 3304 comes into contact with the extension restricting member 3401c vigorously, Since the impact due to the contact can be absorbed on the extension regulating member 3401c side, the tip member 3304 can be prevented from being damaged, the durability of the pachinko machine 1 can be improved, and the tip member 3304 can be It is possible to prevent the game from being interrupted due to breakage, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the player due to the interruption of the game.

  Further, the movable decorative portion 3305 in the right movable decorative body 3301 has a configuration in which the two flange members 3305b and 3305c are rotatably connected, and the free ends (both ends) thereof are respectively connected to the right decorative body main body 3303 and the tip member 3304. Since the tip member 3304 moves so as to advance and retreat with respect to the right decorative body main body 3303 and the relative position between the tip member 3304 and the right decorative body main body 3303 changes, both ends are moved. Each of the movable decorative portions 3305 supported so as to be rotatable is rotated by the action of the link, and the shape (form) of the entire movable decorative portion 3305 changes like a pantograph, so that the movable movable portion 3305 is movable. The decorative portion 3305 can be embodied, and the above-described operational effects can be reliably achieved.

  Further, the upper left movable decorative body 3401 is provided with a tapered guide portion 3401b for guiding the tip of the extended right movable decorative body 3301 to a predetermined position, and the right extended by the tapered guide portion 3401b. Since the tip of the movable decorative body 3301 can be guided to a predetermined position, even if the right movable decorative body 3301 expands in a state of analogy, the right movable decorative body 3301 and the upper left movable decorative body 3401 that are expanded and merged are combined. And the appearance of the right movable decorative body 3301 when the tip of the right movable decorative body 3301 is covered by the upper left movable decorative body 3401 (when combined) can be improved. It is possible to prevent a sense of incongruity from being given to the player and to reduce the interest in the game.

  Furthermore, the right movable decorative body 3301 is provided with a tip member 3304 which can be advanced and retracted on the front end side of the right movable decorative body 3301 after the front end of the right movable decorative body 3301 extends beyond the liquid crystal display device 1400. The upper left movable decorative body 3401 moved to the front surface of the display device 1400, that is, moved to a position shorter than the maximum extension of the right movable decorative body 3301, is provided with an extension regulating member 3401c that regulates the extension of the right movable decorative body 3301. Therefore, when the right decorative body extending unit 3340 further drives the right movable decorative body 3301 in the extending direction with the distal end of the right movable decorative body 3301 in contact with the expansion regulating member 3401c, the distal end member 3304 moves relatively backward. Accordingly, the movement of the tip member 3304 can be enjoyed and the longitudinal direction of the right movable decorative body 3301 can be changed. It can be more diversified pattern, player's interest to hardly get tired movable effect can be suppressed.

  In addition, the upper left movable decorative body 3401 is disposed between the game panel 600 and the liquid crystal display device 1400, and goes to between the game panel 600 on which the upper left movable decorative body 3401 is disposed and the liquid crystal display device 1400. As a result, the distal end of the right movable decorative body 3301 is extended, so that the extended distal end of the right movable decorative body 3301 can be prevented from coming into contact with or touching the game panel 600, the liquid crystal display device 1400, or the like. In addition, it is possible to prevent the right movable decorative body 3301 and the like from being damaged and to cause problems, and to smoothly extend the right movable decorative body 3301. Further, the upper left movable decorative body 3401 is disposed between the opaque game panel 600 and the liquid crystal display device 1400, and the upper left movable decorative body 3401 is moved between the outside and the front surface of the liquid crystal display device 1400 in front view. When the upper left movable decorative body 3401 is moved to the outside of the liquid crystal display device 1400 facing the opening 600e of the gaming panel 600, the upper left movable decorative body 3401 is moved to the opening 600e of the gaming panel 600. Since it moves outward and becomes invisible from the player side, the upper left movable decorative body 3401 can appear and disappear, and the appearance of the upper left movable decorative body 3401 can increase the player's sense of expectation of the game. Thus, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in games.

  Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the base end side of the right movable decorative body 3301 of the right movable decorative body unit 3300 arranged on the lower side of the liquid crystal display device 1400 is centered on the rotation shaft 3302a according to the gaming state. And the right decorative body body 3303 of the right movable decorative body 3301 extends upward so as to cross the front surface of the liquid crystal display apparatus 1400 diagonally. Therefore, it is possible to make a complicated movement that is completely different from the movable decoration body of the conventional pachinko machine, the player can be surprised by the movement of the right movable decoration body 3301, and the right movable decoration body 3301 can be noticed. Since the right movable decorative body 3301 rotates to expand and contract, the types of movement (movable patterns) of the right movable decorative body 3301 can be diversified, and the right movable decorative body 33 Interest in the game of the player to hardly get tired 1 motion can be suppressed.

  Further, since the right movable decorative body 3301 can be illuminated with the right decorative body decorative board 3303c and the right decorative body lower decorative board 3338, not only the movable effect of the right movable decorative body 3301 but also the luminous effect can be shown to the player. It is possible to increase the number of types of effect patterns by the right movable decorative body 3301, and to prevent the player from having fun and to reduce the interest in the game, and the right movable decorative body 3301 The right movable decorative body 3301 (pachinko machine 1) can be made more conspicuous and can attract the player's interest strongly.

  In addition, after the right movable decorative body 3301 is rotated from the vicinity of the right side of the liquid crystal display device 1400 toward the center side, the liquid crystal display device 1400 is extended upward so as to be obliquely cut vertically. By moving, the player's interest can be guided to the center of the liquid crystal display device 1400 and further guided to the upper side where the tip of the right movable ornament 3301 (the right ornament body 3303) extends. It is possible to give changes to the game by inducing the game, to prevent the game from becoming monotonous, to suppress the decrease in interest for the game because it is hard to get tired, and by stretching The rising right movable decorative body 3301 makes it possible to make the player feel as if the momentum of the game is rising, and raises the sense of expectation and interests in the game. It can be suppressed.

  Furthermore, since the right movable decorative body 3301 and the upper middle movable decorative body 3501 rotate and expand and contract, there is something ahead of the right movable decorative body 3301 and the upper middle movable decorative body 3501 to expand and contract for the player. It is possible to make the player think that the player's game is expected, and the movement of the right movable decorative body 3301 and the upper middle movable decorative body 3501 can be noticed. It is possible to entertain the movement of 3501 and to suppress the interest in the game from decreasing. In addition, the movable decorative bodies 3301 and 3501 of the right movable decorative body unit 3300 and the upper movable decorative body unit 3500 rotate and expand and contract depending on the gaming state, and move in a manner not found in conventional pachinko machines. Since the movable decorative bodies 3301 and 3501 are provided, the movable movable decorative bodies 3301 and 3501 can strongly attract the player's interest, and can be greatly differentiated from other pachinko machines. This pachinko machine 1 can be easily selected as a pachinko machine to play.

  Further, when the right movable decorative body 3301 is extended, the front surface of the liquid crystal display device 1400 is obliquely cut longitudinally, so that the right movable decorative body 3301 is obliquely compared with a case where the vertical movable or horizontal cross section is made. The right movable decorative body 3301 that can move with respect to the player can be easily recognized by extending and contracting to the player, so that the movable right movable decorative body 3301 can be surely noticed, and the right movable decorative body 3301 can be moved. It is possible to suppress the interest of the game from deteriorating by making the production enjoyable.

  Further, the liquid crystal display device 1400 is supported via a box-like back box 621 attached to the rear side of the game panel 600, and the right movable decorative body unit 3300 and the upper left movable decorative body unit are provided in the back box 621. 3400, the upper middle movable decorative body unit 3500, and the like are attached, so that the liquid crystal display device 1400 can be reliably arranged and supported on the rear side of the game panel 600, and the liquid crystal display device is supported by the box-shaped back box 621. A space for arranging the right movable decorative body unit 3300 and the like on the front side of 1400 can be secured, and the pachinko machine 1 including the right movable decorative body unit 3300 and the like described above can be reliably realized. Further, the back box 621 that supports the liquid crystal display device 1400 can accurately maintain the positional relationship between the liquid crystal display device 1400 and the right movable decorative body unit 3300, etc. The liquid crystal display device 1400, the right movable decorative body unit 3300, and the like can be disposed at predetermined positions with respect to the game panel 600 by simply mounting the back box 621 on the rear side of the game panel 600. It is possible to simplify the labor involved in assembling the pachinko machine 1.

  Further, the right movable decorative body 3301 is constituted by the right decorative body main body 3303 and the right decorative body base 3302 that supports the right decorative body main body 3303 so as to be slidable in the longitudinal direction. By sliding in the longitudinal direction with respect to the right decorative body base 3302, the entire length of the right movable decorative body 3301 can be expanded and contracted, and the expanding and contracting right movable decorative body 3301 can be realized. While the pachinko machine 1 that can surely exhibit the effects can be obtained, and the rigidity of the right decorative body main body 3303 and the right decorative body base 3302 can be increased, when the right movable decorative body 3301 is expanded and contracted, The bending of the right movable decorative body 3301 and the swinging of the right movable decorative body 3301 are reduced as much as possible to prevent the right movable decorative body 3301 from acting unnaturally. Can be, interest to delight moving rendition of right movable decorative body 3301 to the player can be prevented from lowering.

  In addition, the right decorative body rotating unit 3310 can rotate the right movable decorative body 3301 together with the right decorative body expansion / contraction unit 3340, and the right decorative body expansion / contraction unit 3340 can expand and contract the right movable decorative body 3301. The right movable decorative body unit 3300 described above can be realized with certainty. Further, since the right decorative body expansion / contraction unit 3340 is also rotated together with the right movable decorative body 3301, the configuration relating to the expansion / contraction driving is simplified as compared with the case where the right decorative body expansion / contraction unit 3340 is not rotated. The right movable decorative body 3301 can be relatively enlarged, and the right movable decorative body 3301 can be made conspicuous to make the pachinko machine 1 capable of attracting the player's interest strongly. it can.

  Furthermore, the rotation gear 3318 in the right decoration body rotation unit 3310 has an arc shape, and the rotation fixed to the proximal end side of the right movable decoration body 3301 as compared with the case where the rotation gear 3318 has a disk shape. Since the gear 3318 can be made as small as possible, the rotation gear 3318 can be prevented from being conspicuously large in the right movable decorative body 3301, and the appearance of the right movable decorative body 3301 can be improved to make the player more comfortable. It can be set as the right movable decoration body 3301 with high design which attracts interest.

  Further, since the right decorative body main body 3303 is slid in the longitudinal direction via the slide rack 3344 slidably supported by the base cover 3350 in the right movable decorative body unit 3300, a rack gear or the like is attached to the right decorative body main body 3303. Therefore, it is possible to relax the restriction on the shape of the right decorative body main body 3303, and the right decorative body main body 3303 can be made to have a higher impact shape or the right decorative body main body 3303 can be decorated with the right decoration. An in-body decoration board 3303c can be provided, and the right movable decoration body 3301 that can attract the player's interest more strongly can be obtained.

[5. Control processing]
Next, various control processes executed on the main board 4000 in accordance with the progress of the game of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS.

[About main system processing]
First, a description will be given based on FIG. FIG. 191 is a flowchart showing an example of main system processing executed by the main control MPU 4100a mounted on the main control board 4100 of the main board 4000.

  As shown in FIG. 191, when power is supplied to the pachinko machine 1, the main control MPU 4100a (see FIG. 189) executes power-on processing (step S10). In this power-on process, first, it is determined whether or not the backup data stored in the RAM of the main control MPU 4100a is normal (is a set value when a power failure occurs). That is, the RAM (data memory) of the main control MPU 4100a of this embodiment has a backup area in which various control data are backed up by constantly supplying power. When the power supply is stopped, the pachinko machine 1 performs a process of temporarily saving various control data stored in the RAM processing area of the main control MPU 4100a to the backup area, and this power is temporarily restored when the power is restored. By reading the saved data into the RAM processing area of the main control MPU 4100a, a game with continuity can be executed from the time of power-off.

  Therefore, in this power-on processing (step S10), if the backup data (data in the backup area) is normal, the power supply is returned to the state when the power supply is stopped according to the backup data stored in the RAM of the main control MPU 4100a. Perform processing (power recovery processing) On the other hand, if the backup data is abnormal, the backup data stored in the RAM of the main control MPU 4100a is deleted. After that, various control data necessary for the progress of the game, such as, for example, the winning probability of jackpot and the control data indicating the current gaming state are written in the RAM processing area of the main control MPU 4100a with respective initial parameters. (Initialization process). Also, when the power is turned on for the first time after commercialization, various control data necessary for game progress are written with respective initial parameters.

  Note that the current gaming state written in the power-on process is transmitted to the peripheral control board 4140, and the display of the liquid crystal display device 1400 is controlled based on this command. In this way, the current gaming state at the time of a power failure is stored in the RAM of the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100, and the current gaming state is transmitted to the peripheral control board 4140 after the power is restored. In addition, the internal gaming state can be matched with the gaming state displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1400 (the gaming state at the time of power failure is not stored in the peripheral control board 4140). By the way, regarding the current gaming state, in order to synchronize the variation of the decorative symbol 1153 and the special symbol corresponding symbol of the liquid crystal display device 1400 with the variation of the special symbol, the variation pattern to be described later is started at the timing when the variation of the special symbol is started. The information of the command is transmitted. Immediately after transmitting the command, a command for the current game information is transmitted from the main control board 4100 to the peripheral control board 4140 each time. As a result, the peripheral control board 4140 can always grasp the current gaming state.

  However, in this power-on process (step S10), it is also determined whether or not the RAM clear switch 624a that instructs to erase the backup data stored in the RAM of the main control MPU 4100a is on. That is, even when the RAM clear switch 624a is on, the backup data stored in the RAM of the main control MPU 4100a is erased. At the same time, various control data necessary for the progress of the game, such as the jackpot winning probability and the control data indicating the current gaming state, are written in the RAM processing area of the main control MPU 4100a with respective initial parameters. (Initialization process). In the state in which such initialization processing has been performed (at the initial time), the control data indicating the jackpot winning probability becomes the first probability, and the control data indicating the current gaming state is the movable piece. 2005 operates in the first operation mode, and shows an “external normal gaming state A” which is a gaming state in which the probability changing function does not operate. .

  In the power-on process (step S10), a power-on command indicating that the main control board 4100 (see FIG. 189) is activated when such initialization processing is executed is sent to the peripheral control board 4140 (FIG. 189). The process of setting to a state where transmission is possible is also executed. The power-on command notifies the peripheral control board 4140 that the main control board 4100 has been activated. Even when the power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is stopped (when the power is turned off) when the amusement store is closed, the backup data is stored in the RAM of the main control MPU 4100a, and the power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is again performed. When started, power-on processing is executed.

  When the power-on process (step S10) ends, the main control MPU 4100a starts a loop process that repeatedly executes each process for gaming. At the start of this loop process, the main control MPU 4100a first determines whether or not a power failure notice signal is detected (step S20). In this embodiment, the power supply voltage used in the pachinko machine 1 is generated by the power supply board 395. That is, since a plurality of types of devices mounted on the pachinko machine 1 operate with different power supply voltages, the power supply voltage supplied from the external power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is converted into a predetermined power supply voltage on the power supply board, Power is supplied to the device. When a power failure occurs and the power supply voltage supplied from the external power supply to the power supply board becomes equal to or lower than the predetermined power supply voltage, a power failure notice signal indicating that the supply of the power supply voltage from the power supply board to the main control board 4100 is stopped is transmitted. Is done. Then, when the power failure notice signal is detected by the CPU 511 mounted on the main control board 4100 in step S20, a process at the time of power failure occurrence is executed (step S40).

  The process at the time of the power interruption occurs when the power supply voltage (24V in this embodiment) supplied to the power supply board after a power failure is restored (hereinafter referred to as “recovery”). This is a process for temporarily saving data in the backup area of the RAM of the main control MPU 4100a in order to start. Although the processing content will be described later, in the present embodiment, as shown in the figure, the power interruption occurrence processing is not an interruption processing, but as a branch processing that is executed immediately after the start of the loop depending on whether or not a power failure warning signal is detected. Built in the main system process (main control process).

  If the power failure warning signal is not detected in step S20 (NO in step S20), that is, if the power from the external power supply is normally supplied, the non-winning random number update for updating the random number used in the game Processing is performed (step S30). Note that the random numbers updated in the non-winning random number update process will be described later.

[Power failure occurrence processing]
FIG. 192 is a flowchart illustrating an example of processing upon occurrence of power interruption. As described above, the power interruption occurrence process (step S40) is a process executed when a power failure warning signal is detected in the main system process (YES in step S20). First, the main control MPU 4100a performs an interrupt prohibition setting so that the interrupt process is not executed (step S42). Then, a checksum in the RAM processing area of the main control MPU 4100a is calculated, and the calculation results and various game data are stored in the RAM backup area of the main control MPU 4100a (step S44). This checksum is used to check whether or not the content of the RAM of the main control MPU 4100a before the power failure is properly maintained at the time of power recovery.

  Next, the main control MPU 4100a sets a specified value indicating that the process at the time of power-off occurrence has been performed in a backup flag provided in a predetermined area of the RAM of the main control MPU 4100a (step S46). When the above processing is completed, the main control MPU 4100a prohibits the main control MPU 4100a from accessing the RAM (step S48) and enters an infinite loop to prepare for the stop of power supply. By the way, in this process, if the power supply voltage becomes unstable due to an extremely short power failure or the like (hereinafter referred to as “instantaneous power interruption”) and the process at the time of power interruption occurs, the power supply voltage is not actually stopped. Therefore, there is a possibility that it is impossible to return from the infinite loop. In order to avoid such an adverse effect, the main control MPU 4100a of the present embodiment is provided with a watchdog timer, and is configured to be reset if the watchdog timer is not updated for a predetermined time. The watchdog timer is periodically updated while the process is normally performed, but is not updated when the process when the power is cut off is entered. As a result, the power interruption occurrence process is entered due to a momentary power interruption, and even after entering the infinite loop of FIG.

  Note that a rewritable nonvolatile memory (such as an EEPROM) may be provided instead of the RAM backup area of the main control MPU 4100a. In this case, there is a merit that a constant power supply is not required to back up data.

  Alternatively, the entire RAM area of the main control MPU 4100a may be a backup area in which data is backed up by always supplying power. In this case, it is not necessary to save the data stored in the specific area of the RAM of the main control MPU 4100a to another area when the power is shut off. In addition, since it is not necessary to read the saved data to the processing area when the power is restored, the load required for these processes is reduced.

[About timer interrupt processing]
FIG. 193 is a flowchart illustrating an example of timer interrupt processing. In the present embodiment, a timer interrupt process is executed every 4 ms by the main control MPU 4100a mounted on the main control board 4100 of the main board 4000 during execution of the main system process. In the timer interrupt process, the main control MPU 4100a executes the process from step S60 to step S270 after executing the register standby process (step S50).

  In the sensor monitoring process of step S60, a process of monitoring detection signals of the various sensors described above (gate sensor 2202, first start port sensor 3115, second start port sensor 2012, count sensor 2014, etc.) is executed.

  In the winning random number update process of step S70, a process of updating a random number used in the game is executed. In this embodiment, the random number updated in the winning random number update process is different from the random number updated in the non-winning random number update process. Although the random number will be described later, the random number updated in the winning random number updating process may be updated in the non-winning random number updating process.

  In the payout control process in step S80, a payout command for instructing payout of the game ball is transmitted to the payout control board 1186 based on the signal detected in the sensor monitoring process (step S60).

  In the normal symbol / ordinary electric accessory control process in step S90, the control process related to the normal symbol display 645 is executed based on the signal detected from the gate sensor 2202 in the sensor monitoring process (step S60). The process for performing the opening / closing control of the movable piece 2005 is executed.

  In the special symbol / special electric accessory control process of step S100, a series of processing from the start of the change of the special symbol to the start of the winning game is executed, and the opening / closing control of the opening / closing member 2006 of the attacker unit 2000 as the special electric accessory is performed. Execute the process to do.

  In the output data setting process of step S260, a process of generating a command to be transmitted from the main control board 4100 to the peripheral control board 4140 is executed based on information determined in the special symbol / special electric accessory control process (step S100). .

  In the command transmission process of step S270, a process of transmitting the command set in the output data setting process (step S260) to the peripheral control board 4140 is performed. When the processing from step S60 to step S270 is executed, the register return processing (step S280) is executed, and the timer interrupt processing is terminated.

  Here, various random numbers that are updated by the main control MPU 4100a in the above-described non-winning random number update processing (step S30) and winning random number update processing (step S70) will be described.

  In this embodiment, as various random numbers used in the game, in addition to the above-described special random numbers (first special random number and second special random number), ordinary random numbers, design random numbers, reach determination random numbers (more strictly, high Random number for expected effect determination), random number for first variation pattern, random number for second variation pattern, variation type random number, and the like.

The special random number is a random number used for determining whether or not to generate a jackpot game or an attacker unit operation process. That is, the first special random number is used to determine whether the first special lottery result is “big hit”, “small hit”, or “losing”, and the second special random number is “ It is used to determine whether it is “big hit”, “small hit”, or “losing”. The symbol random number is a random number used for determining the type of jackpot (big hit A to jackpot E) when it is determined that the jackpot is big hit. The determination of whether the first and second special lottery results are “big hit”, “small win”, “losing” and the type of jackpot type are “big hit”, “small hit”, and each big win The determination is made based on a hit determination table in which the winning value of the type is described. An example of the hit determination table is shown in Table 1. In the present embodiment, the first and second special random numbers take any value from 0 to 1398, and the design random number takes any value from 0 to 199.

  The ordinary random number is a random number used for determining whether or not to control the pair of movable pieces 2005 to the open state. The ordinary random number takes a value of 0 to 250 in this embodiment, and the winning value of the ordinary random number is set to 246 to 250 in the case of the external normal gaming state, and 1 to 250 in the case of the external advantageous gaming state. Is set. The random number for reach determination determines whether or not to perform high-expected effects such as reach effects when the special lottery result is “losing” (not “big hit” or “small win”). ) Is a random number used. The reach determination random number takes a value of 0 to 138 in this embodiment, and the winning value of the reach determination random number is set to 0 to 7. The random number for the first variation pattern and the random number for the second variation pattern are the variation patterns of the special symbol displayed on the first special symbol display 641 and the second special symbol display 642 corresponding to the first and second lottery results. This is a random number used for determining the change pattern of the effect image and the decorative design displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1400 corresponding to the determination and the first and second lottery results. In the present embodiment, the first variation pattern random number takes a value of 0 to 240, and the second variation pattern random number takes a value of 0 to 250. Therefore, the number of combinations of the first variation pattern and the second variation pattern random number is 241 × 251 = 60491. The variation type random number is a random number fallen in order to determine the type of variation pattern (in this embodiment, there are usually four types of variation types of 2, 3, 4, and 4 as described later). . In the present embodiment, the variation type random number takes a value of 0 to 232 (total number 233).

  It should be noted that the effect image and the decorative pattern variation pattern controlled by the liquid crystal display device 1400 may be determined by the first and second variation pattern random numbers, and the peripheral mounted on the peripheral control substrate 4140 of the peripheral substrate 4010. It may be determined by the control MPU 4140a or a liquid crystal control MPU 4150a mounted on the liquid crystal control board 4150 (see FIG. 189). The variation pattern random number is not essential, and the variation pattern of the special symbol may be determined using the reach determination random number.

  Among these random numbers, in the winning random number update process, special random numbers, design random numbers, and ordinary random numbers are updated. Here, the special random number, the design random number, and the ordinary random number are updated every 4 ms as a fixed timing. In this way, the probability (probability determined to generate “big hit” or “small hit”, probability to determine that the pair of movable pieces 2005 are controlled to be opened) in a predetermined period in each random number is set. It can be made constant (that is, it is possible to prevent the probability from being biased by aiming or the like), and the player can be prevented from being disadvantaged.

  On the other hand, in the non-winning random number update process, the reach determination random number and the fluctuation pattern random number irrespective of the occurrence of “big hit” or “small win” and the display result of the normal symbol are updated. The random numbers updated on the main control board 4100 are not limited to those described above. In the non-winning random number update process, the initial value of the special random number that starts counting next when the counter that updates the special random number makes one round. The initial value determination random number and the like are also updated.

  In the present embodiment, as means for acquiring a special random number, two first special random number acquisition means 4212 for generating a first special random number and second special random number acquisition means 4222 for generating a second special random number are provided. Although means are provided, a configuration in which only one of them is provided may be employed.

[Regarding special symbol / special electric accessory control processing]
Next, the special symbol / special electric accessory control process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 194 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the special symbol / special electric accessory control process.

  In this special symbol / special electric accessory control process, first, the first and second start opening winning process (step S110) is performed. Specifically, as will be described later, it is determined whether or not a game ball is received in the first start port 2001 and the second start port 2002, and a series of processing is performed based on this. Once the first / second start opening winning process (step S110) is performed, the process flag is checked (steps S120 to S230), and the process corresponding to the process flag is performed.

  When the first and second start opening winning processes (step S110) are finished, first, it is determined whether or not the processing flag is 0 (step S120), and if the processing flag is 0 (YES in step S120), the fluctuation occurs. A start process (step S130) is executed. In the variation start process (step S130), settings for starting the variation display of the special symbol are performed. As will be described in detail later, it is determined whether or not “big hit” or “small win” has been won, and the processing flag is updated to “1”. On the other hand, if the processing flag is not 0 in step S120 (NO in step S120), the process proceeds to step S140.

  In step S140, it is determined whether or not the processing flag is 1 (step S140). If the process flag is 1 (YES in step S140), the variation pattern setting process (step S150) is executed. In this variation pattern setting process, a special symbol displayed on the first special symbol display 641 or the second special symbol display 642, a decorative symbol displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1400, and an effect variation pattern are determined, and the variation The time of change set in accordance with the pattern (the time from the start of the change display of the special symbol in either the first special symbol display 641 or the second special symbol display 642 to the stop display) is used as a timer. Set and update the processing flag to “2”. On the other hand, if the processing flag is not 1 in step S140 (NO in step S140), the process proceeds to step S170.

  In step S170, it is determined whether or not the processing flag is 2 (step S170). If the process flag is 2 (YES in step S170), the process during change (step S180) is executed. In this changing process, the changing time set in the changing pattern setting process (step S150) is monitored by a timer, and the special symbol in the first special symbol display 641 or the second special symbol display 642 is determined based on the time-out. The fluctuation display of is stopped. At this time, if it is determined to be “big hit” in the variation start process (step S130), the process selection flag is updated to “3”, and if it is determined to be “small hit”, the process is selected. The flag is updated to “4”, and if neither the big hit or the small hit is determined (losing), the processing selection flag is updated to “0”. On the other hand, if the processing flag is not 2 in step S170 (NO in step S170), the process proceeds to step S190.

  In step S190, it is determined whether the processing flag is 3 (step S190). If the process flag is 3 (YES in step S190), a big hit game start process (step S200) is executed. In this jackpot game start process, the jackpot type (big hit A to jackpot E) is determined, and the number of rounds, the opening time, and the game ball of the opening / closing member 2006 of the attacker unit 2000 are controlled according to the jackpot type. Set the winning limit number and update the processing flag to “5”. On the other hand, if the processing flag is not 3 in step S190 (NO in step S190), the process proceeds to step S210.

  In step S210, it is determined whether or not the processing flag is 4 (step S210). If the processing flag is 4 (YES in step S210), the small hitting establishment process (step S220) is executed. In the small hitting establishment process, the number of times of opening and the opening time for controlling the opening operation of the opening / closing member 2006 of the attacker unit 2000 are set, and the processing flag is updated to “6”. On the other hand, if the processing flag is not 4 (NO in step S210), the process proceeds to step S230.

  In step S230, it is determined whether the processing flag is 5 (step S230). If the process flag is 5 (YES in step S230), a special electric utility big hit control process (step S240) is executed. In this special electric utility jackpot control process, the opening / closing operation of the opening / closing member 2006 of the attacker unit 2000 is controlled based on the number of rounds set in the jackpot game start process (step S200), the opening time, and the number of game balls to be awarded, When the big hit game ends, it is determined whether or not the probability variation function is to be activated and whether or not the operation mode of the movable piece 2005 is the promotion mode and the processing flag is updated to “0”.

  On the other hand, if the process flag is not 5 in step S230 (NO in step S230), the attacker unit operation process (step S250) is executed. In this attacker unit operation process (step S250), the opening / closing operation of the opening / closing member 2006 of the attacker unit 2000 is controlled based on the number of times of opening, the opening time and the limit number set in the small hitting establishment process (step S220) (small). When the attack unit operation process is completed, the process flag is updated to “0”. Note that the small hit game performed in the attack unit operation process is not a game with the operation of the condition device like the big hit game, but as described above, it is a game that is very similar to the short open big hit game that is a kind of the big hit game. is there.

  When any of the various processes from step S130 to step S250 is executed, the special symbol / special electric accessory control process is terminated.

[About the 1st and 2nd starting entrance prize process]
Next, the first / second start opening winning process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 195 is a flowchart showing an example of the first and second start-up prize winning processes.

  In the first / second start opening winning process, the main control MPU 4100a first determines whether or not a game ball has won the second start opening 2002 (step S1101). Specifically, the presence or absence of game ball detection by the second start port sensor 2012 is confirmed. At this time, if a game ball is detected by the second start port sensor 2012, it is determined that a game ball has won the second start port 2002 (YES in step S1101). If no game ball is detected by the second start port sensor 2012, it is determined that no game ball has won a prize at the second start port 2002 (NO in step S1101).

  When it is determined in step S1101 that a game ball has won the second start opening 2002, second special symbol lottery unit data is acquired. Then, it is determined whether or not the number of reservations in the second special symbol storage unit 4224 is less than the upper limit of 4 (step S1102).

  If it is determined in step S1101 that the number of holdings in the second special symbol holding storage unit 4224 is less than the upper limit of 4 (YES in step S1102), the main control MPU 4100a performs a second holding storage process (step S1103). The process proceeds to step S1104. In the second reserved memory process, a process of storing the second special symbol lottery unit data acquired by winning the game ball in the second starting port 2002 in the second special symbol reserved memory unit 4224 is mainly performed.

  When the main control MPU 4100a determines in step S1101 that a game ball has not won the second start port 2002 (NO in step S1101), and in step S1102, the number of holds in the second special symbol hold storage unit 4224 is the upper limit. When it is determined that the value 4 has been reached (NO in step S1102), the process proceeds to step S1104.

  In step S1104, the main control MPU 4100a determines whether or not a game ball has won the first start port 2001 (step S1104). Specifically, the presence or absence of detection of the game ball by the first start port sensor 3115 is confirmed. At this time, if a game ball is detected by the first start port sensor 3115, it is determined that the game ball has won the first start port 2001 (YES in step S1104). If no game ball is detected by the first start port sensor 3115, it is determined that no game ball is won at the first start port 2001 (NO in step S1104).

  When it is determined in step S1104 that a game ball has won the first starting port 2001, first special symbol lottery unit data is acquired, and the number of holds in the first special symbol hold storage means 4214 is less than the upper limit of 4. Whether or not (step S1105).

  If it is determined in step S1104 that the number of holds in the first special symbol hold storage unit 4214 is less than the upper limit of 4 (YES in step S1105), the main control MPU 4100a performs a first hold storage process (step S1106).・ End the second starting entrance prize process. In the first hold storage process, a process of storing the first special symbol lottery unit data acquired by winning the game ball in the first start port 2001 in the first special symbol hold storage unit 4214 is mainly performed. Note that the first special symbol lottery unit data acquired by winning the game ball at the first start port 2001 is the same as the second special symbol lottery unit data acquired by winning the game ball at the second start port 2002. Is stored in the first special symbol hold storage means 4214.

  When the main control MPU 4100a determines in step S1104 that a game ball has not won the first starting port 2001 (NO in step S1104), and in step S1105, the number of holds in the first special symbol hold storage unit 4214 is the upper limit. When it is determined that the value of 4 has been reached (NO in step S1105), the first and second start opening winning processes are both terminated.

  In step S1102, the second special symbol lottery unit data acquired in step S1101 is obtained when the number of holds in the second special symbol hold storage means 4224 is the upper limit value when a game ball wins the second start port 2002. Discard. Similarly, in step S1105, the first special symbol lottery unit data acquired in step S1104 when the number of holds in the first special symbol hold storage means 4214 is the upper limit when a game ball wins the first starting port 2001. Is discarded.

  When it is determined that a game ball has won the second start opening 2002, the acquisition of the second special symbol lottery unit data is not necessarily performed in step S1101, but may be performed between steps S1101 to S1103. For example, the second special symbol lottery unit data is not acquired in step S1101 and the second special symbol lottery unit data is determined in step S1102 after determining that the number of holds in the second special symbol hold storage unit 4224 is less than the upper limit value. May be acquired, or may be acquired in the second reserved storage process in step S1103.

  Similarly, when it is determined that a game ball has won the first start port 2001, the acquisition of the first special symbol lottery unit data is not necessarily performed in step S1104, and may be performed between step S1104 and step S1106. . For example, without acquiring the first special symbol lottery unit data in step S1104, it is determined in step S1102 that the number of holds in the first special symbol hold storage unit 4214 is less than the upper limit value, and then the first special symbol lottery unit data. May be acquired, or may be acquired in the first reserved storage process in step S1106.

  Thus, in this embodiment, after performing the winning process (steps S1101 to S1103) to the second starting port 2002, the winning process (steps S1104 to 1106) to the first starting port 2001 is performed. Yes. However, instead of this, after the winning process for the first starting port 2001 is executed, the winning process for the second starting port 2002 may be executed.

  Moreover, in this embodiment, the winning probability for the big hit is the same regardless of whether the lottery based on the first special random number or the lottery based on the second special random number is performed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and, for example, the lottery jackpot winning probability based on the first special random number may be different from the jackpot winning probability based on the first special random number.

  In the present embodiment, the selection rate of each jackpot type is different between the case where the jackpot is won in the lottery based on the first special random number and the case where the jackpot is won in the lottery based on the second special random number. For example, when the jackpot is won in the lottery based on the first special random number, the selection ratio of each jackpot type selected based on the design random number is 32% for the jackpot A, 32% for the jackpot B, “Big jackpot C” is 5%, “Big jackpot D” is 30%, and “Big jackpot E” is 1%. In addition, for example, when the jackpot is won in the lottery based on the second special random number, the selection ratio of each jackpot type selected based on the design random number is 60% for “jackpot A” and 32 for “jackpot B”. %, “Big hit C” is 1%, “Big hit D” is 4%, and “Big hit E” is 3%. Not limited to this, there is no difference in the selection rate of each jackpot type when winning a jackpot with a lottery based on the first special random number and when winning a jackpot with a lottery based on the second special random number Also good.

[About variation start processing]
Next, the fluctuation start process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 196 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the change start process.

  In the variation start process (step S130) executed when the process selection flag is “0”, the main control MPU 4100a first determines whether or not the number of holds in the second special symbol hold storage unit 4224 is zero. (Step S1301).

  If the number of reservations in the second special symbol storage unit 4224 is not 0 (NO in step S1301), the main control MPU 4100a acquires the second special symbol lottery unit data to be processed from the second special symbol storage unit 4224. (Step S1302). As described above, the second special symbol lottery unit data is stored in the second special symbol hold storage unit 4224 so that the storage order can be specified up to four, and is processed in the stored order.

  On the other hand, when the number of holds in the second special symbol hold storage unit 4224 is 0 (YES in step S1301), the main control MPU 4100a determines whether or not the number of holds in the first special symbol hold storage unit 4214 is 0. Is determined (step S1303).

  If the number of reservations in the first special symbol storage unit 4214 is not 0 (NO in step S1303), the main control MPU 4100a acquires the first special symbol lottery unit data to be processed from the first special symbol storage unit 4214. (Step S1304). As described above, the first special symbol lottery unit data is stored in the first special symbol hold storage unit 4214 so that the storage order can be specified up to four, and is processed in the stored order.

  On the other hand, when the number of reservations in first special symbol storage unit 4214 is 0 (YES in step S1301), main control MPU 4100a ends the variation start process.

  When the main control MPU 4100a acquires the second special symbol lottery unit data or the first special symbol lottery unit data, the main control MPU 4100a is in a gaming state (external normal gaming state B or external advantageous gaming state B) in which the probability changing function is activated. Whether or not (step S1305). Here, if it is a gaming state in which the probability changing function is operating (YES in step S1305), the hit determination table at the time of high probability is selected from the hit determination table (step S1306).

  On the other hand, if the probability changing function is not activated in step S1305 (NO in step S1305), the normal hit determination table is selected from the hit determination tables (step S1307).

  A special random number (first special random number) included in the determination table selected in step S1306 or step S1307 and the special symbol lottery unit data to be processed (first special symbol lottery unit data or second special symbol lottery unit data). Or the second special random number), the main control MPU 4100a determines whether or not it is a big hit (step S1308).

  If the main control MPU 4100a determines that the special random number included in the special symbol lottery unit data to be processed is a big hit (YES in step S1308), the main control MPU 4100a wins a big hit based on the symbol random number included in the special symbol lottery unit data to be processed The type is determined (step S1309). Thereafter, the flag corresponding to the type of jackpot is turned on (step S1310). Specifically, the main control MPU 4100a sets the jackpot A flag to ON if the jackpot type is jackpot A, sets the jackpot B flag to ON if the jackpot type is jackpot B, and sets the jackpot type to jackpot C. If it is, the jackpot C flag is turned on. If the jackpot type is jackpot D, the jackpot D flag is turned on. If the jackpot type is jackpot E, the jackpot E flag is turned on. Thereafter, the main control MPU 4100a updates the processing flag to “1” (step S1313), and ends the variation start processing.

  On the other hand, if the main control MPU 4100a determines that the big hit determination in step S1308 is not a big hit (NO in step S1308), the determination table shown in Table 1 and the special symbol lottery unit data to be processed (first special symbol lottery unit data) Alternatively, based on the special random number (the first special random number or the second special random number) included in the second special symbol lottery unit data), it is determined whether or not it is a small hit (step S1311). If the main control MPU 4100a determines that the special random number included in the special symbol lottery unit data to be processed is a small hit (YES in step S1311), the main control MPU 4100a sets the small hit flag to ON (step S1312), and proceeds to step S1313. Then, the process flag is updated to “1”, and the variation start process is terminated. If the main control MPU 4100a determines that the special random number included in the special symbol lottery unit data to be processed is not a small hit (NO in step S1311), the main control MPU 4100a proceeds to step S1313, updates the processing flag to “1”, and changes End the start process.

[About variation pattern setting processing]
Next, the variation pattern setting process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 197 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the variation pattern setting process.

  The variation pattern setting process is a process of setting a variation pattern according to a special symbol lottery result (big hit, small hit, loss). In this process, first, it is determined whether or not any one of a plurality of types of jackpots is in an ON state, or whether or not a jackpot flag is in an ON state (step S1510). If the big hit flag or the small hit flag is in the ON state (YES in step S1510), hit variation pattern table setting processing is performed (step S1520), and then variation pattern determination processing is performed (step S1560). Although details will be described later in this variation pattern setting process, the variation pattern is determined based on the table set in the hit variation pattern table setting process.

  If neither the big hit flag nor the small hit flag is ON in step S1510 (NO in step S1510), it is determined whether or not a high expectation effect (for example, a reach effect) with a high degree of expectation for winning the big win should be performed. (Step S1530). Here, if it is determined that a high expectation effect with a high expectation of winning the jackpot is to be performed (YES in step S1530), a high disappointment variation pattern table setting process is performed (step S1540), and then the variation Pattern determination processing is performed (step S1560). Although the details will be described later in this variation pattern setting process, a variation pattern is determined based on the variation pattern table set in the highly disappointing variation pattern table setting process.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1530 that a high expectation effect with a high degree of expectation of winning a big hit should not be performed (NO in step S1530), a low-expectation variation pattern table setting process is performed (step S1550), and then A variation pattern determination process is performed (step S1560). Although the details will be described later in this variation pattern setting process, a variation pattern is determined based on the variation pattern table set in the variation pattern table setting process per low expectation loss and a variation type is determined for the determined variation pattern. Is done.

  Whether or not the high expectation effect should be performed is determined to be a high expectation effect if the reach determination random number described above is won in the high expectation effect lottery, and it has been lost in the high expectation effect lottery. Therefore, it is determined that the high expectation production is not performed. The high expectation effect lottery is performed using the reach determination random number included in the acquired special symbol lottery unit data to be processed when the symbol change is started when the special lottery result is lost. Here, the probability of winning the high expectation effect lottery may be different depending on whether the game is in the external normal game state or the external advantageous game state. Furthermore, the probability of winning the high expectation effect lottery may be different depending on the number of first special symbol hold and the number of second special symbol hold. For example, in the case of an external normal gaming state and the change is a change in the first special symbol, if the first special symbol hold number is 0, 10.5, the first special symbol hold number is If it is 1, it may be 1/12, if the first special symbol reservation number is 2, it may be 13.5, and if the first special symbol reservation number is 3, it may be 1/15. In the case of an external normal gaming state) and the change is a change in the second special symbol, the probability of winning the high expectation effect lottery is 10.5 if the number of second special symbol hold is zero. 1/2, if the second special symbol hold number is 1, 1/12, if the second special symbol hold number is 2, 13.5, if the second special symbol hold number is 3, then 15 It may be a fraction. In the case of an external advantageous game state, the probability of winning the high-expected effect lottery may always be 1/14 regardless of the number of first special symbol hold and the number of second special symbol hold.

  Next, when the variation pattern is determined in step S1560, a value representing the combination of the determined variation pattern and variation type is set as a selection value (step S1570), and the combination of the variation pattern and variation type is supported. The variable time value to be set is set in the timer (step S1580). For example, the fluctuation time value is set in advance for each combination of the fluctuation pattern and the fluctuation type. Thereafter, the processing flag is updated to “2” (step S1590), and the variation pattern setting process is terminated.

  A plurality of LEDs are lit in a predetermined lighting pattern on the first special symbol display 641 or the second special symbol display 642 based on the variation pattern set in the variation pattern setting process.

[About hit variation pattern table setting processing]
Next, the hit variation pattern table setting process will be described based on FIGS. 198 and 199. FIG. 198 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the hit variation pattern table setting process. FIG. 199 is a table showing the distribution of tables to be set in the hit variation pattern table setting process.

  In the hit variation pattern table setting process of FIG. 198, the main control MPU 4100a first recognizes the gaming state (step S15201). As described above, there are four types of game states: the external normal game state A, the external normal game state B, the external advantageous game state A, and the external advantageous game state B. For example, the gaming state is managed by a flag in the main control MPU 4100a, and is any one of the external normal gaming state A flag, the external normal gaming state B flag, the external advantageous gaming state A flag, and the external advantageous gaming state B flag. One flag is turned on. The main control MPU 4100a recognizes the gaming state by recognizing the flag in the on state. Next, the main control MPU 4100a recognizes the hit type (step S15202). The hit type is managed by a flag in the main control MPU 4100a as described above. For example, the main control MPU 4100a recognizes which of the jackpot A flag, jackpot B flag, jackpot C flag, jackpot D flag, jackpot E flag, and jackpot flag is turned on, so that the jackpot A˜ Recognize whether E or small hit. Next, the main control MPU 4100a selects a winning variation pattern setting table based on the gaming state, the winning type, and the first changing pattern random number included in the special symbol lottery unit data to be processed (step S15203). The variation pattern table setting process is terminated.

  In the present embodiment, there are 13 types of hit variation pattern tables A to M as shown in FIG. One of the winning variation pattern tables A to M is associated with the combination of the gaming state, the winning type, and the first changing pattern random number. For example, as shown in FIG. 199, when the game state is the external normal game state A or the external normal game state B and the hit type is a jackpot A, the total number 241 (0 to 240) for the first variation pattern Among random numbers, 126 values are associated with the hit variation pattern table A, 75 values are associated with the hit variation pattern table B, and 40 values correspond to the hit variation pattern table C. It is attached. Therefore, when the gaming state is the external normal gaming state A or the external normal gaming state B and the hit type is the big hit A, the hit fluctuation pattern table setting process has a probability of 126/241 per hit fluctuation pattern table. A is selected, hit variation pattern table B is selected with a probability of 75/241, and hit variation pattern table C is selected with a probability of 40/241. When the game state is the external normal game state A or the external normal game state B and the hit type is jackpot A, tables other than the win fluctuation pattern tables A to C are selected in the win fluctuation pattern table setting process. Never happen.

  As shown in FIG. 199, when the game state is the external normal game state A or the external normal game state B and the hit type is the jackpot B, the total number 241 (0 to 240) of random numbers for the first variation pattern Of these, 166 values are associated with the hit variation pattern table A, and 75 values are associated with the hit variation pattern table B. Therefore, when the gaming state is the external normal gaming state A or the external normal gaming state B and the hit type is the big hit B, the hit fluctuation pattern table A is set at a probability of 166/241 in the hit fluctuation pattern table setting process. The hit variation pattern table B is selected with a probability of 75/241. When the gaming state is the external normal gaming state A or the external normal gaming state B and the hit type is a big hit B, a table other than the hit fluctuation pattern tables A and B is selected in the hit fluctuation pattern table setting process. Never happen.

  As shown in FIG. 199, when the game state is the external normal game state A, the external normal game state B, or the external advantageous game state A, and the win type is jackpot C, a total of 241 (0-240) All of the random numbers for one variation pattern are associated with the hit variation pattern table E. Therefore, when the game state is the external normal game state A, the external normal game state B, or the external advantageous game state A and the hit type is jackpot C, the hit variation pattern table setting process has a probability of 100%. The hit variation pattern table E is selected. That is, when the game state is the external normal game state A, the external normal game state B, or the external advantageous game state A and the hit type is jackpot C, the win fluctuation pattern table setting process performs the win fluctuation pattern table E No other table is selected.

  As shown in FIG. 199, when the game state is the external normal game state A, the external normal game state B, or the external advantageous game state A, and the win type is jackpot C, a total of 241 (0-240) All of the random numbers for one variation pattern are associated with the hit variation pattern table E. Therefore, when the game state is the external normal game state A, the external normal game state B, or the external advantageous game state A and the hit type is jackpot C, the hit variation pattern table setting process has a probability of 100%. The hit variation pattern table E is selected. That is, when the game state is the external normal game state A, the external normal game state B, or the external advantageous game state A and the hit type is jackpot C, the win fluctuation pattern table setting process performs the win fluctuation pattern table E No other table is selected.

  As shown in FIG. 199, when the gaming state is the external normal gaming state A and the hit type is jackpot D, all the random numbers for the first variation pattern of the total number 241 (0 to 240) are hit variation pattern table. Is associated with F. Therefore, when the gaming state is the external normal gaming state A and the hit type is jackpot D, the hit variation pattern table F is selected with a probability of 100% in the hit variation pattern table setting process. That is, when the gaming state is the external normal gaming state A and the hit type is jackpot D, no table other than the hit variation pattern table F is selected in the hit variation pattern table setting process.

  As shown in FIG. 199, when the game state is the external normal game state A, the external normal game state B, or the external advantageous game state A and the hit type is jackpot E, the total number 241 (0 to 240) All the random numbers for one variation pattern are associated with the hit variation pattern table D. Therefore, when the game state is the external normal game state A, the external normal game state B, or the external advantageous game state A and the hit type is jackpot E, the hit variation pattern table setting process has a probability of 100%. The hit variation pattern table D is selected. That is, when the game state is the external normal game state A, the external normal game state B, or the external advantageous game state A and the hit type is jackpot E, in the win fluctuation pattern table setting process, the win fluctuation pattern table D No other table is selected.

  As shown in FIG. 199, when the gaming state is the external normal gaming state B or the external advantageous gaming state A and the hit type is jackpot D, a total of 241 (0 to 240) random numbers for the first variation pattern All are associated with the hit variation pattern table E. Therefore, when the gaming state is the external normal gaming state B or the external advantageous gaming state A and the hit type is jackpot D, the hit variation pattern table E is set with a probability of 100% in the hit variation pattern table setting process. Selected. That is, when the gaming state is the external normal gaming state B or the external advantageous gaming state A and the hit type is jackpot D, a table other than the hit fluctuation pattern table E is selected in the hit fluctuation pattern table setting process. Never happen.

  As shown in FIG. 199, when the game state is the external normal game state A, the external normal game state B, or the external advantageous game state A, and the hit type is a small hit, the total number of 241 (0 to 240) All the random numbers for one variation pattern are associated with the hit variation pattern table G. Therefore, when the game state is the external normal game state A, the external normal game state B, or the external advantageous game state A and the hit type is a small hit, the hit variation pattern table setting process has a probability of 100%. The hit variation pattern table G is selected. That is, when the gaming state is the external normal gaming state A, the external normal gaming state B, or the external advantageous gaming state A, and the hit type is a small hit, the hit fluctuation pattern table G No other table is selected.

  As shown in FIG. 199, when the game state is the external normal game state A, the external normal game state B, or the external advantageous game state A, and the hit type is a small hit, the total number of 241 (0 to 240) All the random numbers for one variation pattern are associated with the hit variation pattern table G. Therefore, when the game state is the external normal game state A, the external normal game state B, or the external advantageous game state A and the hit type is a small hit, the hit variation pattern table setting process has a probability of 100%. The hit variation pattern table G is selected. That is, when the gaming state is the external normal gaming state A, the external normal gaming state B, or the external advantageous gaming state A, and the hit type is a small hit, the hit fluctuation pattern table G No other table is selected.

  As shown in FIG. 199, when the gaming state is the external advantageous gaming state A and the hit type is the jackpot A, 87 of the random numbers for the first variation pattern of the total number 241 (0 to 240) Is associated with the hit variation pattern table A, 25 values are associated with the hit variation pattern table B, 17 values are associated with the hit variation pattern table C, and 112 values are the hit variation. Corresponding to the pattern table M. Therefore, when the gaming state is the external advantageous gaming state A and the hit type is the jackpot A, the winning variation pattern table A is selected with a probability of 87/241 in the winning variation pattern table setting process. The hit fluctuation pattern table B is selected with a probability of 25 / min, the hit fluctuation pattern table C is selected with a probability of 17/241, and the hit fluctuation pattern table M is selected with a probability of 112/241. When the gaming state is the external advantageous gaming state A and the hit type is jackpot A, a table other than the winning variation pattern tables A to C and M is selected in the winning variation pattern table setting process. There is no.

  As shown in FIG. 199, when the game state is the external normal game state B and the hit type is jackpot B, all the random numbers for the first variation pattern of the total number 241 (0 to 240) are hit fluctuations. Corresponding to the pattern table A. Therefore, when the gaming state is the external normal gaming state B and the hit type is jackpot B, the hit variation pattern table A is selected with a probability of 100% in the hit variation pattern table setting process. When the gaming state is the external normal gaming state B and the hit type is jackpot B, no table other than the hit variation pattern table A is selected in the hit variation pattern table setting process.

  As shown in FIG. 199, when the gaming state is the external advantageous gaming state B and the hit type is the jackpot A, 196 out of a total of 241 (0 to 240) random numbers for the first variation pattern Are associated with the hit variation pattern table H, and 45 values are associated with the hit variation pattern table I. Therefore, when the gaming state is the external advantageous gaming state B and the hit type is jackpot A, the winning variation pattern table H is selected with a probability of 196/241 in the winning variation pattern table setting process. The hit variation pattern table I is selected with a probability of 45 minutes. When the gaming state is the external advantageous gaming state B and the hit type is jackpot A, no table other than the winning variation pattern tables H and I is selected in the winning variation pattern table setting process. .

  As shown in FIG. 199, when the gaming state is the external advantageous gaming state B and the hit type is jackpot B, all of the random numbers for the first variation pattern of the total number 241 (0 to 240) are hit variation. Corresponding to the pattern table I. Therefore, when the gaming state is the external normal gaming state B and the hit type is jackpot B, the hit variation pattern table I is selected with a probability of 100% in the hit variation pattern table setting process. When the gaming state is the external advantageous gaming state B and the winning type is the big hit B, no table other than the winning variation pattern table I is selected in the winning variation pattern table setting process.

  As shown in FIG. 199, when the gaming state is the external advantageous gaming state B and the hit type is jackpot C or jackpot D, all the random numbers for the first variation pattern of the total number 241 (0 to 240) Are associated with the hit variation pattern table J. Accordingly, when the gaming state is the external normal gaming state B and the hit type is jackpot C or jackpot D, the hit variation pattern table J is selected with a probability of 100% in the hit variation pattern table setting process. . When the gaming state is the external advantageous gaming state B and the hit type is jackpot C or jackpot D, a table other than the hit variation pattern table J is selected in the hit variation pattern table setting process. Absent.

  As shown in FIG. 199, when the gaming state is the external advantageous gaming state B and the hit type is jackpot E, all of the random numbers for the first variation pattern of the total number 241 (0 to 240) are hit variation. Corresponding to the pattern table L. Therefore, when the gaming state is the external normal gaming state B and the hit type is jackpot E, the hit variation pattern table L is selected with a probability of 100% in the hit variation pattern table setting process. When the gaming state is the external advantageous gaming state B and the hit type is jackpot E, no table other than the hit variation pattern table L is selected in the hit variation pattern table setting process.

  As shown in FIG. 199, when the gaming state is the external advantageous gaming state B and the hit type is a small hit, all of the random numbers for the first variation pattern of the total number 241 (0 to 240) are hit fluctuations. Corresponding to the pattern table K. Accordingly, when the gaming state is the external normal gaming state B and the hit type is small hit, the hit fluctuation pattern table K is selected with a probability of 100% in the hit fluctuation pattern table setting process. When the gaming state is the external advantageous gaming state B and the hit type is small hit, no table other than the hit fluctuation pattern table K is selected in the hit fluctuation pattern table setting process.

[Highly disappointing variation pattern table setting process]
Next, the high expectation disapproval variation pattern table setting process will be described with reference to FIGS. 200 and 201. FIG. FIG. 200 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the highly disappointing variation pattern table setting process. FIG. 201 is a table showing the distribution of tables to be set in the high-expected disappointment variation pattern table setting process.

  In the highly expected disappointment variation pattern table setting process of FIG. 200, the main control MPU 4100a first recognizes the gaming state (step S15401). For example, the gaming state is managed by a flag in the main control MPU 4100a, and is any one of the external normal gaming state A flag, the external normal gaming state B flag, the external advantageous gaming state A flag, and the external advantageous gaming state B flag. One flag is turned on. The main control MPU 4100a recognizes the gaming state by recognizing the flag in the on state. Next, the main control MPU 4100a selects a highly disappointing variation pattern setting table based on the gaming state and the first variation pattern random number included in the special symbol lottery unit data to be processed (step S15402), and disappoints. The variation pattern table setting process is terminated.

  In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 201, there are six types of high-expected variation pattern tables, N to S. One of the high-expectation variation pattern tables N to S is associated with the combination of the gaming state and the random number for the first variation pattern. For example, as shown in FIG. 201, when the gaming state is the external normal gaming state A or the external normal gaming state B, 224 values out of a total of 241 (0 to 240) random numbers for the first variation pattern are present. The 13 values are associated with the high-expected variation pattern table O, and the 4 values are associated with the highly-expected variation pattern table P. Yes. Therefore, when the gaming state is the external normal gaming state A or the external normal gaming state B, the high expectation disapproval variation pattern table N is selected with a probability of 224/241 in the high expectation disapproval variation pattern table setting process, The high-expectation variation pattern table O is selected with a probability of 13/241, and the high-expectation variation pattern table P is selected with a probability of 4/241. In the case of the external normal gaming state A or the external normal gaming state B, tables other than the high expectation loss variation pattern tables N to P are not selected in the high expectation loss variation pattern table setting process.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 201, when the gaming state is the external advantageous gaming state B, all values of the first variation pattern random numbers in total 241 (0 to 240) correspond to the highly disappointing variation pattern table Q. It is attached. Accordingly, when the gaming state is the external gaming gaming state B, the high expectation loss variation pattern table Q is selected with a probability of 100% in the high expectation loss variation pattern table setting process, and the high expectation loss variation pattern table is selected. It will never be done. As shown in FIG. 201, when the gaming state is the external advantageous gaming state A, 233 values out of the total number 241 (0 to 240) of random numbers for the first variation pattern are the highly disappointing variation pattern table. R is associated with R, and eight values are associated with the highly disappointing variation pattern table S. Therefore, when the gaming state is the external advantageous gaming state A, the high expectation loss variation pattern table R is selected with a probability of 233/241 in the high expectation loss variation pattern table setting process, and the probability of 8/241 Thus, the highly disappointing variation pattern table S is selected. In the case of the external advantageous gaming state B, tables other than the high expected loss variation pattern tables R and S are not selected in the high expected failure variation pattern table setting process.

[About low-expected variation pattern table setting processing]
Next, the low expectation variation pattern table setting process will be described with reference to FIGS. 202 and 203. FIG. FIG. 202 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the low-expected variation pattern table setting process. FIG. 203 is a table showing distribution of tables to be set in the low-expected variation pattern table setting process.

  202, the main control MPU 4100a first recognizes the gaming state (step S15501). For example, the gaming state is managed by a flag in the main control MPU 4100a, and is any one of the external normal gaming state A flag, the external normal gaming state B flag, the external advantageous gaming state A flag, and the external advantageous gaming state B flag. One flag is turned on. The main control MPU 4100a recognizes the gaming state by recognizing the flag in the on state. Next, the main control MPU 4100a performs processing of the unprocessed special symbol lottery unit data excluding the special symbol lottery unit data to be processed in the special symbol (first special symbol or second special symbol) to which the special symbol lottery unit data to be processed belongs. The number, that is, the remaining number of holdings is recognized (step S15502). For example, when the special symbol lottery unit data to be processed is acquired, if the number of reserved special symbols is 4, the remaining number of reserved is 3. Further, when the special symbol lottery unit data to be processed is acquired, if the number of reservations of the special symbol is 3, the remaining number of reservations is 2. The main control MPU 4100a decreases the number based on the gaming state, the remaining number of reserved special symbols to which the special symbol lottery unit data to be processed belongs, and the first variation pattern random number included in the special symbol lottery unit data to be processed. An expected disappointment variation pattern setting table is selected (step S15503), and the high expectation disapproval variation pattern table setting processing is terminated.

  In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 203, there are ten types of low expectation / disappointment variation pattern tables: TZ, AA, BB, and CC. A combination of the special symbol type (first special symbol or second special symbol) to be processed, the gaming state, the number of remaining reserved symbols for the special symbol to be processed, and the random number for the first variation pattern, Any of the tables TZ, AA, BB, and CC is associated. For example, as shown in FIG. 203, when the special symbol to be processed is the first special symbol and the gaming state is the external normal gaming state A or the external normal gaming state B, the remaining of the first special symbol is reserved. According to the numbers 0, 1, 2, and 3, all 241 (0 to 240) random numbers for the first variation pattern are associated with the low-expected variation pattern tables T, U, V, and W, respectively. Therefore, when the special symbol to be processed is the first special symbol and the gaming state is the external normal gaming state A or the external normal gaming state B, the remaining number of reserved 0, 1, 2, 3, in the low-expected fluctuation pattern table setting process, the low-expected fluctuation pattern tables T, U, V, and W are selected with a probability of 100%, and other low-expected fluctuation pattern tables are selected. Never happen.

  As shown in FIG. 203, when the special symbol to be processed is the first special symbol and the gaming state is the external advantageous gaming state A or the external advantageous gaming state B, the remaining of the first special symbol is reserved. Regardless of the number, all the random numbers for the first variation pattern 241 (0 to 240) in total are associated with the low-expected variation pattern table Z. Therefore, when the special symbol to be processed is the first special symbol and the gaming state is the external normal gaming state A or the external normal gaming state B, 100% The low-expected variation pattern table Z is selected with probability, and no other low-expected variation pattern table is selected.

  As shown in FIG. 203, when the special symbol to be processed is the second special symbol, and the gaming state is the external normal gaming state B, the remaining number of remaining 0, 1, 2, 3 of the second special symbol Accordingly, the total number 241 (0 to 240) of the random numbers for the first variation pattern are all associated with the low-expected variation pattern tables X, Y, Y, and Y, respectively. Therefore, when the special symbol to be processed is the second special symbol and the gaming state is the external normal gaming state B, depending on the remaining number of reservations 0, 1, 2, 3 of the second special symbol, In the low-expected variation pattern table setting process, one of the low-expected variation pattern tables T and Y is selected with a probability of 100%, and no other low-expected variation pattern table is selected.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 203, when the special symbol to be processed is the second special symbol and the gaming state is the external advantageous gaming state A, the total number is not concerned regardless of the number of remaining reserved of the first special symbol. All of the random numbers for first variation patterns 241 (0 to 240) are associated with the low-expected variation pattern table Z. Therefore, when the special symbol to be processed is the first special symbol and the gaming state is the external normal gaming state A or the external normal gaming state B, 100% The low-expected variation pattern table Z is selected with probability, and no other low-expected variation pattern table is selected.

  As shown in FIG. 203, when the special symbol to be processed is the second special symbol, and the gaming state is the external advantageous gaming state A or the external advantageous gaming state B, the number of remaining reserved numbers of the second special symbol is 0. , 1, 2 and 3, all 241 (0 to 240) random numbers for the first variation pattern are associated with the low-expected variation pattern tables AA, BB, CC, and CC, respectively. Therefore, when the special symbol to be processed is the second special symbol and the gaming state is the external advantageous gaming state A or the external advantageous gaming state B, the remaining number of retained symbols 0, 1, 2 of the second special symbol 3, in the low-expectation variation pattern table setting process, one of the low-expected variation pattern tables AA, BB, and CC is selected with a probability of 100%, and another low-expected variation pattern table is selected. Never happen.

  In the low-expected deviation pattern table setting process, the low-expected fluctuation pattern table that is selected when the remaining number of holdings is large is generally the low-expected fluctuation that is selected when the remaining holding number is low Compared to the pattern table step, a variation pattern with a short variation time from the special chart is described, and when the number of lottery processes that are put on hold is small, it is special in a short time. The symbols are displayed in a variable manner.

  Next, the variation pattern determination process in step S1560 will be described. In this variation pattern setting process, variation is performed based on the variation pattern table set in the hit variation pattern table setting process in step S1520, the high expectation disappointment variation pattern setting process in step S1540, or the low expectation disappointment variation pattern setting process in step S1550. A pattern is determined. Hereinafter, the variation pattern determination process will be described for each set variation pattern table. FIG. 204 is a list of variation patterns determined based on the hit variation pattern tables A to C that can be selected in the hit variation pattern table setting process. FIG. 205 is a list of variation patterns determined based on hit variation pattern tables D to M that can be selected in the hit variation pattern table setting process. FIG. 206 is a list of variation patterns determined on the basis of the high-expected loss variation pattern tables N to S that can be selected in the high-expected loss variation pattern setting process. FIG. 207 is a list of variation patterns determined based on the low-expected variation pattern tables T to Z, AA, BB, and CC that can be selected in the low-expected variation pattern setting process. 204 to 207 also show the distribution of variation patterns determined based on each variation pattern table.

  Each variation pattern table A to Z, AA, BB, and CC associates a total number of 251 (0 to 255) second variation pattern random numbers with each variation pattern. Then, the main control MPU 4100a uses the set variation pattern table to display the variation pattern associated with the second variation pattern random number included in the special symbol lottery unit data to be processed as the special symbol lottery unit data to be processed. The variation pattern in the variation corresponding to is determined. Further, when the variation pattern is determined, main control MPU 4100a determines the variation type for each variation pattern based on the variation type random number included in the special symbol lottery unit data to be processed. As will be described later, there are usually four types of variation types: double, triple, and quadruple. FIGS. 204 to 207 also show the distribution of variation types for each variation pattern.

  For example, when the set fluctuation pattern table is A, as shown in FIG. 204, numbers 4, 5, 7, 8, 9, 10, 12, 14, 15, 17, 18, 20, 22, 24, 25 , 27, 28, 36, and 37 are changed to any one of three fluctuation patterns, 3/251, 22/251, 4/251, 5/251, 7/251, 30/251, and 251, respectively. 34/251, 3/251, 17/251, 3/251, 20/251, 20/251, 33/251, 13/251, 13/251, 2/251, 251 It is determined with a probability of 17 / minute, 4/251, and 13/251.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 204, when the fluctuation pattern of No. 20 (per live-action reach A) is selected, the fluctuation type is “normal” with a probability of 78/233 and a probability of 40/233. Is determined to be “3 stations” with a probability of 110/233, and “4 stations” with a probability of 5/233.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 207, when the set fluctuation pattern table is X, the fluctuation pattern of number 125 (normal fluctuation (hold 3)) is selected with a probability of 100%. Note that the variation type of the variation pattern determined based on the variation pattern tables TZ, AA, BB, and CC shown in FIG. 207 is determined as “normal” with a probability of 100%. The type distribution is not shown.

  When the variation pattern and the corresponding variation type are determined in this way, a command (information) corresponding to the determined variation pattern and variation type is transmitted from the main control board 4100 to the peripheral board 4010, and the peripheral board The peripheral control MPU 4140a in 4010 is used for processing such as effect lottery. That is, the decorative symbol change display and effect display (continuous effect, reach effect, etc.) displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1400 are actually commands transmitted from the main control board 4100 within the peripheral board 4010. It is decided according to. In this sense, the control related to the variation display and the effect display of the decorative symbols displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1400 is performed in cooperation with the main control board 4100 and the peripheral board 4010 (display control means).

[About change processing]
Next, the changing process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 208 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the changing process. In the changing process, first, it is determined whether or not the special symbol is changing (step S1801). Here, if any one of the first special symbol display 641 and the second special symbol display 642 is changing, it is determined that it is changing. If the special symbol is not changing (NO in step S1801), the changing process is terminated as it is.

  If it is determined in step S1801 that the special symbol is changing (YES in step S1801), the process proceeds to step S1802, and it is determined whether or not the variable time has ended. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the variation time set in the timer has elapsed in the variation pattern setting process. If the variation time has not elapsed, the process waits until the variation time has elapsed (NO in step S1802). When the fluctuation time has elapsed (YES in step S1802), the special symbol fluctuation is stopped (step S1803). That is, the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result is derived and displayed on the changing display unit of the first special symbol display unit 641 or the second special symbol display unit 642.

  When the variation of the special symbol is stopped (step S1803), it is determined whether or not any of the jackpot flags is ON (step S1804). That is, as a result of the fact that the current fluctuation is stopped and the lottery result is derived, it is determined whether or not any jackpot game is started. If any of the jackpot flags is in the ON state (YES in step S1804), the processing flag is updated to “3” (step S1805), and the changing process is terminated. If none of the big hit flags is in the ON state (NO in step S1804), it is next determined whether or not the small hit flag is in the ON state (step S1806). That is, it is determined whether or not the attacker unit operation process is started as a result of the current fluctuation being stopped and the lottery result being derived. If the small hit flag is in the ON state (YES in step S1806), the processing flag is updated to “4” (step S1807), and the changing process is terminated. If the small hit flag is not in the ON state (NO in step S1806), the processing flag is updated to “0” (step S1808), and the changing process is terminated.

[About jackpot game start processing]
Next, the jackpot game start processing will be described based on FIG. FIG. 209 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the jackpot game start process. In the jackpot game start process, the main control MPU 4100a first determines whether or not the probability variation function is in operation (step S2001). When the jackpot game is being executed, the probability changing function is not operated. Therefore, when the probability changing function is operating, the main control MPU 4100a stops the operation of the probability changing function (step S2002) and proceeds to step S2003. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S2001 that the probability variation function is not operating (NO in step S2001), main control MPU 4100a skips step S2002 and proceeds to step S2003.

  In step S2003, the main control MPU 4100a determines whether or not the operation mode of the movable piece 2005 of the opening / closing member 2006 is an acceleration mode. When the jackpot game is being executed, the operation mode of the movable piece 2005 of the opening / closing member 2006 is set to the normal mode. Therefore, the main control MPU 4100a is configured so that the operation mode of the movable piece 2005 is The operation mode is changed to the normal mode (step S2004), and the process proceeds to step S2005. On the other hand, when the operation mode of the movable piece 2005 is a normal mode in step S2003 (NO in step S2003), the main control MPU 4100a skips step S2004 and proceeds to step S2005.

  In step S2005, the main control MPU 4100a recognizes the jackpot type by referring to the jackpot flag, and sets the opening / closing pattern of the opening / closing member 2006 of the attacker unit 2000 according to the jackpot type. For example, when the jackpot type is “jackpot A” or “jackpot B”, the maximum opening of the opening / closing member 2006 of the attacker unit 2000 per round is achieved in order to realize the above-described long-time opening / closing pattern (for example, 15 rounds). The time (for example, 26 seconds to 33 seconds) and the maximum winning number (for example, 10 balls) are set. Then, after that, the process proceeds to step S2006 to update the process flag to “5”, and the jackpot game start process is ended.

[About processing when small hits are established]
Next, based on FIG. 210, the process when the small hit is established will be described. FIG. 210 is a flowchart illustrating an example of processing when a small hit is established. In the small hitting establishment process, first, the opening / closing pattern of the opening / closing member 2006 of the attacker unit 2000 is set to the opening / closing pattern for small hitting (in this embodiment, as described above, the short-time opening / closing pattern). Specifically, in order to realize a short-time opening / closing pattern, the number of rounds (for example, 15 rounds), the opening time of the opening / closing member 2006 of the attacker unit 2000 per time (for example, between 0.05 seconds and 0.6 seconds) ) And a maximum winning number (for example, two balls) are set (step S2201). Thereafter, the processing flag is updated to “6” and the process when the small hit is established is ended (step S2202).

[Special electric utility jackpot control processing]
Next, based on FIG. 211, the special electric utility jackpot control process will be described. FIG. 211 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the special electric utility jackpot control process. In the special electric utility jackpot control process, the main control MPU 4100a first determines whether or not the opening / closing member 2006 of the attacker unit 2000 is being opened (step S2401). If the opening / closing member 2006 of the attacker unit 2000 is being opened (YES in step S2401), the main control MPU 4100a determines whether or not the preset maximum opening time of the opening / closing member 2006 of the attacker unit 2000 has elapsed ( Step S2402). Specifically, the main control MPU 4100a determines whether or not the maximum opening time set in step S2005 has elapsed. If it is determined that the maximum opening time of the opening / closing member 2006 of the attacker unit 2000 has elapsed (YES in step S2402), the opening / closing member 2006 of the attacker unit 2000 is closed (step S2404), and the process proceeds to step S2405.

  If the opening time of the opening / closing member 2006 of the attacker unit 2000 has not elapsed in step S2402 (NO in step S2402), the main control MPU 4100a determines that the pre-set maximum number of winning balls is the big winning port 2003 of the attacker unit 2000. It is determined whether or not it has been accepted (step S2403). Specifically, the main control MPU 4100a determines whether or not the count value by the count sensor 2014 has reached the maximum number of winnings set in step S2005. If the main control MPU 4100a determines that the maximum number of game balls has been received in the big prize opening 2003 of the attacker unit 2000 (YES in step S2403), the main control MPU 4100a proceeds to step S2404 and closes the opening / closing member 2006 of the attacker unit 2000. On the other hand, if the maximum number of game balls is not received in the big prize opening 2003 of the attacker unit 2000, the process returns to step S2402.

  Next, the main control MPU 4100a determines whether or not a preset number of rounds has been reached (step S2405). Specifically, the main control MPU 4100a determines whether or not the number of rounds set in step S2005 has been reached. If the number of rounds set in advance is reached (YES in step S2405), the main control MPU 4100a proceeds to step S2407, where a big hit flag (big hit A flag, big hit B flag, big hit C flag, big hit D flag, Of the big hit E flag, the flag that is in the ON state) is turned OFF. On the other hand, if the preset round number has not been reached (NO in step S2405), the main control MPU 4100a performs the opening process of the opening / closing member 2006 of the attacker unit 2000 (step S2406), and returns to step S2402.

  If it is determined in step S2401 that the opening / closing member 2006 of the attacker unit 2000 is not open (NO in step S2401), the process proceeds to step S2405.

  After turning off the jackpot flag in step S2407, it is determined whether or not the probability variation function should be activated (step S2408). If the probability variation function is to be activated, the probability variation function is activated (step S2409). Specifically, if the jackpot flag turned off in step S2407 is one of the jackpot A flag, jackpot C flag, jackpot D flag, or jackpot E flag, the main control MPU 4100a operates the probability variation function. To do.

  When the probability changing function is activated, the main control MPU 4100a determines whether or not the operation mode of the movable piece 2005 that opens and closes the second start port 2002 is changed from the normal mode to the promotion mode (step S2410). In the present embodiment, specifically, when the type of jackpot that caused the occurrence of the jackpot game is jackpot A, E, or C, the main control MPU 4100a enters the gaming state when the jackpot is won. Regardless, it is determined that the operation mode of the movable piece 2005 is changed from the normal mode to the promotion mode. When the type of jackpot that caused the occurrence of the jackpot game is jackpot D, the main control MPU 4100a operates the movable piece 2005 if the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot is the external normal gaming state A. If it is determined that the mode is not changed from the normal mode to the promotion mode and the game mode is other than the external normal game state A (the external normal game state A or the external advantageous game state A, B), the operation mode of the movable piece 2005 is normal. It is determined that the mode is changed from the mode to the mode of promotion. That is, in the gaming machine of the present embodiment, when the jackpot A, E, C is won among the jackpots (so-called odd jackpots) in which the probability changing function is activated after the jackpot game, the game machine is always in the external advantageous gaming state B after the jackpot game. Transition. In the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, when winning the jackpot D out of the so-called probability variation jackpot, the external normal gaming state B is only after the jackpot game if the gaming state at the time of winning is the external normal gaming state A. When the game state at the time of winning is other than the external normal game state A, the game shifts to the external advantageous game state B.

  When determining that the operation mode of the movable piece 2005 is changed from the normal mode to the promotion mode, the main control MPU 4100a changes the operation mode of the movable piece 2005 from the normal mode to the promotion mode (step S2411). It is updated to “0” (step S2414), and the special feature jackpot control process is terminated. On the other hand, when determining that the operation mode of the movable piece 2005 is not changed from the normal mode to the promotion mode, the main control MPU 4100a skips step S2411 and updates the processing flag to “0” (step S2414). The jackpot control process is terminated.

  On the other hand, in this embodiment, when it is determined in step S2408 that the probability variation function should not be activated (big hit B) (NO in step S2408), the operation mode of the movable piece 2005 is normal. The mode is changed to the promotion mode (step S2412). After that, the main control MPU 4100a sets the number of operations (for example, 100 times) of the movable piece 2005 in the promotion mode (step S2413), updates the processing flag to “0” (step S2414), and hits the special electric accessory big hit The control process ends. That is, the gaming machine of the present embodiment always shifts to the external advantageous gaming state A when a so-called normal jackpot (bonus B) is won.

[Attacker unit operation processing]
Next, based on FIG. 212, the attacker unit operation process will be described. FIG. 212 is a flowchart showing an example of the attacker unit operation process. In the attacker unit operation process, first, the main control MPU 4100a determines whether or not the maximum number of game balls set in step S2201 has won the big prize opening 2003 of the attacker unit 2000 (step S2501). If the game balls with the maximum number of winnings have won the big winning opening 2003 of the attacker unit 2000 (YES in step S2501), the main control MPU 4100a determines whether the opening / closing member 2006 of the attacker unit 2000 is being opened or closed ( Step S2502). If the opening / closing member 2006 of the attacker unit 2000 is being opened / closed (YES in step S2502), the main control MPU 4100a closes the opening / closing member 2006 of the attacker unit 2000 (step S2503) and sets the small hit flag to the OFF state (step S2503). Step S2509). If the opening / closing member 2006 of the attacker unit 2000 is not open (ie, closed) in step S2502, the main control MPU 4100a proceeds to step S2509 and sets the small hit flag to the OFF state. Thereafter, the main control MPU 4100a proceeds to step S2510, updates the processing flag to “0”, and ends the attacker unit operation processing.

  If it is determined in step S2501 that the game ball with the maximum number of winnings has not won the big winning port 2003 of the attacker unit 2000, the main control MPU 4100a determines whether or not the opening / closing member 2006 of the attacker unit 2000 is open. (Step S2504). If the opening / closing member 2006 of the attacker unit 2000 is being opened (YES in step S2504), it is determined whether or not the opening time set in advance in step S2201 has elapsed (step S2505), and the opening time is determined. If it has elapsed (YES in step S2505), the main control MPU 4100a closes the opening / closing member 2006 of the attacker unit 2000 (step S2506). Thereafter, the main control MPU 4100a determines whether or not the number of times of opening / closing the opening / closing member 2006 of the attacker unit 2000 has reached the preset number in step S2201 (step S2507), and has reached the preset number. If so (YES in step S2507), the small hit flag is turned off (step S2509), and then the processing flag is updated to “0” (step S2510). If it is determined in step S2504 that the opening / closing member 2006 of the attacker unit 2000 is not open (NO in step S2504), the main control MPU 4100a proceeds to step S2507.

  When it is determined in step S2505 that the opening time of the opening / closing member 2006 of the attacker unit 2000 has not passed the predetermined time (NO in step S2505), the main control MPU 4100a returns to step S2501. If it is determined in step S2507 that the number of times the opening / closing member 2006 of the attacker unit 2000 has not been opened (NO in step S2507), the main control MPU 4100a opens the opening / closing member 2006 of the attacker unit 2000 again. (Step S2508), and then returns to Step S2501).

  As described above, when it is determined that the game ball set in advance has won the opening / closing member 2006 of the attacker unit 2000 (YES in step S2501), the main control MPU 4100a determines that the opening / closing member 2006 of the attacker unit 2000 set in advance in step S2201. Regardless of whether or not the number of opening / closing operations has been reached, the attacker unit operation process is terminated.

[Variation display and effect display of decorative design]
Next, the decorative symbol variation display and the effect display in each gaming state will be described. When the peripheral control MPU 4140a of the peripheral control board 4140 receives information representing the change pattern and the change type determined in the change pattern setting process (FIG. 197) performed by the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 described above, the peripheral control MPU 4140a Displays on the liquid crystal display device 1400 a decorative display variation display and an effect display based on the determined variation pattern and variation type. The variation display and the effect display of the decorative symbol based on the variation pattern and the variation type are displayed in synchronization with the variation display of the special symbol displayed on the first special symbol display 641 or the second special symbol display 642, and a special lottery. The result is displayed on the first special symbol display 641 or the second special symbol display 642 after the special symbol variation display, and at the same time, the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1400 after the variation symbol variation display. Displayed by a combination of.

  In the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the external normal gaming state A, the external normal gaming state B, the external advantageous gaming state A, and the external advantageous gaming state B are set as described above. In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, when in the external normal gaming state A or the external normal gaming state B, it is difficult for the player to determine the gaming state only by looking at the liquid crystal display device 1400. As shown, the variation display and the effect display of similar or the same decorative design are displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1400 for each variation.

  An example of display contents of the liquid crystal display device 1400 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 213 is a diagram illustrating an example of a state in which a decorative symbol variation display and an effect display are displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1400. FIG. 213A shows the display content of the first display panel 1400a. FIG. 213 (B) shows the display content of the second display panel 1400b. FIG. 213 (C) shows a front view screen of the liquid crystal display device 1400 viewed from the player when the first display panel 1400a and the second display panel 1400b are in the display state shown in FIGS. 213 (A) and (B). In other words, it corresponds to an image expressed by superimposing the display content of the first display panel 1400a and the display content of the second display panel 1400b. Note that the state of the display surface of the liquid crystal display device 1400 (first display panel 1400a) viewed from the player center side on the panel center line is also referred to as a front view state, and the front view screen is visible when in the front view state. Display surface. Further, a state where the display surface of the liquid crystal display device 1400 (first display panel 1400a) is viewed from a position on the player side that is shifted to the right side from the panel center line is also referred to as a shifted front view state. Sometimes the display surface visually recognized is also referred to as a front-viewing screen.

  In the example shown in FIG. 213, when the variation pattern (normal reach loss) of No. 128 in FIG. 207 is selected in the variation pattern setting process described above, when the effect before establishment of reach is selected as the effect before establishment of reach. The content of the effect (effect display pattern) displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1400 is shown. The effect before the reach is established is determined based on the change type by the peripheral control MPU 4140a of the peripheral control board 4140 based on the effect selection table before the reach establishment (shown). The content of the effect display pattern is determined based on the variation pattern determined in step S1560 described above on the main control board 4100. In this example, the first display panel 1400a includes the upper region B1 and the lower region B2. Is divided and displayed. The second display panel 1400b includes an upper region B3 that overlaps the upper region B1 of the first display panel 1400a almost accurately as viewed from the player, and an almost accurate view from the player of the lower region B2 of the first display panel 1400a. And the lower region B4 that overlaps each other, but both regions are controlled to the transparent state CLR. Therefore, for convenience of explanation, FIG. 213 (B) shows a wavy line that divides the upper region B3 and the lower region B4, but the wavy line is not displayed on the actual second display panel 1400b. The entire second display panel 1400b is controlled to the transparent state CLR.

  In this example, an effect screen is displayed in the upper area B1 of the first display panel 1400a as shown in FIG. In addition, a hold display described later is performed in the lower area B2 of the first display panel 1400a. When the predetermined area of the first display panel 1400a is controlled to the transparent state CLR and the area of the second display panel 1400b that overlaps the predetermined area of the first display panel 1400a is controlled to the transparent state CLR, the player When viewing the effect display device 115, the predetermined area of the first display panel 1400a appears white (backlight color). Further, the predetermined area of the first display panel 1400a is controlled to the transparent state CLR, and a predetermined image is displayed in the area of the second display panel 1400b that overlaps the predetermined area of the first display panel 1400a when viewed from the player. Then, when the player views the liquid crystal display device 1400, a predetermined image displayed on the second display panel 1400b on the back side can be seen through a predetermined area of the first display panel 1400a. On the contrary, when a predetermined image is displayed in a predetermined area of the first display panel 1400a and the area of the second display panel 1400b that overlaps the predetermined area of the first display panel 1400a is controlled to be transparent, a liquid crystal is sent from the player. When the display device 1400 is viewed, the predetermined image displayed in the predetermined area of the first display panel 1400a can be seen in the same manner as the predetermined image is displayed on one normal liquid crystal panel. Furthermore, when the first image is displayed in a predetermined area of the first display panel 1400a and the second image is displayed in an area of the second display panel 1400b that overlaps the predetermined area of the first display panel 1400a, When the person views the liquid crystal display device 1400, an image in which the first image and the second image overlap is seen in the predetermined area. At this time, as described above, since the gap La is provided between the first display panel 1400a and the second display panel 1400b, the second image may be located behind the first image. It appears as a three-dimensional image that is recognized by the player and gives a sense of depth.

  On the effect screen displayed in the upper area B1 of the first display panel 1400a, a background image (in the example of FIG. 213, an image of a car or a building) is displayed as a background, and a design symbol group 1153 of decorative symbols is displayed in the center area. Is done. The symbol row group 1153 includes three symbol rows, the left symbol row 1153a displayed on the left side when viewed from the player, the middle symbol row 1153b displayed in the middle when viewed from the player, and the right side when viewed from the player. The right symbol row 1153c displayed in is composed of three symbol rows. In the present embodiment, a plurality of decorative symbols 1 to 8 are sequentially arranged and displayed in the symbol rows 1153a to 1153c of the decorative symbols.

  Further, the hold display displayed in the lower area B2 of the first display panel 1400a has a first hold display area 1151 and a second hold display area 1152 adjacent to each other. The first hold display area 1151 has four hold storage display sections, a first hold storage display section 1151a to a fourth hold storage display section 1151d arranged in a line in the left-right direction. The second hold display area 1152 has four hold storage display sections, a fifth hold storage display section 1152a to an eighth hold storage display section 1152d arranged in a line in the left-right direction. The number (4 in the present embodiment) of the reserved storage display portions in the first reserved display area 1151 is equal to the upper limit value of the first special symbol reserved number. Further, the number of sums (4 in the present embodiment) of the reserved storage display portion of the second reserved display area 1152 is equal to the upper limit value of the second special symbol reserved number. In the present embodiment, the number of the reserved storage display portions of the first hold display area 1151 and the number of the hold storage display sections of the second hold display area 1152 are both “4” (holding digestion) on the basis of the pre-holding digestion. "3" based on the later.

  In addition, the first reserved display area 1151 displays the first special symbol hold count, and the second hold display area 1152 displays the second special symbol hold count. In the example of FIG. 213, it is displayed that the first special symbol hold number is “3” in the first hold display area 1151, and the second special symbol hold number is displayed in the second hold display area 1152. “1” is displayed.

  In addition to the hold display, the decoration symbol 1157 is displayed in the lower area B2 of 1400a (FIG. 213 (A)). This decoration symbol 1157 is a symbol different from the decoration symbol displayed in the upper area B1 displayed in FIG. 213, and is a symbol that must always be displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1400 according to the rules of the gaming machine. is there. The decoration symbol 1157 is changed and stopped in accordance with the special symbols displayed on the first special symbol display 641 and the second special symbol display 642. In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 213 (A), the decoration symbol 1157 is configured such that eight small rectangular images are arranged in the horizontal direction, and the four rectangular images on the left are displayed as the first special symbol display. The right four rectangular images correspond to the display of the second special symbol display 642. The decorative symbol 1157 is always displayed at the same position on the first display panel 1400a while a game is being played in the gaming machine. However, in this specification, in order to avoid the complexity of the drawing, the following drawings are used. Then, the illustration is omitted.

  Here, instead of the above display mode, the contents displayed in the lower area B2 of the first display panel 1400a (in the present embodiment, the hold display and the display of the decorative pattern 1157) are displayed in the lower area of the second display panel 1400b. You may display on B4. In this case, the lower region B2 of the first display panel 1400a is preferably controlled to the transparent state CLR.

  When the variation pattern of normal reach loss is selected and the pre-reach establishment effect is determined as the normal reach establishment effect, all the effect display patterns displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1400 are performed using only the first display panel 1400a. First, on the first display panel 1400a, the decorative symbols in the left symbol row 1153a, the middle symbol row 1153b, and the right symbol row 1153c change simultaneously with the start of the change. Thereafter, after a predetermined time elapses, one decorative symbol (for example, seven symbols) stops at a predetermined stop position of the left symbol row 1153a (the center in the vertical direction of the display panels 1400a and 1400b). Later, the same decorative symbol as the decorative symbol stopped in the left symbol row 1153 stops at a predetermined stop position in the right symbol row 1153c, and reach is established. After the reach is established, decorative symbols (for example, eight symbols) different from the decorative symbols (reach symbols) stopped in the left symbol row 1153a and the right symbol row 1153c respectively stop at the predetermined stop position of the middle symbol row 1153b. The change ends.

  When the first special lottery result or the second lottery result wins the big hits A and B in the external normal gaming state, the symbol rows 1153a to 1153c of the decorative symbol 1153 are scrolled in the vertical direction, and then shown in FIG. The display is stopped and displayed at the double eyes (the three symbol rows 1153a to 1153c are the same symbol) across the effect display corresponding to the fluctuation pattern (in many cases, the so-called super reach effect variation pattern). The This doublet is a predetermined combination of decorative symbols (hereinafter also referred to as jackpot symbol combination) for notifying the player of the jackpot in the present embodiment. The jackpot symbol combination is not limited to a flat eye, and may be a specific combination of different types of decorative symbols. For example, a jackpot symbol combination for notifying a certain type of jackpot (for example, jackpot A, B) is set to a flat eye, and a jackpot symbol combination for notifying another type of jackpot (for example, jackpot C, D, E) is of a different type. It may be a specific combination of decorative symbols. Note that combinations of decorative symbols other than a predetermined combination of decorative symbols for notifying jackpots are basically combinations of decorative symbols for notifying a missing symbol (hereinafter referred to as “unknown symbol combinations”). Further, in addition to the combination of decorative symbols for notifying detachment, for example, when the combination of decorative symbols is stopped and displayed, a combination for notifying that the variation continues (for example, a chance eye) is called. .) May be prepared. Specific contents of the super reach production will be described later.

[Direction before reach is established]
[Continuous production]
In addition, as can be seen from the distribution shown in FIGS. 199 and 204, in the variation pattern selected when the first special lottery result or the second lottery result wins the big hits A and B, the variation type is two or three. There are relatively many cases where four stations are selected. When the variation type is “double”, the effect display content in which the effect twice (reach effect) corresponding to the variation effect is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1400 during the variation. Similarly, when the variation type is “triple”, the effect display contents in which the effect of three consecutive times and the effect corresponding to the change pattern (reach effect) are combined are displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1400 during the change. The When the variation type is “four stations”, the effect display content in which the effect of four consecutive effects and the effect corresponding to the variation pattern (reach effect) are combined is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1400 during the variation.

  Here, the n-th continuous effect means that the first special symbol display 641 or the second special symbol display 642 in the liquid crystal display device 1400 after the special symbol is once variably displayed and then stopped. Fluctuation display and stop display of the left symbol row 1153a, middle symbol row 1153b, and right symbol row 1153c are n times (n is a natural number of 2 or more: in this embodiment, n = 2 to 3: 2 times if 2 times, 3 times) If it is 3 times, if it is 4 consecutive times, it is an effect performed over 4 times. In the following, when a variation pattern with a reach effect (for example, variation pattern number 15 in FIG. 204) is selected and triple is selected as the corresponding variation type, the display content displayed on liquid crystal display device 1400 is displayed. As a specific example, the continuous production will be further described.

  214 to 237 are diagrams showing frame images constituting a moving image displayed on the liquid crystal display device as a three-time continuous effect. 214 to 227 show frame images that are temporally later as the figure number increases. By looking at FIGS. 214 to 227 according to the figure number, a moving image as a special effect is shown. Can understand the contents. Since the three consecutive effects are performed using the upper region B1 of the first display panel 1400a described above, FIGS. 214 to 227 illustrate only the display contents of the upper region B1 of the first display panel 1400a. The upper region B3 of the second display panel 1400b that overlaps the upper region B1 of the first display panel 1400a is controlled in the transparent state CLR in this embodiment. Instead, an effect display such as a background may be displayed in the upper area B3 of the second display panel 1400b. In FIGS. 214 to 227, among the display contents of the upper area B1 of the first display panel 1400a, a background image (for example, a building in FIG. 213) is omitted in order to avoid complication of the drawing. The three-time continuous effect is performed in cooperation with the display on the first display panel 1400a by operating the upper middle movable decorative body 3501 (see FIGS. 161, 176, 189, etc.). In FIG. 227, the upper middle movable decorative body 3501 is illustrated as appropriate. As described above, the display on the first display panel 1400a is performed by the peripheral control MPU 4140a by controlling the VDP 4150c. The operation of the upper middle movable decorative body 3501 is performed by the peripheral control MPU 4140a driving the upper middle rotation drive motor 3504 and the like via the lamp drive board 3120.

  First, peripheral control MPU 4140a uses main control MPU 4100a of main control board 4100 as a command with information indicating the selected variation pattern and information indicating that three consecutive effects have been selected as the variation type of the variation pattern. Is received, the symbol variation display and the effect display including the three consecutive effects are started.

  When the variable display and the effect display including the three consecutive effects are started, first, the first display panel 1400a has eight types of symbols in each of the left symbol column 1153a, the middle symbol column 1153b, and the right symbol column 1153c. The decorative symbols (1 symbol to 8 symbols) are displayed at high speed in a predetermined order (not shown). The high-speed variation display is a mode in which the decoration symbols are variably displayed at a high speed that makes it difficult to determine the type of the decoration symbol that the player is changing. 214 to 237, the high-speed variation display of the decorative symbols is expressed by three vertical lines (for example, the middle symbol row 1153b and the right symbol row 1153c in FIG. 214). At this point, the upper middle movable decorative body 3501 is located at the above-described retracted position so as not to overlap the first display panel 1400a.

  Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 214, the decorative symbol variation display in the left symbol row 1153a is shifted from the high-speed variation display to the low-speed variation display. The low-speed fluctuation display is a mode in which the decorative symbols are variably displayed at a low speed that allows the player to determine the type of the decorative symbols that are changing. In FIG. 214, in the low-speed fluctuation symbol display in the left symbol row 1153a, an image of one symbol of the decorative symbols (one symbol image: the symbol image with the number “1”) S1 is the symbol stop of the left symbol row 1153a. 2 shows a scene in which the image of 2 symbols (2 symbol image: the image of the symbol given the number “2”) S2 is about to reach the symbol stop position after passing the position. At this point, the high-speed variation display of the decorative symbols is continued in each of the middle symbol row 1153b and the right symbol row 1153c. At this time, the upper middle movable decorative body 3501 located at the retracted position is rotated and moved to a position where it can be visually recognized by the player so as to overlap the first display panel 1400a. If there is such a movement of the upper middle movable decorative body 3501, the player expects that "this variation may cause some interesting effects to be displayed" or "the jackpot expectation may be displayed" It can make you feel.

  As described above, the upper middle movable decorative body 3501 has a cylindrical shape, and is decorated with a weapon called a large machine gun (gatling gun). As described above, the projection 3501 a that emits light is disposed at a position corresponding to the launching port of the Gatling gun at the end opposite to the rotation axis of the upper middle movable decorative body 3501. The upper middle movable decorative body 3501 is configured to be capable of extending and contracting in the axial direction of the cylindrical shape by the upper middle expansion / contraction drive solenoid 3514 as described above. The upper middle movable decorative body 3501 is configured to express a state that a gatling gun is continuously fired by simultaneously performing an axial expansion / contraction operation and a light emitting operation of the upper middle movable decorative body 3501. The operation expressing that the gatling gun is fired continuously is called the firing operation of the upper middle movable decorative body 3501.

  FIG. 215 shows a frame image several frames after the frame image shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 215, following the state shown in FIG. 214, a predetermined decorative symbol (in the example shown in FIG. 215, two symbol image S2) is stopped and displayed at the symbol stop position of the left symbol row 1153a. At this time, the high-speed variation display of the decorative symbols is continued in each of the middle symbol row 1153b and the right symbol row 1153c.

  FIG. 216 shows a frame image several frames after the frame image shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 216, following the state shown in FIG. 215, a message MA indicating that it is disadvantageous for the player to reach is displayed. In the example shown in FIG. 216, a message using a relatively indirect expression “DANGER !!” is displayed. Instead, “Don't establish reach!” “Do not establish reach”. A message using a relatively direct expression such as “!” May be displayed. Substantially in the same manner as the display of this message MA, the upper middle movable decorative body 3501 that imitates the Gatling gun is directed so that the Gatling gun launcher is directed to the stop position of the right symbol row 1153c, as indicated by an arrow in FIG. It rotates. The player who sees the displayed message MA can recognize that “there is no chance of reaching here, it is more likely to be a big hit”, while wishing that “the reach is not here” You will see the progress of the production.

  FIG. 217 shows a frame image several frames after the frame image shown in FIG. After the state shown in FIG. 216, the right symbol row 1153c shifts from the state in which the decorative symbol is displayed with high-speed fluctuation to the state in which low-speed fluctuation is displayed. At the time shown in FIG. 217, the 1 symbol image S1 passes the symbol stop position of the right symbol row 1153c, and the 2 symbol image S2 is about to reach the symbol stop position of the right symbol row 1153c. That is, a state where the same kind of symbol as the two symbol image S2 stopped and displayed at the symbol stop position of the left symbol row 1153a has reached and stopped at the symbol stop position of the right symbol row 1153c, and the reach state is about to be established. It is. At this time, the movable decorative body 3501 that imitates the upper middle Gatling gun has been rotated to a position toward the 2 symbol image S2 that is about to reach the symbol stop position of the right symbol row 1153c. In the state shown in FIG. 217, high-speed fluctuation display of the decorative symbols is performed in the middle symbol row 1153b.

  FIG. 218 shows a frame image after several frames of the frame image shown in FIG. After the state shown in FIG. 217, it is expressed that the gatling gun fires on the 2 symbol image S2 that is about to reach the symbol stop position of the right symbol row 1153c and destroys the 2 symbol image S2. The Specifically, the upper middle movable decorative body 3501 is finely expanded and contracted (vibrated) in the axial direction of the cylindrical shape, and the projection 3501a imitating the launch port of the upper middle movable decorative body 3501 is blinked, so that the Gatling gun The firing operation of bombarding is represented in the 2-design image S2. At the same time, on the first display panel 1400a, the two-design image S2 is displayed with fine vibrations, and a number of images representing small explosions are displayed on the two-design image S2, and the two-design image S2 is gatling. It is expressed that the gun is under attack. At the same time, the gatling gun firing sound is output from the speaker 121 as a sound effect. A display in which the Gatling gun shown in FIG. 218 attempts to destroy the 2-symbol image S2 can be called a reach prevention effect display.

  FIG. 219 shows a frame image several frames after the frame image shown in FIG. 218. After displaying for a while an effect expressing that the two symbols in the right symbol row 1153c shown in FIG. 218 are to be bombarded and destroyed, the two-successful design has succeeded in destroying the two symbol images as shown in FIG. 219. It is displayed that two symbols cause a big explosion. Specifically, an explosion that causes two symbols to explode is displayed, and the first display panel 1400a displays that the two symbols are shattered. At the same time, an explosion sound is output from the speaker 121 as a sound effect. The display as shown in FIG. 219 in which the two symbols are successfully destroyed and the two symbols cause a large explosion can be called a reach prevention success display. Immediately after the reach prevention success display, the upper middle movable decorative body 3501 returns to the retracted position and is not visible to the player.

  220 shows a frame image after several frames of the frame image shown in FIG. In FIG. 219, after the symbol destruction of 2 symbols is expressed, the decorative symbols (example in FIG. In the 2 symbol image S2), a decorative symbol (4 symbols S4 in the example shown in FIG. 220) that does not constitute a jackpot symbol combination is displayed. In this embodiment, the decorative symbols are moved from the rear (back side of the screen) to the front (player side) at the symbol stop position of the middle symbol row 1153b and the symbol stop position of the right symbol row 1153c. The image is gradually enlarged. Here, the decoration symbol may be displayed so as to fall from above the first display panel 1400a at the symbol stop position of the middle symbol row 1153b and the symbol stop position of the right symbol row 1153c. You may display so that it may raise from the downward direction of the panel 1400a.

  FIG. 221 shows a frame image after several frames of the frame image shown in FIG. After the state shown in FIG. 220, the middle symbol row 1153b and the right symbol row 1153c are enlarged and displayed to the same size as the two symbol images S2 in which the four symbols S4 are stopped on the left symbol row 1153a. The decorative symbols are completely stopped and displayed at the symbol stop positions of the middle symbol row 1153b and the right symbol row 1153c (FIG. 221). At this time, for example, the decorative pattern is stopped in a different manner from the case of displaying the off symbol combination at the end of normal fluctuation, such as blinking the outer edge portion of the decorative symbol that has been stopped and displaying a predetermined color (gold). It may be displayed. By doing this, it is possible to maintain the player's feeling that this change should continue because the reach has been prevented.

  After FIG. 221, each of the left symbol row 1153a, the middle symbol row 1153b, and the right symbol row 1153c is again displayed with high-speed fluctuation display (second fluctuation start: not shown). Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 222, the decorative symbol variation display in the right symbol row 1153c is shifted from the high-speed variation display to the low-speed variation display. In FIG. 222, in the low-speed fluctuation symbol display in the right symbol row 1153c, one symbol image S1 of the decorative symbols passes through the symbol stop position in the right symbol row 1153c, and the two symbol images S2 try to reach the symbol stop position. Shows the scene. At this time, the high-speed variation display of the decorative symbols is continued in each of the middle symbol row 1153b and the left symbol row 1153a. At this time, the upper middle movable decorative body 3501 located at the retracted position is rotated again and moved to a position where it can be visually recognized by the player so as to overlap the first display panel 1400a. When there is such a movement of the upper middle movable decorative body 3501, the player feels that “this variation may still have an interesting effect” and “an effect with a higher jackpot expectation may be displayed”. Can be held.

  FIG. 223 shows a frame image several frames after the frame image shown in FIG. 222. As shown in FIG. 223, following the state shown in FIG. 222, a predetermined decorative design (2 design images S2 in the example shown in FIG. 222) is stopped and displayed at the design stop position of the right design row 1153c. At this time, the high-speed variation display of the decorative symbols is continued in each of the middle symbol row 1153b and the left symbol row 1153a.

  FIG. 224 shows a frame image several frames after the frame image shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 216, following the state shown in FIG. 215, a message MA indicating that it is disadvantageous for the player to reach is displayed. In the example shown in FIG. 224, the message “DANGER !!” is displayed as in FIG. 216, but a message different from that in FIG. 216 may be displayed. In substantially the same manner as the display of this message MA, the upper middle movable decorative body 3501 simulating a Gatling gun is directed so that the Gatling gun's launch port is directed to the stop position of the left symbol row 1153a as indicated by an arrow in FIG. It rotates. The player who sees the displayed message MA can recognize that if there is no reach here, it will be more likely to be a big hit. However, you will see the progress of the production.

  FIG. 225 shows a frame image several frames after the frame image shown in FIG. After the state shown in FIG. 224, the left symbol row 1153a shifts from the state in which the decorative symbol is displayed with high-speed fluctuation to the state in which low-speed fluctuation is displayed. At the time shown in FIG. 224, the 1 symbol image S1 passes the symbol stop position of the left symbol row 1153a, and the 2 symbol image S2 is about to reach the symbol stop position of the left symbol row 1153a. That is, the same kind of symbol as the two symbol image S2 that is stopped and displayed at the symbol stop position of the right symbol row 1153c has reached and stopped at the symbol stop position of the left symbol row 1153a, and the reach state is about to be established. It is. At this time, the movable decorative body 3501 that imitates the upper middle Gatling gun has been rotated to a position toward the 2 symbol image S2 that is about to reach the symbol stop position of the left symbol row 1153a. In the state shown in FIG. 225, the high-speed fluctuation display of the decorative symbols is continuously performed in the middle symbol row 1153b.

  FIG. 226 shows a frame image several frames after the frame image shown in FIG. After the state shown in FIG. 225, it is expressed that a Gatling gun fires and destroys the two symbols for the two symbols that are about to reach the symbol stop position in the left symbol row 1153a (reach prevention). Production display).

  FIG. 227 shows a frame image several frames after the frame image shown in FIG. After the effect expressing that the two symbols in the left symbol row 1153a shown in FIG. 226 are to be bombarded and destroyed is displayed for a while, in the third consecutive effect, the two symbols are successfully destroyed as shown in FIG. It is displayed that the 2 symbols will undergo a large explosion (reach prevention success display). Immediately after the reach prevention success display, the upper middle movable decorative body 3501 returns to the retracted position and is not visible to the player.

  FIG. 228 shows a frame image several frames after the frame image shown in FIG. In FIG. 227, after the destruction of the two symbols is expressed, the decorative symbols (example of FIG. 228) stopped and displayed in the right symbol row 1153c are displayed at the symbol stop position of the middle symbol row 1153b and the symbol stop position of the left symbol row 1153a. In the 2 symbol image S2), a decorative symbol (4 symbols S4 in the example shown in FIG. 228) that does not constitute a jackpot symbol combination is displayed. In this embodiment, the decorative symbols are moved from the rear (back side of the screen) to the front (player side) at the symbol stop position of the middle symbol row 1153b and the symbol stop position of the left symbol row 1153a. The image is gradually enlarged. Here, the decoration symbol may be displayed so as to fall from above the first display panel 1400a at the symbol stop position of the middle symbol row 1153b and the symbol stop position of the left symbol row 1153a, or the first display. You may display so that it may raise from the downward direction of the panel 1400a.

  FIG. 229 shows a frame image several frames after the frame image shown in FIG. After the state shown in FIG. 228, the left symbol row 1153a and the middle symbol row 1153b are enlarged and displayed to the same size as the two symbol images S2 in which the four symbols S4 are stopped and displayed in the right symbol row 1153c. Then, the decorative symbols are completely stopped and displayed at the respective symbol stop positions of the middle symbol row 1153b and the right symbol row 1153c (FIG. 229). At this time, in the same manner as the image shown in FIG. 221, for example, the outlying symbol combination is displayed at the end of the normal variation, for example, the outer edge portion of the decorative symbol that has been stopped is blinked, or is set to a predetermined color (gold). The decorative symbol may be stopped and displayed in a different manner from the case. By doing this, it is possible to maintain the player's feeling that this change should continue because the reach has been prevented.

  After FIG. 229, each of the left symbol row 1153a, the middle symbol row 1153b, and the right symbol row 1153c is again displayed with high-speed fluctuation display (start of the third fluctuation: not shown). Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 230, the decorative symbol variation display in the left symbol row 1153a is shifted from the high-speed variation display to the low-speed variation display. 230, in the low-speed fluctuation symbol display in the left symbol row 1153a, one symbol image S1 of the decorative symbols passes through the symbol stop position in the left symbol row 1153a, and the two symbol images S2 try to reach the symbol stop position. Shows the scene. At this point, the high-speed variation display of the decorative symbols is continued in each of the middle symbol row 1153b and the right symbol row 1153c. At this time, the upper middle movable decorative body 3501 located at the retracted position is rotated again and moved to a position where it can be visually recognized by the player so as to overlap the first display panel 1400a. When there is such a movement of the upper middle movable decorative body 3501, the player feels that “this variation may still have an interesting effect” and “an effect with a higher jackpot expectation may be displayed”. Can be held.

  FIG. 231 shows a frame image several frames after the frame image shown in FIG. 230. As shown in FIG. 231, following the state shown in FIG. 230, a predetermined decorative design (in the example shown in FIG. 231, 2 design images S <b> 2) is stopped and displayed at the design stop position of the right design row 1153 c. At this time, the high-speed variation display of the decorative symbols is continued in each of the middle symbol row 1153b and the left symbol row 1153a.

  FIG. 232 shows a frame image several frames after the frame image shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 232, following the state shown in FIG. 231, a message MA indicating that reaching is unfavorable for the player is displayed. In the example shown in FIG. 232, the message “DANGER !!” is displayed as in FIGS. 216 and 224, but a message different from that in FIGS. 216 and 224 may be displayed. In substantially the same manner as the display of this message MA, the upper middle movable decorative body 3501 simulating a Gatling gun is directed so that the Gatling gun's launch port is directed to the stop position of the left symbol row 1153a as indicated by an arrow in FIG. It rotates. The player who sees the displayed message MA can recognize that if there is no reach here, it will be more likely to be a big hit. However, you will see the progress of the production.

  FIG. 233 shows a frame image several frames after the frame image shown in FIG. After the state shown in FIG. 232, the right symbol row 1153c shifts from a state in which the decorative symbol is displayed with high-speed fluctuation to a state in which low-speed fluctuation is displayed. At the time shown in FIG. 232, the 1 symbol image S1 passes the symbol stop position of the left symbol row 1153a and the 2 symbol image S2 is about to reach the symbol stop position of the left symbol row 1153a. That is, a state where the same kind of symbol as the two symbol image S2 stopped and displayed at the symbol stop position of the left symbol row 1153a has reached and stopped at the symbol stop position of the right symbol row 1153c, and the reach state is about to be established. It is. At this time, the movable decorative body 3501 that imitates the upper middle Gatling gun has been rotated to a position toward the 2 symbol image S2 that is about to reach the symbol stop position of the right symbol row 1153c. In the state shown in FIG. 233, the high-speed fluctuation display of the decorative symbols is continuously performed in the middle symbol row 1153b.

  FIG. 234 shows a frame image several frames after the frame image shown in FIG. After the state shown in FIG. 233, it is expressed that a gatling gun fires and destroys two symbols that are about to reach the symbol stop position of the right symbol row 1153c (blocking reach). Production display).

  FIG. 235 shows a frame image several frames after the frame image shown in FIG. After the effect expressing that the two symbols in the right symbol row 1153c shown in FIG. 234 are to be bombarded and destroyed is displayed for a while, in the third consecutive effect, the destruction of the two symbols fails as shown in FIG. It is displayed that the two symbols do not explode and stop at the symbol stop position in the right symbol row 1153c. The display that the two symbols shown in FIG. 235 do not explode and stop at the symbol stop position in the right symbol row 1153c can also be called a reach prevention failure effect display. Immediately after the reach prevention failure effect display, the upper middle movable decorative body 3501 returns to the retracted position and becomes invisible to the player. Reach is established at the same time as the reach prevention failure display.

  FIG. 236 shows a frame image several frames after the frame image shown in FIG. When reach is established together with the reach prevention failure display in FIG. 235, a message MA2 indicating the reach is displayed as shown in FIG. In the present embodiment, the message MA2 is “REACH”. Instead of this, other types of characters, symbols, and figures may be displayed. In addition, instead of the message MA2 or instead of the message MA2, a sound and sound effect for notifying reach establishment may be output from the speaker 121. In the present embodiment, the message MA2 is displayed, and then the display of the message MA2 is erased, and the high-speed variation display of the decorative symbol shifts to the low-speed variation display in the middle symbol row 1153b as shown in FIG.

  After the state shown in FIG. 237, the reach effect corresponding to the variation pattern is displayed. The reach effect will be described later, but after the reach effect, the jackpot symbol combination or the off symbol combination is finally stopped and displayed in the left symbol column 1153a, the middle symbol column 1153b, and the right symbol column 1153c, and the special lottery result of the change Is notified to the player. In the above description, the three-time production has been described. However, in this embodiment, the production is not continuous (one time), continuous twice, and continuous four times. In the case of non-continuity, after the first reach prevention effect display (FIG. 218), the reach prevention failure effect display shown in FIG. 235 is made and the reach state is established as shown in FIGS. In the case of two consecutive times, after the first reach prevention effect display (FIG. 226), the reach prevention failure effect display shown in FIG. 235 is made, and the reach state is established as shown in FIGS. In the case of four consecutive times, after the third reach prevention effect display (FIG. 234), after the reach prevention successful effect display shown in FIG. 219 again, in the manner shown in FIGS. 220 to 226, the jackpot symbol combination After the decorative pattern stop different from the fourth, the fourth variation start, the fourth reach prevention effect display, and the reach prevention failure effect display are displayed, as shown in FIGS. 236 to 237, the establishment of reach is displayed.

  Here, as can be seen from the lists in FIG. 204 and FIG. 206, whether the special symbol lottery result is a big hit or not, the continuous effect is produced in the variation corresponding to the lottery. May be selected as a variation type. Here, the probability that the special symbol lottery result corresponding to the variation in which the effect display content (effect display pattern) accompanied by the n-time continuous effect is displayed is a big hit, in other words, the effect display content (effect display) with the n-time continuous effect. Let X be the probability that a jackpot symbol combination will be displayed as the final stop symbol due to the variation in which the (pattern) is displayed. In addition, the probability that the special symbol lottery result corresponding to the change in which the effect display content (effect display pattern) accompanied by the n-th consecutive effect is displayed, in other words, the effect display content (effect display pattern) accompanied by the n-th consecutive effect ) Is the probability that an out symbol combination will be displayed as a final stop symbol due to the change displayed. At this time, it is possible to represent the degree of jackpot expectation (hit probability) when n consecutive effects are displayed by the ratio of X and Y. For example, if X is 1/500 and Y is 1/500, it can be said that jackpot expectation = X / (X + Y) = 0.5, that is, 50%. In the present embodiment, the variation type and the variation pattern are distributed so that the greater the number of consecutive times of the n-time production (the larger the value of n), the greater the expectation of jackpot when the continuous production is displayed. (FIGS. 199, 201, and 203 to 207).

Specifically, the probability that the variation pattern of number 15 is performed three times with the continuous effect is the probability that the variation pattern table A is selected × the probability that the variation pattern of number 15 is selected in the variation pattern table A × number This is expressed as a probability that three consecutive effects are selected in 15 variation patterns. For example, if it is calculated assuming that all winnings in the external normal state are winnings to the first starting port 2001,
Probability that winning variation pattern table A is selected = winning probability of jackpot A × probability of winning variation pattern table A being selected when winning jackpot A + winning probability of winning jackpot B × winning variation pattern table A is selected when winning winning jackpot B Probability = 1/350 × 0.32 × 126/241 + 1/350 × 0.32 × 166/241 = 1.108 × 10 −3
Probability that the fluctuation pattern number 15 is selected in the hit fluctuation pattern table A = 17/251
Probability of selecting 3 consecutive performances in the fluctuation pattern of number 15 = 130/233
Therefore, the probability that the fluctuation pattern of number 15 is performed with the continuous production three times in the external normal state = 1.108 × 10 −3 × 17/251 × 130/233 = 4.186 × 10 −5.
In the jackpot variation pattern calculated in this way, when the probability that three consecutive effects are selected is summed for all the jackpot variation patterns, an effect display pattern that is a jackpot is displayed after the three consecutive effects are displayed. The probability of being done can be calculated.
In addition, when the probability that the three consecutive effects are selected in the deviation variation pattern is summed with respect to all the variation variations, the probability that an effect display pattern that is off after the third variation is displayed is displayed. Can be calculated.

  For example, in the distribution examples shown in FIGS. 199, 201, and 203 to 206 described above, the probability of winning a jackpot when the continuous effect is displayed twice in the external normal gaming state is approximately 7.5%, and the consecutive three times. The probability of winning a jackpot when the effect is displayed is set to about 12%, and the probability of winning the jackpot when the effect is displayed four times is set to about 45%. Also, in the external advantageous game form, the variation type and the variation are such that the greater the number of consecutive times of the n-time production (the larger the value of n), the greater the jackpot expectation when the continuous production is displayed. The pattern is distributed.

[About the slip direction]
When the variation pattern determined on the main control board 4100 includes a predetermined reach effect and the variation type is “normal”, the peripheral control MPU 4140a, in addition to the above-described effect before the establishment of the normal reach, In some cases, the smooth production is selected as the production before the establishment. In this embodiment, a plurality of types of slip effects are prepared, and one of them, a cut-out slip effect, will be described with reference to FIGS. 238 to 253.

  238 to 253, (A) shows the display contents of the first display panel 1400a, (B) shows the display contents of the second display panel 1400b, and (C) shows the display contents of the first display panel 1400a. The figure of the content (front view visual image) expressed by overlapping with the display content of the 2nd display panel 1400b is shown.

  FIG. 238 to FIG. 253 are views showing frame images constituting a moving image displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1400 as a cut-out sliding effect in the present embodiment. FIG. 238 to FIG. 253 show frame images that are temporally later as the figure number increases. By looking at FIG. 238 to FIG. Can understand the contents of

  In the cut-out sliding effect, first, through the same scroll fluctuation as the effect before the establishment of the normal reach, different decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in the left symbol row 1153a and the right symbol row 1153c on the first display panel 1400a. In the example shown in FIG. 238, the 7 symbol image (7 symbol image) S7 is stopped and displayed in the left symbol row 1153a, and the 6 symbol image (6 symbol image) S6 is stopped and displayed in the right symbol row 1153c (FIG. 238 (A)). At this time, the middle symbol row 1153b is a state in which the decorative symbols are displayed in a high-speed fluctuation manner.

  At this time, a character image TK similar to an octopus (hereinafter referred to as an octopus character image TK) is displayed on the second display panel 1400b. The octopus character image TK is displayed on the first display panel 1400a at a position where the 6 symbol image S6 stopped and displayed in the right symbol row 1153c and the right end overlap (FIG. 238 (B)). The octopus character image TK is displayed with the decorative symbols variably displayed in the left symbol row 1153a and the right symbol row 1153c on the first display panel 1400a before reaching the state shown in FIG. 238A, that is, in the first display panel 1400a. It may be displayed on the second display panel 1400b from the stage of being displayed. For example, after the octopus character image TK appears on the second display panel 1400b from the end of the second display panel 1400b and the state in which the octopus character image TK moves around on the second display panel 1400b is displayed, FIG. May be stopped at the position indicated by Instead of this, the octopus character image TK may be displayed as if it suddenly appeared at the position shown in FIG. Further, the portion of the second display panel 1400b excluding the octopus character image TK is controlled to the transparent state CLR.

  The front visual image of the frame image in FIG. 238 is a combination of the effect image displayed on the first display panel 1400a and the octopus character image TK displayed on the second display panel 1400b (FIG. 238 (C )). The octopus character image TK is displayed as if looking into the front 6 symbol image S6. The player feels three-dimensionally that the octopus character is looking into the front 6 symbol image S6. Here, the octopus character image TK is displayed in a relatively darker color than the image displayed on the first display panel 1400a as a whole (in this embodiment, a color mainly composed of black and dark gray). . A dark color is a color with low brightness, and an image displayed with a dark color means that, for example, the average value of the brightness of each pixel constituting the image is low. For example, when the lightness is represented by 256 gradations of 0 to 255, 0 represents black with the lowest lightness, and 255 represents white with the highest lightness, the average value of the lightness of each pixel constituting the image is 100 or less. This is the case. Thereby, the octopus character image TK is displayed on the second display panel 1400b on the back side of the first display panel 1400a, and is recognized by the viewer while overlapping with the display image of the first display panel 1400a. The presence is recognized by the viewer relatively clearly.

  FIG. 239 shows a frame image several frames after the frame image of FIG. 238. In the frame image of FIG. 239, a state in which the tacho character image TK displayed on the second display panel 1400b emits a laser beam to the effect image displayed on the first display panel 1400a is displayed. Specifically, on the second display panel 1400b, an image on the emission source side (laser source side laser image) LZ1 of the laser beam emitted from the octopus character image TK is displayed (FIG. 239 (B)). Further, on the first display panel 1400a, an image on the tip side of the laser beam (tip-side laser image) LZ2 is displayed (FIG. 239 (A)). The emission source side laser image LZ1 is located at a position where one end overlaps the octopus character image TK, and the other end is located at the upper left position of the 6-design image S6 that is stopped and displayed on the first display panel 1400a from the end. It is the strip | belt-shaped image extended so that a part might be located. One end portion of the front end side laser image LZ2 is located at a position overlapping with the other end portion of the emission source side laser image LZ1 displayed on the second display panel 1400b, and from the end portion, the emission source side laser image LZ1 is displayed. It is the strip | belt-shaped image extended on the extended line of strip | belt-shaped shape. As shown by a black circle in FIG. 239 (B), laser light is applied to the first display panel 1400a from the back side at one end of the front end side laser image LZ2, and penetrates through the first display panel 1400a. The penetration part image LZP to be displayed is displayed. The display content of the first display panel 1400a and the second display panel 1400b of the frame image of FIG. 239 is the frame image of FIG. 238 except that the emission source side laser image LZ1 and the tip side laser image LZ2 are additionally displayed. Is the same as the displayed content.

  In the front view image of the frame image of FIG. 239, the emission source side laser image LZ1 and the tip side laser image LZ2 are additionally displayed on the front view image of the frame image of FIG. 238 (FIG. 239 (C)). The player recognizes it as an image of one laser beam by combining the emission source side laser image LZ1 and the front end side laser image LZ2. At this time, the emission source side laser image LZ1 is displayed on the second display panel 1400b positioned on the back side when viewed from the player, and the tip side laser image LZ2 is displayed on the front side when viewed from the player. Since it is displayed on the panel 1400a, it is possible to make the player feel three-dimensionally that a laser beam is emitted from the back side to the front side. In addition, the penetration portion image LZP described above (FIG. 239 (C) ), A laser beam emitted from the tacho character image TK located on the far side of the display image on the first display panel 1400a toward the display image on the first display panel 1400a is displayed to the player. A state in which the display image of the first display panel 1400a is penetrated can be felt three-dimensionally.

  240 shows a frame image several frames after the frame image of FIG. 239. In the frame image of FIG. 240, the image of the laser beam emitted from the octopus character image TK is displayed so as to move the penetrating part image LZP in the right direction of the screen. That is, the emission source side laser image LZ1 displayed on the second display panel 1400b and the front end side laser image LZ2 displayed on the first display panel 1400a are moved and displayed in conjunction with each other. In the first display panel 1400a, a cut line image (cut line image) CLN is displayed on the trace through which the penetrating portion image LZP has passed. The display contents of the first display panel 1400a and the second display panel 1400b of the frame image of FIG. 240 are additionally displayed as a point where the emission source side laser image LZ1 and the tip side laser image LZ2 are moved and displayed and a cut-out line image CLN. The display contents of the frame image in FIG. 238 are the same except for the above.

  240 shows that the laser beam displayed in the frame image of FIG. 239 moves and cuts the upper part of the 6-symbol image S6 displayed on the first display panel 1400a. It will be. For the player, the display image on the first display panel 1400a is manipulated by the laser beam emitted from the octopus character image TK located on the far side of the display image on the first display panel 1400a toward the display image on the first display panel 1400a. The state of cutting is recognized in three dimensions.

  FIG. 241 shows a frame image several frames after the frame image of FIG. FIG. 242 shows a frame image several frames after the frame image of FIG. As shown in FIGS. 241 and 242, the image of the laser beam emitted from the octopus character image TK is moved and displayed so that the outer portion of the six-symbol image S6 is made to go around the penetrating part image LZP. That is, the emission source side laser image LZ1 displayed on the second display panel 1400b and the front end side laser image LZ2 displayed on the first display panel 1400a are moved and displayed in conjunction with each other. Then, along with the movement of the image of the laser beam, the cut-out line image CLN displayed on the trace through which the penetrating portion image LZP has passed on the first display panel 1400a The image is displayed so as to be cut out (FIGS. 241 and 242). The display contents of the first display panel 1400a and the second display panel 1400b of the frame images in FIGS. 241 and 242 are the point that the emission source side laser image LZ1 and the tip side laser image LZ2 are displayed in a moving manner and the cut-out line image CLN. The display content of the frame image in FIG. 240 is the same as that of FIG. 240 except that the display is extended.

  In the front visually recognized images of the frame images from FIG. 240 to FIG. 242, the laser beam displayed in the frame image of FIG. 239 moves to cut out the entire circumference of the 6-symbol image S6 displayed on the first display panel 1400a. Will be displayed. For the player, the 6 patterns of the first display panel 1400a are manipulated by the laser beam emitted from the octopus character image TK located on the far side of the display image of the first display panel 1400a toward the display image of the first display panel 1400a. A state in which the image S6 is cut out is recognized three-dimensionally.

  FIG. 243 shows a frame image immediately after the frame image of FIG. In the frame image shown in FIG. 243, on the second display panel 1400b, the 7-symbol image S7B is displayed in an area overlapping with the approximate center of the 6-symbol image S6 displayed on the first display panel 1400a as viewed from the player ( FIG. 243 (B)). The 7 symbol image S7B displayed on the second display panel 1400b is an image smaller than the 6 symbol image S6 displayed on the first display panel 1400a, and the entire image is behind the 6 symbol image S6 as viewed from the player. It is displayed to be located. Further, at this time, it is displayed that the cutting of the entire circumference of the 6-symbol image S6 by the laser beam has been completed, and the emission source side laser image LZ1 of the second display panel 1400b and the front end side of the first display panel 1400a are displayed. The laser image LZ2 has been erased. The display contents of the first display panel 1400a and the second display panel 1400b of the frame image in FIG. 243 are the same except that the 7-design image S7B is additionally displayed on the second display panel 1400b and the laser beam image is erased. The display contents of the frame image in FIG. 242 are the same.

  In the front view image of the frame image of FIG. 243, the 7 symbol image S7B appears behind the 6 symbol image S6 stopped and displayed in the right symbol row 1153c on the first display panel 1400a (FIG. 243 (C)). . In the present embodiment, the 6-symbol image S6 and the 7-symbol image S7B are drawn with the same level of density (the average value of the brightness of each pixel constituting the image is about the same). The 7-symbol image S7B is smaller than the 6-symbol image S6. Therefore, in the present embodiment, in the front view image, the 7 symbol image S7B cannot be clearly recognized as the 7 symbol image S7B when viewed from the player. It is only possible to recognize that an image of some decorative design appears behind the image S6.

  FIG. 244 shows a frame image immediately after the frame image of FIG. 243. In the frame image of FIG. 244, the first display panel 1400a displays a state in which the cut-out image TR1 drops downward at a speed that naturally drops. The cutout image TR1 refers to an image displayed in the inner area of the cutout line image CLN in FIG. As shown in FIG. 244, the cutout image TR1 includes a 6-design image S6 that is one of the decorative designs, and a background image BGE that is located around the 6-design image S6 and inside the cut-out line image CLN. including. When the cut-out image TR1 moves downward from the position inside the cut-out line image CLN, the cut-out image TR1 is already out of the area where the cut-out image TR1 is displayed before moving (that is, the inside area of the cut-out line image CLN). The area where is not displayed is controlled to the transparent state CLR (FIG. 244A). In the example shown in FIG. 244, the cutout image TR1 moves (drops) downward while rotating slightly clockwise. For this reason, in the state shown in FIG. 244, the upper part and the lower right part of the clipped image TR1 that has started to move (drop) in the inner region of the clipped line image CLN are controlled to the transparent state CLR. Here, in the first display panel 1400a, a region where the clipped image TR1 is already displayed among the regions where the clipped image TR1 is displayed before moving is referred to as a cutout transparent region.

  In the frame image of FIG. 244, in the second display panel 1400b, another world background BGA is displayed in an area overlapping with the cutout transparent area of the first display panel 1400a. The different world background BGA is a background drawn with a different world view from the background image displayed on the first display panel 1400a. For example, in this embodiment, the background image displayed on the first display panel 1400a is an image representing the real world, whereas the different world background BGA displayed on the second display panel 1400b is created by a computer. It is an image that represents the virtual world that was created.

  The front visual image of the frame image of FIG. 244 is a combination of the effect image displayed on the first display panel 1400a, the image of another world background BGA displayed on the second display panel 1400b, and the octopus character image TK. (FIG. 244 (C)). A part of the world represented by the image displayed on the first display panel 1400a (the area where the cut-out image TR1 was displayed before moving (dropping)) is cut out and the player starts dropping, It becomes a hollow, and you can make it feel like you can see another world hidden from the hollow.

  FIG. 245 shows a frame image several frames after the frame image of FIG. FIG. 246 shows a frame image several frames after the frame image of FIG. 245. As shown in FIGS. 245 and 246, in the first display panel 1400a, the clipped image TR1 is displayed as moving (falling) further from the state shown in FIG. 244, and the clipped clipped image TR1 is displayed. Natural fall is expressed (FIGS. 245 (A) and 246 (A)). Of the region where the cutout image TR1 is displayed before moving as described above (ie, the inner region of the cutout line image CLN), the region where the cutout image TR1 is not already displayed is controlled to the transparent state CLR. Therefore, in conjunction with the movement display of the cutout image TR1, the cutout transparent area is sequentially enlarged. Then, in the second display panel 1400b, another world background BGA is displayed in a portion overlapping the cutout transparent region of the first display panel 1400a (FIGS. 245 (B) and 246 (B)). That is, in conjunction with the enlargement of the cutout transparent area in the first display panel 1400a, the area in which the different world background BGA is displayed in the second display panel 1400b is also enlarged sequentially.

  The front view image of the frame image of FIGS. 245 and 246 is a combination of the effect image displayed on the first display panel 1400a, the image of the different world background BGA displayed on the second display panel 1400b, and the octopus character image TK. It becomes the contents (FIGS. 245 (C) and 246 (C)). To the player, a part of the world represented by the image displayed on the first display panel 1400a (the area where the cut-out image TR1 was displayed before moving (falling)) is cut out and dropped, and as a result The cut-out part becomes a cavity, and it can be felt that another world that has been hidden from the cavity can be seen better. At the time shown in FIG. 245 (C), the cutout transparent area of the first display panel 1400a has expanded to a position that overlaps with the upper part of the 7-pattern image S7B displayed on the second display panel 1400b. The person can clearly see the upper part of the 7-pattern image S7B through the cut-out transparent region. Furthermore, at the point of time shown in FIG. 246 (C), the cutout transparent region of the first display panel 1400a has expanded to a position that overlaps the entire 7-pattern image S7B displayed on the second display panel 1400b. The person can clearly see the entire 7 symbol image S7B through the cutout transparent region. That is, in the moving image from the frame image of FIG. 244 to the frame image of FIG. 246, the cutout portion transparent area of the first display panel 1400a is sequentially enlarged, and the cutout portion transparent area of the first display panel 1400a A portion where the 7-pattern image S7B of the display panel 1400b overlaps is sequentially enlarged. As a result, the portion of the 7-symbol image S7B displayed on the second display panel 1400b that can be visually recognized by the player through the cutout transparent region is enlarged. Finally, the cutout transparent region of the first display panel 1400a and the entire 7-pattern image S7B of the second display panel 1400b overlap each other. In this state, the player can clearly see the entire 7 symbol image S7B through the cutout transparent region. An image of the 7-symbol image S7B that was hidden behind the 6-symbol image S6 and was not clearly visible to the player who viewed the moving image from the frame image of FIG. 244 to the frame image of FIG. It can be made to feel that it has become clearly visible sequentially from the cavity formed by the drop of the cut-out image TR1 including.

  FIG. 247 shows a frame image several frames after the frame image of FIG. In the frame image of FIG. 247, the cutout image TR1 disappears from the first display panel 1400a on the first display panel 1400a (FIG. 247 (A)). The player feels that the cut-out image TR1 has naturally dropped and disappeared to the outside below the first display panel 1400a. The region in which the cutout image TR1 is displayed before the start of movement (falling) (that is, the inner region of the cutout line image CLN) is in a state where the whole is controlled to the transparent state CLR. Then, in the second display panel 1400b, another world background BGA is displayed in the cutout portion transparent area of the first display panel 1400a, that is, the part overlapping the entire inner area of the cutout line image CLN at this time (FIG. 247 ( B)). Then, in FIGS. 238 to 247, 7 symbols are placed at positions on the second display panel 1400 b that overlap with the stop position of the 6 symbol image S 6 that is stopped and displayed in the right symbol row 1153 c of the first display panel 1400 a as viewed from the player. An image S7B is displayed. As a result, the player who has viewed a series of moving images from FIG. 238 to FIG. 247 recognizes that the decorative symbols stopped in the right symbol row 1153c have been replaced by the 6 symbol images S6 to the 7 symbol images S7B.

  Here, the 7-symbol image S7B displayed on the second display panel 1400b is also referred to as a back-side 7-symbol image S7B in order to distinguish it from a 7-symbol image S7A displayed on the first display panel 1400a described later. The back side 7 symbol image S7B displayed on the second display panel 1400b of FIG. 247 is similar to the 7 symbol image S7 stopped at the center position of the left symbol row 1153a of the first display panel 1400a. On the other hand, the size of the back 7 symbol image S7B displayed on the second display panel 1400b of FIG. 247 is one side compared to the 7 symbols stopped at the center position of the left symbol row 1153a of the first display panel 1400a. The length ratio is less than half and the area ratio is less than 1/4.

  In FIGS. 248 to 250, a part of the frame images constituting the moving image following the frame image of FIG. 247 is shown in time series. On the second display panel 1400b of the frame image of FIGS. 248 to 250, the image of the different world background BGA is displayed and the above-mentioned back side 7 symbol image S7B is displayed (FIGS. 248 (A) to 250 (). A)) On the other hand, in the cutout transparent region of the first display panel 1400a of the frame images of FIGS. 248 to 250, 7 having the same shape at the same position as the back side 7 symbol image S7B displayed on the second display panel 1400b. The image symbol S7A is displayed. Here, the 7 symbol image S7A displayed on the first display panel 1400a is also referred to as a front 7 symbol image S7A. Further, the portion other than the region where the front 7-symbol image S7A of the cutout region of the first display panel 1400a is displayed is controlled to the transparent state CLR. In the moving image including a series of frame images from FIG. 248 to FIG. 250, the back side 7 symbol image S7B of the second display panel 1400b and the near side 7 symbol image S7A of the first display panel 1400a are enlarged as time passes. Displayed. In one frame image, the rear side 7 symbol image S7B of the second display panel 1400b and the front side 7 symbol image S7A of the first display panel 1400a are displayed at the same position and size as viewed from the player. . In the moving image including a series of frame images from FIG. 248 to FIG. 250, the rear side 7-symbol image S7B of the second display panel 1400b gradually increases the transparency of the constituent pixels with time, that is, the light of the constituent pixels. The transmittance of will increase. As the transparency increases, the ratio of the white backlight arranged on the back side as viewed from the player through the display area of the back side 7 symbol image S7B increases, so the entire back side 7 symbol image S7B is white. The taste and brightness are increased, the contrast of the back 7 symbol image S7B is lowered, and the white image is approached. Incidentally, the complete white image is synonymous with the state controlled to the transparent state CLR. On the other hand, in the moving image including a series of frame images from FIG. 248 to FIG. 250, the near-side 7 symbol image S7A of the first display panel 1400a gradually increases in transparency of the constituent pixels, that is, the constituent pixels. The light transmittance decreases. In other words, the front side 7-symbol image S7A is an image with high transparency and low contrast as shown in FIG. 248 (A) at the beginning of display, but as time passes, FIG. 249 (A) and FIG. As shown to (A), transparency falls and it changes to an image with high contrast.

  In this way, the images (the front side 7) that exactly overlap each other as viewed from the player on both the first display panel 1400a on the near side as viewed from the player and the second display panel 1400b on the far side as viewed from the player. The design image S7A and the back side 7 design image S7B) are respectively displayed. The second display panel 1400b initially displays the image with low transparency, and the first display panel 1400a initially displays the image with high transparency. To do. As described above, as the time passes, the transparency (luminance) of the constituent pixels of the image of the second display panel 1400b is continuously increased, and the transparency of the constituent pixels of the image of the first display panel 1400a is continuously increased. Make it smaller. Then, in the front view image viewed from the player, three symbols appear to gradually emerge from the second display panel 1400b side to the first display panel 1400a side in a three-dimensional manner. Furthermore, in the moving image including a series of frame images from FIG. 248 to FIG. 250, since the image is enlarged and displayed with the passage of time, the image is further combined with the effect due to the continuous change in transparency. It appears to gradually emerge from the second display panel 1400b side to the first display panel 1400a side in three dimensions. In the same frame image, an image obtained by superimposing the front 7 symbol image S7A and the back 7 symbol image S7B, that is, a front view image of the front 7 symbol image S7A and the back 7 symbol image S7B is The transparency of the front side 7 symbol image S7A and the back side 7 symbol image S7B is adjusted so that the density and the contrast are comparable to those of the 7 symbol images stopped in the symbol row 1153a. In addition, in the moving image including the series of frame images from FIGS. 248 to 250, the density and contrast of the front visual images of the front side 7 symbol image S7A and the back side 7 symbol image S7B seem to be almost unchanged. In addition, the transparency of the near side 7 symbol image S7A and the far side 7 symbol image S7B in each frame image is adjusted.

  FIG. 251 shows a frame image immediately after the frame image of FIG. In the first display panel 1400a of the frame image of FIG. 251, the transparency is lowered to the same level as that of the 7 symbol image S7 of the left symbol row 1153a, and the contrast is increased to the same level as that of the 7 symbol image S7 of the left symbol row 1153a. The symbol image S7A is displayed in the cutout region (FIG. 251 (A)). At this point, the front 7 symbol image S7A has been enlarged to the same size as the 7 symbol image S7 in the left symbol row 1153a. As a result, the front 7 symbol image S7A and the 7 symbol image S7 in the left symbol row 1153a are completely the same. On the other hand, in the second display panel 1400b of the frame image in FIG. 251, as a result of the high transparency and the low contrast, the back 7 symbol image S7B is an area completely controlled to the transparent state CLR. That is, at this time, the second display panel 1400b displays the different world background BGA, and inside the different world background BGA, the near side 7 symbol image S7A displayed on the first display panel 1400a and the player see it. The overlapping region is controlled to the transparent state CLR. The visual image shown in FIG. 251 is combined with the effect image displayed on the first display panel 1400a, the near-side 7 symbol image S7A, and the image of the different world background BGA displayed on the second display panel 1400b ( FIG. 251 (C)).

  FIG. 252 shows a frame image immediately after the frame image of FIG. The real-world background image BGB is displayed in the cutout portion transparent area of the first display panel 1400a of the frame image of FIG. (FIG. 252 (A)). The background image BGB is an image that can be recognized as a single background without a sense of incongruity with the background of the effect image displayed from the beginning on the first display panel 1400a. On the other hand, in the second display panel 1400b of the frame image of FIG. 252, the display of the different world background BGA is erased and the whole is controlled to the transparent state CLR (FIG. 252 (B)). The visually recognized image in FIG. 252 is the content of the effect image itself displayed on the first display panel 1400a (FIG. 252 (C)). The decorative symbol 1153 stopped at the center position of the right symbol row 1153c varies from 6 symbols to 7 symbols by the moving image from the frame image of FIG. 238 to the frame image of FIG. 252.

  FIG. 253 shows a frame image immediately after the frame image of FIG. In the first display panel 1400a of the frame image in FIG. 253, the image of the cut line CLN is deleted. In the effect image displayed on the first display panel 1400a, there is a state (so-called reach state) in which the decorative symbols stopped in the left symbol row 1153a and the decorative symbols stopped in the right symbol row 1153c are the same seven symbols. A character (REACH) indicating that the reach state is reached is displayed (FIG. 253 (A)). The visual image of the frame image in FIG. 253 is the content in which the effect image displayed on the first display panel 115a is displayed as it is (FIG. 253 (C)). After that, as will be described in detail later, various reach effect images are subsequently performed.

  According to the cut-out slip effect described above, after the 6-design image S6 is stopped on the first display panel 1400a, the cut-out image TR1 that is an area including the 6-design image S6 is an area effect excluding the cut-out image TR1. It is displayed as if it is falling separately from the image. At the same time, the area in which the cutout image TR1 is displayed before the moving display of the cutout image TR1 on the first display panel 1400a and the area where the cutout image TR1 is not currently displayed is controlled to be transparent (FIG. 244 to 247). As a result, the cutout transparent region controlled to be in a transparent state is sequentially enlarged in accordance with the movement display of the cutout image TR1. Then, on the second display panel 1400b, a 7-symbol image S7 different from the 6-symbol image S6 is displayed in the overlapped area as seen from the player and the cutout transparent area of the first display panel 1400a (FIG. 244). Here, the 7-design image S7 on the second display panel 1400b can be visually recognized by the player through the cut-out portion transparent area in the 7-design image S7 as the cut-out portion transparent area on the first display panel 1400a expands. Is displayed at an enlarged position from the upper part of the 7 symbol image S7 (FIGS. 245 and 246), and finally the player visually recognizes the entire 7 symbol image S7 through the cutout transparent region (FIG. 247). As a result, the symbol image visually recognized at the symbol stop position in the right symbol row 1153c as viewed from the player is switched from the six symbol images S6 to the seven symbol images S7. As a result, by utilizing the two display panels arranged in a double manner, it is possible to realize a variable display effect of a new design that is rich in stereoscopic effect and attracts the player's interest. Specifically, the player moves a part of the world represented by the image displayed on the first display panel 1400a (the part including the 6-symbol image S6), and the moved part becomes a hollow, It is possible to make the viewer feel as if the 7-symbol image S7 existing in another world hidden behind is visible. And since the 7 symbol image S7 that exists in another world is replaced with the 6 symbol image S6 that has been displayed so far, the variation of the decorative symbol is displayed, so that the variation of the symbol overflowing with freshness never seen before Can be realized.

  Further, after the 6-symbol image S6 is made the first display panel 1400a, the octopus character image TK is displayed on the second display panel 1400b, and the octopus character image TK is displayed on the first display panel 1400a by the laser emitted. The way of cutting out the world is displayed. In this way, when the character is displayed on the first display panel 1400a while the character is displayed behind the first display panel 1400a, the display content of the liquid crystal display device 1400 can be felt three-dimensionally, and the player continues to expand. Can give you a sense of expectation. In addition, since the character displayed on the second display panel 1400b on the back side displays a cutout of the world displayed on the first display panel 1400a, a unique effect unique to the two display panels is displayed. It is possible to have a further expectation for the development that follows the elderly. In order to exert such effects more effectively, for example, in the effect display corresponding to a fluctuation pattern with a relatively low expectation degree of big hit such as normal reach, the cut-out slip effect is not displayed or the display probability is lowered. It is preferable to suppress, and it is preferable to increase the probability that the cut-out sliding effect is displayed in the effect display corresponding to the fluctuation pattern having a relatively high expectation degree of jackpot, such as a double-sided reach effect described later. Further, in order to exert such effects more effectively, for example, in the effect display corresponding to the fluctuation pattern with a relatively low expectation degree of big hit such as normal reach, the variation of the decorative pattern using only the first display panel 1400a. It is preferable to mainly perform display (such as the above-described effect before establishment of normal reach). That is, the above-described cut-out slip effect is not a big hit of the frequency executed in the fluctuation process corresponding to the jackpot, but the ratio of the frequency executed in the fluctuation process corresponding to the lottery result (lost) (so-called big hit expectation degree of the effect) However, it is preferable to set larger than the normal variation display effect. By doing so, after the player's attention is aroused by the cut-out sliding effect, the percentage of jackpots is increased, and the interest of the gaming machine can be improved.

  Furthermore, according to the special variation display effect, 7 symbols are the same on the first display panel 1400a, and 7 symbols on the second display panel 1400b are overlapped with the 7 symbols on the first display panel 1400a when viewed from the player. In conjunction with the enlargement of the 7-pattern image, the light transmittance of the pixels constituting the 7-pattern image of the first display panel 1400a is reduced and the 7-pattern of the second display panel 1400b is displayed. The light transmittance of the pixels constituting the image is increased (FIGS. 248 to 250). Thereby, it can be expressed in a three-dimensional manner that the 7 symbols come up from the back side toward the near side when viewed from the player.

  Furthermore, after displaying the 6 symbols by cutting them out together with the surrounding images and displaying them as they fall naturally, the symbol that appears from the back is displayed three-dimensionally so that the symbols appear from the back. The variation of the decorative symbol in the symbol row 1153c (variation from 6 symbols to 7 symbols) is displayed. As a result, it is possible to provide a novel, three-dimensional, and interesting decoration pattern variation effect using two display panels (the first display panel 1400a and the second display panel 1400b).

[Direction after reach formation (reach production)]
[Example of double-sided reach production]
A double-sided reach effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 254 to 261 as an example of a reach effect that is performed after reach is established (for example, after reach is established through continuous effects as shown in FIG. 237). As an example, a description will be given of a double-sided reach effect that is produced and displayed after a 7-character reach is established after a continuous effect when a variation pattern of variation 15 (3D reach → double-sided reach rear surface) is selected. In this variation pattern, after the 3D reach effect is displayed, the double side reach effect is displayed. The 3D reach effect is an effect mainly using an image using 3D graphics. FIGS. 254 to 261 are views showing frame images constituting a moving image displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1400 as the reach effect and a viewing screen viewed from the player. FIGS. 254 to 261 show frame images that are temporally later as the figure number increases. By looking at FIGS. 254 to 261 in accordance with the figure numbers, moving images as the reach effect are shown. Can understand the contents of In other words, FIGS. 254 to 261 show a frame image after several frames of the frame image shown in the previous figure number and a viewing screen (front viewing screen) viewed from the player. Since the double-sided reach effect is performed by making full use of both the first display panel 1400a and the second display panel 1400b, FIGS. 254 to 261 show the display contents of the first display panel 1400a. ) Shows the display contents of the second display panel 1400b, and (C) shows the contents expressed by superimposing the display contents of the first display panel 1400a and the display contents of the second display panel 1400b (front view screen). Indicates.

  The peripheral control MPU 4140a starts the 3D reach effect after the reach is established after the continuous effect (FIG. 237) and after a while, the display content of the liquid crystal display device 1400 is whiteout or blacked out. FIG. 254 shows a frame image immediately after the start of the reach effect. When the 3D reach effect is started, the peripheral control MPU 4140a first displays the symbols Y1 and Y2 representing the number “7” on the first display panel 1400a as shown in FIG. 254 (A), respectively. Let In this case, the peripheral control MPU 4140a displays the character image CR1 and the background image HK1 in an area other than the display portion of the symbol Y1 and the symbol Y2, and more specifically, the character image CR1 indicating a woman drawn in 3D graphics. A state in which the vehicle runs along the wall of the background image HK1 is shown. Further, as shown in FIG. 254 (B), the peripheral control MPU 4140a controls the second display panel 1400b so that the entire area is in a transparent state CLR (non-display area).

  As described above, as shown in FIG. 254 (C), the symbols Y1 and Y2 can be stopped and displayed to form a reach state on the front view screen. In this way, the display mode indicating the reach state with the symbols Y1 and Y2 is also referred to as a first reach display mode. In addition, although the said 1st reach display mode is formed only with two symbols, in the "first reach display mode", the symbol in the variable display is displayed between the symbols Y1 and Y2. Various display modes are also included.

  Next, 3D reach production develops into double-sided reach production. As shown in FIG. 255A, the peripheral control MPU 4140a controls the left half trapezoidal area (hereinafter also referred to as the left area) to the transparent state CLR on the first display panel 1400a, and the remaining right half stage In the shape area (hereinafter also referred to as the right area), a first reach display mode RC1 in which a symbol Y3 representing a number is displayed between the symbol Y1 and the symbol Y2 is displayed. A background image HK2 and a character image CR2 showing a car are displayed. In the following, on the display panel, a boundary line between a region in the transparent state CLR and a region in which an image (character image CR, background image HK, symbol image, etc.) is displayed is indicated by an edge line ED. Further, the peripheral control MPU 4140a displays the title TL in a region near the center of the first display panel 1400a and straddling the left region and the right region. This title TL is displayed as “DUAL CHANCE”, which suggests that a double-sided reach effect that is a double reach effect using the first display panel 1400a and the second display panel 1400b will be performed.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 255 (B), the peripheral control MPU 4140a displays a character image CR3 indicating an octopus in the left area on the second display panel 1400b, and controls the right area to the transparent state CLR. . The peripheral control MPU 4140a performs control so that the portion corresponding to the title TL portion is in the transparent state CLR in the left region. Note that, when the first display panel 1400a and the second display panel 1400b are overlapped, the right region and the left region coincide with each other.

  As described above, on the front view screen, as shown in FIG. 255 (C), “DUAL CHANCE” is displayed near the center, and the character image CR2 and the background image HK2 are displayed in the right region together with the first reach mode. Furthermore, the character image CR3 can be shown in the left region.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 256A, the peripheral control MPU 4140a erases the title TL represented as “DUAL CHANCE” on the first display panel 1400a.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 256 (B), the peripheral control MPU 4140a causes the second reach display mode RC2 to be displayed on the left side area of the first display panel 1400a on the second display panel 1400b. The second reach display mode RC2 is configured such that the symbol X1 and the symbol X2 representing “8” are stopped and displayed, and the symbol X3 being displayed in a variable manner is displayed between the symbols X1 and X2. The peripheral control MPU 4140a performs control so that the character image CR3 is displayed also in a portion corresponding to the title TL portion in the transparent state CLR in the left region of the first display panel 1400a.

  As described above, on the front view screen, as shown in FIG. 256 (C), the character image CR2 and the background image HK2 can be displayed in the right region together with the first reach display mode RC1, and the left region can be displayed. The character image CR3 can be shown together with the second reach display mode RC2, that is, double reach can be expressed using the first display panel 1400a and the second display panel 1400b.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 257 (A), the peripheral control MPU 4140a includes the first reach display mode RC1 and the background in an area including the vicinity of the center (hereinafter also referred to as the center vicinity area) in the first display panel 1400a. The image HK3 is displayed, and an area other than the central vicinity area (hereinafter also referred to as a peripheral area) is controlled to the transparent state CLR. In this case, the peripheral control MPU 4140a is formed such that the central vicinity area where the first reach display mode RC1 and the background image HK3 are displayed is larger (wider) than the peripheral area controlled to the transparent state CLR.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 257 (B), the peripheral control MPU 4140a controls the area near the center to the transparent state CLR in the second display panel 1400b, and the second reach display mode RC2 and the background image HK4 is displayed. In this case, as a matter of course, in the second display panel 1400b, the central vicinity region controlled to the transparent state CLR is larger than the peripheral region in which the second reach display mode RC2 and the background image HK4 are displayed. Note that, when the first display panel 1400a and the second display panel 1400b are overlapped, the central vicinity region and the peripheral region thereof coincide with each other.

  As described above, on the front view screen, as shown in FIG. 257 (C), the first reach display mode RC1 can be shown with the background image HK3 as a background in a relatively large area near the center. The second reach display mode RC2 can be shown in the small peripheral area with the background image HK4 as the background.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 258 (A), the peripheral control MPU 4140a stops and displays the symbol Y3 that has been changed in the first reach display mode RC1 of the first display panel 1400a with the numeral “6”. The off symbol combination HZH formed by the symbols Y1, Y2, and Y3 is displayed. In addition, the peripheral control MPU 4140a performs control for maintaining the same state as in FIG. 257 (B) in the second display panel 1400b as shown in FIG. 258 (B).

  As described above, on the front view screen, as shown in FIG. 258 (C), the background image HK3 can be displayed as a background in the relatively large area near the center, and the symbol combination HZH can be shown and is relatively small. The second reach display mode RC2 can be shown in the peripheral area with the background image HK4 as the background.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 259 (A), the peripheral control MPU 4140a includes the outlier symbol combination HZH and the trapezoidal region at the lower right corner (hereinafter also referred to as the lower right corner region) on the first display panel 1400a. The background image HK5 is displayed, and most of the region other than the lower right corner region (hereinafter, also referred to as the most region) is controlled to the transparent state CLR. In this case, the peripheral control MPU 4140a is formed so that the most area controlled to the transparent state CLR is larger (wider) than the lower right corner area where the off symbol combination HZH or the background image HK5 is displayed.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 259 (B), the peripheral control MPU 4140a controls the lower right one corner area to the transparent state CLR in the second display panel 1400b, and the second reach display mode RC2 and the most area. The background image HK6 is displayed. In this case, of course, in the second display panel 1400b, the most area for displaying the second reach display mode and the background image HK6 is larger than the right-side corner area controlled to the transparent state CLR. Note that, when the first display panel 1400a and the second display panel 1400b are overlapped, the right-side corner area and the most area match each other.

  In this way, on the front view screen, as shown in FIG. 259 (C), the background image HK5 can be shown as the background in the relatively small lower right corner area, and the symbol combination HZH can be shown relatively large. The second reach display mode RC2 can be shown in most areas with the background image HK6 as the background.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 260A, the peripheral control MPU 4140a performs control for maintaining the same state as that in FIG. 259A in the first display panel 1400a. In addition, the peripheral control MPU 4140a stops and displays the symbol X3 that has been changed in the second reach display mode RC2 of the second display panel 1400b with the numeral “8”, and the symbols X1, X2, and X3 have the same number. The jackpot symbol combination OZH expressed by expressing is displayed. That is, the jackpot symbol combination OZH is displayed at the symbol stop positions of the left symbol row 1153a, the middle symbol row 1153b, and the right symbol row 1153c as a display for finally notifying the player of the jackpot.

  As described above, on the front view screen, as shown in FIG. 260 (C), the outlier symbol combination HZH can be shown in the relatively small lower right corner area with the background image HK5 as the background and is relatively large. In most regions, the jackpot symbol combination OZH can be shown with the background image HK6 as the background.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 261 (A), the peripheral control MPU 4140a moves the jackpot symbol combination OZH and the background image HK6 displayed on the second display panel 1400b until immediately before to the entire area of the first display panel 1400a. To confirm. Further, as shown in FIG. 261 (B), the peripheral control MPU 4140a controls the second display panel 1400b so that the entire area is in a transparent state CLR (non-display area).

  As described above, on the front view screen, as shown in FIG. 261 (C), the jackpot symbol combination OZH can be shown with the background image HK6 as the background.

  The main control MPU 4100a controls the jackpot game by controlling the attacker solenoid 2016 and the like after the peripheral control MPU 4140a notifies the player of the jackpot symbol combination OZH as shown in FIG.

  As described above, in the double-sided reach effect, the second display panel 1400b disposed so as to overlap the first display panel 1400a is disposed on the back side of the first display panel 1400a when viewed from the player, and the peripheral control is performed. Since the MPU 4140a performs display on these two display panels, an attractive and three-dimensional display effect can be performed.

  Further, as described above, in the above-described double-sided reach effect, the peripheral control MPU 4140a displays the first reach display mode RC1 on the first display panel 1400a and the second reach display mode RC2 on the second display panel 1400b. Are displayed to form a double reach. In this way, the two reach display modes can have a sense of depth, and a reach effect with a dynamic feeling can be performed.

  In the double-sided reach effect described above, the peripheral control MPU 4140a displays the first reach display mode RC1 on the first display panel 1400a and also displays the second reach display mode RC2 on the second display panel 1400b to double reach. After the formation, the symbols changing in the reach display mode are stopped and displayed in order. In this way, the double reach effect can be expressed in an easy-to-understand manner for the player, and the expectation of the double reach effect can be improved.

  In the double-sided reach effect described above, the peripheral control MPU 4140a performs display control so that the area near the center where the first reach display mode RC1 is displayed is larger than the peripheral area where the second reach display mode RC2 is displayed on the front view screen. Then, when the symbols in the first reach display mode RC1 are stopped and displayed, the first reach display mode RC1 is displayed on the first display panel 1400a and the second reach display mode RC2 is displayed on the second display panel 1400b. (Refer to FIG. 257, 258, etc.). If it does in this way, it can express that the 1st reach display mode RC1 is a production object by the feeling of depth which arises between the 1st reach display mode RC1 and the 2nd reach display mode RC2. A sense of urgency can be given to the stop display operation of the changing symbol in the display mode RC1. As a result, a realistic reach production can be expressed.

  Furthermore, in the double-sided reach effect described above, the peripheral control MPU 4140a stops and displays the changing symbol in the first reach display mode RC1 to display the off symbol combination HZH (see FIG. 258). After the display control is performed so that the area (peripheral area) where the two reach display mode RC2 is shown is larger than the area (right side corner area) where the outlier symbol combination HZH is shown, in the second reach display mode RC2, The symbols are stopped and displayed (see FIGS. 259, 261, etc.). In this way, after the production of the first reach display mode RC1, it is possible to promptly appeal to the player that the production target has shifted to the second reach display mode RC2, and it is easy for the player to understand. Reach production can be provided. In addition, a sense of urgency can be imparted to the stop display operation of the changing symbol in the second reach display mode RC2, and a realistic reach effect can be expressed.

  In the double-sided reach effect described above, the peripheral control MPU 4140a displays the displayed big hit symbol combination OZH on the second display panel 1400b using the entire area of the first display panel 1400a as shown in FIG. I try to let them. In this way, it is possible to accurately notify the player of the jackpot, and it is possible to prompt the player to prepare for the jackpot game.

  In the double-sided reach effect described above, the peripheral control MPU 4140a stops and displays the changing symbols in the first reach display mode RC1 on the first display panel 1400a to display the off symbol combination HZH (see FIG. 258). The second reach display mode RC2 is displayed on the second display panel 1400b while the off symbol combination HZH is displayed on the first display panel 1400a (see FIG. 259). In this way, it is possible to express that the second reach display mode RC2 is a production target, and it is possible to notify the player that the first reach production in the double reach has ended and that it has been lost. Further, in this case, a sense of depth can be generated between the off symbol combination HZH and the second reach display mode RC2, and the second reach display mode RC2 performed deeper than the off symbol combination HZH can be further emphasized. Can do. As a result, the reach effect of the second reach display mode RC2 can be dynamically expressed.

  In the double-sided reach effect described above, the peripheral control MPU 4140a causes the first display panel 1400a to display the detachment symbol combination HZH and the second display panel 1400b to display the second reach display mode RC2. (See FIG. 259). In this case, the display area of the off symbol combination HZH on the first display panel 1400a is displayed smaller than the display area of the second reach display mode RC2 on the second display panel 1400b. In this way, it is possible to notify the player that the first reach effect in the double reach has ended and the game has been lost without disturbing the reach effect of the second reach display mode RC2.

  In the double-sided reach effect described above, the peripheral control MPU 4140a displays the second reach display mode RC2 on the second display panel 1400b while displaying the symbol combination HZH on the first display panel 1400a (see FIG. 259). In addition, while the display of the off symbol combination HZH is continued, the changing symbol in the second reach display mode RC2 is stopped and displayed so that the jackpot symbol combination OZH is displayed (see FIG. 260). In this way, it is possible to express that the second reach effect in the double reach is a big hit, and the first reach effect in the double reach is completed, and it is possible to notify the player that the game has been lost. In this case, a sense of depth can be generated between the missed symbol combination HZH and the jackpot symbol combination OZH, and the jackpot symbol combination OZH displayed at the back of the missed symbol combination HZH can be further emphasized. As a result, the jackpot symbol combination OZH can be dynamically notified to the player.

  In the double-sided reach effect described above, the peripheral control MPU 4140a displays the first reach display mode RC1 on the first display panel 1400a and the second reach display mode RC2 on the second display panel 1400b when the double reach state is formed. (See FIG. 257), the first reach display mode RC1 is cut (omitted) by cutting (omitting) a part of the changing symbol Y3 that is changing to the extent that the first reach display mode RC1 can be identified. It is made to display. In this way, the display area of the first reach display mode RC1 can be made compact in the first display panel 1400a, and various other game effects can be provided in the first display panel 1400a or the second display panel 1400b. It is possible to secure a display space to be performed. In particular, as described above, when the first display panel 1400a and the second display panel 1400b are used and the display area of these two panels is dynamically expanded or reduced, the display space is effectively reduced. Can be secured.

  In the double-sided reach effect described above, the peripheral control MPU 4140a displays the first reach display mode RC1 on the first display panel 1400a and the second reach display mode RC2 on the second display panel 1400b when the double reach state is formed. (See FIG. 257), in the second reach display mode RC2, a part of the symbol X2 in the stopped state is cut (omitted) and displayed to the extent that the second reach display mode RC2 can be identified. I am letting. In this way, the display area of the second reach display mode RC2 can be made compact in the second display panel 1400b, and various other game effects can be provided on the first display panel 1400a or the second display panel 1400b. It is possible to secure a display space to be performed. In particular, as described above, when the first display panel 1400a and the second display panel 1400b are used and the display area of these two panels is dynamically expanded or reduced, the display space is effectively reduced. Can be secured.

  In the double-sided reach effect described above, the peripheral control MPU 4140a displays the second reach display mode RC2 on the second display panel 1400b after the double reach state is formed (see FIG. 257), and the first display panel 1400a disengages the symbol combination HZH. In this case, a part of the symbol Y3 in the stopped state in the off symbol combination HZH is cut (omitted) so that it can be identified that the off symbol combination HZH is formed. (See FIGS. 258 and 259). In this way, it is possible to make the display area of the off symbol combination HZH compact in the first display panel 1400a. For example, as described above, the first display panel 1400a and the second display panel 1400b are used. Thus, when performing various game effects on the first display panel 1400a or the second display panel 1400b, such as when the display area of these two panels is dynamically expanded or reduced, a display space should be secured. Is possible.

  In the double-sided reach effect described above, the peripheral control MPU 4140a displays the second reach display mode RC2 on the second display panel 1400b after the double reach state is formed (see FIG. 257), and the first display panel 1400a disengages the symbol combination HZH. In this case, a part of the symbol X2 in the stopped state in the second reach display mode RC2 is cut (omitted) to the extent that it can be identified that the second reach display mode RC2 is formed. Are displayed (see FIGS. 258 and 259). This makes it possible to make the display area of the second reach display mode RC2 compact in the second display panel 1400b. For example, as described above, the first display panel 1400a and the second display panel 1400b To secure display space when performing various game effects on the first display panel 1400a or the second display panel 1400b, such as when the display area of these two panels is dynamically expanded or reduced using It becomes possible to do.

  As described above, an example of the reach effect has been described, but the reach effect displayed after the continuous effect is a reach effect with a relatively high expectation level. In the present embodiment, in the order of low jackpot expectation, “reach starting with long reach (FIG. 204: number 2 to 6)”, “reach starting with 3D reach (FIG. 204: number 7 to 19)”, “live action reach” Reach that starts (FIG. 204: Numbers 20 to 33) ”and“ Reach that starts from the introduction video (Numbers 34 to 42) ”. Then, as can be seen from the distribution in FIG. 204, after three consecutive performances, the development of “reach that starts with long reach (FIG. 204: number 2 to 6)” is denied, and “reach that starts with 3D reach (FIG. 204). 204: Numbers 7 to 19) "or more, the development to reach production with a high expectation degree of jackpot is determined. Furthermore, after four consecutive productions, the development to reach productions that have a higher expectation level than “reach that starts with live-action reach (FIG. 204: numbers 20 to 33)” or higher is determined.

  As described above, according to the continuous effect of the present embodiment described above, the reach prevention effect display, which is the effect display for blocking the reach, is displayed immediately before the reach that is originally expected by the player is established. When the prevention effect success display is displayed, the continuous production is developed or continued, and when the reach prevention effect failure display is displayed, reach is established. Then, the greater the number of successful display of reach prevention effects, the greater the number of continuous effects. And as the number of continuous performances increases, there is a high possibility that the fluctuation will eventually lead to a jackpot game. As a result, when an effect display pattern other than the continuous effect of the present embodiment is displayed, the player first desires the establishment of the reach so that the reach expectation with a high expectation is displayed. The game is played while watching, but when the effect display pattern of the continuous effect of this embodiment is displayed, the effect display is performed so that the reach prevention effect display is successful, that is, the hope that the reach is not established. You will play while watching the pattern. As a result, the player can play the game in exactly the opposite thinking state between the change in which the effect display pattern other than the continuous effect of the present embodiment is displayed and the change in which the effect display pattern of the continuous effect of the present embodiment is displayed. Will be. As a result, it is possible to suppress the loss of interest in the game by activating the player's head, and to suppress the player from feeling bored. Further, it is possible to make the player play a game with an unprecedented emotion, and it is possible to realize a fresh and attractive presentation display.

  Furthermore, in the continuous production of this embodiment, the message MA indicating that “reach is not good” is displayed immediately after the reach is established, and then the reach prevention display is displayed. The player can be promptly guided to the emotion “Don't reach!”. As a result, the first-time player can fully enjoy the continuous performance of this embodiment.

  In addition, since the upper middle movable decorative body 3501 and the liquid crystal display device 1400 perform the reach prevention effect display and the reach prevention success effect display, the power of the continuous effect of the present embodiment is improved and the big hit Can expect the expectation of

  Furthermore, as the number of successful reach prevention effects increases, the variation pattern with continuous effects is distributed so that the probability of finally obtaining a jackpot game is increased. As the number of times of playing increases, the player will have a fresh feeling of “Don't reach!”, Which is a fresh feeling for the player, and will be able to play games with an unprecedented feeling. As a result, it is possible to provide a game that is fresher and more attractive to the player by further restraining the player from feeling bored.

[Modification of continuous production]
・ First modification:
With reference to FIGS. 262 to 263, a first modification of the continuous effect will be described. In the first modification, the player is prompted to press the main button 371 of the operation button unit 370 together with the message “Prevent the establishment of reach!” Before displaying the above-described reach prevention effect display shown in FIG. A display BTN is displayed. The main button 371 of the operation button unit 370 functions as one of instruction receiving means for receiving an instruction from the player. When the player presses the main button 371, as shown in FIG. 263, a reach prevention effect display in which the upper middle movable decorative body 3501 and the display (such as a small explosion) on the first display panel 1400a cooperate is displayed. You can go. In this way, the player can press the main button 371 with a feeling of “Don't reach reach!” Or make it hit repeatedly, so that the player's feeling of uplifting can be enhanced and the player can be more immersed in the game. it can.

  If the player does not press the main button 371 even though the continuous production is scheduled to continue, a reach prevention display is displayed after a predetermined time, and then a reach prevention production success display is displayed. You may go and continue the continuous production. Alternatively, if the player does not press the main button 371 even though the continuous production is scheduled to continue, a display that ends the continuous production and establishes the reach is scheduled to be used for the continuous production. In order to earn time for the continuous production, the change time of the symbol of the middle symbol row 1153b in the reach production after the reach is established may be lengthened, and the total change time may be adjusted to the scheduled change time. In this way, if the player does not press the main button 371, the continuous production is not performed as scheduled, so the player can not predict the jackpot expectation of the production display pattern, and can not fully enjoy the game. The player presses the main button 371 to actively participate in the game. As a result, the player can actively participate in the game to enhance the sense of excitement of the game, and the player can be more enthusiastic about the game.

・ Second modification:
In the above embodiment, only the continuous effect for performing the reach prevention effect display has been described. However, in the above embodiment, in addition to the continuous effect for performing the reach prevention effect display, other types of continuous effects can be easily performed, and a plurality of types of continuous effects can be easily performed. Production may be used. In this case, when the peripheral control MPU 4140a receives from the main control board 4100 a command indicating that it is a variable type that should display a continuous effect such as “2” or “3”, the peripheral control MPU 4140a draws a lottery. Decide which kind of continuous production to perform and perform the continuous production. Alternatively, the peripheral control MPU 4140a may determine the type of continuous effect as the variation type and transmit a command including information indicating the type of continuous effect and the number of continuous effects to the peripheral control board 4140.

  As another type of continuous production, after a variable display, a combination of symbols representing a so-called chance eye is stopped and displayed in the left symbol row 1153a, the middle symbol row 1153b, and the right symbol row 1153c, and then the so-called chance eye simulation is repeated. After the display of the symbols and the change, the decorative symbol that is stopped at the moment when the same decorative symbol is stopped and displayed on the left symbol row 1153a and the right symbol row 1153c is moved downward (slide-displayed) at high speed, and then the left symbol row 1153a. In addition, there is a so-called smooth pseudo-ream which repeats the variable display again after stopping and displaying the symbol combinations that deviate from the middle symbol row 1153b and the right symbol row 1153c, or the symbol combination representing the chance eye. In the Chance eyes pseudo-rendition, the player watches the continuous production with the feeling "Stop again at the chance eyes!" As you watch, you can enjoy the game with different feelings with the continuous effect that displays the reach prevention effect of this embodiment, so you can enjoy the game with various emotions to the player by using multiple types of continuous effects And making the player feel bored.

・ Third modification:
The reach prevention effect display, the reach prevention success effect display, and the reach prevention failure effect display are not limited to the aspects of the above-described embodiment, and various aspects can be used. For example, in FIG. 218, the reach prevention display effect display may indicate that a character such as a person tries to lift up the decorative symbol S2 that is about to descend to the symbol stop position in the right symbol row 1153c. good. In this case, for example, the reach prevention success effect display indicates that the decorative symbol S2 is lifted by the character and disappears from the upper end of the first display panel 1400a. It may be displayed that the character is crushed by the decorative symbol S2, and as a result, the decorative symbol S2 descends to the symbol stop position and stops.

-Fourth modification:
Although the continuous effect of the above embodiment is performed using only the first display panel 1400a, it may be performed using the second display panel 1400b, or between the first display panel 1400a and the second display panel 1400b. It may be performed using both. For example, the decorative symbol change display and stop display may be performed on the first display panel 1400a, and the display portion other than the decorative symbol display portion of the first display panel 1400a may be controlled to the transparent state CLR. Then, on the second display panel 1400b, even if a character such as a person from the back uses a weapon or the like to display as a reach prevention effect display that attempts to destroy the decorative symbol displayed on the first display panel 1400a. good. By doing so, it is possible to realize a three-dimensional continuous effect as seen from the player, and to realize a fresh and attractive continuous effect.

-5th modification:
In the continuous production of the above embodiment, the decorative symbols are semi-transparent in the symbol rows (a part and all of the left symbol row 1153a, the middle symbol row 1153b, and the right symbol row 1153c) on which the high-speed variation display of the decorative symbols is performed. It may be displayed, or instead of the high-speed fluctuation display, the display of the decorative pattern may be erased. Then, the decorative pattern may be displayed when shifting from the high-speed fluctuation display to the low-speed fluctuation display. In this continuous effect, a live action or CG effect of the character is performed on the background image. However, such an effect can be easily seen by the player by displaying the decorative pattern during high-speed fluctuation display semi-transparently or by erasing it. There are benefits.

-6th modification:
In the case where a continuous effect is performed in the variation that is reserved, an effect may be performed in which the player is notified in advance that the continuous effect is performed in the variation that is reserved in the previous variation. For example, the main control MPU 4100a determines in advance that a continuous effect will be performed in the variation that is being held, and transmits that fact to the peripheral control MPU 4140a (so-called prefetching). Then, when the fluctuation immediately before the fluctuation in which the continuous effect is performed is a normal fluctuation (for example, FIG. 207, number 126) in which reach is not established, the peripheral control MPU 4140a The middle movable decorative body 3501 may be rotated so as to be visible to the player, and may be moved as if the reach is being warned.

-Seventh modification:
In the above-described continuous production, the maximum number of continuous productions is four times, but is not limited thereto. For example, you may perform a continuous production 5 times. In the above-described embodiment, after 5 consecutive effects, for example, a so-called full-rotation effect may be displayed to win a premium jackpot.

-Eighth modification:
In addition, in the above-mentioned continuous production, the variation pattern and the variation type are distributed so that the jackpot probability increases as the number of continuous operations increases, but in addition to or instead of this, It is preferable to increase the probability of jackpots with jackpot types with more benefits for the player. For example, in this embodiment, the jackpot A, E (there is a lottery, a probable change after hitting the jackpot) is the jackpot type with the most benefits for the player, so the jackpots A, E are increased as the number of consecutive consecutive performances increases. It is preferable to distribute the variation pattern and the variation type so that the probability of winning a big hit is increased. In this way, it is possible to make the player have a stronger feeling that the reach prevention effect display is successful in the continuous production, and to make this continuous production important and awaiting for the player.

-Ninth modification:
In addition to the above-described aspect 1, the following aspects may be adopted as the aspect of the gaming machine that realizes the above-described continuous performance.
[Aspect 2]
The gaming machine according to aspect 1 above,
The specific effect display pattern further includes:
After step (a) and before step (d),
(F) A gaming machine including a step of displaying that the establishment of the reach state is disadvantageous for the player.
In this way, after displaying that “reach is not good”, a reach prevention effect display is performed, so the player has a fresh feeling “reach is not established!” Can promptly guide the player. As a result, the first-time player can fully enjoy the continuous performance of this embodiment.
[Aspect 3]
The gaming machine according to aspect 1 above,
The reach prevention effect display is a display of trying to destroy the symbols constituting the specific combination to be stopped at a position other than the final stop position among the plurality of positions.
The reach prevention success display is a display in which the symbols constituting the specific combination are destroyed,
The reach prevention failure effect display is a gaming machine in which the symbols constituting the specific combination are not destroyed.
By doing this, it is possible to perform reach prevention effect display, reach prevention success effect display, and reach prevention failure effect display in a powerful and easy-to-understand manner for the player.
[Aspect 4]
The gaming machine according to aspect 1 further includes:
An instruction receiving means for receiving an instruction from a player;
The specific effect display pattern further includes:
After step (a) and before step (d),
(G) including a step of prompting the player to input an instruction using the instruction receiving means,
A gaming machine that performs the step (d) when the instruction is received through the instruction receiving means.
In this way, the player can be actively involved in the game, and the player can enjoy the game more.

[Modified example of clipped sliding effect]
・ First modification:
In the above embodiment, before the moving display of the cut-out image TR1 is performed on the first display panel 1400a, the 7-graphic image S7B is displayed on the second display panel 1400b so that the player can visually recognize the cut-out image TR1. Although the display is performed (FIG. 244), the 7-design image S7B may not be displayed on the second display panel 1400b in advance. Specifically, similarly to the different world background BGA, in the second display panel 1400b, the 7-symbol image S7B may be displayed only in an area overlapping with the cutout transparent area of the first display panel 1400a. Specifically, in the state shown in FIG. 245, only the upper part of the area where the 7-symbol image S7B is to be displayed on the second display panel 1400b overlaps with the cutout transparent area of the first display panel 1400a. Only the upper part of the 7-symbol image S7B may be displayed on the second display panel 1400b, and the other area where the 7-symbol image S7B is to be displayed may be controlled to the transparent state CLR. Then, in the second display panel 1400b, in accordance with the enlargement of the transparent area of the first display panel 1400a, the displayed part of the 7-symbol image S7B is sequentially increased, as shown in FIG. The entire 7-symbol image S7B may be displayed on the second display panel 1400b when the entire region where the design image S7B is to be displayed overlaps the cutout transparent region of the first display panel 1400a. However, as in the embodiment, before the moving display of the clipped image TR1 is performed, the 7-design image S7B is displayed on the second display panel 1400b so that the player can visually recognize the clipped image TR1. Then, the player can recognize in advance that some decoration image has emerged on the back side of the 6-symbol image S6, so that the player draws the player's attention at an early stage and performs the cut-out slip effect. be able to. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from overlooking the fall effect of the cut-out image TR1, which is a showcase of the cut-out effect.

-2nd modification;
In the above embodiment, the clipped image TR1 is moved and displayed downward so as to fall naturally, but is not limited thereto. For example, the clipped image TR1 may be moved and displayed in the right direction or the left direction as if it was blown by the wind. Conceptually speaking, it is only necessary to move and display a predetermined area including a decorative pattern to be changed with respect to other areas excluding the predetermined area.

・ Third modification:
In the above embodiment, after moving the cutout image TR1 on the first display panel 1400a, the 7-pattern image S7B is displayed in the area on the second display panel 1400b that overlaps the area where the cutout image TR1 existed before the movement. ing. Then, after the 7-symbol image S7B displayed on the second display panel 1400b is displayed on the first display panel 1400a (FIGS. 248 to 252), the reach is established, but instead, before the movement When the 7-symbol image S7B is displayed in the area on the second display panel 1400b that overlaps the area where the cut-out image TR1 existed, the reach establishment may be displayed. In this case, a series of effect display (FIGS. 248 to 252) for transferring the 7-symbol image S7B displayed on the second display panel 1400b to the first display panel 1400a may be omitted.

-Fourth modification:
In the cut-out slip effect in the above embodiment, the reach is established after the effect, but the reach may not be established. Further, the change from the 6 symbols to the 7 symbols is an example, and it is natural that the method of the above embodiment and the first modification can be applied to the variation of all kinds of decorative symbols.

-5th modification:
The method of enlarging the symbol image (FIGS. 248 to 252) in the above embodiment and the first modification is not limited to the decorative display variation display effect, but is applied to other display objects displayed on the effect display device 115 of the gaming machine. Is also applicable. Other objects to be displayed can include all things, letters, numbers, designs, and characters.

-6th modification:
The method of enlarging the symbol image in the embodiment is not limited to the effect display during the variation process, and may be used for any effect displayed using the liquid crystal display device 1400 of the gaming machine. For example, you may use for the production of the image (for example, demo screen) when the game is not performed.

-Seventh modification:
In addition, as the aspect of the gaming machine that realizes the above-described cut-out sliding effect, the following aspect may be adopted.
[Aspect 1]
A gaming machine with a lottery,
A display unit capable of notifying a player of the result of the lottery by displaying a predetermined combination of design images,
A transmissive first display panel;
A second display panel disposed on the back side of the first display panel as seen from the player so as to overlap the first display panel;
A display unit having
Display control means for controlling display on the first display panel and the second display panel,
(A) displaying a first type of symbol image at a predetermined position of the first display panel;
(B) After the step (a), the region of the first display panel where the first type of symbol image is displayed is controlled to be transparent,
(C) After the step (b), in the second display panel, the first type of pattern image having a predetermined size at a position overlapping with the transparent controlled region of the first display panel. Displaying the second type of symbol image different from
(D) After the step (c), the second type symbol image is displayed on the second display panel while being enlarged, and the second type symbol image on the second display panel is enlarged. In conjunction with the second display panel, the light transmittance of the pixels constituting the second type of symbol image of the second display panel is increased, and the second display panel of the second display panel is increased in the first display panel. Displaying the second type of symbol image in the same manner as the second type of symbol image on the second display panel in an overlapping region overlapping the two types of symbol images as seen from the player, By reducing the light transmittance of the pixels constituting the second type symbol image of the first display panel in conjunction with the enlargement of the second type symbol image of the first display panel. , The second type of design image is By three-dimensional representation of the like approaching from the far side to the near side as seen from the user,
Replacing the symbol image displayed at the predetermined position of the first display panel from the symbol image of the first type to the symbol image of the second type;
Display control means;
A gaming machine comprising:
[Aspect 2]
A gaming machine,
A display unit capable of displaying an effect image,
A transmissive first display panel;
A second display panel disposed on the back side of the first display panel as seen from the player so as to overlap the first display panel;
A display unit having
Display control means for controlling display on the first display panel and the second display panel,
After displaying a predetermined display target image with a predetermined size at a predetermined position on the second display panel,
The display target image is displayed while being enlarged on the second display panel, and the display target image of the second display panel is configured in conjunction with the enlargement of the display target image of the second display panel. The light transmittance of the pixels is increased, and the display target image is displayed on the second display panel in an overlapping region that overlaps the display target image of the second display panel when viewed from the player in the first display panel. In the same manner as the display target image, the display target image is enlarged and linked to the enlargement of the display target image of the first display panel, and the light of the pixels constituting the display target image of the first display panel By reducing the transmittance, the display target image is three-dimensionally expressed as approaching from the back side to the near side when viewed from the player.
Display control means;
A gaming machine comprising:
In this way, it is possible to realize that a predetermined display target image emerges from the back side to the near side when viewed from the player by using at least two display panels with a more three-dimensionally interesting expression. .

  [Modified example of double-sided reach production]

・ First modification:
In the double-sided reach effect in the above embodiment, the peripheral control MPU 4140a performs control so that the first reach display mode RC1 is displayed in the right region as shown in FIG. 240, and the second reach display mode RC2 is displayed in the left region. After controlling to be displayed, as shown in FIG. 241, the area where the first reach display mode RC1 is displayed (the area near the center) is more than the area where the second reach display mode RC2 is displayed (the peripheral area). However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the peripheral control MPU 4140a performs control so that the first reach display mode RC1 is displayed in the right region and the second reach display mode RC2 is displayed in the left region (see FIG. 240, the first (Also referred to as one process) and a process for controlling the area where the first reach display mode RC1 is displayed (near the center) to be larger than the area where the second reach display mode RC2 is displayed (the peripheral area) ( (See FIG. 241, also referred to as second processing). In addition, the peripheral control MPU 4140a may make the second process precede the first process. Even if it does in this way, there can exist the effect of the said embodiment.

・ Second modification:
FIG. 264 is a diagram for describing a second modification of the double-sided reach effect.
In the super reach production in the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 259, the peripheral control MPU 4140a displays the out-of-right symbol combination HZH in the lower right corner area of the first display panel 1400a, and displays it in the most area of the second display panel 1400b. When the second reach display mode RC2 is displayed, the lower right corner area of the second display panel 1400b is controlled to the transparent state CLR (non-display area), but the present invention is not limited to this. It is not something that can be done. The following may be used.

The pachinko machine 1 senses that a button (such as a stick) to which an instruction from a player is input, specifically, the main button 371 of the operation button unit 370 is pressed, and performs a game effect. Execution means (peripheral control MPU 4140a may perform) may be provided. Then, as shown in FIG. 264, the peripheral control MPU 4140a displays the out symbol combination HZH in the lower right corner area of the first display panel 1400a, and the second reach display mode RC2 in the most area of the second display panel 1400b. May be displayed in the lower right corner area of the second display panel 1400b. Then, the game effect execution means may perform the game effects as shown in the following (1) to (3), for example, when detecting that the button is pressed by the player.
(1) A premier image, which is a rare image, is displayed at any location on the liquid crystal display device 1400.
(2) When the jackpot is notified in the variation pattern, the jackpot notification is performed.
(3) In the second reach display mode RC2 in the double reach, a reliability display indicating the probability that a jackpot symbol array is formed is performed.
The peripheral control MPU 4140a uses the first display panel 1400a to cause the image (background image HK5 and symbols Y1 to Y3) displayed in the lower right corner area to function as a shielding image for hiding the button image BTN. It is possible to employ an image expressed in a state where the light transmission level is low such that the button image BTN displayed on the two-display panel 1400b is not visible (for example, a dark color such as dark gray, dark green, or agricultural blue).

  In this way, when the double reach as described above occurs, the player can view the button image BTN in the lower right corner area by looking at the display surface of the liquid crystal display device 1400 in a state where the misaligned front view. It becomes possible to see. Then, the player can experience a special game effect by being prompted by the button image BTN and pressing the button. That is, according to the above-described configuration, the player can enjoy the enjoyment of viewing the display surface of the liquid crystal display device 1400 in a state where the player can visually recognize the depth while experiencing a three-dimensional double reach with a sense of depth. The interest in the machine 1 can be greatly improved.

・ Third modification:
In the second modified example, as shown in FIG. 264, the peripheral control MPU 4140a displays the symbol combination HZH in the lower right corner area of the first display panel 1400a and displays the symbol combination HZH in the most area of the second display panel 1400b. When the two-reach display mode RC2 is displayed, the button image BTN indicating the button is displayed in the lower right corner area of the second display panel 1400b. However, the present invention is not limited to this. Absent. For example, the peripheral control MPU 4140a may display various images such as a premier image, an image suggesting a jackpot, and an image indicating reliability information, in addition to the button image BTN indicating a button. In this way, the player can enjoy the enjoyment of viewing the display surface of the liquid crystal display device 1400 in a state of being viewed from the front while experiencing a three-dimensional double reach with a sense of depth, and the pachinko machine 1 Can greatly improve the interest in

-Fourth modification:
In the second modified example, as shown in FIG. 264, the peripheral control MPU 4140a displays the symbol combination HZH in the lower right corner area of the first display panel 1400a and displays the symbol combination HZH in the most area of the second display panel 1400b. When the two-reach display mode RC2 is displayed, the button image BTN indicating the button is displayed in the lower right corner area of the second display panel 1400b. However, the present invention is not limited to this. Absent. For example, the peripheral control MPU 4140a displays a shield image including the first reach display mode RC1 or the off symbol combination HZH in a predetermined area of the first display panel 1400a, and the second reach display mode in the predetermined area of the second display panel 1400b. RC2 is displayed, and in this state, in the second display panel 1400b, a button image BTN that suggests a button at a position that is a region corresponding to the shielded image of the first display panel 1400a and is visible in a shifted front view state. Also, a premier image, an image suggesting a big hit, an image showing reliability information, and the like may be displayed. In this way, the player can enjoy the enjoyment of looking into the back of the shielded image while seeing a misaligned front view while experiencing a three-dimensional double reach with a sense of depth. The interest in 1 can be greatly improved.

-5th modification:
In the double-sided reach effect in the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 256 to 260, the peripheral control MPU 4140a (1) the area including the first reach display mode RC1 in the first display panel 1400a is in the second display panel 1400b. (2) The variation symbol Y3 of the first reach display mode RC1 is stopped and displayed to form a disjoint symbol combination HZH. (3) The second reach display is performed on the second display panel 1400b. The region including the aspect RC2 is larger in the first display panel 1400a than the region including the out-of-pattern combination HZH. (4) The step of the variable symbol X3 of the second reach display aspect RC2 being stopped and displayed is realized. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, in the peripheral control MPU 4140a, (1) the region including the second reach display mode RC2 in the second display panel 1400b is larger than the region including the first reach display mode RC1 in the first display panel 1400a. (2) The area including the first reach display mode RC1 in the first display panel 1400a includes the lost pattern array in the second display panel 1400b. You may make it implement | achieve the step that the fluctuation symbol Y3 of the 1st reach display mode RC1 stops and becomes larger than an area | region. Even if it does in this way, there can exist the effect of the said embodiment.

-6th modification:
In the double-sided reach effect in the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 260, the peripheral control MPU 4140a stops and displays the numerical symbol “8” when the variable symbol X3 of the second reach display mode RC2 is stopped and displayed. Although the jackpot symbol combination OZH is formed using X3, the present invention is not limited to this. When the peripheral control MPU 4140a stops and displays the variation symbol X3 of the second reach display mode RC2, the peripheral control MPU 4140a stops and displays a symbol other than the numeral “8” (for example, “7”), and uses the symbols X1 to X3 to lose the symbol. An array may be formed. Even if it does in this way, there can exist the effect of the said embodiment.

-Seventh modification:
In the double-sided reach effect in the above embodiment, the peripheral control MPU 4140a performs control so that the display areas displaying the images do not overlap when the first display panel 1400a and the second display panel 1400b are overlapped. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and when the first display panel 1400a and the second display panel 1400b are overlapped, control is performed so that the display areas displaying images overlap each other. May be. In this way, various display effects can be displayed on the display panels where the display areas displaying images overlap, and the display surface of the liquid crystal display device 1400 can be used effectively without waste. be able to.

  The peripheral control MPU 4140a displays the image on the second display panel 1400b when the first reach display mode RC1 displayed in the image display area on the first display panel 1400a is overlapped with the second display panel 1400b. You may make it form in the area | region corresponding to an area | region. Further, the peripheral control MPU 4140a displays the image on the first display panel 1400a when the second reach display mode RC2 displayed in the image display area on the second display panel 1400b is overlapped with the first display panel 1400a. You may make it form in the area | region corresponding to an area | region. In this way, various effects can be displayed in a portion where the reach display mode on one display panel and the image display area on the other display panel overlap, and the display surface of the liquid crystal display device 1400 can be displayed. Can be used effectively without waste, and the base of the game production can be expanded to provide an amusing gaming machine.

-Eighth modification:
In the above embodiment, in the liquid crystal display device 1400, the first display panel 1400a and the second display panel 1400b are fixed, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, in a state in which a pachinko machine is normally installed, at least one of the first display panel 1400a and the second display panel 1400b moves to the near side as viewed from the player (B) It is a movable display panel that can be moved to the back side as viewed from the person and (C) tilted with respect to the vertical direction, and movable control means for controlling the movable display panel ( (Not shown) may be provided. In this case, the peripheral control MPU 4140a may control the display mode of the area including the first reach display mode and the second reach display mode according to the movement of the movable display panel. In this way, in the case of performing double reach using the two panels (the first display panel 1400a and the second display panel 1400b) to display the first reach display mode and the second reach display mode, the two panels are used. Since the change of the reach display mode between the two and the movement of the display panel can be linked, it is possible to perform a reach display with a more dynamic feeling for the player.

-Ninth modification:
In the double-sided reach effect of the above embodiment, the peripheral control MPU 4140a displays the first reach display mode RC1 on the first display panel 1400a and the second reach display mode RC2 on the second display panel 1400b when the double reach state is formed. When displayed (see FIG. 257), in the first reach display mode RC1, a part of the changing design Y3 that is changing is cut (omitted) to the extent that it is possible to identify that the first reach display mode RC1 is formed. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the peripheral control MPU 4140a displays the first reach display mode RC1 on the first display panel 1400a and the second reach display mode RC2 on the second display panel 1400b during the formation of the double reach state (FIG. 257), in the first reach display mode RC1, a part of the symbol Y1 and / or the symbol Y2 in a stopped state is cut (omitted) to the extent that it can be identified that the first reach display mode RC1 is formed. You may make it display. Even in this manner, the display area of the first reach display mode RC1 can be made compact in the first display panel 1400a, and various other game effects can be provided in the first display panel 1400a or the second display panel 1400b. It is possible to secure a display space to be performed.

-10th modification:
In the double-sided reach effect of the above embodiment, the peripheral control MPU 4140a displays the first reach display mode RC1 on the first display panel 1400a and the second reach display mode RC2 on the second display panel 1400b when the double reach state is formed. When displayed (see FIG. 257), in the second reach display mode RC2, a part of the symbol X2 in the stopped state is cut (omitted) to the extent that it can be identified that the second reach display mode RC2 is formed. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the peripheral control MPU 4140a displays the first reach display mode RC1 on the first display panel 1400a and the second reach display mode RC2 on the second display panel 1400b when the double reach state is formed (FIG. 257), in the second reach display mode RC2, a part of the symbol X3 that is changing is cut (omitted) and displayed so that it can be identified that the second reach display mode RC2 is formed. Also good. Even in this case, the display area of the second reach display mode RC2 can be made compact in the second display panel 1400b, and various other game effects can be provided in the first display panel 1400a or the second display panel 1400b. It is possible to secure a display space to be performed.

-Eleventh modification:
In the double-sided reach effect of the above-described embodiment, the peripheral control MPU 4140a displays the second reach display mode RC2 on the second display panel 1400b after the double reach state is formed (see FIG. 257), and deviates from the first display panel 1400a. The combination HZH is displayed. At this time, a part of the symbol X2 in the stopped state in the second reach display mode RC2 is cut (omitted) to the extent that it can be identified that the second reach display mode RC2 is formed. ) (See FIGS. 258 and 259), but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when the peripheral control MPU 4140a displays the second symbol display mode RC2 on the second display panel 1400b and displays the out symbol combination HZH on the first display panel 1400a, the symbol in the second reach display mode RC2 is changing. X3 may be displayed with a part cut (omitted) to the extent that it can be identified that the second reach display mode RC2 is formed. Even in this case, the display area of the second reach display mode RC2 can be made compact in the second display panel 1400b, and various other game effects can be provided in the first display panel 1400a or the second display panel 1400b. It is possible to secure a display space to be performed.

[Other variations]
(1) In the above embodiment, the liquid crystal display device 1400 has been described by taking two stacked display panels as an example, but the present invention can also be applied to three or more multiple display panels. In such a case, it is preferable that the display panel excluding the display panel located on the farthest side as viewed from the player is configured as a transmissive display panel that can be transparently controlled.

(2) In the above embodiment, a bullet ball game machine (so-called pachinko game machine) has been described as an example, but the above-described effect display may be applied to other types of game machines. Other gaming machines include household gaming machines such as a spinning-type gaming machine (so-called slot gaming machine), a commercial amusement gaming machine (so-called gaming machine for game centers), and a portable gaming machine.

(3) In the above embodiment, a part of the configuration realized by hardware may be replaced by software, and conversely, a part of the configuration realized by software may be replaced by hardware.

  As mentioned above, although this invention was demonstrated based on embodiment and a modification, above-mentioned embodiment and modification are for making an understanding of this invention easy, and do not limit this invention. . The present invention can be changed and improved without departing from the spirit and scope of the claims, and equivalents thereof are included in the present invention.

DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 1 Pachinko machine 2 Outer frame 3 Main body frame 4 Game board 5 Door frame 400 Handle device 410 Operation handle part 600 Game panel 600e Opening part 601 Front component 605 Game area 621 Back box 621b Rear wall 621c Opening 621j Entry ball discharge passage (discharge aisle)
1400 Liquid crystal display device (effect display means)
1400a 1st display panel 1400b 2nd display panel 2300 Center accessory 2301 Center frame 2310 Front wall member (front wall)
2311 Upper shelf 2312 Outer peripheral guide wall 2313 Warp entrance (advance entrance)
2314 Warp outlet (discharge outlet)
2320 Stage member 2321 First stage (stage)
2322 Second stage
2340 Housing part 2341 Rolling regulation part 3000 Back unit 3100 Back box unit 3102 Right decoration body (decoration body)
3117 Intrusion ball discharge port (discharge port)
3118 Ball discharge passage cover 3301 Right movable decorative body (movable decorative body)

Claims (1)

A gaming machine capable of giving a jackpot game to a player by stopping and displaying a jackpot symbol combination indicating a jackpot by combining a plurality of symbols,
A starter that can accept game media;
A game medium detecting means for detecting a game medium received at the start opening;
A first display panel that is capable of forming a display area for displaying an image and a non-display area for not displaying the image; and a rear panel of the first display panel as viewed from the player A second display panel disposed so as to overlap the first display panel and capable of forming the display area and the non-display area;
Based on the detection of one game medium by the game medium detection means, the front screen effect executed on the first display panel of the display means and the rear screen effect executed on the second display panel are performed in parallel. Display control means capable of executing a parallel progression game effect to be advanced;
With
The parallel progression game direction is
(1) In the first display panel and the second display panel, the display area is formed, and the display area of one of the first display panel and the second display panel is displayed. To display a first reach display mode representing a reach state with a plurality of symbols including a stopped state symbol and a changing symbol, and in parallel, the display of the other display panel different from the one display panel A parallel reach display effect that displays a second reach display mode that represents a reach state with a plurality of symbols including a stopped state symbol and a changing symbol in the area;
(2) After the parallel reach display effect, the display area of the one display panel and the display area of the other display panel are enlarged or reduced, respectively, so that each display area has a plurality of sizes. When the display area of the one display panel is enlarged and displayed, the display area of the other display panel is reduced and the display area of the one display panel is reduced. When the display area is reduced and displayed, the display area of the other display panel is enlarged and the display area of the other display panel is enlarged. The plurality of replacement expansion / contraction display effects in which the front screen effect and the rear screen effect are advanced in parallel while changing the size relationship of the plurality of times,
(3) The reach display mode corresponding to the display area relatively reduced among the first reach display mode and the second reach display mode during the multiple replacement scaled display effect is displayed as the reach display. A pattern cut display effect for cutting and displaying at least a part of the symbols in the stopped state forming an aspect to the extent that the symbol forms a reach display aspect;
Including gaming machines.